GE Senographe DS Manual Download Page 1050 | Manualshive

Page: 1050 / 1810

background image

Chapter 9

Page no. 1050

JC-TSG-A-015.fm

GE Healthcare

Senographe DS

Revision 1

Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072-16-8EN

Job Card TSG A015 - Lift Movement Troubleshooting

Repeat these sub-steps above several times until the Lift Screw is cleaned. A well cleaned Lift Screw
looks like that shown below.

2. Apply Grease (for Lift and Rotation) (5212483) (

Orapi CT FLON 607

) to the Lift Screw by hand.

Ensure the Lift Screw is homogeneously covered with grease, as shown in illustration 8.

CAUTION

Do not use any other type of grease, other than Grease for Lift and Rotation (5212483)
(Orapi CT FLON 607).
Do not use a brush to apply the grease as this may introduce foreign objects on to the Lift
Screw. Only use your hands to apply the grease to the Lift Screw.

About 35 g (1.23 oz) of grease is sufficient to cover the entire length of the Lift Screw.

«
...
1048
1049
1050
1051
1052
...
»

Summary of Contents for Senographe DS

Page 1: ...s A SIP A 0459 2385072 16 8EN Revision 1 Copyright 2012 by General Electric Company inc All rights reserved GE Healthcare The page behind contains quick access links to commonly used information Use these Favorite Links when attempting to find information ...

Page 2: ...Page no 2 coverDS SIP Class A fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN This page is blank ...

Page 3: ...installation procedures Scenario PRE A001 Pre installation Procedures on page 363 Installation procedures Scenario PHY A001 Physical Installation on page 389 Scenario ELE A001 Electrical Installation on page 537 Corrective maintenance Error Messages on page 829 Diagnostics on page 941 Troubleshooting guides on page 1007 Disassembly Reassembly on page 1093 Scenario CAL A001 Image Quality Full Calib...

Page 4: ...Page no 4 Favorites for FE fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Favorite Links for Field Engineers This page is blank ...

Page 5: ...ossary 35 Revision History 39 Chapter 3 System Description Sub Systems and Components 43 1 System Features 44 2 System Component Description 45 3 Accessories 49 Product history and compatibility 51 Functional Diagrams 71 1 Introduction 71 2 Correspondence between Functions and Components 72 3 Symbols 73 4 Acquisition System Entry Block Diagram 74 5 MPCB Block Diagram 75 6 Column Block Diagram 76 7...

Page 6: ...vice Desktop 142 FRU Component Index 145 FRU Component Index Control Station 149 FRU Component Index Gantry 156 FRU Component Index Generator Cabinet 177 FRU Component Location 185 1 Scope 185 2 Navigation Principles 185 3 Acquisition System Components 187 Tools Glossary 219 1 Mechanical Tools 220 2 Specified Tools 226 3 Consumable Supplies 236 Central Listing 239 1 Introduction 239 2 Generator Ca...

Page 7: ...A001 Physical Installation 389 Job Card PHY A001 Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet 391 Job Card PHY A002 Unpacking the Control Station 397 Job Card PHY A003 Gantry and Control Station Installation 401 Job Card PHY A004 Radiation Screen Installation 405 Job Card PHY A005 Bucky Support Installation 409 Job Card PHY A006 Regulatory and Safety Labelling 411 Job Card PHY A009 Opposite Side Rot...

Page 8: ... Collimation Checks 679 Job Card ELE A031 AOP Configuration 693 Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test 699 Job Card ELE A037 Image Acquisition and ACR Score 705 Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check 707 Job Card ELE A039 Compliance with Germany for Detector Dose 711 Job Card ELE A042 Bar Code Scanner Option 715 Job Card ELE A043 AWS Monitor Calibration 729 Job Card ELE A044 Install User Pub...

Page 9: ...TSG A015 Lift Movement Troubleshooting 1035 Job Card TSG A016 Rotation Movement Troubleshooting 1059 Job Card TSG A020 Generator Power Up Sequence Flow Charts 1069 Job Card TSG A027 080 011 Error Trouble Shooting 1083 Job Card TSG M028 E24 084 008 Error Troubleshooting 1085 Disassembly Reassembly 1093 Job Card D R A121 Optical Fiber Gantry to Generator 1097 Job Card D R A141 Image Receptor Digital...

Page 10: ...ual Compression Brake 1301 Job Card D R A247 Motorized Compression Brake 1309 Job Card D R A248 Force Sensor 1313 Job Card D R A249 W304 Cable for Paddle Recognition 1319 Job Card D R A250 Compression Board 1323 Job Card D R A251 Paddle Holder Board 1331 Job card D R A252 Compression Trolley Kit 1337 Job Card D R A255 Bucky 1339 Job card D R A256 Bucky Top Cover 1343 Job card D R A258 Bucky Board ...

Page 11: ...ard 300 PL1 1595 Job Card D R A411 Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 1601 Job Card D R A412 Anode Starter Board 300 PL2 1609 Job Card D R A413 BT Power Supply 400 T1 1613 Job Card D R A414 Power Line Filter Box 1617 Job Card D R A415 Generator Board CPU EEPROMs 1625 Job Card D R A421 Conditioner Unit 1633 Configuration guide 1639 Job Card CFG A001 Software Reload 1641 Job Card CFG A070 Deactivate C...

Page 12: ...Card CHK A013 Check mA and mAs settings 1755 Chapter 10 Long Term Shutdown Procedures Job Card CARE A001 Detector protection during system shutdown 1761 Chapter 11 Planned Maintenance Procedures Scenario PM A001 Planned Maintenance Steering Guide 1765 Job Card PM A101 Site Status 1773 Job Card PM A155 General System Inspection Checks 1775 Job Card PM A201 Gantry operational checks 1777 Job Card PM...

Page 13: ...are Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Safety Page no 13 Chapter 1 Chap Safety fm CHAPTER 1 SAFETY This chapter contains information and warnings related to safety ...

Page 14: ...Chapter 1 Page no 14 Chap Safety fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Safety This page is blank ...

Page 15: ...чна или друга опасност 警告 ZH CN 本维修手册仅提供英文版本如果客户的维修服务人员需要非英文版本则客户需自行提供翻译服务未详细阅读和完全理解本维修手册之前不得进行维修忽略本警告可能对维修服务人员操作人员或患者造成电击机械伤害或其他形式的伤害警告 ZH HK 本服務手冊僅提供英文版本倘若客戶的服務供應商需要英文以外之服務手冊客戶有責任提供翻譯服務除非已參閱本服務手冊及明白其內容否則切勿嘗試維修設備不遵從本警告或會令服務供應商網絡供應商或病人受到觸電機械性或其他的危險警告 ZH TW 本維修手冊僅有英文版若客戶的維修廠商需要英文版以外的語言應由客戶自行提供翻譯服務請勿試圖維修本設備除非您已查閱並瞭解本維修手冊若未留意本警告可能導致維修廠商操作員或病患因觸電機械或其他危險而受傷 UPOZORENJE HR ...

Page 16: ... Engels verkrijgbaar Als het onderhoudspersoneel een andere taal vereist dan is de klant verantwoordelijk voor de vertaling ervan Probeer de apparatuur niet te onderhouden alvorens deze onderhoudshandleiding werd geraadpleegd en begrepen is Indien deze waarschuwing niet wordt opgevolgd zou het onderhoudspersoneel de operator of een patiënt gewond kunnen raken als gevolg van een elektrische schok m...

Page 17: ...er Sprache Falls ein fremder Kundendienst eine andere Sprache benötigt ist es Aufgabe des Kunden für eine entsprechende Übersetzung zu sorgen Versuchen Sie nicht diese Anlage zu warten ohne diese Serviceanleitung gelesen und verstanden zu haben Wird diese Warnung nicht beachtet so kann es zu Verletzungen des Kundendiensttechnikers des Bedieners oder des Patienten durch Stromschläge mechanische ode...

Page 18: ...meccanici o altri rischi 警告 JA このサービスマニュアルには英語版しかありませんサービスを担当される業者が英語以外の言語を要求される場合翻訳作業はその業者の責任で行うものとさせていただきますこのサービスマニュアルを熟読し理解せずに装置のサービスを行わないでくださいこの警告に従わない場合サービスを担当される方操作員あるいは患者さんが感電や機械的又はその他の危険により負傷する可能性があります 경고 KO 본 서비스 매뉴얼은 영어로만 이용하실 수 있습니다 고객의 서비스 제공자가 영어 이외의 언어를 요구할 경우 번역 서비 스를 제공하는 것은 고객의 책임입니다 본 서비스 매뉴얼을 참조하여 숙지하지 않은 이상 해당 장비를 수리하 려고 시도하지 마십시오 본 경고 사항에 유의하지 않으면 전기 쇼크 기계적 위험 또는 기...

Page 19: ...m inglês Se outro serviço de assistência técnica solicitar a tradução deste manual caberá ao cliente fornecer os serviços de tradução Não tente reparar o equipamento sem ter consultado e compreendido este manual de assistência técnica A não observância deste aviso pode ocasionar ferimentos no técnico operador ou paciente decorrentes de choques elétricos mecânicos ou outros ATENÇÃO PT PT Este manua...

Page 20: ...pozícii len v angličtine Ak zákazníkov poskytovateľ služieb vyžaduje iný jazyk ako angličtinu poskytnutie prekladateľských služieb je zodpovednosťou zákazníka Nepokúšajte sa o obsluhu zariadenia kým si neprečítate návod na obluhu a neporozumiete mu Zanedbanie tohto upozornenia môže spôsobiť zranenie poskytovateľa služieb obsluhujúcej osoby alebo pacienta elektrickým prúdom mechanické alebo iné ohr...

Page 21: ...čnika niste v celoti prebrali in razumeli Če tega opozorila ne upoštevate se lahko zaradi električnega udara mehanskih ali drugih nevarnosti poškoduje ponudnik storitev operater ali bolnik DIKKAT TR Bu servis kılavuzunun sadece ingilizcesi mevcuttur Eğer müşteri teknisyeni bu kılavuzu ingilizce dışında bir başka lisandan talep ederse bunu tercüme ettirmek müşteriye düşer Servis kılavuzunu okuyup a...

Page 22: ...Chapter 1 Page no 22 language warning fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Language Warning This page is blank ...

Page 23: ...adiological Protection contained in Annals Number 60 of the ICRP and with applicable national standards and should have been trained in use of the equipment ATENCION Los aparatos de rayos X son peligrosos para el paciente y el manipulador cuando las normas de proteccion no estan observadas Aunque este aparato está construido según las normas de seguridad más estrictas la radiación X constituye un ...

Page 24: ...Chapter 1 Page no 24 radiation warning fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN X ray Warning This page is blank ...

Page 25: ...dous situation that if not avoided will result in death or seri ous injury WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided could result in death or serious injury CAUTION Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that if not avoided may result in minor or mod erate injury Notice Used for instructions to the Operator to prevent damage to property Note Used to draw attentio...

Page 26: ...us voltage Type B equipment This symbol indicates that waste electrical and electronic equipment must not be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste and must be col lected separately Please contact an authorized representative of the manufacturer for information concerning the decommissioning of your equipment Name and address of manufacturer Date of manufacture Medical device catalogue number Med...

Page 27: ...nd understood before reading the documentation and using the equipment 2 2 Publication Presentation The Publication Presentation chapter describes the content of the publication and explains how to navigate within it 2 3 Descriptive Chapters Descriptive chapters give information required to understand the equipment together with reference information System Description gives a physical and operati...

Page 28: ...state and the final state are perfectly known All the steps are identified including preparation steps pre requisites and finalization steps post requisites The steps are defined in Job Cards The sequencing order of the steps is exactly defined However there can be alternative condi tional paths in the sequence Scenarios contain two sections Context explains the circumstances in which the scenario...

Page 29: ...sed to confirm correct global operation of the system after an installation or repair action has been performed VF N A Functional and performance checks for specific regulations Equivalent to VF but applies to a specific case of verifying compliance to one standard or regulation REG N A Image Quality performance checks Equivalent to VF but applies to the specific case of verifying Image Quality pe...

Page 30: ...nds are entered at the command line In other text Italics are used when a specific concept is introduced Italic and bold characters can also be used for local emphasis Blue italics are used for cross references 3 2 Entering and Typing Instructions Depending on the situation you are instructed to either enter or type a command or string of text If you are instructed to enter a command or string of ...

Page 31: ... Find or click the binocular symbol as shown in illustration 1 then type the desired string in the Find box Click Find to locate the first occurrence then on Find again to find more occurrences The located string of characters is highlighted By clicking a section in the Table of Contents By clicking a topic in the list of Bookmarks as shown in illustration 2 It is important to understand the struc...

Page 32: ...n DR Job Card CHK Job Card CAL Job Card SGN Job Card Pre Installation scenario Physical Installation scenario Electrical Installation scenario Troubleshooting scenario Descriptive Procedural Acrobat navigation Cable Layout and Pin out TOC navigation PRE Job Cards PHY Job Cards ELE Job Cards DIA Job Cards Error messages DIA or TSG Job Cards Corrective Maintenance Planned Maintenance scenario PM Job...

Page 33: ...GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Publication Presentation Page no 33 Chapter 2 Publication Presentation fm ILLUSTRATION 2 USE BOOKMARKS ...

Page 34: ...Chapter 2 Page no 34 Publication Presentation fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Publication Presentation This page is blank ...

Page 35: ...mable Logic Device CPU Central Processing Unit D DC Direct Current DCB Differential Circuit Breaker DICOM Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine DLC Data Length Code CANopen protocol DMPU Digital Mammography Processing Unit DMR Dual Molybdenum Rhodium A legacy term which in some cases represents a product such as Senographe DMR and in other cases represents the Generator Typically system e...

Page 36: ...ont System Bus FW Firmware or Feeder Wire G GLI Grid Line Interference Gnd Ground H HIS Hospital Information System HNS Hospital Network Service OR Health Net Services HV High Voltage HVL Half Value Layer HT High Tension I IPMS Isis Positioner Motion Software old definition that covers the whole Gantry or Interrupt Pipes Management System low level processor activity IP Internet Protocol IIP Insit...

Page 37: ...nLine Center P PB Push Button PDB Power Distribution Board PDI Product Delivery Instructions PDO Process Data object CANOpen protocol PDU Power Distribution Unit PI Part Identity PPP Point to Point Protocol PPS Performed Procedure Step PWA Printed Wiring Assembly PM Planned Maintenance PTB Positioner Tracking Board main Gantry control board called Roadrunner that has Poseidon SW on it Q QAP Qualit...

Page 38: ...rvice Class Provider SCU Service Class User SDD Source to Dosimeter Distance SEL Select SID Source to Image Distance SIP Service Information and Procedures SLDU Second Look Digital Unit SM Service Manual SOP Service Object Pair T TEC ThermoElectric Cooler TFT Thin Film Transistor TP Twisted Pair U UBC Universal Builders Code USL Upper Specification Limit V VOI Volume Of Interest W WL Window Level ...

Page 39: ...ook Master folder It is a slave publication To maintain this publication it is mandatory to use Master Folder 2396423 x 8EN as the Frame Maker source The Master Folder contains a Read me which explains how to proceed Date Reference Main reason for change March 2012 2385072 16 8EN Rev 1 Updates for Sunburst Release August 2011 2385072 15 8EN Rev 1 Updates for Pixel Spacing Kit and IB Release June 2...

Page 40: ...Chapter 2 Page no 40 Revision history fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Revision History This page is blank ...

Page 41: ...ision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN System Description Page no 41 Chapter 3 Chap System Description fm CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION This chapter contains descriptive information for the Senographe system ...

Page 42: ...Chapter 3 Page no 42 Chap System Description fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN System Description This page is blank ...

Page 43: ...onitor b w X ray Console AWS keyboard pull out from top of cabinet Conditioner Main Distribution Rack MDR Conditioner Rack Generator Rack Gantry readout keyboard keypad LCD or CRT AW 4 2 LCD monitor color Processor unit AW 4 2 Footswitches Radiation screen UPS CAD Processor unit Tube Head Compression Arm Column AWS cabinet including ADS computer IDC computer UPS Hub switch Mouse or optional trackb...

Page 44: ...itor keyboard and mouse or trackball computer electronics and Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS The AWS is used for image acquisition processing and display The AWS can also be used for database management and can send images to archive review or filming The Acquisition Workstation displays acquired images in the room allowing immediate evaluation of breast positioning and possible motion blur or a...

Page 45: ...ystem The X ray Console is normally mounted on the Control Station 2 The Control Station includes the Acquisition Workstation AWS Cabinet an LCD monitor a key board and mouse or optional trackball and a radiation screen The AWS Cabinet houses the work station electronics and a UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply 3 Accessories standard and optional Mandatory marking labels such as CE marking UL Listin...

Page 46: ...P Automatic Optimization of Parameters and manual setting modes are provided for control of the X ray parameters the system provides auto collimation 2 3 Digital Detector and Image Receptor The Digital Detector is built into the Image Receptor shown below It is a flat panel of amorphous silicon on which cesium iodide is deposited to maximize detection of X Rays and transmission of light photons Th...

Page 47: ...abinet which accommodates the following the workstation electronics ADS computer Image Detection Controller IDC computer the Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS an integrated CD R unit for interchange purposes The AWS Cabinet supports the LCD monitor used for control and display a pointing device trackball or mouse and a radiation screen LCD Monitor Mouse or optional trackball Radiation screen Access...

Page 48: ... in the Control Station cabinet During power fluctuations or brief interruptions the UPS assures a continuous supply to the workstation and the acquisition system The UPS prevents mains disturbances from being transmitted to the system When a power failure occurs the UPS continues to supply power to the workstation until it has shut down safely 2 4 3 External Connections One Ethernet cable connect...

Page 49: ...emote handswitch Bar code scanner CAUTION Only Senographe DS recommended accessories must be used with this equipment Fail ure to heed this warning can cause unexpected results and possible data loss System Options System options available include Review workstation Mass Archiving System When installed and connected to the Senographe system acquired images can be sent to the mass archiving device ...

Page 50: ...tion of customized connections DICOM conformance statements can be accessed at http www gehealthcare com usen interoperability dicom index html CD R Interchange Media For older systems an external CD R CD Recordable unit is installed in the AWS cabinet On newer systems an internal CD RW CD Rewriter unit exists in the ADS com puter This allows selected sets of images to be saved on CD ROMs for comm...

Page 51: ... application of an FMI Field Modification Instruction Changes may also occur to individual systems when a component fails and is replaced by a newer version Some replacement components FRUs and some service procedures may be applicable only to cer tain versions of the system The document module FRU Component Index on page 145 identifies these components and procedures by Compatibility codes which ...

Page 52: ...YSTEM IDENTIFICATION LABEL PRE PENDUICK SYSTEMS Note Since the Gantry column covers are changed more frequently than the Generator cabinet covers it was decided to move the identification label to the Generator cabinet covers Some older sys tems which have had their Gantry column covers changed may no longer have their identification labels Model number for the system Regulatory labels OR Upto and...

Page 53: ...lass A 2385072 16 8EN Product history and compatibility Page no 53 Chapter 3 Product historyDS fm ILLUSTRATION 2 LOCATION OF SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION LABEL PENDUICK AND ABOVE SYSTEMS HV Tank ID CDRH Generator ID CDRH System Identification Model Number System Identification Label ...

Page 54: ...the monitor which accom modated the mouse trackball The fixation of the Radiation Shield and the Radiation Shield are different On V1 the plate securing the Radiation Shield to the back cover of the Control Station was separate whereas for V2 the plate is integrated into the back cover For the V2 by default there is a mouse instead of a trackball 2 3 3 Different ADS Computers for Different Control...

Page 55: ...l Stations A new V4 Control Station exists based on the V3 Control Station with the following changes A new HP Z400 computer exists for the ADS Computer replacing the Sun U20 As a result The HP Z400 computer has a display port so the monitor is now connected to the ADS Computer via a display port DVI I adaptor The two serial cards inserted into the Z400 computer are in the opposite order to the U2...

Page 56: ...2383168 Gantry Column V1 CS 31 3 2 Nephtys M5A M5A 2383168 2 Gantry Column V1 CS 31 20 Nephtys M5B M5B 2383168 3 Generator Cabinet V2 CS 32 04 Nephtys M5BPlus M5BPlus Standard 2383168 3 Generator Cabinet V2 CS 32 05 M5BPlus International 2383168 3 1 Generator Cabinet V2 CS 32 05 Nephtys M5BPlus FB M5BPlus FB Standard 2383168 3 Generator Cabinet V2 CS 32 10 M5BPlus FB International 2383168 3 1 Gene...

Page 57: ...care Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Product history and compatibility 3 SYSTEM HISTORYOVERVIEW CHRONOGRAM This chronogram illustrates an overview of the Senographe DS evolution up to Nephtys M5BPlusFB ...

Page 58: ...ion and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Product history and compatibility This chronogram presents an overview of the Senographe DS product evolution up to Nephtys M416 Note During June 2011 forward production systems had a new Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly with Motor Brake introduced in the Gantry ...

Page 59: ...Control Station V2 b The Control Station V2 b has slightly different hole positions for the keyboard sliders As a result a new FRU exists for the sliders and a slider adapter kit exists for the pre December 2006 V2 a Control Stations so that they can accommodate the new sliders 3 1 3 Nephtys M49 IS4 2 Madras The introduction of the V3 Control Station is implemented at Nepthys M49 IS4 2 Madras whic...

Page 60: ...7 is not a FRU If you need to replace the Gantry CD ROM order Gantry Update CD ROM 5174994 6 3 1 6 Nephtys M412 Orion 1 The support of 5 new languages and the replacement of Brazilian Portugese by continental Portugese which results in the introduction of a new Generator CPU Board 2385602 9 which supports additional languages a new Gantry CPU Board 5233827 4 which supports additional languages ADS...

Page 61: ...on of a new V2 50 N Rotation Clutch which is only physically compatible with the Rotation Board 2375488 12 or later Note Since no more V1 Rotation Clutches exist the Spare Part Kit Clutch 2345968 4 and Rotation Board 2375488 13 5265895 2 has been introduced for systems where both the Rotation Board and Clutch need changing replacing Spare Part Kit Clutch 2345968 3 and Rotation Board 2375488 12 526...

Page 62: ...rew Assembly with an integrated Motor Brake The FRU strategy changed for the Generator CPU Board such that it is now delivered with no EEPROMs and seperate EEPROM Kits are now available For more information see Empty Gener ator CPU Board and EEPROM Kits on page 66 The System Identification Label on the Generator cover is slightly different Available IHE 54 11 kit for IHE sites New dust kit PN 5394...

Page 63: ... Board CPLD 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 5 1 2 DSP 5 13 5 5 13 5 5 13 5 5 13 5 HC12 5 9 4 5 9 4 5 12 4 5 12 4 Lift Board CPLD 5 0 1 or 10 0 1 10 0 1 10 0 1 10 0 1 DSP 5 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 5 6 3 HC12 5 10 2 5 15 2 5 16 2 5 16 2 Compression Board CPLD 5 1 4 5 1 4 5 1 4 5 1 4 HC12 5 7 1 5 7 1 5 12 1 5 12 1 Tilt Board CPLD 5 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 5 HC12 5 4 0 5 4 0 5 4 0 5 4 0 Collimator DSP Rev1026 Rev1026 Rev1026 R...

Page 64: ...5 16 2 5 16 2 5 16 2 5 16 2 Compression Board CPLD 5 1 4 5 1 4 5 1 4 5 1 4 HC12 5 12 1 5 12 1 5 12 1 5 12 1 Tilt Board CPLD 5 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 5 5 1 5 HC12 5 4 0 5 4 0 5 4 0 5 4 0 Collimator DSP Rev1026 Rev1026 Rev1026 Rev1026 PDU Board HC12 5 0 7 5 0 7 5 0 7 5 0 7 Bucky Board CPLD 5 0 3 5 0 3 5 0 3 5 0 3 HC12 5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 5 4 6 Gantry CD ROM to use to get required system level 5174994 11 517499...

Page 65: ...C Generator CPU versions displayed on the Service Desktop home page and by consulting Table 1 on page 63 The system level will be defined by one of the System Level Model Number columns in Table 1 on page 63 3 Check whether the current firmware version s for the new Gantry Board corresponds to the required firmware version for the that system level If the current firmware version s match the requi...

Page 66: ...mber columns in Table 1 on page 63 3 Order the appropriate Generator CPU EEPROM Kit according to the system level as indicated below If the Generator CPU Board is also faulty in addition to the EEPROM Kit also order the empty Generator CPU board System Level Generator DMR Version Old Generator CPU Board ref erence no lon ger orderable Reference of EEPROMs set to be used ordered Reference of empty ...

Page 67: ...te ADS or IDC Software Kit according to the system level as follows System Level IDC SW Kit ADS SW Kit IS4 3 2383168 5 and lower 4 2 6 2407974 4 53 10 1 V3 CS 5261383 3 43 10 1 V1 V2 CS 5261381 3 Orion1 Nephtys M412s1 Nephtys M413 2383168 6 4 2 6 2407974 4 53 10 10 5261381 4 Penduick 2383168 7 10 0 5 5324092 53 40 5261381 6 Z400 2383168 8 10 0 5 5324092 54 10 5261381 7 Pixel Spacing 10 0 5 5324092...

Page 68: ...Type of Subsystem Sometimes the Senographe system may be equipped with alternate subsystem For example two types of Control station equivalent from a feature point of view but built with different hardware or software The following table provide examples of how you should select a FRU related to the Control Station in the Component Index Component Compatibility code Means that FRU A 70 This FRU sh...

Page 69: ...int code and field change code are applicable at the same time For example a failure in the Control Station CD Writer must be corrected by installing a replacement unit The choice of replacement unit depends on the product history System identified by Change Point code 25 manufacturing configuration M3 or M4 The replacement unit is External CD Writer kit reference 5142891 replaces 2303825 2 System...

Page 70: ...Chapter 3 Page no 70 Product historyDS fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Product history and compatibility This page is blank ...

Page 71: ...screen from an original Acrobat PDF file you can use hypertext links to navigate from the Entry Block Diagram to other Block Diagrams These links are highlighted in blue 1 2 2 Between Twin Block Diagrams The presence of navigation buttons as shown below indicates that the same assembly has more than one point of view and therefore requires more than one Block Diagram They are called Twin Block Dia...

Page 72: ...and Mag Stand Generating and Con trolling Exposures Parameter Selection and Exposure Control X Ray Console Supplying X Ray Tube Generator Parameter Optimization Generator Command 400 PL1 Irradiating the Patient Simulating X Ray Beam with light Collimator X Ray beam control Tilting the X Ray Tube Tube Head Filtering X Rays Filter Wheel Collimating X Rays Collimator Antiscattering Bucky Emitting X R...

Page 73: ...ss A 2385072 16 8EN Functional Diagrams 3 SYMBOLS DC Motor Electrical connection Generator Gantry main units Circuit board assembly Physical component assembly Cable conduit M Mstp Stepper motor Connector Set of components belonging to the same function Bulkhead Area Water hoses Manual operation Fiber optic cable ...

Page 74: ... Line Network Filter wheel Global Insite Modem CD Writer Control Station 1 2 DATA 2 2 AC POWER Paddle Detector cooling Mains Distribution 200PL1 MDR AC UPS X Ray Console Ext Power ON Lamp Ext X ray ON Lamp Generator Interface 400 PL2 XJ6 XJ8 Generator Command 400 PL1 XJ3 XJ2 XJ1 200PL4 Relay Board Conditioner Rack XJ11 Generator Cabinet ADS UPS Gene link ADS IDC Link HV Tank 701 Main Hospital AC S...

Page 75: ...1 F2 F1 2 F1 1 F2 1 F2 2 Terminal block ST102 Arm Distrib B Lift Rot Nd Arm Distrib B E Stop R Butt E Stop L Butt Lift Rot Nd Lift Rot Nd J3 W106 W124 W125 12 Vdc to PDU AC supply 48 Vdc2 48 Vdc3 48vdc1 48vdc LP Fuse check Thermoswitch SYS POS Bus POS Bus 1 Serial link Rx Serial link Tx GridSync W107 DC Control J2 AC PDU Supply 48vdc LP1 48vdc LP2 48vdc HP AC Supply EMC filter E101 N P N P GND bar...

Page 76: ...ard PDU Board MPCB Foot Switches U201 Encoder U201 R201 Lower Opt fork S202 Opt fork S203 Clutch B201 Upper Opt fork S201 J9 J8 J7 J6 J5 J9 J15 J11 J5 J4 J3 J7 W209 W208 W207 W213 W212 W211 J1 J2 J14 J13 J12 J1 J2 J3 J16 W204 W219 W205 W205 W203 W202 W215 W218 W201 M201 Potentiometer R202 J11 J10 W206 W220 M M201 J10 W206 M W222 J17 Terminal block ST102 PL101 PL104 Brake W221 Encoder J3 J7 J6 Stop...

Page 77: ... Bucky Board J1 J1 Distribution Board PL301 W316 W317 W408 W001 W306 GND Bar G301 J5 J1 J2 J1 J2 J7 J8 J9 J10 To Colim PL403 To Colim PL402 W409 W401 W411 W410 48vdc LP2 SYS Bus2 POS Bus2 48vdc LP2 J5 J10a J2a To XR Tube To Compr Trolley To Image Rec To Arm To MPCB GND W308 W307 J5 J4 J3 W310 W311 J3a J1a W313 Mstp W312 M302 Manual brake B303 W309 Tilt Board PL401 Arm Control Keypads left and righ...

Page 78: ...1 Mstp J1 Zero Sensor S401 J12 J7 PL404 Right J1 W407 W406 W404 W405 W407 W410 W411 From GND Bar G301 From Distrib Board PL301 Ground cable Thermo Switch W408 W402 Tube HV cable HT mA feedback and Tube stator W403 Tube Tilt X Ray tube support Arm Control Keypads left and right of tube head To Interface Board PL104 J4 J1a MPCB Compression Arm From Distrib Board PL301 J1 J2 X Ray tube 48Vdc LP2 SYS ...

Page 79: ...M5 W506 M4 S4 W504 W506 M3 S3 W504 W506 M2 S2 W504 W506 M1 S1 W504 M4 S4 M3 S3 M2 S2 M1 S1 W502 Collimator Set Falhauber motors single FRU DC DC Board Control Board PL402 PL403 J5 J8 W409 W401 48Vdc LP2 SYS Bus 2 J10 Interconnection Board Maxon Filter Wheel Assy J3 J9 J4 W501 W500 CONN50 Rectangular Blade Unit Light Assembly W503 W509 Collimator S5 M5 S5 M5 W508 M4 S4 W504 W508 M3 S3 W504 W508 M2 ...

Page 80: ... Generator cabinet Mains Circuit Breaker IEC 320C1 4 10 Plug IEC 320C1 4 10 Plug FFDM Main Distribution link Bulkhead area Water To Detector To UPS To Detector AC Conditioner 200 PL1 From IDC Conditioner control Power Line Filter Main Hospital AC Supply Conditioner ON OFF Detector PS ON OFF UPS ON AWS Cart ON OFF Operator Mains Distribution Interface Board 400 PL2 Conditioner Rack Generator MPCB J...

Page 81: ...10 X11 X12 X6 XJ2 Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 XJ6 XJ4 XJ8 XJ10 XJ7 XJ9 AUTO TRANSFO XJ11 D27 AK D25 AK F3 2 XJ9 XJ10 XJ6 C1 P XJ7 C1 M C2 XJ2 XJ3 XJ1 FAN T S2 T S1 Heat Sink Inverter 300 PL1 C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 C7 C8 TR1 TR1 C1 POWER LINE FILTER PE L1 N INPUT OUTPUT AC Mains via Line Supply Cable FUSE PHASE 2 OR NEUTRAL FUSE PHASE 1 RELAY K1 1 3 13 A1 2 4 14 A2 1 2 3 4 SELF L1 C10 C9 XJ2 XJ3 XJ...

Page 82: ... Ethernet RJ45 SB150 AC UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC OUT AC Monitor AC Trackball SCSI PCI boards 2 2 1 1 RJ45 COM1 COM2 OF SIB 26pts SIB 50pts AC serial RJ45 External Ethernet MODEM HARDWARE KEY D2 D4 D5 D6 D8 RJ45 CD W 2 1 2 2 1 1 IDC Internal Ethernet RJ45 3X 2X 1X ETHERNET SWITCH VIDEO Keyboard SCSI Modem D1 D9 D10 2387162 2387162 2240227 or 2244615 2226612 2340426 2226621 2240227 or 2244615 2226625 2...

Page 83: ...C Mouse External Ethernet RJ45 3X 2X 1X ETHERNET SWITCH DVI Keyboard 2387162 2387162 2240227 or 2244615 2226612 2340426 2226621 2240227 or 2244615 2226625 2385966 2381694 5177284 2 RJ45 COM1 COM2 OF SIB 26pts SIB 50pts AC IDC USB U20 AC net0 net1 PCI0 PCI1 PCIe USB UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC HARDWARE KEY To Conditioner To Detector Power Supply To Detector Optical Fiber Socket To Generator To Gene...

Page 84: ...AC Mouse RJ45 4X 3X 2X 1X ETHERNET SWITCH DVI Keyboard 2387162 2387162 2244615 2226612 2340426 2226621 2226625 2385966 5177284 2 RJ45 COM1 COM2 OF SIB 26pts SIB 50pts AC IDC USB U20 AC net0 net1 PCI0 PCI1 PCIe USB UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC HARDWARE KEY To Conditioner To Detector Power Supply To Detector Optical Fiber Socket To Generator To Generator To Generator MDR To Gantry RJ45 Service Networ...

Page 85: ...THERNET SWITCH DVI Keyboard 2387162 2387162 2244615 2226612 2340426 2226621 2244615 2226625 2385966 5177284 2 RJ45 COM2 OF SIB 26pts SIB 50pts AC IDC UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC HARDWARE KEY To Conditioner To Detector Power Supply To Detector Optical Fiber Socket To Generator To Generator To Generator MDR To Gantry RJ45 Service Network Connection Hospital Network USB Z400 AC net0 net1 PCI1 PCI0 PC...

Page 86: ...12 5 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram CS V1 V2 AC AC AC AC AC AC AC SIB 26Pts SIB 50Pts OF IDC COM1 COM2 RJ45 UPS ADS OUT ETHERNET SWITCH PCI Boards 2 1 1 1 2 2 USB USB SCSI AC IN AC Monitor CD W AC AC AC AC AC IN AC Module Modem AC Module Serial 2385960 2385793 RJ45 Internal Ethernet Note Not present on later models with an internal CD W unit ...

Page 87: ...ce Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Functional Diagrams 12 6 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram CS V3 Pre Penduick AC OUT ETHERNET SWITCH AC Monitor AC AC AC AC AC IN 2385960 2385793 UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC AC IDC USB U20 AC net0 net1 PCI0 PCI1 PCIe USB ...

Page 88: ... Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Functional Diagrams 12 7 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram CS V3 Penduick and above AC OUT ETHERNET SWITCH AC Monitor 2385960 2385793 UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC AC IDC USB U20 AC net0 net1 PCI0 PCI1 PCIe USB ...

Page 89: ...sion 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Functional Diagrams 12 8 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram CS V4 AC OUT ETHERNET SWITCH AC Monitor 2385960 2385793 UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC AC IDC USB Z400 AC net0 net1 PCI1 PCI0 PCIe2 USB 1 2 ...

Page 90: ...Chapter 3 Page no 90 FunctionsDS fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Functional Diagrams This page is blank ...

Page 91: ...describe how to use various Service functions of the Senographe system Section 1 page 93 describes the use of the X ray Console Section 2 page 99 describes how to use the X ray Console to change system parameters through the Service menu Information on the use of the Senographe Service Desktop accessed from the AWS is given in sec tions 5 page 120 through 12 page 139 Section 13 describes the use o...

Page 92: ...Chapter 3 Page no 92 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to This page is blank ...

Page 93: ...ay Console kV knob When the required value or parameter appears confirm the selection by selecting VALID Calibration functions Some calibration functions require the Exposure button to be pressed in order to perform the calibration WARNING Never modify a Senographe parameter value that has already been calibrated unless you have a specific reason If you do it is usually necessary to enter the defa...

Page 94: ... the key The illustration below shows typical X ray Console displays before left and after right entering installation mode The normal key symbols shown shaded no longer apply and in the example shown two of the keys shown shaded have no function The remaining four carry out the functions displayed above them e g the left hand key now gives access to the GENE menus Some special installation menus ...

Page 95: ... not mandatory to do a checksum each time you leave a menu There is no risk of losing data if you switch off the Senographe displaying a checksum error 1 5 Re loading Default Initial Parameters WARNING These functions are not normally used after the Senographe system has left the factory To re load generator or Gantry default parameters before any installation or calibration procedures use the app...

Page 96: ...cedure computes more than one parameter turn the kV dial to display the parameters in sequence 1 8 Modification and Entry of Values At menu points allowing entry of a measured value or modification of a parameter there are two possible selections NEXT and VALID Select NEXT to allow the first character to be entered by changing the displayed character Select NEXT again to enter the following charac...

Page 97: ...st composition Thickness Breast thickness in equivalent cm of acrylic Prep dose Dose for pre shot returned by IDC Prep kV kV used for pre shot Prep track Track used for pre shot Prep filter Filter used for pre shot Delta grid Delta time ms from end of X ray emission to grid U turn To change the DISP parameter access SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE CONFIG DISP and select YES or NO A CKSUM is NOT necessary b...

Page 98: ...Chapter 3 Page no 98 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to This page is blank ...

Page 99: ...enerator and compression parameters KEY Values indicates that several values can be displayed by rotating the kV knob Value indicates that a single value appears or can be modified or entered indicates that rotation of the kV knob Either dis plays other parameter values or modifies a digit or character in a string being entered indicates that the Exposure button must be pressed in order to perform...

Page 100: ...P DECOMP COMP LIFT BEEP COMPRESSION SPEED FAST SLOW WITH BEEP YES NO MAX COMPRESS FORCE daN value VALID ROTATE VALID DECOMPRESSION HEIGHT xx cm MAINT GEMS E gen soft version GEN release date STEREO See Illustration 2 A B DECOMP HEIGHT END OF EXPOSURE DECOMP YES NO FORCE SPEED LIFT FOOTSWITCH SPEED FAST SLOW ANGLE SPEED VALID DEFAULT OBLIQUE ANGLE XX deg ROTATION SPEED FAST SLOW LIGHT VALID DEFAULT...

Page 101: ... MODE Select arm gene install VIEW LANGUAGE Select LANGUAGE FRANC ENGL DEUTS ESPAN ITALI MEDICAL PORTU These selections appear only when the password has been entered PASSWORD Enter your password 1 2 3 4 5 6 A B Select arm gene install GENE LANGUAGE MEDICAL ARM CLINIC ARM ACCESS VALID DECOMP LIFT COMP STEREO ROTATE BEEP DECOMP FORCE SPEED HEIGHT DANIS FINNI DUTCH NORWI SWEDI ...

Page 102: ...EXT 5 0KW DUAL PRS B SUB SYSTEMS PRESENCE SMDA DM SINGLE NEXT VALID TYPE OF ANODE 2Metal FOCUS SELECTION bifocus CLEAR ALL SAVED PARAM VALID WARNING USING THE CLEAR FUNCTION WILL ENTAIL A COMPLETE RE CALIBRATION OF THE GANTRY GENERATOR AND AEC WARNING RE INITIALIZING THE TUBE WILL ENTAIL RE CALIBRATING THE TUBE HEATER CURRENT USE THE FUNCTION ONLY WHEN YOU HAVE REPLACED THE X RAY TUBE PRS DS PRS I...

Page 103: ...LISATION TUBE RE INITIALISATION DATE and TIME UPDATE NO YES HOUR DAY VALID INIT_TUBE THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRODUCTION TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER DATE DD MM YY values NEXT VALID TIME HH MN SS values NEXT VALID SETUP GENE INSTAL MAINT GEMS E EXPOSURE PARAM DISPLAY IMAGE GENERATOR EVOLUTION 300PL3 WITH THE BOARD 300PL3 TYPE DOSE F EVOLUTION APOLLO FILM AUTOMATIC EXPOSU...

Page 104: ...AM SF RH HEATER Select Foc Track HEATER LF MO CALIB CALIB PARAM HEATER SF MO CALIB CALIB PARAM HEATER LF Rh CALIB CALIB PARAM HEATER SF Rh CALIB HEATER LF MO CALIB Currents LF MO 28 values kV A I_VALUE CHANGE C_GAIN Cathode Gain LF MO GK_Ax 3 values NEXT Modif LF MO cathode gain GK_Ax value VALID CHANGE Currents LF MO modif value value NEXT VALID WARNING THE TWO MENUS CTUBE AND CTUBH ARE NOT INTEN...

Page 105: ... 2nd pt calcul 1st pt HTR_SCL CALIB TRACK1 PT1 ref value CMDE CALIB Meas HTR_SCL TRACK1 PT1 modif ref value NEXT VALID HTR_SCL TRACK1 1st point meas value NEXT VALID VALID PARAM HTR_SCL track 1 x 2 values CHANGE PARAM HTR_SCL modif track 1 x value NEXT VALID THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN BOTH FILAMENT CURRENT VALUES HAVE BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE 1ST PT AND 2ND PT MENUS THE MENU ICH_M ...

Page 106: ...ESSIBLE WHEN 1ST OR 2ND PT FOCAL BIAS VOLTAGE VALUE HAS BEEN MEASURED VIA THE CALIB MENU A TUBE TYPE 100TH M1 OTHERS 100TH M1 BIAS CALIB PARAM CALIB OTHER BIAS CALIB PARAM CALIB IJKLMN PARAM Disp display 6 values CHANGE NEXT VALID CALIB 100TH M1 Pt 1st calcul 2nd 3rd 4th IJKLMN PARAM modif display 6 values FOCAL BIAS VOLT 1st 2nd 3rd 4th pt MeasV CALIB FOCAL BIAS VOLT measure meas value NEXT VALID...

Page 107: ...lue NEXT VALID Same menu structure as for 1st pt VALID THIS MENU IS ONLY ACCESSIBLE WHEN BOTH HV VALUES HAVE BEEN MEASURED AND ENTERED VIA THE 1ST PT AND 2ND PT MENUS kV PARAMETERS x 2 values CHANGE PARAM kV MODIF x value NEXT VALID mA MEASUREMENT CALIB PARAM mA MEASURE CALIBRATION CALIB I_MEAS CALCUL mA MEASURE CALIBRATION meas x mA MEASUR MEASURED CURRENT meas value NEXT VALID mA MEASUREMENT CAL...

Page 108: ...AIN CHANGE FREQ PM_HV GAIN display F HV value NEXT FREQ PM_HV GAIN change F HV value VALID HV_M CALIB REF FREQUENCY PM_HV GAIN ref value CALC STOP START Send PM HV ref FREQ PM_HV REF modif ref value NEXT VALID FREQ PM_HV Measure meas value VALID PARAM CALIB PM_HV DAC Calibration default 7 000E 2 START PM_HV DAC Calibration CHANGE PM_HV DAC PARAM display alpha 2 values PM_HV DAC PARAM change alpha ...

Page 109: ... NEXT VALID COPY TARG SOURCE PARAMETERS DUPLICATION fsc screen fsc screen FSC SCREEN SOURCE CHOICE fsc scr nscr NO YES SCREEN PRESENT yes no FSC C FSC B FSC A SOURCE FSC CHOICE FSC fsc FSC E FSC D FSC SCREEN TARGET CHOICE fsc scr nscr NO YES SCREEN PRESENT yes no FSC C FSC B FSC A TARGET FSC CHOICE FSC fsc FSC E FSC D VALID ENABLE COPY D default A nSC E SCR PARAM CALIB PM PM_HV calibration CHANGE ...

Page 110: ...B GRID SCREEN PM YIELD NO YES SCREEN PRESENT NO YES CALIBRATION WITH GRID PARAM CALIB FILM SCREEN CALIBRATION CALC CALIB THICK FILM SCREEN CALIBRATION 6 cm 4 cm 2 cm Select plexi thickness x cm VALID PARAMETERS calculation PARAM CONFIG FSC PARAM display Mo Rh Mo Al Mo Mo Select Configuration Rh Al Rh Rh CHANGE FSC PARAM display x 6 values VALID NEXT FILM SCREEN PARAM change x value OD_MS CALIB mAs...

Page 111: ... PARAM menu SCALE D_STEP CHANGE REFERENCE ENERGY display GAMMA value WARNING THE VALUE OF GAMMA IS CALCULATED DURING THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE AND MUST NEVER BE MODIFIED MANUALLY FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER CHANGE REFERENCE ENERGY display ENERG value WARNING CHANGE REFERENCE ENERGY display OD_r value THE VALUE OF ENERG IS CALCULATED DURING THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE AND MUST NEVER BE MODIFIED MANUALL...

Page 112: ...AM CALIB HEATER CALIBRATION CHANGE HEATER PARAM DISPLAY Kv 3 values I value NEXT HEATER PARAM MODIF Kv value I value VALID MAS SCALE OD_ref CALIB REF_ENERGY OF LNRT CALIB CHANGE REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY OD_r value NEXT REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF OD_r value VALID CHANGE REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY OD_x 7 values NEXT REF ENERGY PARAM MODIF OD_x value VALID CHANGE REF ENERGY PARAM DISPLAY mAs value NEXT REF...

Page 113: ...TIME RECIPROCITY FAILURE THICK x cm MEASURED OPTICAL DENSITY value NEXT VALID RECIPROCITY FAIL calc VALID CHANGE LNRT PARAM display x 3 values NEXT LNRT PARAM change x value VALID CALC CALIB CONFIG MAGNIFICATION CALIB Config contact magnify CONTACT CONFIGURATION YES NO CALIB THICK MAGNIFICATION CALIB x cm Select plexi thickness 2 CM 4 CM 6 CM MAGNIFICATION CALIB calc VALID CHANGE MAGNIF PARAM disp...

Page 114: ...ID LF NOGRID LF NOGRID SF AOP APOLLO GRID LF CALIB CALIB PARAM AOP CALIB WITH GRID LFMoMo LFRhRh LF MoRh Same menu structure as 19 x 23 CHANGE VALID NEXT PADDLE PARAMETERS Same menu GRID LF Structure as COPY ALGO CELL FILM AOP C D TYPE 18x24 PARAM DISPLAY 2 values 18 x 24 PARAM CHANGE offs values 18x24 24x30 STEREO MAGN A B Ill 7 Ill 5 mAsPRE NON LINEARITY mAs PRE CAL CALIB PARAM mAs PRE CORR VAL ...

Page 115: ...o CALIB 0 2 0 5 CALCUL DOSE LF Mo Mo 0 mm Al Meas D CALIB NEXT DOSE LF Mo Mo 0 0 mm Al mGy value VALID DOSE LF Mo Mo HVL 2 values Same menu Idem Idem Idem THIS MENU CONSISTS OF PRO DUCTION TEST PROCEDURES THAT ARE OF NO USE TO THE SERVICE ENGINEER LF Structure as CHANGE NEXT DOSE LF Mo Mo Name Value VALID WARNING THE VALUES OF HVL AND TUBE YIELD ARE COMPUTED DURING THE CALIBRATION PROCEDURE AND MU...

Page 116: ...Chapter 3 Page no 116 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to This page is blank ...

Page 117: ... At the AWS login screen on V1 and V2 Control Stations select Login from the Operation drop down field select clinical from the Username drop down field type clinical in the Password field and click the OK button At the AWS login screen on V3 and V4 Control Stations type clinical in the User ID field type clinical in the Password field and click the OK button The Browser appears described in Intro...

Page 118: ...the DMI registration failure message they can simply press the return key and enter sdc to login as usual 3 2 Introduction The Browser window known as the Browser is displayed after someone logs in via the AWS login screen with the Login option Hospital staff use the Browser to undertake many tasks such as to Shut down the Senographe system Link with the HIS RIS Hospital Radiology Information Syst...

Page 119: ... occasions e g during trouble shooting you may need to restart the Browser Use one of the following two methods if you need to restart the Browser In the Browser click the Tools menu button and then click Restart Browser in the drop down menu Click the title bar of the Browser window and move the Browser to expose the background Then click the right mouse button on the background of the Browser sc...

Page 120: ...to the version of the Control Station you are using The Service Desktop GUI for V1 and V2 Control Stations running the SB150 Workstation uses one type of Service Desktop GUI The V3 Control Stations running the U20 Workstation and the V4 Control Stations running the Z400 uses another type of Service Desktop GUI These differences are highlighted briefly in the following sections and a comparison is ...

Page 121: ...vice Desktop An icon for each available service tool appears in the Navigation bar at the top of the screen 5 3 How to Navigate in the Service Desktop Illustration 10 and 11 show how to access the main service functions from the service desktop Available functions ar represented by icons in the navigation bar In the following sections screens for each ser vice function are illustrated and the main...

Page 122: ...Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 10 NAVIGATING IN THE SERVICE DESKTOP Error Log section 6 Diagnostics section 7 Image Quality section 8 Calibration section 9 Configuration section 10 Utilities section 11 Exit Home ...

Page 123: ...tions How to Page no 123 Chapter 3 S2100D How To fm ILLUSTRATION 11 NAVIGATING IN THE SERVICE DESKTOP ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS Error Log section 6 Diagnostics section 7 Image Quality section 8 Calibration section 9 Configuration section 10 Utilities section 11 Exit Home Replacement not available PM not available ...

Page 124: ...ns the system error log pages which contain error logs for the Generator AWS and IDC See How to Use the Error Log on page 125 Opens the diagnostic pages See How to Use Diagnostics on page 127 Opens the Image Quality IQ pages See How to Use the Image Quality Function on page 129 Opens the Calibration pages See How to Use Calibration Functions on page 131 Opens the Site configuration pages See How t...

Page 125: ... type the desired number in the box then click the Partial View check box By default errors are listed by date in descending order To filter errors which satisfy a condition type the condition in the corresponding box then click the Filter check box Click an error code for an explanation of the error not applicable for Gantry errors see Note below Note Gantry errors are saved in a format which is ...

Page 126: ...evision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 13 ERROR LOG ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS Note The error logs on V3 V4 Control Stations are listed in reverse order to the error logs on the V1 V2 Control Stations ...

Page 127: ...ostic tests for the different subsystems and communication links of the Senographe system Specific instructions are given for each diagnostic test and results are displayed at the end of each test Notice After running diagnostics always reboot the system before handing it back to the customer to en sure correct configuration This is especially important after tests which require disconnection of c...

Page 128: ...rocedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 15 DIAGNOSTICS ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS Note If you select the UPS diagnostics option on the V3 V4 Control Station an APS Login page appears The login credentials to access the APS UPS Diagnostics are username root password root ...

Page 129: ...e Service Desktop navigation bar to View results of image quality tests performed in the past Launch a new image quality diagnostic test To view the results of a past test click the desired line under Result History then click the Select button To launch a new image quality diagnostic test click the New Acquisition button Results are displayed in the Image Quality Test Results column ILLUSTRATION ...

Page 130: ... Page no 130 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 17 IMAGE QUALITY ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS ...

Page 131: ...How to Page no 131 Chapter 3 S2100D How To fm 9 HOW TO USE CALIBRATION FUNCTIONS Click the Calibration button in the Service Desktop navigation bar for access to calibration func tions Available calibration procedures are summarized below in sections 9 1 through 9 8 ILLUSTRATION 18 CALIBRATION ON V1 V2 CONTROL STATIONS ...

Page 132: ...3 Page no 132 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 19 CALIBRATION ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS ...

Page 133: ...e brightness of the corrected image The conversion factor is used for automatic optimization of parameters AOP calculations Refer to Job Card CAL A045 Conversion Factor Measurement on page 1701 9 2 Calibration of AWS Monitor The AWS monitor calibration adjusts the AWS monitor settings for brightness contrast horizontal and vertical width and linearity 9 3 Calibration of Tube Tilt The tube tilt cal...

Page 134: ...e The compression force sensor is factory calibrated However if parts have been replaced or disturbed which affect the software or hardware settings calibration must be carried out Refer to Job Card CAL A048 Calibration of Compression Force Sensor on page 1709 9 8 Compression Thickness Calibration The breast thickness calibration calibrates the absolute breast thickness measurement read by a linea...

Page 135: ... 10 HOW TO USE THE CONFIGURATION FUNCTION Click the Configuration button in the Service Desktop navigation bar for access to configuration functions These allow you to change certain basic system parameters such as language date and time or site details Refer to Job Card ELE A013 AWS Configuration on page 573 ILLUSTRATION 20 CONFIGURATION ON V1 V2 CONTROL STATIONS ...

Page 136: ... Page no 136 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 21 CONFIGURATION ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS ...

Page 137: ...mation Install the software onto subsystems Format a floppy disk on V1 V2 Control Stations and CD Erase on V3 V4 Control Stations Note You must only use the CD Erase function with CD RW media and not with CD R media Eject CD ROM on V3 V4 Control Stations Open a telnet session on V1 V2 Control Stations only Upgrade the detector manufacturing data after detector replacement Install Gantry software p...

Page 138: ...S Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to ILLUSTRATION 23 UTILITIES ON V3 CONTROL STATIONS UP TO ADS 53 10 10 ILLUSTRATION 24 UTILITIES ON V3 CONTROL STATIONS GREATER THAN ADS 53 10 10 AND V4 CON TROL STATIONS ...

Page 139: ... components do the following For V1 V2 V3 Control Stations press down the meta key and the F1 key at the same time For V4 Control Stations press down the Windows á key and the F1 key at the same time Alternatively you can do the following 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 2 In the command window that appears start the ADS Command Pane...

Page 140: ... to display system status information in the ads Room Control Panel 4 To close the Room Control Panel click the Cancel button 5 When you have finished using the ads Command Panel click the minimize button at the top right cor ner the window remains active To view it again press the Front key on V1 V2 V3 Control Stations or the Alt Tab keys together on V4 Control Stations to bring the minimized win...

Page 141: ...e Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to Page no 141 Chapter 3 S2100D How To fm Note If you close the panel by using the option in the Config drop down menu the system application closes and must restart it ...

Page 142: ...e using The Service Desktop GUI for V1 and V2 Control Stations running the SB150 Workstation uses one type of Service Desktop GUI The V3 Control Stations running the U20 Workstation and the V4 Control Stations running the Z400 Workstation uses another type of Service Desktop GUI As seen briefly in the sections above both types of Service Desktop GUI have a common layout such that All the main serv...

Page 143: ...Service Desktop GUIs the following documentation conventions are used The procedures are written generically but the Service Desktop GUI screens are shown only for the V1 V2 Control Stations and not the V3 V4 Control Stations The access to service function commands is written generically in the format Click Service Action Command under Some Heading For V1 V2 Control Stations you actually click a S...

Page 144: ...Chapter 3 Page no 144 S2100D How To fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Senographe Operations How to This page is blank ...

Page 145: ...the class of the component Within each sub assem bly components are sorted by class The following table gives class codes and definitions with exam ples of components within each class Class Class title Examples 15 Electronic components Capacitor Coil Encoder Fuse on board low power Display LED Optical fork detector Potentiometer Switch Resistor on board low power 25 Electronic sub assemblies Circ...

Page 146: ...mponent description identify alternate components 2 4 Comp Compatibility An entry in this column indicates that the component must be used only on certain versions of the equip ment This column may contain two types of information a compatibility code which helps you decide which FRU to order and or cross cross reference to the Product History chapter which describes the product evolution The code...

Page 147: ...ty The entry in this column indicates FRU Traceability Trac Y the FRU is tracked by a product locator Trac N the FRU is not tracked by a product locator 2 11 D R Disassembly Reassembly An entry of D R in this column indicates that Disassembly Reassembly of the component is explained in a D R Job Card The D R Job Card includes any required post requisite procedures recalibrations and checks etc A l...

Page 148: ... component forms part of one of these main sub assemblies and the component index includes three tables one for each sub assembly Cables connecting two sub assemblies are allocated to one sub assembly or another as shown Except for the X ray Console cable no cables pass directly between the Control Station and the Generator Cabinet 3 2 Component Class Within each sub assembly components are sorted...

Page 149: ... CS V4 page 66 Loc page 206 FD page 85 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1401 25 IDC Computer Dione 4 form factor 2375961 See Supplies on page 1503 Pre Penduick Loc page 203 FD page 82 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1503 25 IDC Computer Dione 5 form factor 5324091 See Supplies on page 1503 Penduick and above Loc page 203 FD page 82 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1503 25 Console X Ray 2282675 7 Loc page 201 FD page 74 FRU Y Tra...

Page 150: ...443 CS V3 page 54 Loc page 201 FRU Y D R page 1417 and page 1443 25 XS Complete Keyboard for V4 Control Stations See supplies on page 1443 CSV4 page 54 Loc page 201 FRU Y D R page 1443 25 XS Complete Mouse for V4 Con trol Stations 5394733 CSV4 page 54 Loc page 201 FRU Y D R page 1417 25 Global Modem Kit for V1 V2 Control Stations 2245794 CS V1 V2 page 54 Loc page 203 FD page 82 FRU Y Trac N 25 ADS...

Page 151: ... FRU Y Trac N D R page 1457 45 Cable AWS Line 1 2226625 FD page 82 Cabl page 322 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Control Station Pos Har ness 5142875 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Ethernet 2385966 FD page 74 Cabl page 322 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Gene ADS UPS 2387162 FD page 82 Cabl page 322 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Ground 2385960 FD page 86 FRU N 45 Cable IDC Conditioner Control 2226612 Loc page 200 FD page 82 Cabl page...

Page 152: ... Carthage For V3 Con trol Stations 5388869 CS V3 page 54 45 Internal Cable Set incl Ethernet cable etc for V4 Control Sta tions 5388869 2 CS V4 page 54 FRU Y 45 Cable Monitor VGA BNC for CS V1 V2 or a V3 Control Station upgraded via Accelera Kit 2390029 CS V1 V2 page 54 FD page 82 FRU Y 45 AWS DVI Monitor Cable for V3 Control Stations 5177284 2 CS V3 page 54 45 Cable SCSI VHDCI 68 HD50 not require...

Page 153: ...age 203 FRU Y Trac N D R page 503 75 Radiation Screen for V1 Control Stations 2409301 CS V1 page 54 Loc page 201 FRU Y Trac N 75 Lamerpax Radiation Screen for V2 V3 V4 Control Stations for China 5170447 CS V2 V3 V4 page 54 Loc page 201 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1463 75 Mavig Radiation Screen for V2 V3 V4 Control Stations not China 5352284 CS V2 V3 V4 page 54 Loc page 201 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1463 75 ...

Page 154: ...479 Sis page 54 Loc page 209 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1483 75 Stop Bracket Set for Sisfle Rota tive Arm 5244791 Sis page 54 Loc page 209 FRU Y Trac N Inst page 415 75 30 mm Monitor Cable Harness 5156705 Sis page 54 Loc page 209 FRU Y Trac N 75 Silicone Masks for Sisfle Rotative Arm 5270827 Sis page 54 Loc page 209 FRU Y Trac N 75 Stop Screw for Sisfle Rotative Arm 5233539 Sis page 54 Loc page 209 FRU...

Page 155: ...ee page 67 Loc page 204 FRU Y P D R page 822 135 Software Backup kit ADS V54 10 for Z400 V4 Control Stations 5261381 7 See page 67 Loc page 206 FRU Y P D R page 821 135 Software Backup kit ADS V54 20 for Z400 V4 Control Stations 5261381 8 See page 67 Loc page 206 FRU Y P D R page 821 135 Software Backup set IDC V4 2 6 2407974 4 See page 67 Loc page 203 FRU Y P D R page 822 135 Software Backup set ...

Page 156: ...on PDU Board 46 170021P30 Loc page 290 CL page 290 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 250 Vac 125 mA Delay F5 and F6 on PDU Board 5344386 2 Loc page 290 CL page 290 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 60 Vac 0 3 A Resettable F1 on Compression Board and F1 on Tilt Board 5314541 5 Loc page 288 FRU N Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 60 Vac 0 3 A Resettable F2 F3 on Compression Board and F2 F3 on Tilt Boar...

Page 157: ...193 FD page 77 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1143 25 Board Bucky PL302 5214502 Loc page 193 FD page 77 CL page 294 FRU Y DR page 1347 25 Board Collimator Control PL403 2324334 3 Loc page 195 FD page 78 CL page 295 FRU N Trac N D R page 1369 25 Board Collimator DC DC PL402 2376691 Loc page 195 FD page 78 CL page 296 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1379 25 Board Collimator Interconnection Falhauber 2376693 30 page 68...

Page 158: ...lies on page 1331 See page 1331 Loc page 193 FD page 77 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1331 25 Board PDU PL101 2365871 8 Loc page 197 FD page 75 CL page 290 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1137 25 Board Rotation PL202 2375488 13 See page 67 Loc page 191 FD page 76 CL page 286 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1223 25 Board Tilt PL401 2375399 5 Loc page 195 FD page 78 CL page 288 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1365 25 Bucky Assembly Pack...

Page 159: ... 2281990 Loc page 195 FD page 78 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1353 35 Breaker Circuit C10A MPCB 2387401 Loc page 199 FD page 75 CL page 297 FRU Y Trac N 35 Fuse 600 Vac 20 A Fast F1 F2 on MPCB in Gantry 2387747 Loc page 297 FD page 75 CL page 297 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 35 Terminal Block ST101 Loc page 199 FD page 75 FRU N 35 Terminal Block ST102 Loc page 198 FD page 75 FRU N 45 Button Stop Motion Lef...

Page 160: ...y 2386549 Loc page 200 FD page 74 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Nephtys system coolant hose 2387073 FD page 74 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable UPS ac supply 2225470 FD page 74 FRU N Trac N 45 CAN Bus Kit containing the fol lowing BUS cables W314 Sys Positioner 2345920 2 W208 Positioner 2345953 W213 Positioner Between Nodes 2345960 W311 Positioner for Bucky 2372186 W308 Positioner for Compression 2372181 W411 Positi...

Page 161: ... FD page 75 Cabl page 299 FRU N 45 Cable W101 Loc page 196 FD page 75 Cabl page 299 FRU N 45 Cable W104 Loc page 197 FD page 75 Cabl page 300 FRU N 45 Cable W105 Loc page 198 FD page 75 Cabl page 300 FRU N 45 Cable W106 Loc page 199 FD page 75 Cabl page 300 FRU N 45 Cable W107 Loc page 199 FD page 75 Cabl page 300 FRU N 45 Cable W108 Loc page 198 FD page 75 Cabl page 301 FRU N 45 Cable W109 Loc pa...

Page 162: ...FD page 75 Cabl page 302 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W116 Loc page 196 FD page 75 Cabl page 302 FRU N 45 Cable W117 Loc page 198 FD page 75 Cabl page 302 FRU N 45 Cable W119 TX 2381704 FD page 75 Cabl page 302 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W120 RX 2381702 FD page 75 Cabl page 303 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W121 GridSync 2381706 FD page 75 Cabl page 303 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W123 FD page 75 Cabl page 303 FRU N 45 Cab...

Page 163: ... FRU N 45 Cable W202 FD page 76 Cabl page 304 FRU N 45 Cable W203 FD page 76 Cabl page 304 FRU N 45 Cable W204 FD page 76 Cabl page 304 FRU N 45 Cable W205 FD page 76 Cabl page 305 FRU N 45 Cable W206 FD page 76 Cabl page 305 FRU N 45 Cable W207 FD page 76 Cabl page 305 FRU N 45 Cable W208 Loc page 196 FD page 76 Cabl page 305 FRU N 45 Cable W209 Loc page 197 FD page 76 Cabl page 306 FRU N 45 Cabl...

Page 164: ...6 Cabl page 307 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W215 FD page 76 Cabl page 307 FRU N 45 Cable W216 FD page 76 Cabl page 307 FRU N 45 Cable W217 FD page 76 Cabl page 307 FRU N 45 Cable W218 FD page 76 Cabl page 307 FRU N 45 Cable W219 FD page 76 Cabl page 308 FRU N 45 Cable W220 FD page 76 Cabl page 308 FRU N 45 Cable W221 FD page 76 Cabl page 307 FRU N 45 Cable W222 FD page 76 Cabl page 305 FRU N 45 Cable W3...

Page 165: ... 45 Cable W305 2345911 FD page 77 Cabl page 310 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1217 45 Cable W306 FD page 77 Cabl page 310 FRU N 45 Cable W307 FD page 77 Cabl page 310 FRU N 45 Cable W308 FD page 77 Cabl page 311 FRU N 45 Cable W309 FD page 77 Cabl page 311 FRU N 45 Cable W310 313 2372183 FD page 77 Cabl page 311 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W311 2372186 FD page 77 Cabl page 311 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W312 FD page...

Page 166: ...5 Cable W317 2372171 FD page 77 Cabl page 314 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W318 FD page 77 Cabl page 314 FRU N 45 Cable W319 FD page 77 Cabl page 314 FRU N 45 Cable W320 2372204 FD page 77 Cabl page 314 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W401 FD page 78 Cabl page 314 FRU N 45 Cable W402 2345927 Loc page 196 FD page 78 Cabl page 314 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W403 Stator Cable 2381701 2 FD page 78 Cabl page 315 FRU Y Trac ...

Page 167: ...409 FD page 78 Cabl page 317 FRU N 45 Cable W410 FD page 78 Cabl page 317 FRU N 45 Cable W411 FD page 78 Cabl page 318 FRU N 45 Cable W412 Tube HV 4 conductor 2379842 FD page 78 Cabl page 318 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1565 45 Cable W413 FOV 2395068 FD page 78 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable W500 2377083 FD page 79 Cabl page 318 FRU N 45 Cable W501 2377081 FD page 79 Cabl page 319 FRU N 45 Cable W502 2377082 2 F...

Page 168: ...4 FD page 79 Cabl page 321 FRU N 45 Cable W509 2408705 FD page 79 Cabl page 321 FRU N 45 Cable Water Hose Assy 2266812 FD page 74 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Water Hose Assy blue 2266811 FD page 74 FRU Y Trac N 45 Footswitch Left 2393691 2 Loc page 188 FD page 76 FRU Y Trac N 45 Footswitch Right 2393690 2 Loc page 188 FD page 76 FRU Y Trac N 45 Keypad Arm Control on Tube Head left and right 5268425 2 Lo...

Page 169: ...227 Loc page 194 FD page 76 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1227 55 Spare Part Kit Clutch 2345968 4 and Rotation Board 2375488 13 5265895 2 See Supplies on page 1227 See page 1227 Loc page 194 FD page 76 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1227 55 Fan W406 2345931 Loc page 195 FD page 78 FRU Y Trac N 55 Force Sensor W319 2345925 Loc page 193 FD page 77 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1313 55 Motor Compression Motorized 2345907 Loc...

Page 170: ...ssy for system using Maxon motors 2324331 1 Loc page 195 FD page 79 FRU N Trac N D R page 1375 65 HVL Attenuator Set AL 99 99 2388637 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1361 65 Entire Tilt Motor and Tilt Drive Assembly with Bearing 2345905 Loc page 195 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1361 65 Tilt Drive Assembly 2392469 Loc page 195 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1361 65 Compression Trolley Kit 5130573 Loc page 193 FRU Y Trac N D...

Page 171: ...age 191 FRU Y Trac N 75 Cable tie Compression D70 L250x4 8 2387733 5 FRU Y Trac N 75 Lift Screw Assembly Type 2 or Type 3 See Supplies on page 1255 Loc page 192 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1255 75 Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake Type 2 Lift Screw Assemblies only 5198687 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1279 75 Chain Energy Compr 2388037 Loc page 194 FRU Y Trac N 75 Clamp Tube 46 208713P1 FRU Y P D R page 825 75 Cove...

Page 172: ...5 Cover Column Cable Exit To replace 2375029 or 2375029 3 see J C D R A210 on page 1197 2375029 2 Loc page 189 FRU Y D R page 523 75 Cover Column Bottom Front To replace 2375030 or 2375030 3 see J C D R A210 on page 1197 2375030 2 Loc page 189 FRU Y D R page 523 75 Cover Column Bottom Back To replace 2375031 or 2375031 3 see J C D R A210 on page 1197 2375031 2 Loc page 189 FRU Y D R page 523 75 Co...

Page 173: ... D R A210 on page 1197 2401145 2 Loc page 189 FRU Y D R page 523 75 Cover Compression Carriage Lower To replace 2375041 or 2375041 3 see J C D R A210 on page 1197 2401147 Loc page 189 FRU Y D R page 523 75 Arm cover rework assy Required when replacing older Arm Com pression or Head covers see J C D R A210 on page 1197 2412297 FRU Y D R page 1197 75 Handle Main See J C D R A210 on page 1197 2352894...

Page 174: ... recep tor 2410755 FRU Y 75 Logo GE D60 2399858 3 Loc page 188 FRU Y Trac N 75 Nut Tube Cathode 2300174 FRU Y 75 Pulley and Torque limiter Com pression 2388164 Loc page 193 FRU Y 75 Retaining Ring Lift 91202713 FRU Y Trac N 75 Retaining Ring Rotation 91202737 FRU Y Trac N 75 Screw Tube CL M3x5 5 99051913 FRU Y 75 Screw Tube CL M4x6 6 A2 50 99059598 FRU Y 75 Screw Tube CL M4x8 99100033 FRU Y P D R ...

Page 175: ...psy 2389571 FRU Y 85 Paddle Biopsy Round Spot 2389572 Loc page 190 FRU Y 85 Paddle Phlexis This new replacement flexible paddle corrects the problem of the edge of the flexible com pression paddle appearing in the chest wall side of some images due to an exaggerated tilting of the paddle It replaces previous paddle with P N 2395540 2 2395540 3 FRU Y Trac N 85 Paddle Plate 19x23 Compress 2241745 FR...

Page 176: ...c N 85 19 X 23 Flexible Paddle Dampers FRU Kit This new replacement flexible paddle kit for the 19 X 23 Flexible Paddle corrects the problem of the edge of the flexible compres sion paddle appearing in the chest wall side of some images due to an exaggerated tilting of the paddle 5337715 FRU Y Trac N SWF 95 Gas Spring Lift 450mm 5390061 replaces 2375828 2375828 2 and 2412204 5390061 Loc page 192 F...

Page 177: ...5067136 FRU Y Trac N 15 Capacitor ALU 100UF 99182146 FRU Y Trac N 15 Diode Bridge 120A D26 D27 91707991 Loc page 215 FRU Y Trac N 15 Diode Bridge 60A D24 D25 91707990 Loc page 215 FRU Y Trac N 15 Diode Module 1 4kV 60A 58079525 Loc page 214 FRU Y Trac N 15 Electronic Component Misc 2326402 FRU Y Trac N 15 Electronic Component Misc 2326401 FRU Y Trac N 15 Fuse 250 Vac 1 A Delay F1 on Mains Distribu...

Page 178: ... FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 250 Vac 10 A Delay F1 on Mains Distribution Assembly 99183979 Loc page 281 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 250 Vac 5 A Delay F2 F4 on Mains Distribution Assembly 99183923 Loc page 281 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 250 Vac 1 6 A Delay F3 on Mains Distribution Assembly 99183925 Loc page 281 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1109 15 Fuse 250 Vac 1 0 A Delay F5 on Mains...

Page 179: ...Generator Command 400PL1 2107747 2 Loc page 216 FD page 81 CL page 251 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1569 25 Board Generator Interface 400PL2 2198369 3 Loc page 216 FD page 81 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1577 25 Board Inverter 2121509 2 Loc page 214 FD page 81 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1595 25 Board Main Distribution 200PL1 2108592 2 Loc page 212 FD page 81 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1601 25 Board Relay Board 200PL4 210...

Page 180: ...nsformer 2kVA 2228007 Loc page 213 FD page 80 FRU Y Trac N 35 Battery 3 6V 2315533 Loc page 212 FRU Y Trac N 35 Battery Lithium for CPU 850mAh 99171019 Loc page 216 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1549 35 Circuit Breaker 25A 5352939 Loc page 213 FD page 80 FRU Y Trac N 35 Holder Fuse 2P 600V 91685123 Loc page 215 FRU Y Trac N 35 Relay 18A 230V 2327235 Loc page 215 FRU Y Trac N 35 Relay K1 K2 8A 2100312 Loc ...

Page 181: ...at 55 45 58079252 Loc page 214 FRU Y Trac N 35 Thyristor 58079220 Loc page 214 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable 400PL1 200PL2 2110259 Loc page 217 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable 400PL1 200PL2 2110271 Loc page 217 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable 400PL1 300PL1 2110262 Loc page 217 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable 400PL1 300PL2 2110264 Loc page 217 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable 40 P 0 5 M C801418 Loc page 217 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Heater and BIAS 4...

Page 182: ...Coaxial HV Unit IC Alt B 45203215 Loc page 212 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Conditioner Pos Har ness 2387792 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable CPU Power Supply 45440115 Loc page 212 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Data Control 45440116 Loc page 212 FRU Y Trac N 45 Cable Gene pos Harness 2387764 FRU Y Trac N 45 HV Tank Unit 701 2107399 Loc page 212 FD FRU Y Trac Y D R page 1559 45 Line Filter 250V 2229249 Loc page 213 FD page ...

Page 183: ... FRU 2235112 2 Loc page 211 FRU Y Trac N D R page 513 75 Cover assembly Rear includ ing fan packaged FRU 2235113 2 Loc page 211 FRU Y Trac N D R page 513 75 Cover Front packaged FRU 2235114 2 Loc page 211 FRU Y Trac N D R page 513 75 Cover Left packaged FRU 2235115 2 Loc page 211 FRU Y Trac N D R page 513 75 Cover Right packaged FRU 2235116 2 Loc page 211 FRU Y Trac N D R page 513 75 Jack Fixed 91...

Page 184: ...ures Class A 2385072 16 8EN FRU Component Index Generator Cabinet 75 Tubing Shrink Wht D12 7 6 4 99002536 FRU Y Trac N 75 Wheel Transportation 91727258 Loc page 214 FRU Y Trac N 115 Coolant kit 2355459 Loc page 212 FRU Y Trac N D R page 1633 Class Component Description Reference Comp Loc FD Cabl CL FRU Trac D R ...

Page 185: ...strations of the main component assemblies Gantry Generator Control Station follow the top level illustration of the Senographe system Successive levels of illustration show more detail Notice If you are viewing an original Acrobat PDF document on screen illustrations appear in color and you can use hypertext links to navigate the document Hypertext links are highlighted in blue They are either bl...

Page 186: ...ide of the assembly These buttons are used when an illustration is too large to fit on the page Click the up arrow to move the view upwards Click the down arrow to move the view downwards This folder icon is placed beside title text when a lower level illustration with more information is avail able Click the title to move down one level Click one of these buttons to jump to an illustration showin...

Page 187: ...Page no 187 Location Nephtys fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 ACQUISITION SYSTEM COMPONENTS Control Station Gantry Generator ...

Page 188: ... and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 Gantry MPCB Rotation Lift Compression Arm Gantry Footswitch Curtains CPU Board Supply Bulkhead Tube Head PDU Board Footswitch Right Left Readout GE Logo Covers Accessories Detector Supply Arm control keypad Arm control keypad Stop Latches Faceshield ...

Page 189: ...it covers Gantry Covers full list Column covers Cable Exit cover Top Column cover left and right Bottom Column covers front and rear Front covers left and right Compression and Arm covers Compression Carriage cover Arm covers left and right Tube Head covers left and right Detector covers upper and lower covers Left Right Bottom Column covers Arm covers Top Column covers Front covers Main Handle Bu...

Page 190: ...ce Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 2 Accessories 19 x 23 cm compression paddle Small round spot compression paddle Axillary compression paddle Square spot compression paddle Mag Stand 1 5 Mag Stand 1 8 Two magnification platforms or Mag Stand with latches ...

Page 191: ... Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 3 Rotation Lift Front View Rotation Belt Rotation Motor Encoder Rotation Potentiometer Rotation Gas Spring Rotation Optical Fork Rotation Board Not Illustrated Lift Synchronous Belt Rotation Worm Gear Gas Spring ...

Page 192: ...rmation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 4 Rotation Lift Rear View Lift Upper Optical Fork Lift Gas Spring Rotation Brake Lift Motor Encoder Lift Potentiometer Lift Lower Optical Fork Lift Board Lift Screw Assembly Brake Lift Screw Assembly Lift Screw Assembly Ball Baring Ring ...

Page 193: ...cedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 5 Compression Arm Front Manual Compression Belt Arm Distribution Board Force Sensor Paddle Holder Board Image Digital Detector Paddle Standard 19 x 23 Brake Manual Compression Bucky Assembly Image Receptor Bucky Board Pulley and Torque Limiter Compression Trolley Kit ...

Page 194: ...n 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 6 Compression Arm Rear Brake for Motorized Compression Compression Board Motorized Compression Belt Compression Motor Encoder Compression Potentiometer Rotation Clutch Compression Energy Chain Motor Pulley ...

Page 195: ...phe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 7 Tube Head Tilt Drive Assembly Tube Tilt Board DC DC Board Control Board Fan Tube Tilt Motor Filter Wheel Collimator Set Zero Sensor Tube Head Light Assembly Tilt Drive Bearing ...

Page 196: ...Gantry_DS fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 8 MPCB CPU Board Cable W101 Cable W314 Cable W402 Cable W116 Cable W208 Interface Board PL104 CPU Board PL103 ...

Page 197: ...enographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 9 MPCB PDU Board Cable W107 Cable W104 Stop Motion Left Cable W101 Cable W315 PDU Board PL101 Fuses F1 F3 F4 Cable W209 Cable W111 Fuses F5 F6 Cable W125 Cable W110 ...

Page 198: ...thcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 10 MPCB Supply Cable W117 EMC Filter Fuse 20A Shunt R101 E102 Cable W105 Cable W108 Cable W109 Cable W112 Cable W113 Cable W110 Terminal Block ST102 ...

Page 199: ... Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 11 MPCB Bulkhead area Cable W127 Cable W006 Cable W106 Cable W107 Cable W002 Input I F Board PL102 AC DC Converter EMC Filter E101 Cable W004 Cable W005 Circuit Breaker 10A Terminal Block ST101 Cable W001 Module ...

Page 200: ...m GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 1 12 Detector Power Supply Detector power Supply Detector power cable 2386549 Detector supply to IDC 2226621 Detector ac supply cable ...

Page 201: ...nformation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 Control Station Radiation Screen X Ray Console LCD Monitor CS V1 V2 Left View CS V1 V2 Right View Omega Cover CS V3 Left View CS V3 Right View Rotative Arm Ergotron or Sisfle AWS Keyboard Mouse CS V4 Right View CS V4 Left View ...

Page 202: ... fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 1 Control Station V1 V2 Left Side UPS Ethernet Switch ADS Computer SB150 with CD Writer ADS Software Keyboard Slider Rails ...

Page 203: ...on CS_DS fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 2 Control Station V1 V2 Right Side Modem Top Cover IDC IDC IDC Software Bucky Support Keyboard Slider Rails ...

Page 204: ...thcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 3 Control Station V3 Left Side ADS Computer U20 ADS Software UPS IDC Keyboard Slider Rails RJ 45 Service Panel Ethernet Switch Penduick and above ...

Page 205: ...fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 4 Control Station V3 Right Side IDC IDC Software Pre Penduick Ethernet Switch Top Cover UPS Keyboard Slider Rails Handswitch ...

Page 206: ...m GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 5 Control Station V4 Left Side ADS Computer Z400 ADS Software UPS IDC Keyboard Slider Rails RJ 45 Service Panel Ethernet Switch ...

Page 207: ...Location CS_DS fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 6 Control Station V4 Right Side IDC IDC Software Top Cover UPS Keyboard Slider Rails Handswitch ...

Page 208: ... Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 7 Rotative Arm Set Ergotron rev 2 Monitor Fixation Optional Trackball Note The Ergotron rev 2 Rotative Arm Set is a FRU and the components listed above are also available separately as a FRU Monitor and Mouse Support Arm Handle Mouse Mat Mouse Mat Support ...

Page 209: ...Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 8 Rotative Arm Set Sisfle Arm Monitor Fixation Stop Bracket Set Stop Screw Arm Handle Mouse Mat Mouse Mat Support 30 mm Monitor Cable Silicone Masks Harness not shown Note The Sisfle Rotative Arm Set is a FRU and the components listed above are also available separately as a FRU ...

Page 210: ...Page no 210 Location CS_DS fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN This page is blank ...

Page 211: ... A 2385072 16 8EN Page no 211 Location Gene fm 3 2 Generator Cabinet 3 2 1 Generator Conditioner Cabinet Right Cover Generator Front Cover Generator Rear Cover Generator Left Cover Generator Top Cover Generator FRU detail Illustration 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 2 7 Generator Cooling Fan ...

Page 212: ...y board 200PL2 Supply command board Mains distribution board 701HV unit Conditioner Relay K1 K2 Relay X1 Coiled Resistor 280W Coiled Resistor 160W Fast Fuse 27X27 125A 150VAC Fuse 10A 380V Coaxial cable HVunit IC CPU Power supply cable Data control cable Line Filter Box 250 V distribution cable WG4 200PL1 Protective cover between 200PL1 and 200PL2 Coolant kit for install or replace ...

Page 213: ...ormation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Page no 213 Location Gene fm 3 2 3 Generator Conditioner Cabinet continued Circuit breaker Mains distribution Operator Interface Power supply 220V 0 5A Line filter 250VAC Service Interface Transformer 2kVA ...

Page 214: ...s A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 4 Generator with HV Unit Transportation wheel D2X50mm Fixed jack D 40 M10X25 HR 43 A Capacitor unit A Filtering inductor 2X125 Diode module DD31N 1 4 KV 60A Thyristor TH1 TH2 Thermostat 55 45oC 1R 6A F6 Thermostat 40 30oC 1T 6A F6 300 PL2 Anode Starter Power Board 300PL1 Inverter Board ...

Page 215: ...ene fm 3 2 5 Generator with the HV Unit continued Transformer 9kW 52A 415V Cable REL CTRS W10 Cable PSRS CTRS W12 Line Supply Contactor Diode DD31N400K D24 D25 Diode DD61N400K D26 D27 Main Emergency switch Relay 18 A 230 V 22 V Fuse Holder 2P 60x27 600V Fast Fuse 27x60 35A cable W14 Capacitor AL 2200µF 350V 600V C 100KA ...

Page 216: ... Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN 3 2 6 Generator with the HV Unit continued A A Power supply 50W 5V5A 400 PL1 Generator Command Board 400 PL2 Gene Interface Board 400 PL3 CPU Gene Jumper red Battery lithium 12V2A 12V0 5A ...

Page 217: ...ice Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Page no 217 Location Gene fm 3 2 7 Generator with the HV Unit continued Heater bias cable Cable 400PL1 200PL2 Cable 400PL1 300PL1 Cable 400PL1 300PL2 Cable 400PL1 200PL2 Cable 40 cond 0 50 m ...

Page 218: ...Page no 218 Location Gene fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN This page is blank ...

Page 219: ...Chapter 3 This section describes the tools and consumable supplies that are required to install and maintain the Senographe system It is organized logically in the following sections Mechanical Tools Standard Mechanical Tools Professional Mechanical Tools Specified Tools Specific Maintenance Tools Image Quality Tools Measuring Meters Loopback Kit Consumable Supplies ...

Page 220: ... installation and routine maintenance of the Senographe system Standard Mechanical Tools Set of allen metric wrenches 1 5 mm 2 mm 2 5 mm 3 mm 4 mm 5 mm 5 5 mm 6 mm 8 mm Set of imperial allen wrenches including the size 3 32 American wrench 3 16 Set of metric open ended wrenches 5 5 mm 7 mm 8 mm 13 mm 17 mm Adjustable pin wrench Ratchet handle 1 4 Square Drive 10 Piece Metric Standard Hex Socket Se...

Page 221: ...ation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Tools Glossary Page no 221 Chapter 3 Tool Glossary fm 13 mm Hex Socket 1 4 Square Drive Socket Extension Bars 1 4 Square Drive Combination pliers Circlip pliers Bent needle nose pliers Standard Mechanical Tools ...

Page 222: ...m GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Tools Glossary Channel lock pliers Set of Feeler Gauges from 0 03 mm to 1 mm Torque Wrench 3 30 N m Soldering Iron Standard Mechanical Tools ...

Page 223: ...5072 16 8EN Tools Glossary Page no 223 Chapter 3 Tool Glossary fm ESD Strap Spirit level or similar device for measuring horizontal ity accuracy 0 5 Protractor or suitable device for measuring angles of 5 and 15 accuracy 0 5 Vernier calipers 3 m measuring tape Standard Mechanical Tools ...

Page 224: ...thcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Tools Glossary Screwdriver set including large and small flat and cross head screwdrivers Spatular or slim flat blade Vacuum Cleaner Standard Mechanical Tools ...

Page 225: ...ny professional hardware store These tools are only required when changing a few components in the Senographe system Tools Where Used Bearing Jaw Puller Axial Lock Nut Socket for KM15 Lock Nuts 98 mm diameter HN15 Hook Spanner for KM15 Lock Nuts 98 mm diameter Bearing Fitting Tool Kit SKF Hub Extractor Minimum specifications jaw reach 100 mm jaw spread 90 mm Suitable models are the Grainger 4YT15 ...

Page 226: ...asks They can be sup plied with the system or by the Field Engineer 2 1 Specific Maintenance Tools Tools PN Orderable How supplied Where Used Loopback kit 2247879 4 Y In system accessory kit Purge Tool 2249359 Y In system accessory kit Service terminal cable EMC 2116257 Y In system accessory kit Magstand simulator 5376101 Y In system accessory kit and FE supply Standard RS 232 Loopback Adapter N F...

Page 227: ...399 Y FE supply Two sheets of 0 2 mm and 0 5 mm thickness of 99 9 pure aluminum Length and width sufficient to cover fully the ionization chamber The thickness must be accurate within 1 N FE supply Lead sheet N 24 x 30 cm mammographic cas sette with film N Hospital One coin N FE supply Job Card ELE A028 Colli mation Checks on page 679 Parallel Key 2X2X14MM 2201766 10 Y FE supply Used to change Pul...

Page 228: ...at you can use to perform Image Quality measurements on the Senographe system Tools PN Orderable How supplied Set of acrylic plates Comprises six 10 mm acrylic plates and one 5 mm acrylic plate The acrylic plates in this set can be stacked to create different thick nesses 2299008 2 N With system part of option S30321MP IQST standard phantom 2222686 2 Y FE supply Flat Field Phantom 2233248 Y In sys...

Page 229: ... 8EN Tools Glossary Page no 229 Chapter 3 Tool Glossary fm ACR Standard Phantom RMI 156 Detector Protection Plate 5162279 Y In system accessory kit GAFCHROMIC XR M Film 5324611 Y FE Supply Aluminum attenuator plate used for Collimator checks 5330673 Y FE Supply Tools PN Orderable How supplied ...

Page 230: ...rizes the recommended meters that you can use to perform different types of measurements on the Senographe system 2 3 1 kVp Meters The table below summarizes the recommended kVp meters that you can use to perform kVp measure ments on the Senographe system kVp Meter PN Orderable How supplied Radcal 4082 kVp meter 2384916 Y FE supply RMI 232 kVp meter N FE supply Keithley 35080B kVp meter N FE suppl...

Page 231: ...you can use to perform ionization measurements on the Senographe system Dosimeter accessory PN Orderable How supplied Dosimeter Radcal 2026 2213942 Y FE supply Chamber for dosimeter 2026 mammo 6M ionization chamber 6cc calibrated at mammographic X ray beam energies 2213938 Y FE supply Dosimeter Support with Radiation Protection Plate Y In system accessory kit Radiation Protection Plate 2238777 In ...

Page 232: ...ummarizes the recommended multimeters and mA mAs meters that you can use to perform various voltage resistance and current measurements on the Senographe system Meter PN Orderable How supplied Multimeters Fluke 87 multimeter first generation type III and type V 12062 Fluke 87 type 5 Y FE supply Fluke 8060 multimeter GS Poner 165 mA mAs meter N FE supply Keithley 35035 mAs meter 46 194427P435 Y FE ...

Page 233: ...ow summarizes the recommended luminance meters that you can use to perform luminos ity measurements in hospital rooms that accommodate the Senographe system Luminance Meter PN Orderable How supplied IET Luminance meter kit 46 262762G1 or G2 Y FE supply Siemens luminance meter Wellhoffer Serial Spot Meter 2319223 Y FE supply Minolta Luminance Meter LS100 110 or CS100 2109716 Y FE supply ...

Page 234: ...re Function Connector Loopback UPS 2248665 N 9 pin loopback adapter which can be used to perform loopback tests with COM ports on the UPS IDC and ADS Computer Connector Loopback Generator 2248430 N 2 pin loopback adapter which is used solely for loopback tests on the Gener ator 2 4 Loopback Kit The loopback kit PN 2247879 4 comprises various parts which are used to perform loopback tests on the di...

Page 235: ...Female Loopback COM 5342935 N 9 pin female loopback adapter which can be used to perform loopback tests with the serial COM line between the IDC and Generator Female Loopback RT 5315956 N 9 pin female loopback adapter which can be used to perform loopback tests with the RT line between the IDC and Generator Adapter Loopback Sub D 9F 25Mr 2198175 2 N 9 pin to 25 pin adapter FO Loopback Connector SC...

Page 236: ...FE supply Grease for Lift and Rotation 5212483 Y FE supply Roll of adhesive tape N FE supply Blank DOS formatted Extra HD 3 5 4 MB floppy disk 45558533 Y Blank CD R Box of 10 10CDQ80NXSL Y Initially with the Control Station Coolant kit including Pre mixed coolant for conditioner This is provided in two containers marked Flushing and Topping Their contents are identical the labeling is only for con...

Page 237: ...DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Tools Glossary Page no 237 Chapter 3 Tool Glossary fm Thread Locking Compound Loctite 222 Thread Locking Compound Loctite 270 Loctite Cleaner 7061 Supplies ...

Page 238: ...Chapter 3 Page no 238 Tool Glossary fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Tools Glossary This page is blank ...

Page 239: ...ers switches circuit breakers and indicator lights and indicates their location their function and their normal setting Links are provided to the appropriate component references in the FRU Component Index on page 145 and links are provided to this section from the FRU Component Index 2 GENERATOR CABINET JUMPERS AND SWITCHES The information in this Section is provided only to allow verification of...

Page 240: ... Generator CPU Board 400PL3 Push Buttons 2 1 3 Jumpers Connector Function P1 To the XP1 connector on the Generator Interface Board 400PL2 P2 To the XP2 connector on the Generator Interface Board 400PL2 Switch Function S1 Abort S2 Reset Jumper Function X1 Not Applicable X2 Battery Disconnection see below X2 TP1 TP110 TP111 TP112 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10 DS11 S1 S2 P2 P1 B1 TP2 TP8 T...

Page 241: ...er on the Generator CPU board 400PL3 is installed in position X2 as shown below CAUTION This jumper must never be removed from position X2 and must never be placed in position TP1 If this jumper is either removed or placed in position TP1 the generator CPU RAMs are erased necessitating a TOTAL RE CALIBRATION of the generator and AEC P1 P2 B46 B41 X2 BT1 Board CPU Generator 400PL3 see component ind...

Page 242: ... signals Normal status ON OFF Blinking ON Blinking when the Generator CPU board is sending receiving communication data OFF when the Generator CPU board is not send ing receiving communication data DS3 Rx D B1 Yellow DS4 Tx TTL A2 Yellow DS5 Rx D A1 Yellow DS6 Tx TTL A2 Yellow DS7 Rx D A2 Yellow DS8 Tx TTL B2 Yellow DS9 Rx D B2 Yellow DS10 Halt Red Normal status OFF ON when the Generator CPU Board...

Page 243: ...nd TP2 LDS TP3 CS_DUART TP4 UDS TP5 IRQ_DUART1 TP6 IRQ_DUART2 TP7 VPA_G64 TP8 VPA_G64 TP9 ADDR 23 00 TP10 ADDR 23 00 TP11 ADDR 23 00 TP12 ADDR 23 00 TP13 Abort TP14 Gnd TP15 Gnd TP16 Vcc TP17 Vcc TP18 CS_Banc_1 TP19 CS_Banc_0 TP20 Taille_1M TP21 CS_Blanc_3 TP22 CS_Blanc_2 TP23 Dateur TP24 ADDR 23 00 TP25 ADDR 23 00 TP26 ADDR 23 00 TP27 AS TP28 E TP29 VPA_CPU TP30 VMA_CPU TP31 FC 2 TP32 FC 1 TP33 I...

Page 244: ...GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Central Listing TP39 FIRQ_G64 TP40 CLK_16 MHz TP41 CLK_8 MHz TP42 NMI_G64 TP43 IRQ_G64 TP44 to TP109 PLCC Outputs TP110 Vcc TP111 Gnd TP112 Alim SAVV 5 V ...

Page 245: ...he Generator CPU Board 400PL3 XJ1 To the XJ9 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 power supply 12 V 5 V XJ2 To the XJ10 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 control signals XJ3 Not Applicable XJ4 To ADS Workstation RS 232 communications link XJ5 Not Applicable XJ6 To PL104 optical fiber serial link Rx XJ7 To PL104 optical fiber serial link Tx XP1 XP2 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 D...

Page 246: ...ed e g either during an X ray exposure or via the use of the proprietary maintenance menu OFF when no polarization is applied DS4 Heater Working Yellow ON when current is applied to the heater e g either during a preparation and an X ray exposure or via the use of the proprietary maintenance menu OFF when no current is applied to the heater DS5 Track 2 Track 2 Rh Yellow ON when the Rh track from t...

Page 247: ...Board 400PL1 If the DS11 LED on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 is ON change the cable between the XJ9 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 and the XJ1 connector on the Generator Interface Board 400PL2 If the DS11 LED on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 is OFF follow the appropriate trou ble shooting steps for that LED as described in Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 LEDs on page 26...

Page 248: ...ase check the status of the green DS9 LED on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 If the DS9 LED on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 is ON change the cable between the XJ9 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 and the XJ1 connector on the Generator Interface Board 400PL2 If the DS9 LED on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 is OFF follow the appropriate trou ble shooting steps for that LE...

Page 249: ...Empty TP8 Pose_Rx X ray Exposure TP9 Marche_Chauf Heater Working TP10 Piste_2 Track 2 TP11 mA_Max Maximum mA TP12 kV_INF_5_B TP13 Strobe_kV_A TP14 SRI_kV_A TP15 Load_kV_A TP16 Load_kV_B TP17 Voyant_Pose_A Exposure Warning A TP18 0V_Pupitre X ray Console 0V TP19 Button Prepare TP20 mA_A TP21 Rx TP22 Rx TP23 Tx TP24 Frein Brake TP25 Alim_Puis_OK Power Supply OK TP26 Secu_RatTrap TP27 Pres_Supply Sup...

Page 250: ...l TP43 kV_Max Maiximum kV TP44 Arret_Def_Alim Stop_Def_Supply TP45 Voyant_Pose_B Exposure Warning B TP46 Bouton_Graphie Rx Pose Button TP47 Tx TP49 kV_INF_S_A TP49 X ray ON X ray ON TP50 X ray Autor X ray Autorization TP51 Synchro_BRAS Arm Sync TP52 Trigger 1 Preperation TP53 Trigger 2 Exposure TP54 Pres_Acceleration TP55 Pres_Lanc_Actiif PT1 Sortie_DAC Exit DAC PT2 Vcc Vcc PT3 12 V 12 V PT4 0 V 0...

Page 251: ...2 DS4 DS5 DS6 DS8 DS10 DS12 DS13 F1 DS9 DS11 F2 F3 TP88 TP86 TP78 TP83 TP87 TP90 TP89 GND5 TP71 TP63 TP51 TP60 GND3 TP67 TP58 TP56 DS7 TP53 TP52 TP44 TP46 TP79 TP80 TP75 TP68 TP76 TP72 TP66 TP64 TP85 TP84 TP82 TP81 TP77 TP73 TP69 TP65 TP70 TP74 TP62 GND4 TP59 TP57 TP55 TP54 TP49 TP45 TP47 TP48 TP50 TP51 GND1 TP28 TP7 TP5 TP4 TP3 TP8 TP25 TP27 TP29 TP31 TP26 TP24 TP23 TP9 TP6 TP22 TP32 TP34 TP36 TP...

Page 252: ... To the HV Tank heater bias XJ5 To the XJ1 connector on the kVmA Board HV Tank control XJ6 To XJ1 the connector on the Anode Starter Board 12 V control signals XJ7 To the XJ1 connector on the Inverter Board control signals XJ8 From X ray Console Cable 27 V Rx Tx signal PREP and GRAPHIE signals XJ9 To the XJ1 connector on the Generator Interface Board 400PL2 power supply 12 V 5 V XJ10 To the XJ2 co...

Page 253: ...nt a false command OFF when the filament is operating properly DS4 Over Intensity on Stator Red Normal status OFF ON when the stator motor power is over intense Due a short circuit in the stator motor or a problem at the Anode Starter board OFF when the stator motor is operating properly DS5 Rotation Movement Present Yellow Normal status ON ON at the start of an exposure preparation signal ing rot...

Page 254: ... broken In this case check the cable from the HV Tank going to the XJ4 connec tor or HV Tank itself OFF when the polarization circuit on the Generator Command board is functioning correctly DS9 12 V Present Green Normal status ON ON when the 12 V supply voltage is OK OFF when the 12 V supply voltage is defective In this case either the fuse F3 has blown the cable going from the BT Power Supply 400...

Page 255: ...figuration on page 475 for more information DS12 Security Re obtainable Red Normal status OFF ON when the security signal has been triggered by kV max Chute kV mA max or Iond max OFF when there is no security issue DS13 Security Blocked Red Normal status OFF ON when the security signal has been triggered by DEF alim or DEF TRAD OFF when there is no security issue Jumper Function JP1 Defines lamp b...

Page 256: ...regul_ch TP8 Measure_Phases TP9 Reset ADR TP10 C_T6 Stator Command Signals TP11 B_T6 TP12 C_T5 TP13 B_T5 TP14 C_T4 TP15 B_T4 TP16 C_T3 TP17 B_T3 TP18 C_T2 TP19 B_T2 TP20 C_T1 TP21 B_T1 TP22 Output B13 6 TP23 Clock B6 TP24 SEL_LC TP25 Auto_Regul_Ch TP26 Measure_Phase_TTL TP27 Output_B16 ICH_OND TP28 Fil_Coupé Filament Cut TP29 Surcharge_Detectee Overload Detected in Filament TP30 Marche_Chauffage d...

Page 257: ...m TP39 125 kHz LC Clock 125 kHz TP40 Reset_Detect TP41 Reset B21 1 TP42 Under Int saved LC TP43 Brake LC TP44 Presence_Rotation Rotation Presence TP45 H500 clock TP46 Vcc 5 V TP47 H62_5K clock Clock 62 5 kHz TP49 H250K clock Clock 250 kHz TP49 H4M clock Clock 4 MHz TP50 H2M clock Clock 2 MHz TP51 Presence_Polarisation Polarization Presence TP52 12 V BT Supply ...

Page 258: ...witches fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Central Listing 2 4 Inverter Board 300PL1 XJ1 X7 PT5 X10 X1 X6 X2 X4 X3 X9 X5 X8 PT4 PT2 PT3 PT1 X11 X12 X14 X13 X15 X16 ST1 ST2 L1 ...

Page 259: ... 4 1 Inverter Board 300PL1 Connectors Connector Function XJ1 To the XJ7 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 Prep Exposure thyristor command X1 0V 600VR X2 Not Applicable X3 415 V Monophase 1 X4 415 V Monophase 2 X5 600VR X6 300VR X7 600VF X8 HF2 X9 HF1 X10 0V 600VF X11 Thermal Switch 1 X12 Thermal Switch 2 X13 Gate TH1 X14 K TH1 X15 Gate TH2 X16 K TH2 ...

Page 260: ... the LEDs on the Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 see Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 LEDs on page 264 If the states of any of the LEDs are abnormal fix the problem as described in Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 LEDs on page 264 If the states of all the LEDs are normal check with a multimeter that the voltage between the X3 and X4 connectors on the Inverter Board 300PL1 is at 415 V If the voltage ...

Page 261: ...300PL2 2 5 1 Anode Starter Board 300PL2 Connectors Connector Function XJ1 To the XJ6 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 control signals XJ2 To Stator U V W power phases XJ3 To the XJ5 connector on the Supply Command Board 200PL2 250 V power supply XJ1 XJ2 XJ3 PT23 PT22 PT25 PT18 PT1 PT2 PT3 PT4 PT5 PT6 PT7 PT8 PT9 PT10 PT11 PT13 PT12 PT17 PT24 PT21 PT20 PT19 PT15 PT16 PT14 ...

Page 262: ...PT4 Bloc T2 PT5 T3 Command PT6 Block T3 PT7 T4 Command PT8 12 V Coupé 12 V Cut PT9 Bloc T4 Command Signals PT10 T5 Command PT11 Bloc T5 PT12 Bloc T6 PT13 T6 Command PT14 Phase 1 Phase 1 Output PT15 Phase 2 Phase 2 Output PT16 Phase 3 Phase 3 Output PT17 S T2 T4 T6 PT18 SUR_I_B Overload Current 1 PT19 0V Phase 1 0V Phase 1 PT20 Measure Phase 1 Measure Phase1 PT21 Measure Phase 3 Measure Phase 3 PT2...

Page 263: ... no 263 Chapter 3 Indicators and Switches fm 2 6 Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 XJ4 XJ5 XJ6 XJ3 XJ2 XJ1 XJ7 XJ8 DE4 DE1 DE5 DE6 DE7 DE3 DE2 N2 N1 F2 F3 F1 DE8 DE9 PT2 PT1 PT3 PT4 PT6 PT7 PT5 PT8 PT9 PT10 PT13 PT18 PT20 PT17 PT16 PT11 0VE PT14 PT12 PT15 PT19 SW2 SW1 XJ14 XJ11 XJ13_2 XJ13_1 XJ12_1 XJ12_2 P1 P2 XJ10 IN2 ...

Page 264: ...w seconds after the X ray Console ON button is pressed while the DC Bus reaches 30 V If permanently ON there is a problem with the DC Bus reaching 30 V In this case proceed as follows Check the status of the DC Bus indicated by yel low DE5 LED If the DE5 LED is ON there is a problem with the Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 and you must change it If the DE5 LED is OFF there is a problem with the 60...

Page 265: ...een the Power Line Filter and the Mains Distri bution Board 200PL1 is closed OFF when there is a problem and no 12 V is pres ent In this case proceed as follows Check the fuse F1 If the fuse F1 is OK check the fuses of the mains input If the fuses of the mains input are OK check the cabling arriving on the XJ1 and XJ3 connectors If the cabling is OK there is a problem with the transformer TR2 or R...

Page 266: ...e of DE5 If DE5 is ON then follow the appropriate trouble shooting described for when DE5 is ON If DE5 is OFF check the state of DE7 If DE5 OK use a multimeter to check the voltage on the XJ9 connector The cause of the anomaly comes from the Inverter Board 300PL1 configu ration of the Transformer or the Transformer itself If the voltage tension measured does not corre spond with the indication of ...

Page 267: ...t are OK check the cabling arriving on the XJ1 and XJ3 connectors If the cabling is OK there is a problem with the transformer TR2 or RT4 Change the Mains Distri bution Board 200PL1 DE9 8 V VE Green Normal status ON ON when 8 V is present i e when the S1 switch between the Power Line Filter and the Mains Distri bution Board 200PL1 is closed OFF when there is a problem and no 8 V is pres ent In thi...

Page 268: ...se check the status of the N2 neon light N2 K1 under tension Orange Normal status ON ON when the K1 contact is under tension OFF when the K1 contact is not under tension In this case proceed as follows Check the X2 relay on the Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 If the X2 relay is okay check that the tension selector SEL is on the correct value If the X2 relay and the tension selector are OK check th...

Page 269: ...nfo DC Bus 700 V PT5 E_Sup_EPRE Info DC Bus 250 V PT6 E_Sup_30V Info DC Bus 30 V PT7 E_Sup_Emin Info DC Bus 400 V PT8 VE VE 8 V PT9 VE VE 8 V PT10 Ref 400 V Reference 400 V Min threshold PT11 Ref 250 V Reference 250 V Precharge PT12 0 V 0 VE 0 V PT13 MES_E_B 0 V DC Bus Measure 1 PT14 8 V VE 8 V internal for 200PL1 PT15 8 V VE 8 V internal for 200PL1 PT16 Ref 30 V Reference 30 V DC Bus Detection PT...

Page 270: ...rol data signals XJ5 To the XJ2 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 0 250 V DC To the CN1 connector on the BT Power Supply 0 250 V DC To the XJ3 connector on the Anode Starter Board 300PL2 0 250 V DC XJ6 27 V on the C1 capacitor in the Generator XJ7 0 V on the C1 capacitor in the Generator XJ8 Thermostat 27 V XJ9 To auto transformer 250 V XJ10 To emergency stop button on Gantry and the...

Page 271: ...onnector on the Mains Dis tribution Board If the cable is OK check the fuses at the mains supply If the fuses at the mains supply are OK change the Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 DE2 Waiting for Power On Red Normal status OFF ON when the DC Bus is below a level of 30 V Usu ally ON for a few seconds after the X ray Console ON button is pressed while the DC Bus reaches 30 V If permanently ON there ...

Page 272: ... the Generator Transformer is present OFF when 250 V supply from the Generator Trans former is not present In this case proceed as fol lows Check the F6 fuse and change if necessary Check the status of the N1 and N2 neon lights on the Mains Distribution Board 200PL1 If N1 and N2 are ON there is a problem with either the Generator Transformer or the cabling of the Generator Transformer Check the ca...

Page 273: ... Switch Command PT7 MST Power ON PT8 Teta_Sup_Tmax Overtemperature PT9 RAZ 3 s Reset Counter B11 PT10 Demande MST Power ON Request PT11 T_Sup_3S Delay 3 s PT12 7 63 Hz 7 63 Hz Clock PT13 Echauffement Clock Counter B8 PT14 Auto MST Automatic Power ON Signal PT15 B13 Output B13 Counter Outpuy PT16 15 6 kHz Clock 15 6 kHz Clock PT17 Contacteur K1 Switch Command PT18 VLC 12 V 12 V PT19 Cde Precharge P...

Page 274: ...16 8EN Central Listing 2 8 Relay Board 200PL4 2 8 1 Relay Board 200PL4 Connectors Connector Function XJ1 X ray Room Lamp Indicator Cable Senographe System ON XJ2 X ray Room Lamp Indicator Cable X ray ON XJ3 X ray Room Lamp Indicator Cable Room Door XJ4 To the XJ4 connector on the Supply Command Board 200PL2 control signals XJ1 XJ2 XJ3 XJ4 ...

Page 275: ...700PL1 Connectors Connector Function XJ1 To XJ5 connector on Generator Command Board 400PL1 HV Tank control XJ2 To HV Tank mA feedback XJ3 To HV Tank kV measure XJ4 Test 62 kV testing input XJ4 XJ3 XJ2 XJ1 TP1 TP4 TP6 TP12 TP11 TP17 TP19 TP18 TP15 TP20 TP24 TP25 TP27 TP26 TP30 TP31 TP22 TP16 TP2 TP3 TP21 TP10 TP7 TP5 TP8 TP9 TP13 TP14 TP28 TP29 TP23 DS3 DS2 DS1 SW1 SW2 P5 P2 P3 P1 MES_MA_NG MES_MA...

Page 276: ...ted by its green DS9 LED If the DS9 LED is ON change the cable between the XJ1 connector on the kVmA Board and the XJ5 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 If the problem persists change the HV Tank DS2 15 V Present Green Normal status ON ON when the 15 V from the Generator Command Board 400PL1 is present OFF when there is a problem with the 15 V from the Generator Command Board 400PL1 ...

Page 277: ... status of the 12 V on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 indicated by its green DS11 LED If the DS11 LED is ON change the cable between the XJ1 connector on the kVmA Board and the XJ5 connector on the Generator Command Board 400PL1 If the DS11 LED is OFF check whether the 12 V returns when you disconnect the cable between the XJ1 connector on the kVmA Board and the XJ5 connector on the Generator ...

Page 278: ...K 0V TP2 0 V M 0V TP3 Retour_MA mA feedback or return TP4 Vcc Vcc 5 V TP5 Chute_kV kV Minimum Threshold TP6 10 V TP7 Measure_kV TP8 kV_Ref kV Reference TP9 E kV TP10 kV_Ref_Auto kV Reference Automatic TP11 kV_Ref_Manuel kV Reference Manual TP12 Init 1 TP13 kV 2 TP14 kV 1 TP15 Init 2 TP16 Measure mA TP17 N C TP18 N C TP19 N C TP20 Auto Regul TP21 kV 5 kV at 5 kV TP22 Ref_mA_Max TP23 12V_Drivers TP2...

Page 279: ... when power is applied to the component the left hand side push button is illuminated green and the right hand side light is not illuminated when power is not applied to the component the right hand side light is illuminated yellow indicating that the component is in standby and the left hand side push button is not illuminated The UPS indicator light is off during normal operation when the system...

Page 280: ...of the power to each of the compo nent defaults as indicated below The table above assumes that the mains AC power supply is connected to the Generator and the Gen erator MDR breakers are switched on Push button Component controlled Default status when X ray Console ON button sup plies power to the system Default status when X ray Console OFF button cuts power to the system Conditioner Conditioner...

Page 281: ...50 V Line Filter XP4 connector on Conditioner Cab inet and XJ2 connector on Gantry bulkhead J5 AC supply to J1 connector on Detector Power Supply via XP5 connector on Conditioner Cabinet J6 220 V to the IN connector on the Low Voltage Power Supply Board J7 12 V from the OUT connector on the Low Voltage Power Supply Board J8 FFDM Mains Distribution connection to XJ11 connector on Generator Interfac...

Page 282: ... status ON ON when the 230 V Supply from the Secondary Transformer is present OFF when there is a problem with 230 V Supply from the Secondary Transformer DS4 230 V DPS APS_SPS Clear Normal status ON ON when the 230 V AC supply to the Detector Power Supply is present OFF when there is a problem with the 230 V AC supply to the Detector Power Supply DS5 Power ON ADS Orange Normal status ON OFF ON wh...

Page 283: ... ON ON when the standby 12 V from the Low Voltage Power Supply Board is present OFF when there is a problem with the standby 12 V from the Low Voltage Power Supply board In this case proceed as follows Check the F3 and F5 fuses on the Mains Distribu tion Assembly and change them if necessary If F3 F5 fuses are OK check the F2 fuse on the Low Voltage Power Supply Board and change if necessary If th...

Page 284: ...Power button it is powered off by the ADS shutdown process TP2 OFF Open Conditioner auto power off enabled If the TP2 jumper is OFF as required the Conditioner is always ON even when the Generator is powered OFF TP3 ON Closed DPS auto power off enabled If TP3 is ON as required the DPS is switched OFF by system Fuse Specification PN Function F1 250 Vac 10 A Delay 99183979 Power Supply XP4 to Contro...

Page 285: ...Low Voltage Power Supply Connectors 3 2 2 Low Voltage Power Supply Fuses Connector Function IN 240 V Supply from Primary Transformer OUT 240 V Supply to Conditioner Fuse Specification PN Function F1 220 Vdc 2 5 A Fast N A AC input LVPS protection Note The F1 Fuse on the Low Voltage Power Supply cannot be changed If the F1 fuse is faulty you must change the Low Voltage Power Supply Board F1 OUT IN ...

Page 286: ... A 2385072 16 8EN Central Listing 4 GANTRY BOARD INDICATORS AND FUSES 4 1 DC Boards DS10 DS9 J22 J4 J5 J16 J17 J3 J14 J18 J19 J11 J1 J9 U10 K1 J10 J12 J7 J8 DS7 DS8 DS11 DS12 DS1 DS2 DS3 DS4 DS5 DS6 J15 DS13 DS14 J21 J23 J6 J2 J13 Board Lift DC PL201 see component index page 158 Board Rotation PL202 see component index page 158 ...

Page 287: ... Green ON when the rotation brake is inactive rotation movement is enabled OFF when the rotation brake is active rotation movement is not enabled DS6 Clutch Command does not exist for lift board Green ON when the clutch is inactive Angulation move ment is enabled OFF when the clutch is active Angulation move ment is not enabled DS7 Microcontroller activity Green Blink fast node not initialized Bli...

Page 288: ... enabled OFF when the valid line is inactive movement is not enabled DS7 Compression Brake Actived does not exist for tilt board Green ON when the rotation brake is inactive rotation move ment is enabled OFF when the rotation brake is active rotation move ment is not enabled DS8 RX CAN Yellow ON when CAN data or command received OFF when no CAN data or command received DS9 3 3 V Green ON when the ...

Page 289: ...Board PL303 and Tilt Board PL401 Fuses Fuse Specification PN Function F1 60 Vac 0 3 A CMS Resettable 5314541 5 Resettable thermal protection 5V power supply for Paddle Holder Board Compression Paddle recognizing F2 60 Vac 0 3 A Resettable 2214421 Resettable thermal protection 5V power supply for Key Pads F3 Resettable thermal protection 5V power supply for Compression coder and for Tilt coder ...

Page 290: ... when the PDU board is in programming mode Bot tom two pins closed turn 48 V off Top two pins closed turn 48 V on Open enables normal PDU board operation where the 48 V is controlled by the Senographe system This jumper must always be open LED Function Color Behavior DS1 DMR On Green ON when the Generator is ON OFF when the Generator is OFF DS2 48 V Green ON when 48 V DC supply voltage is OK OFF w...

Page 291: ... Yellow ON when the power is inhibited i e bottom two pins of jumper J22 are closed or when PDU turns off the 48 V power OFF when the power is not inhibited i e the jumper J22 is open or when PDU turns on the 48 V power Note Normal operation is that power is not inhib ited i e the jumper J22 is open and the LED is OFF DS14 48 V DC ON OFF Safety indicator Red If DS13 is wrong or insertion is wrong ...

Page 292: ...relay 1 is idle DS23 Relay 2 Active Yellow ON when relay 2 is active OFF when relay 2 is idle DS24 Reset PDU Board Red ON while the PDU board is being reset OFF when the PDU board is functioning normally DS25 Watchdog Yellow ON when the watchdog is alive OFF when the watchdog is no longer refreshed or dead DS26 AC Power ON Green ON when the 220 V AC supply is okay OFF when the 220 V AC supply is d...

Page 293: ...onfigured Red On when the FPGA is not configured The board is faulty and needs replacing OFF when the FPGA is configured and the board is oper ating correctly DS7 Not used Green Not used debug only DS8 Ethernet RX Green ON when the Interface board receives Ethernet data OFF when the Interface board receives no Ethernet data DS9 Not used Green Not used debug only DS10 X Ray On Yellow ON when X Rays...

Page 294: ...n n a DS7 Microcontroller Heartbeat Green Blinks once every second when the Bucky board is okay Blinks more than once a second or is constantly ON or constantly OFF when the bucky board is faulty DS8 Microcontroller Debug Green n a DS9 5 V Green ON when the 5 V supply voltage is OK OFF when the 5 V supply voltage is defective DS10 3 3 V logic Green ON when the 3 3 V supply voltage is OK OFF when t...

Page 295: ...V supply voltage is defective DS2 Lamp ON Green ON when the Collimator Lamp is on OFF when the Collimator Lamp is off DS3 2 5 V Green ON when the 2 5 V supply voltage is OK OFF when the 2 5 V supply voltage is defective DS4 5 V Green ON when the 5 V supply voltage is OK OFF when the 5 V supply voltage is defec tive DS5 Init done Green ON or BLINKING when the Collimator Control board is initializin...

Page 296: ...en the 3 3 V supply voltage is defective DS7 Error indicators Not used for future application Red Error indicators Not used for future application DS8 Red DS9 Red DS10 Red Jumper Test Point Function TP1 Jumper present Lamp ON test Jumper absent Normal setting TP2 Trim not used TP3 Gnd 24 V TP4 24 V TP5 Trim not used TP6 Gnd 12 V TP7 12 V Board Collimator DC DC PL402 see component index page 157 J5...

Page 297: ...e no 297 Chapter 3 Indicators and Switches fm 5 GANTRY MPCB SWITCHES AND FUSES 5 1 MPCB Fuses Fuse Specification PN Function F1 600 Vac 20 A Fast 2387747 F2 PDU Board PL101 for fuses etc see PDU Board PL101 on page 290 Stop Motion button Left one either side of column F1 F2 Fuse 600 Vac 20 A Fast Circuit Breaker 10 A ...

Page 298: ...Chapter 3 Page no 298 Indicators and Switches fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Central Listing This page is blank ...

Page 299: ... PS101 1 4 W005 Earth Cable for AC DC Converter Module MPCB box to AC DC Converter Module 1 5 W006 Earth Cable for Bulkhead Cover MPCB box to bulkhead cover 1 6 W101 SYS Bus 1 PDU Board to Interface Board Connector B20B PHDSS 20 points two in parallel PDU Board PL101 J8 to Interface Board PL104 J2 Pin N Signal Name Signal description J2 1 H Expose Enable RT CAN Diff 5 2 5V J2 2 L Expose Enable RT ...

Page 300: ...DC Module Board PS101 J137 to EMC filter E101 P N 1 10 W107 AC DC Databus AC DC Module Board PS101 J138 to PDU Board PL101 J3 J2 12 L Power On Command reserved J2 13 H Motion Enable RT CAN Diff 5 2 5V J2 14 L Motion Enable RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V J2 15 Command CAN Electric CAN Ground J2 16 P Power supply 12 V J2 17 H CAN Network CAN Diff 5 2 5V J2 18 L CAN Network CAN Diff 2 5 0V J2 19 H Spare RT CAN D...

Page 301: ...unt resistor and cable assembly 1 14 W111 48 V DC Cable See W109 W111 W113 Shunt Cables on page 301 1 15 W112 48 V DC Cable 4 EMC filter E102 N to Terminal Block ST102 X1 1 16 W113 48 V DC Cable See W109 W111 W113 Shunt Cables on page 301 AC DC PS101 W109 Shunt R101 R 4 7kOhm 0 5W 5 W111 W113 J1 1 2 PDU PL101 J4 Board W109 48 V DC connects shunt resistor R101 to the EMC filter E102 W111 48 V DC co...

Page 302: ... 1 18 W116 PL104 Power See W114 W116 W209 PDU Board J7 Connections on page 302 1 19 W117 Terminal Block Interconnection Terminal block ST102 from F1 2 to F2 2 1 20 W119 Serial Link TX Generator to Interface Board Generator Interface J7 to Interface Board PL104 J9 Pin no Level Pin no PL 104 J1 1 48 V PL 101 J7 5 PL 104 J1 2 GND PL 101 J7 11 Pin no Functions Pin no PL 201 J2 1 48 Volts max 100 mA PL...

Page 303: ...1 25 W125 12 V DC Supply to PDU Board and Generator Shutdown Signal PDU Board PL101 J2 to Generator If the error 152 001 12VDC Generator voltage off occurs there may be an issue with the W125 Cable PDU Board or the Generator Supply Command board For more information refer to JC DIAG A1501 12V DC Genera tor Voltage Off on page 971 Pin no on PL101 Functions Location on Generator PL 101 J2 1 HV Suppl...

Page 304: ...er Lift Board PL201 J4 to opto detector S201 1 29 W202 Lift Optical Fork Connect Lower Lift Board PL201 J5 to opto detector S202 1 30 W203 Lift Potentiometer Lift Board PL201 J11 to potentiometer R201 1 31 W204 LCD Connect Lift Board PL201 J15 to LCD DS201 Designation Type Level Pin N VCC_Led_1 VCC 5 V J4 1 GND Ground 0 V J4 2 Fork_Opt_Out_ 1 Open coll 0 5 V J4 3 GND Ground 0 V J4 4 Designation Ty...

Page 305: ...ield J9 2 GND Blue J9 3 A Channel Brown J9 4 A Channel Green J9 5 B Channel Purple J9 6 B Channel White J9 7 C Channel Yellow J9 8 C Channel PIN PL104 Designation Type Level PIN PL201 PL104 J3 1 H CAN Network CAN Diff 5 2 5V PL201 J3 1 PL104 J3 2 L CAN Network CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL201 J3 2 PL104 J3 3 GND Ground 0 V PL201 J3 3 PL104 J3 4 H RT line 1 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V PL201 J3 4 PL104 J3 5 L RT line ...

Page 306: ... Connections on page 302 1 36 W210 48 V DC HP Lift Board PL201 J1 to MPCB Terminal 1 ST102 1 37 W211 48 V DC HP between Boards Lift Board PL201 J12 to Rotation Board PL202 J1 1 38 W212 48 V DC LP1 Lift Board PL201 J13 to Rotation Board PL202 J2 N Pin Functions J1 1 48 Volts J1 2 0 Volt N Pin Functions J12 1 0 Volt J12 2 48 Volts max 15 A avg 30 A 3 s N Pin Functions J13 1 0 Volt J13 2 48 Volts max...

Page 307: ...1 to Rotation Board PL202 J7 PIN PL202 Designation Type Level PIN PL201 PL202 J3 1 H CAN Network CAN Diff 5 2 5V PL201 J14 1 PL202 J3 2 L CAN Network CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL201 J14 2 PL202 J3 3 GND Ground 0 V PL201 J14 3 PL202 J3 4 H RT line 1 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V PL201 J14 4 PL202 J3 5 L RT line 1 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL201 J14 5 PL202 J3 6 Stop motion RT 0 5 V PL201 J14 6 PL202 J3 7 H RT line 2 RT CAN D...

Page 308: ...W221 Clutch Cable See W218 1 47 W222 Footswitch Cable See W207 1 48 W301 Compression Stepper Motor Stepper Motor M301 to Compression Board PL303 J3 Designation Type Level Pin N VCC VCC 5 V J11 1 Pot analog 0 5 V J11 2 GND Ground 0 V J11 3 Color ITEM Red DC 5 V Orange GND Yellow NC Brown NC Blue A Channel Green A Channel Gray B Channel Violet B Channel Tbd C Channel White C Channel Designation Type...

Page 309: ...VCC 5 V J4 1 GND 0V Ground J4 2 A Channel TTL 0 5 V J4 5 A Channel TTL 0 5 V J4 6 B Channel TTL 0 5 V J4 7 B Channel TTL 0 5 V J4 8 C Channel TTL 0 5 V J4 9 C Channel TTL 0 5 V J4 10 Designation Type Level Pin N VCC VCC 5 V J6 1 Pot Analog 0 5 V J6 2 GND Ground 0 V J6 3 Designation Level Pin N VCC 5 V J10 1 GND 0 V J10 2 Force_Sensor Analog J10 3 Paddles bit 0 LSB Open collector J10 4 Paddles bit ...

Page 310: ...speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 7 Lift down High speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 6 Lift down High speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 8 Rotation left slow speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 9 Rotation left slow speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 10 Rotation left high speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 11 Rotation left high speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 12 Rotation right slow speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 13 Rotation right slow sp...

Page 311: ... N Designation Level Pin N J2 1 CAN Diff 5 2 5 V J6 1 J2 2 CAN Diff 2 5 0 V J6 2 J2 3 Ground 0 V J6 3 J2 4 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V J6 4 J2 5 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0 V J6 5 J2 6 RT 0 V J6 6 J2 7 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V J6 7 J2 8 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0 V J6 8 J2 9 RT 0 5 V J6 9 J2 10 Ground 0 V J6 10 J2 11 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V J6 11 J2 12 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0 V J6 12 Color Designation Type Level Pin N Green Red VCC_48 VCC...

Page 312: ...L302 J2 PL301 J3 7 H RT line 2 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V PL302 J1 7 PL301 J3 8 L RT line 2 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL302 J1 8 PL301 J3 9 Not used PL301 J3 10 GND Ground 0 V PL302 J1 10 PL301 J3 11 Not used PL301 J3 12 Not used Designation Type Level PIN OUT_1A Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 1 OUT_1B Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 2 OUT_2A Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 3 OUT_2B Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 4 PIN PL303 Designation Colour PIN ...

Page 313: ... Xray On RT 0 5 V J5 12 P Power On RT 0 5 V J5 13 H Motion Enable RT 0 5 V J5 14 Command CAN Electric CAN 0 V CAN Gnd J5 15 H CAN Network CAN Diff 5 2 5V J5 16 H Spare N A N A J5 17 NC N A N A J5 18 NC N A N A J5 19 NC N A N A J5 20 L CAN Bus Column CAN Diff 2 5 0 V J5 21 Stop Motion Line Column RT 0 5 V J5 22 H CAN RT1 Column RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V J5 23 L CAN RT2 Column RT CAN Diff 2 5 0 V J5 24 GN...

Page 314: ...ompression Trolley 1 65 W318 Compression Block Connect Manual Brake B301 to Paddle Detect Board PL304 Green Blue Green Red 1 66 W319 Force Sensor Force Sensor B302 to Paddle Detect Board PL304 1 67 W320 Earth Cable for Paddle Holder Paddle Holder PL304 to Ground 1 68 W401 48v dc LP2 Arm Distribution Board PL301 J8 to Collimator DC DC PL402 J5 1 69 W402 Thermoswitch Connect N Pin Functions N Pin J6...

Page 315: ...L401 J12 to Optical fork S401 1 73 W406 Fan Connect Tilt Board PL401 J11 to Fan V401 Designation Level Pin N Power supply 15 V J1a 2 secu_sheath 15 V or 0 V failure J1a 1 Designation Type Level Pin N OUT_1A Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 1 OUT_1B Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 2 OUT_2A Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 3 OUT_2B Hbridge 0 48 Volts J3 4 Designation Type Level Pin N VCC_Led_1 VCC 5 V J12 1 GND Ground 0 V J12 2 Fo...

Page 316: ...B Contact to gnd J7 J8 7 Lift down High speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 6 Lift down High speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 8 Rotation left slow speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 9 Rotation left slow speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 10 Rotation left high speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 11 Rotation left high speed_B Contact to gnd J7 J8 12 Rotation right slow speed_A Contact to gnd J7 J8 13 Rotation right slow speed_B ...

Page 317: ...V J7 2 Spare J7 3 0 Power supply Ground J7 4 H Expose Command RT CAN Diff 5 2 5V J7 5 L Expose Command RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V J7 6 Ground Ground J7 7 P Reset Command RT 0 5V J7 8 H Xray On RT CAN Diff 5 2 5V J7 9 L Xray On RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V J7 10 P Power On Command reserved J7 11 L Power On Command reserved J7 12 H Motion Enable RT CAN Diff 5 2 5V J7 13 L Motion Enable RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V J7 14 Common...

Page 318: ... PL401 J9 2 L CAN Network CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL301 J9 2 PL401 J9 3 GND Ground 0 V PL301 J9 3 PL401 J9 4 H RT line 1 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V PL301 J9 4 PL401 J9 5 L RT line 1 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL301 J9 5 PL401 J9 6 Stop motion RT 0 5 V PL301 J9 6 PL401 J9 7 H RT line 2 RT CAN Diff 5 2 5 V PL301 J9 7 PL401 J9 8 L RT line 2 RT CAN Diff 2 5 0V PL301 J9 8 PL401 J9 9 Reset line RT 0 5 V PL301 J9 9 PL401 J9 10...

Page 319: ...to J8 10 Left blade pins J8 11 to J8 20 Rear blade pins J8 21 to J8 30 Right blade pins J8 31 to J8 40 Filter wheel pins J8 41 to J8 50 1 82 W502 Lamp Cable 2 From Lamp Cable 3 2377082 3 to Light Assembly 1 83 W503 Lamp Cable 3 From DC DC board PL402 J5 to Lamp Cable 2 2377082 2 Designation Type Level Pin N 1S2 N C N C J8 x1 1S4 Open coll optical sensor 0 5V J8 x2 VCC VCC 5 V J8 x3 GND Ground 0 V ...

Page 320: ...cal Sensor Connect Filter Wheel optical sensor S5 to Interconnection board S5 1 86 W506 Rectangular Blade DC Motor Connect Four cables used to connect the rectangular blade DC motor connectors M1 through M4 to the Inter connection board connectors M1 through M4 board PI 2376693 Connectors Mx in the table below correspond to the following Front blade M1 Left blade M2 Rear blade M3 Right blade M4 De...

Page 321: ... through M4 board PI 2408939 Connectors Mx in the table below correspond to the following Front blade M1 Left blade M2 Rear blade M3 Right blade M4 1 89 W509 Filter Wheel DC Motor Connect Maxon Filter Wheel DC motor M5 to Interconnection board PI 2408939 M5 Designation Level Pin No Motor 0 24 V M5 1 Motor 0 24 V M5 2 GND 0 V M5 3 VCC 5 V M5 4 Channel B 0 5 V M5 5 Channel A 0 5 V M5 6 Designation L...

Page 322: ...0 PL2 XJ10 2 5 Cable 2226623 AWS UPS Generator Link SB150 UPS to Gantry Bulkhead Area then Bulkhead Area to Generator Interface 400 PL2 XJ10 2 6 Cable 2387162 ADS and UPS to Generator Mid connector to UPS serial I O UPS Serial End connector to AWS serial I O SB150 Serial A 2 7 Cable 2240227 or 2244615 IDC COM and Serial to Generator 50 pin connector to IDC serial I O 9 pin connector IDC COM 2 2 8 ...

Page 323: ...res Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements Page no 323 Chapter 4 Chap Pre Requirements fm CHAPTER 4 PRE INSTALLATION SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS The following pages give information required for the planning and preparation of a Senographe system installation ...

Page 324: ... storage requirements assume that the all the equipment remains in its packaging including the protection for the detector 1 3 2 Before installation short term For short term storage less than 5 days refer to the storage requirements table below 1 3 3 Before installation long term For long term storage more than 5 days it is recommended that the detector assembly is kept in an area with relatively...

Page 325: ...ographe system via the Control Sta tion in that case the Conditioner remains switched on and the environment must be within the following limits 1 5 2 Shutdown with Conditioner off During evenings and weekends some Operators shutdown the Senographe system via the circuit breaker on the wall in that case the Conditioner is switched off and the environment must be within the following limits 1 5 3 A...

Page 326: ... you must ensure that you remove all of the coolant from the detector internal tubes If the detector is removed from the system and stored again in its original packaging it can still con tain traces of coolant In this case the coolant is the limiting factor in the detector storage require ments It is recommended that the detector is stored between 10 C 50ºF and 40 C 104ºF The temperature is allow...

Page 327: ... for use in the specified electromagnetic environment The purchaser or Operator of a Senographe system must ensure that it is used in an electromagnetic environment as described below Emissions Test Compliance Electromagnetic Environment Radio Frequency Emissions CISPR11 Group1 Class A limits The Senographe is primarily intended for use in non domes tic environments and not connected directly to t...

Page 328: ...nes 1 kV for input output lines Mains power quality is that of a typical commercial and or hos pital environment Surge IEC 61000 4 5 1 kV differen tial mode 2 kV common mode 1 kV differen tial mode 2 kV common mode Mains power quality is that of a typical commercial and or hos pital environment Voltage dips short interrup tions and volt age variations on power sup ply input lines IEC 61000 4 11 0 ...

Page 329: ...flicker If this occurs the monitor can be removed from the vicinity of the electrical field source to improve image qual ity E4 0 3 V m At this disturbance level the system is fully operational Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters must be less than the compliance level in each frequency range At frequencies between 150 kHz to 80 MHz field strengths must be less than V2 V m Note Field strengt...

Page 330: ...mitter watts DISTANCE meters DISTANCE meters DISTANCE meters DISTANCE meters 10 mW 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 3 100 mW 3 8 3 8 3 8 7 3 1 12 12 12 23 10 38 38 38 73 100 120 120 120 230 For transmitters rated at a power not listed above the recommended separation distance d in meters can be estimated using the equation in the corresponding column Where P is the power rating of the transmitter in watts W accordin...

Page 331: ... All components accessories subsystems and systems which are electrically connected to the Senographe must have AC power supplied by the same power distribution panel and line Note You can not connect together different electrical devices and supply them by different AC power distribution lines In order to avoid interference all components and accessories connected to the Senographe must be connec...

Page 332: ... of chairs for tall patients 4 2 Wall Requirements The hospital must take special precautions regarding X ray protection in the examination room walls See Planning for Radiation Protection on page 339 4 3 Floor Requirements The Gantry and Control Station must be anchored to the floor The Generator cabinet is normally placed on the floor but must be anchored in seismic areas The floor must be stabl...

Page 333: ...Station The customer is responsible for the structural analysis of the floor and the proposed mounting method The customer must hire a structural engineer to design and approve the mounting method and provide GEMS with an engineering report If the results of the structural analysis require stronger anchoring inserts the defaults supplied in Anchoring Inserts on page 354 the customer must inform GE...

Page 334: ...nt Radiation Shield In seismic areas if the optional independent radiation shield is present it must be anchored to the floor or provision must be made to secure it in place For example encircle the unit with a nylon belt secured to wall anchors 4 4 5 Gantry Two additional anchoring holes exist to improve the anchoring refer to Gantry Baseplate Template on page 356 5 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 5 1 CE...

Page 335: ...ear access door 1 5 m 59 inches above the floor LMP1 Red power presence indicator light con tinuous glow or flashing located above access door bulb 30 V 25 W max Line Supply Cable which comprises of two sup ply wires FW and a ground cable Gnd 3 x 5 32 mm WARNING The Line Supply Cable from the Generator must be internally and permanently con nected to the hospital power distribution box and cannot ...

Page 336: ...large focal spot and 100 mAs or more CAUTION 380 VAC or 415 VAC coupling which was possible with Senographe 2000D is not possible with the Senographe DS system If you choose this coupling you will destroy the Gantry power supply 5 4 Line Frequency Specifications 50 Hz or 60 Hz 1 Hz 5 5 kVA Load Characteristics Maximum power in standby 1 5 kVA Maximum instantaneous power during exposures up to 6 se...

Page 337: ...erential trigger 30 mA waveform pulsed For circuit breaker sizes and supply conductors for the US market refer to Section 517 71 a and Section 517 73 a Item 1 2 of NEC 1993 see below The branch circuit used must be rated 30 A or less NEC 1993 Section 517 73 a Item 1 The current capacity of supply branch circuit conductors and the current rating of overcurrent pro tective devices must not be less t...

Page 338: ...the power presence indicator LMP1 Note The load current ratings of relays K1 and K2 are 5 A 30 V AC or DC For safety reasons the elec trical source for the K1 and K2 lamps i e Seno ON and X ray ON lamps must be no more than 30 V You cannot use a 250 V source under any circumstances The relay K3 must be supplied with 24 V ac 7 ROOM LIGHTING In order to obtain a room brightness value of 100 lux or l...

Page 339: ...with the Senographe system is 700 mm wide and attached directly to the Control Station Two versions of the integrated radiation shield exist as follows Lemerpax which is 9 mm 0 35 thick and has a lead thickness equivalence of 0 3 mm 0 012 at 49 kV Mavig which is 6 mm 0 24 thick and has a lead thickness equivalence of 0 5 mm 0 020 at 35 kV Note The Mavig radiation sheild is not available in China I...

Page 340: ... DIMENSIONS AND MASSES Item Dimensions in mm inches Mass in kg lbs Depth Width Height Crate1 2066 81 34 848 33 39 2292 90 24 641 1410 2 Crate 1 includes the Gantry and the Generator Cabinet and the ramp for removing the Gantry Generator and Control Station Crate 2 1110 43 70 770 30 31 1850 72 83 210 5 464 07 for trucktransportation without side covers and lid 223 5 492 73 for plane boat trans port...

Page 341: ...he size of the hospital elevators In cases where hospital elevators are small you will need to disconnect the Generator from the Gantry and move them separately The minimum depth of hospital elevators must be slightly larger than 1273 mm 50 1 inches in order to be able to move the Gantry 10 ROOM LAYOUT PLANNING 10 1 Dimensions and Masses Refer to the following pages for more information on major c...

Page 342: ...stallation System Requirements ILLUSTRATION 2 GANTRY DIMENSIONS MM INCH Anchor Points for the Gantry Refer to Anchoring Inserts on page 354 1930 76 All measurements shown as mm inches 2447 96 4 1273 50 1 1842 72 5 Gantry base 1842 72 5 630 24 8 788 31 0 X Y Z Center of Gravity CG X 325 12 8 Y 3 0 12 Z 1024 40 3 Z CG CG plate 2430 94 67 Maximum Height ...

Page 343: ...A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements Page no 343 Chapter 4 Chap Pre Requirements fm ILLUSTRATION 3 GENERATOR CABINET DIMENSIONS CG CG 640 25 2 437 17 2 1350 53 2 554 21 8 CABLE ENTRY SPACE FOR CABLE STORAGE All measurements shown as mm inches POWER CONTROL BUTTONS ...

Page 344: ...e Control Station Refer to Anchoring Inserts on page 354 2225 87 5 400 15 75 710 27 9 Center of Gravity X Z Y Origin Center of Gravity origin at bottom left back with Lemerpax Radiation Shield X 213 8 4 Y 358 14 1 Z 654 25 75 All measurements shown as mm inches Control Station base plate 710 27 9 400 15 75 Cable entry from left of the Control Control Station height with Mavig Radiation Shield is 1...

Page 345: ...720 28 4 275 10 8 All measurements shown as mm inches Double Configuration Optional radiation shield plus one optional radiation screen extension on one side left or right Single Configuration Optional radiation shield Triple Configuration Optional radiation shield plus one optional radiation screen extension on each side Ordering Optional radiation shield S30321MM 2234536 Optional radiation shiel...

Page 346: ... can exit The two power control buttons on the front side must be facing outwards away from the wall The Generator is on wheels so it can easily be moved during servicing SE3 Control Station A clearance of 300 mm from the Control Station baseplate right edge so access to the UPS IDC and ADS cables are possible System Use SU1 Generator 100 mm at the rear side to allow uninhibited air flow SU2 Contr...

Page 347: ...t of the room allows the rotative arm to be installed on the left hand side the room that hosts the Scenographe system does not permit the Control Station to have the LCD monitor on the right hand side due to either limited space or intrusive objects such as doors or pillars When reviewing the room that will host the Senographe system you must determine whether the LCD monitor must be installed on...

Page 348: ... 4 Note If a separate radiation screen is used instead of the integrated radiation screen the Control Station must positioned so that the LCD Monitor cannot collide with the integrated radiation screen Note If the room size is small such that it restricts the positioning of the Control Station so that it is close to a wall or separate radiation screen the Rotative Arm securing the LCD Monitor can ...

Page 349: ...formation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements Page no 349 Chapter 4 Chap Pre Requirements fm ILLUSTRATION 6 NON RECUMBENT PATIENTS LCD ON THE LEFT NON USA ILLUSTRATION 7 NON RECUMBENT PATIENTS LCD ON THE LEFT USA ...

Page 350: ...Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements ILLUSTRATION 8 NON RECUMBENT PATIENTS LCD ON THE RIGHT NON USA ILLUSTRATION 9 NON RECUMBENT PATIENTS LCD ON THE RIGHT USA ...

Page 351: ...dures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements Page no 351 Chapter 4 Chap Pre Requirements fm ILLUSTRATION 10 RECUMBENT PATIENTS CONTROL STATION IN FRONT OF TUBE HEAD NON USA ILLUSTRATION 11 RECUMBENT PATIENTS CONTROL STATION IN FRONT OF TUBE HEAD USA ...

Page 352: ...nographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements ILLUSTRATION 12 RECUMBENT PATIENTS CONTROL STATION BEHIND TUBE HEAD NON USA ILLUSTRATION 13 RECUMBENT PATIENTS CONTROL STATION BEHIND TUBE HEAD USA ...

Page 353: ... ROOM LAYOUT IF THERE ARE NO SPACE RESTRICTIONS USA In the ideal room layout for USA the orientation of the Control Station Generator and Gantry are all positioned in a way such that the 28 egress clearance is everywhere all the cable groups are along one wall and kept out of the way preventing damage to them or having them become a trip hazard full use of the Rotative Arm for LCD monitor is permi...

Page 354: ...d to the anchoring inserts that are supplied with the Senographe system You must choose to use different anchoring inserts if your floor thickness is less than 120 mm and or if you are installing the Senographe system in a seismic area If you use different anchoring inserts to those supplied you must use the recommendations correspond ing with those anchoring inserts and not those listed in this t...

Page 355: ...2 4 Diameter of the hole in the plate 11 mm 11 mm 14 mm Recommended inserts Hilti Kwik Bolt III 3 8 Hilti Kwik Bolt III 3 8 Hilti Kwik Bolt III 3 8 Hole diameter in the floor 9 5 mm 3 8 9 5 mm 3 8 9 5 mm 3 8 Hole depth in the floor 64 mm 2 64 mm 2 64 mm 2 Minimum floor thickness 95 mm 3 95 mm 3 95 mm 3 Maximum bolt load pull ten sion at each bolt 490 daN 490 daN 490 daN Recommended tightening torq...

Page 356: ...Page no 356 Chap Pre Requirements fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements ILLUSTRATION 15 GANTRY BASEPLATE TEMPLATE ...

Page 357: ...enographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements Page no 357 Chapter 4 Chap Pre Requirements fm ILLUSTRATION 16 CONTROL STATION BASEPLATE TEMPLATE ...

Page 358: ...ptation Green Insite connection Purple X ray Console Cable CAUTION Cables between Generator and Gantry and X ray Console are fragile Protect these cables in a cable housing or ensure that the cable path is safe 3 8 m 14 9 10 m 32 8 4 8 m 15 75 All cable lengths indicated are usable lengths The X ray Console cable is integrated within harness 2 and cable tied alongside harness 1 It can be separated...

Page 359: ...equired Note The Insite Pre Installation Manual and the BB Solutions Catalogue are only available via the GEMS Intranet If a customer require these documents then GEMS personnel can provide the cus tomer with these documents at request In the Americas region only the Site to Site VPN Cus tomer Solution is possible 12 NETWORKING CONNECTIONS The Control Station and any optional equipment provided ar...

Page 360: ...Chapter 4 Page no 360 Chap Pre Requirements fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation System Requirements This page is blank ...

Page 361: ... Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation Procedures Page no 361 Chapter 5 Chap Pre Procedures fm CHAPTER 5 PRE INSTALLATION PROCEDURES The following pages list recommended procedures for planning and implementing the installation of a Senographe system ...

Page 362: ...Chapter 5 Page no 362 Chap Pre Procedures fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Pre Installation Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 363: ...rom the Price Book For more information see Line Supply Cable on page 337 GEMS sales rep resentative 3 If the floor thickness is less than 120 mm and or the installation is in a seismic area order different anchoring bolts to those that are supplied with the system Anchoring Inserts on page 354 Installation planning visit 4 Visit site to assess installation requirements and specify the preparatory...

Page 364: ...Chapter 5 Page no 364 SC PRE A001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Scenario PRE A001 Pre installation Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 365: ...ng the temperature and humidity requirements can be met Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements section 1 Environmental Requirements Heating engineer Rom layout 3 Check that an adequate room is avail able with suitable floor and access Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements Site planner Electrical supply 4 Check availability of suitable supply Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requi...

Page 366: ...Chapter 5 Page no 366 SC PRE A002 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Scenario PRE A002 Pre purchase Site Visit This page is blank ...

Page 367: ...iling floor doors 4 Consult the Radiation Physicist for advice on radiation protection Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements section 8 Planning for Radiation Protection Radiation pro tection special ist Structural requirements 5 Check access door width and height Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements section 4 Struc tural Requirements Hospital engi neer 6 Check floor requirements...

Page 368: ...uirements Electrician 16 Check the main circuit breaker characteris tics Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements section 5 Electri cal Requirements Electrician Door protection switches 17 Specify the requirement for provision and connection of the door X ray protection switches Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements section 5 Electri cal Requirements Electrician Insite connection 18...

Page 369: ... sec tion 10 Room Layout Plan ning Site planner 3 Check floor and anchorage preparation Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements sec tion 10 Room Layout Plan ning Flooring special ist 4 Check access requirements Chapter 4 Pre Installation System Requirements sec tion 4 Structural Require ments Hospital engi neer Radiation protection wall ceiling floor doors 5 Check preparation for radiation ...

Page 370: ...Chapter 5 Page no 370 SC PRE A004 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Scenario PRE A004 Pre Delivery Check This page is blank ...

Page 371: ... on the packages and there may or may not be actual damage to the contents of the packages This type of damage is a consequence of bad transporta tion Internal concealed damage no damage is visible on the packages however there is actual damage to the contents of the packages This type of damage is a consequence of bad manufacturing The illustration on the below summarizes the general process to d...

Page 372: ...od defined by your coun try consumer laws usually 14 days The second phase can be undertaken later during physical and electrical installation of the Senogra phe system Any damage found during this phase is considered as either physical DOA or electrical DOA which is the responsibility of GE Healthcare manufacturing External visible damage Report damage and make a transportation claim Reporting Da...

Page 373: ...Contact GE Healthcare to report the initial damage according to section 4 Reporting Damage If the pallets in the shipment do not show visible signs of damage or excessive shock no action is required other than to sign for the shipment 2 Move the pallet into or close to the x ray room ready for unpacking 2 2 Conduct post delivery Inspections Contact the Customer Service Department at phone number p...

Page 374: ...ion of damage upon receipt of damaged equipment Do not ship any damaged product back to factory without an RMA If damage is deemed minimal and can be repaired in the field with replacement parts the factory will provide a quote to the consignee to purchase those parts If damage is deemed catastrophic and requires complete replacement of damaged equipment GE Healthcare will provide a quote to the c...

Page 375: ...vice Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Physical Installation Page no 375 Chapter 6 Chap Physical Install fm CHAPTER 6 PHYSICAL INSTALLATION This chapter contains information for the physical installation of the Senographe system ...

Page 376: ...Chapter 6 Page no 376 Chap Physical Install fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Physical Installation This page is blank ...

Page 377: ...d establishes the minimum requirements according to European Law on Occupational Health and Safety and the GEHC Standards for locking out live power in order to achieve the power iso lation required to carry out any installation de installation maintenance or repair work on the Senogra phe system All authorized personnel are required to follow these instructions as well as any other safety procedu...

Page 378: ...s H 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box Digital Multimeter with a 1000V rating 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 25 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS This entire Job Card is to do with safety Follow the steps in this Job Card exactly as described 6 POTENTIAL RISKS The following electrical risks are associtated with the Senographe system 220V monophase AC mains power supply in the Line Supply Cabl...

Page 379: ...ne Supply Cable going into the Generator 2 Identify those points where these energies exist in the system and their magnitude For example there may be a connection between the socket on the Mains Distribution Panel and the entrance into the Generator 3 Identify the electical energy source which supplies electical power to the lamp cables going into the Generator Relay board 8 3 Switch the Senograp...

Page 380: ...n Panel The Mains Distribution Panel may vary in different hospital and the specific details are listed in the site specific LOTO procedure Use the following generic steps to isolate the power source going to the Senographe system 1 Switch off the AC mains power going to Generator cabinet To do this turn the handle of the Mains Distribution Panel into the OFF position 2 Press the OFF button on the...

Page 381: ...nerator then disconnect this connection and secure it with a yellow box 8 4 2 Isolating the Room Lamps power source You must locate and isolate the power source of the room lamps that route electrical enegry into the Relay Board on the Generator The room lamps power source can vary in different hospitals but typi cally you will need to cut the power source circuit breaker or isolator ...

Page 382: ...label to isolate incoming supply If there exists a connection between the socket on the Mains Distribution Panel and the entrance into the Generator then secure the yellow box with an additional red LOTO padlock and red LOTO label The key and the red LOTO padlock is the personal property of the individual Feild Engineer and must never be loaned to others If the activity requires more than one Fiel...

Page 383: ...cket on the Mains Distribution Panel and the entrance into the Generator then secure the yellow box with a multihasp in conjunction with a red LOTO padlock and LOTO red tag for each Field Engineer 2 Write the date and Field Engineer name on each of the red labels 3 Apply reasonable not excessive force to perform a TRY OUT Make sure that the LOTO device does not allow you to switch on the power at ...

Page 384: ...ll Generator Covers on page 513 2 Use a Digital Multimeter to ensure that the Line Supply Cable voltage between L1 and N is at 0 Volts 3 Wait at least five minutes to discharge the stored electric energy in the capacitors 4 Check residual voltage using a Digital Mulitmeter do not rely on Neon Tell Tales 5 Use a voltmeter with a rating of 1000 V DC to check that there is no residual voltage between...

Page 385: ...Digital Multimeter to check that the 27 V circuit is at 0 V between the following items of the Supply Command Board 200PL2 Test Points P27V and 0 27V Connections on each side of Fuse F3 XJ1 XJ2 XJ3 XJ4 F1 F2 F4 F5 XJ8 XJ3 XJ6 XJ7 XJ9 F3 F6 TP19 TP19 TP19 TP18 P250V TP1 P27V 0V 27V XJ5 TP2 0VV TP16 TP15 TP12 TP13 TP8 TP7 TP6 TP5 TP4 TP3 TP10 0V 250V TP9 TP21 XJ10 27 V Test Points Fuse F3 ...

Page 386: ...aintenance or corrective tasks you must ensure that the electical energy source which supplies power to the X ray ON and Seno ON lamp cables is changed so that no more than 30V AC or DC is supplied to the Generator Relay board If the voltage is 30 V AC or DC or less then proceed with your planned maintenance or correc tive tasks 3 Close the room door to ensure that a voltage is present on the Rela...

Page 387: ...turn the Senographe system or subsystem components to its normal opera tion 1 Inform everybody of the reconnection of the device 2 Check the area and the equipment 3 Make sure that all the parts and covers are correctly fitted 4 Remove the tools from the area of the system 5 Remove the LOTO devices including locking pins or bolts 6 Re establish the power to the system 7 Return the equipment in its...

Page 388: ...Page no 388 JC LOTO A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card LOTO A001 Lock Out Tag Out LOTO Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 389: ... date movers etc None 2 Check room preparation See PIM inspec tion report and the structural engineer site survey report None Physical Installation 3 Unpack Generator and Gantry pallet Move Generator Gantry to X ray room Job Card PHY A001 Unpacking the Gantry and Generator Cabinet on page 391 Two persons required 4 If the hospital doors are too low for the height of the Gantry with its covers on r...

Page 390: ...onnect HT cable Job Card PHY A015 HT Cable Con nection on page 467 14 Connect AC supply to Generator Job Card PHY A016 AC Connection on page 469 15 X ray Console Cable Routing and connect X ray Console to Generator Job Card PHY A012 X ray Console Cable Routing on page 451 16 Connect the Door safety switches and the X ray lamp to Generator Job Card PHY A018 Room Lamps and Door Configuration on page...

Page 391: ... the pallet When moving the Gantry so it cannot tip over never apply excessive force at the top of the Gantry 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 UNPACKING THE EQUIPMENT General Electric Medical Systems recommend that you always put the palette on flat level ground before you begin to unpack the Gantry and Generator Cabinet The objective is to unpack the Gantry Generator and accessories and move them to the ma...

Page 392: ...nel c Push the bracket firmly upwards as shown C so that it is held up by the adhesive tape 3 Remove the screws B which hold the two wooden blocks under neath the cabinet remove the blocks 4 Leave the two brackets in place held to the covers by the adhesive tape until you are ready to remove the covers and connect the sys tem Then remove them and place them with the other packing materials for ret...

Page 393: ...ocks 1 so that the Gatry base wheels are raised from the pallet floor Three bolts one at the front and two at the back 2 are attached from the Gantry base to a metal plates which exist below the pallet floor 2 Ensure that the three bolts are perpendicular to the Gantry base so that you do not damage the bolt threads 1 Gantry base Gantry base Gantry base Gantry base GOOD Perpendicular No risk of th...

Page 394: ...ention not to damage the thread on each of the bolts as they are used later to raise the Gantry 4 Remove the metal bars 3 from below the pallet floor Keep these metal bars as they are used to raise the Gantry 5 Continue to unscrew carefully each of the three bolts so that the end of each bolt 4 appears above the pallet floor To release these bolts remove the nut 5 attached to each of the bolts Ens...

Page 395: ...ct with the metal bar 8 Continue to re screw carefully turn clockwise each of the bolts so that they raise the Gantry off of the wooden blocks as shown below Ensure that you raise the Gantry progressively keep the base close to horizontal 9 When the Gantry base is high enough to be clear of the two wooden support blocks remove these blocks 10 Lower the Gantry progressively keep the base close to h...

Page 396: ...the pallet floor Leave the bolts threaded into the Gantry base Install the long wooden ramp 7 coming from column packaging to the side of the Gantry right or left 12 Carefully roll the Gantry along with the Generator cabinet down the ramp and into the mammogra phy room CAUTION Never push the Gantry covers to move the Gantry on its wheels Push the base or if necessary pull on the large handle 6 4 A...

Page 397: ...e Control Station can tip over When moving the Control Station so it cannot tip over never apply excessive force at the top of the Control Station 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Reception The Control Station is delivered on a single pallet The Gantry and Generator Cabinet are delivered on another pallet The radiation screen digital detector monitor and the accessories are delivered on pal le...

Page 398: ...packing the Control Station 6 2 Removal from Pallet 1 Unpack the equipment 2 Install the long wooden ramp 1 coming from column packaging to the right hand side of the Con trol Station the side that is connected to the Gantry 3 On the left hand side of the Control Station remove the three hex bolts 2 that secure the bracket to the Control Station base 1 2 ...

Page 399: ...cket from between the Control Station base and pallet remove the bolt 5 that secures the rectangular bracket to the pallet and remove the rectangular bracket 5 With the ramp in place guide the Control Station off of the pallet 6 3 Unpacking 1 Unpack the accessories pallet box containing the monitor the radiation screen and the accessories 2 Examine all items for damage If there are any signs of da...

Page 400: ...Chapter 6 Page no 400 JC PHY A 002 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A002 Unpacking the Control Station This page is blank ...

Page 401: ...ded with the Senographe System only for non seismic areas on page 354 and Anchor ing Inserts Not Provided with the Senographe System for seismic areas on page 355 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Follow standard safety practices for handling heavy equipment Never push on the covers to move the Gantry on its wheels Push the base or if necessa...

Page 402: ...nent position 2 Ensure that suitable provision has been made for passage of cable harnesses between the Gantry the Generator and the Control Station Connections are already made in the Gantry and Generator The Control Station cable harness set of cables in a black flexible conduit must be routed and con nected after it has been installed A cable must be run from the Generator to connect the X ray ...

Page 403: ...il their hol lowed ends engage with the nipples of the jack feet 4 Use the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to jack up progressively the Gantry Do this turning the three jack ing bolts 2 until the wheeled bars are clear of the floor 5 Use the 8 mm allen wrench to remove the screws 3 securing the wheeled bars 4 Remove the bars 6 Turn the jacking bolts to lower the Gantry ensuring that the basepla...

Page 404: ...ples facing upwards 3 Turn the four jacking bolts downwards until their hollowed ends engage with the nipples of the four jack feet 4 Jack up progressively the Control Station using the ratchet wrench with a 22 mm socket to turn the jacking bolts Keep the base plate as close to horizontal as possible 5 Use the 8 mm hex wrench to remove the castor securing screws Remove the castors 6 Turn the jacki...

Page 405: ...system must be off before beginning the procedure 5 PRE REQUISITES The Control Station have been secured to the floor in its correct position 6 PROCEDURE RADIATION SCREEN ON CONTROL STATION CAUTION Do not attempt to install the Radiation Screen on the Control Station cabinet before the cabinet has been secured to the floor Refer to Job Card PHY A003 Gantry and Control Station Installation on page ...

Page 406: ...n Installation 6 2 Installation 1 According to the site configuration remove the edge pinch 1 on the side where the radiation screen can be introduced To do this remove the two screws 2 and remove the edge pinch and its pinch plate 2 Carefully put the radiation screen 3 in place The vertical felt bands 4 must be located towards the back of the Control Station 2 1 3 4 ...

Page 407: ...PHY A 004 fm 3 Carefully introduce one pinch plate 5 between the edge pinch and the radiation screen 4 Tighten with moderation the two screws 6 5 Reinstall each edge pinch that you previously removed and secure it with two screws 7 6 Carefully introduce one pinch plate 8 between the edge pinch and the radiation screen 7 Tighten with moderation the two screws 9 6 5 7 9 8 ...

Page 408: ...1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A004 Radiation Screen Installation 8 Install the main frame radshield joint 10 between the radiation screen and the frame 9 Install the eight screw covers 11 to the fixing points of the edge pinches 10 11 ...

Page 409: ...ky Support Assembly 2 TOOLS 3 mm allen wrench 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PRE REQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 1 Put in place the Bucky Support 1 and secure it with two screws CHC 4 x 12 on the top 2 and two screws FHC M4 x 16 on the bottom 3 3 mm allen wrench 2 Install the four screw covers to the fixing points of the Bucky Support 8 mm diam...

Page 410: ...Chapter 6 Page no 410 JC PHY A 005 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A005 Bucky Support Installation This page is blank ...

Page 411: ...d Engineer Time 5 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Notice The attachment of appropriate regulatory and safety labeling to the equipment is a LEGAL RE QUIREMENT for operation of an X ray producing unit 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 SAFETY LABELLING ON THE X RAY CONSOLE You must select and attach appropriate safety labels to the X ray Console according to local safety regulations concerning the use of X ray pr...

Page 412: ...adiation warning labels illustrated below select the one that corresponds to local regula tions ILLUSTRATION 1 SAFETY LABELS Note The CEI warning symbols are already screen printed on the X ray Console If one of the other warning labels is required peel off the self adhesive backing from the selected label Then affix it over the CEI warning symbols in the upper right corner of the X ray Console as...

Page 413: ...ty Labelling Page no 413 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 006 fm 6 2 Surface Hygiene Label for US Only 1 If your installation is in the USA locate the surface hygiene label like that shown here 2 Peel off the self adhesive backing from the label and affix the label in the center of the upper part of the X ray Console as shown below Affix label here ...

Page 414: ...hapter 6 Page no 414 JC PHY A 006 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A006 Regulatory and Safety Labelling This page is blank ...

Page 415: ...l Station framework below the keyboard Left stop bracket PN 5235174 2 one ring labeled L Note The left stop bracket PN 5235174 2 can be found in the Accessories box that is delivered with the Senographe system The Accessories box located in the large wooden Accessories cabinet contains the ADS IDC Software Loopback Kit Service Documents etc 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box Sisfle Rotative Arm Installatio...

Page 416: ...ully pull on the upper silicone mask 1 to remove it from the rotative arm Store the upper sili cone mask in a clean place 2 Carefully pull on the lower silicone mask 2 to remove it from the rotative arm support Store the lower silicone mask in a clean place 3 Disconnect the mouse cable from the ADS computer 4 Cut the cable ties that secure the monitor cables and mouse cable to the Control Station ...

Page 417: ...Job Card PHY A009 Opposite Side Rotative Arm Installation Page no 417 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 009 fm 3 and harness 4 5 Carefully pull the harness 5 from the upper and lower parts of the rotative arm 6 Extract the mouse cable 6 from the hole in the harness and from the opening of the monitor sup 4 3 5 7 ...

Page 418: ...pport 7 To ease the harness extraction pull the harness back from the monitor cables and remove the monitor cables from opening of the moni tor support in the following order Ground cable DVI video cable Power cable 8 Remove the monitor cables 8 from the harness and put the harness in a clean place 9 Pass each of the monitor cables through the opening of the rotative arm support and store them on ...

Page 419: ...ass A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A009 Opposite Side Rotative Arm Installation Page no 419 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 009 fm a Thread the ground cable through the opening of the rotative arm support b Thread the power cable through the opening of the rotative arm support as shown below ...

Page 420: ...rd PHY A009 Opposite Side Rotative Arm Installation c Thread the ferrite ring 9 of the DVI video cable inside the rotative arm support While keeping the DVI connector outside 10 move the DVI video cable to the bottom of the rotative arm sup port d Thread the DVI video cable through the opening of the rotative arm support as shown below 9 10 ...

Page 421: ...12 Remove the four screws 13 securing the rotative arm support 5 mm allen wrench and remove it 13 Install the rotative arm support on the opposite side of the Control Station and secure it with the same four screws 5 mm allen wrench To do this easily use the Sisfle Arm Installation Tool with the fol lowing sub steps a Put the two threaded rods the Sisfle Arm Installation Tool into the lower two th...

Page 422: ... Job Card PHY A009 Opposite Side Rotative Arm Installation rod will have some of its thread exposed as illustrated below b Slide lower holes of the rotative arm support onto the two threads Push the acrylic support block 16 from the Sisfle Arm Installation Tool on to the two threaded rods so that the rotative arm is supported 15 14 16 ...

Page 423: ...eaded rods Unscrew the two threaded in an anti clockwise direction to remove them from the Control Station framework e Attach the bottom two screws 18 to secure the top of the rotative arm support 5 mm allen wrench f Use the torque wrench to tighten the four screws to 9 5 Nm 0 5 Nm g Apply Blue Loctite 243 around the heads of the four screws At this stage you cannot re route the cables You must ch...

Page 424: ...rom the joint of the rotative arm 6 mm allen wrench 16 Place the large allen screw and its washers in a clean place Ensure that the washers on the large allen screw are positioned as indicated below 17 Remove the black plastic washer 21 and keep it close by as you will reinstall it with the left stop bracket 20 Large Black Washer Medium Black Washer Small Silver Washers Small Black Washers Bending...

Page 425: ... 19 Take the left stop braket labeled with an L from the stop bracket set Place the left stop bracket 23 with its lug facing downwards so that the lug goes into the hole 24 as shown below 20 Reinstall the black plastic washer 25 on top of the left stop bracket 21 On the upper part of the rotative arm move the stop bracket screw from its original position to the opposite side 3 mm allen wrench 23 2...

Page 426: ...e arm support 27 When in close proximity to the left stop bracket 28 ensure that the stop bracket screw 29 fits between the gap on the left stop bracket 23 Put the large allen screw 30 back in place on the joint of the rotative arm 6 mm allen wrench 24 Use the torque wrench to tighten the large allen screw to 1 5 Nm 0 5 Nm 25 Turn the allen screw 31 at the joint of the rotative arm anti clockwise ...

Page 427: ...n top of the Control Station keyboard through the opening of the rotative arm support To do this easily proceed as described in the following sub steps a Thread the DVI video cable through the opening of the rotative arm support as shown below b Thread the ferrite ring 32 of the DVI video cable inside the rotative arm support While keeping the DVI connector outside 33 move the DVI video cable to t...

Page 428: ...ort as shown below d Thread the ground cable through the opening of the rotative arm support 27 Thread the monitor cables 34 through the harness Ensure that the monitor cables do not cross each other as shown below 28 Put the harness through the opening of the monitor support 35 To do this pull the harness back from the monitor cables and insert the monitor cables through the opening of the monito...

Page 429: ...r 6 JC PHY A 009 fm Ground cable 29 Distribute evenly 36 the harness over the monitor cables on both sides of the monitor support 30 Place the mouse at the back of the mouse support so that there is enough cable for use of the mouse on the entire mouse support 31 Use pointed nose pliers to create an opening in the harness at 27 cm from the end of the harness 35 36 36 27 cm ...

Page 430: ... rotative arm support entrance into the Control Station 33 Ensure that the length of each of the monitor cables leaving the harness are at the distances as specified below Secure the harness to the monitor cables with a cable tie located at 1 cm from the end of the harness 34 Install and connect the monitor as described in Job Card PHY A010 Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station Procedure on page 43...

Page 431: ...e arm support 38 are aligned in the same plane see below Carefully put the harness inside the rotative arm and rotative arm support 36 Insert the upper silicone mask shorter of the two 39 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwards 37 Insert the lower silicone mask longer of the two 40 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwar...

Page 432: ...d USB extension cable connectors with two cable ties 41 39 Ensure that the monitor cables have sufficient slack 42 within the Control Station so that they can move This ensures that the movement of the monitor cables are not inhibited when the rotative arm is turned Secure the harness to the monitor cables and mouse cable with a cable tie at 1 cm from the end of the harness 43 Secure the monitor c...

Page 433: ...ove as indicated below 41 When moving the rotative arm through the extreme positions check that the stop bracket screw 45 is correctly positioned to avoid a collision with the radiation screen 42 Install the crock on the opposite side of the Control Station secure it with two screws 3 mm allen wrench but do not tighten the screws 43 Connect the ground cable to the crock 44 During reinstallation of...

Page 434: ...er 6 Page no 434 JC PHY A 009 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A009 Opposite Side Rotative Arm Installation This page is blank ...

Page 435: ...Card PHY A010 Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station Page no 435 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 010 fm Job Card PHY A010 Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station Chapter 6 1 SUPPLIES None 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES None ...

Page 436: ... 18 and 19 Monitors Follow section 6 2 Mounting the optional 21 3 MP Monitor for the optional 21 3 MP Monitor 6 1 Mounting an 18 or 19 Monitor When appropriate the steps below show images for both arms 1 Place the monitor on a protected surface Fix the screen plate to the monitor using washers and two 20 mm screws 1 on the top and two 16 mm screws 2 on the bottom 2 Put the monitor in place the scr...

Page 437: ... 16 8EN Job Card PHY A010 Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station Page no 437 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 010 fm wrench 4 Unscrew the screw 4 screwdriver which secures the monitor cable protecting plate 5 and remove the cable protecting plate 5 Connect the ground cable 6 screwdriver 3 3 5 4 Sisfle Arm ...

Page 438: ...clamp 8 8 Re install the cable protecting plate 5 while ensuring that the cables pass through the exit without being trapped and tighten the securing screw 4 screwdriver 9 At 17 cm away from the right edge looking from behind secure the harness to the back of the LCD monitor with a black cable tie 9 10 Perform a monitor collision check To do this check that the stop bracket and stop bracket screw ...

Page 439: ...6 2 Mounting the optional 21 3 MP Monitor 1 Place the monitor on a protected surface Fix the screen plate to the monitor using washers and two 20 mm screws 1 on the top and two 16 mm screws 2 on the bottom 2 Put the monitor in place the screen plate adjusted on the sliding pivot 3 Fix the sliding pivot with the monitor using the four inner screws of 8 mm length 3 3 mm allen wrench 1 2 3 3 ...

Page 440: ...N Job Card PHY A010 Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station 4 Remove the pre routed monitor earth cable from the harness and connect it to the same Earth Bar connector accommodating the cable labelled 5166436 5 Create a loop with the excess earth cable and secure the loop with a cable tie 6 6 Monitor earth cable going down to earth bar ...

Page 441: ... with a cable tie 9 8 Close the top of the harness with a black cable tie 10 9 Perform a monitor collision check Check that the stop bracket and stop bracket screw 11 is cor rectly positioned to avoid a collision with the radiation screen Note Later on during the electrical installation phase remember to perform Job Card ELE A008 Con figuring the 21 inch 3MP Monitor on page 549 so that the ADS sof...

Page 442: ...pter 6 Page no 442 JC PHY A 010 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A010 Mount LCD Monitor on Control Station This page is blank ...

Page 443: ...t and switch off the Senographe system hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power 5 PREREQUISITES Calibrate the Trackball on a laptop in a quiet area see Job Card ELE A065 Trackball Configuration on page 787 6 PROCEDURE 1 Unplug and remove the X ray Console 2 Remove the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Rem...

Page 444: ...11 Trackball Option Installation cone mask in a clean place 5 Carefully pull on the lower silicone mask 2 to remove it from the rotative arm support Store the lower silicone mask in a clean place 6 Disconnect the mouse cable from the ADS computer 7 Cut the cable ties that secure the monitor cables and mouse cable to the Control Station framework 1 2 ...

Page 445: ... 8EN Job Card PHY A011 Trackball Option Installation Page no 445 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 011 fm 3 and harness 4 8 Carefully pull the harness 5 from the upper and lower parts of the rotative arm 9 Extract the mouse cable 6 from the hole in the harness and from the opening of the monitor sup 4 3 5 7 ...

Page 446: ...ouse 10 Remove the mouse mat 9 11 While holding the handle 10 Remove the three screws 11 securing the mouse mat support 12 and remove the mouse mat support 12 Secure the handle 10 with the three new screws 13 that are supplied with the Trackball kit 13 Install and secure the trackball with the longest screw 14 length 38 mm and spacer 15 that are supplied with the Trackball Kit 8 12 9 11 10 14 13 1...

Page 447: ...ackball cable through the opening in the harness so that it leaves the other end of the harness Then route the track cable through the rotative arm support entrance into the Control Sta tion 16 Ensure that the rotative arm 15 and rotative arm support 16 are aligned in the same plane Care fully put the harness inside the rotative arm and rotative arm support 17 Insert the upper silicone mask shorte...

Page 448: ... 16 8EN Job Card PHY A011 Trackball Option Installation silicone mask must point outwards 18 Insert the lower silicone mask longer of the two 18 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwards 19 Use the USB extension cable supplied with the Trackball Kit to connect the trackball to the ADS 17 18 ...

Page 449: ...wo cable ties 19 20 Ensure that the monitor cables have sufficient slack 20 within the Control Station so that they can move This ensures that the movement of the monitor cables are not inhibited when the rotative arm is turned Secure the harness to the monitor cables and trackball cable with a cable tie at 1 cm from the end of the harness 21 Secure the monitor cables and trackball cable to the Co...

Page 450: ...ion 21 Turn the rotative arm though all extremes and check that the harness monitor cables and trackball cable are free to move as indicated below 22 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 23 Reinstall the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 24 Reinstall the X ray Console ...

Page 451: ... 6 1 SUPPLIES None 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 5 PREREQUISITES None Notice To avoid unwanted disconnection the X ray Console cable must be fixed to the mechanical struc ture of the Control Station and the Generator The external part of the X ray Console cable must be mechanically protected from damage that could c...

Page 452: ...as shown To avoid unwanted disconnec tion the X ray Console must be fixed to the mechanical structure of the Generator Therefore use cable ties to secure the X ray Console cable to the existing cables 2 that are already connected to the Generator Cabinet 3 Route the other end of the X ray Console cable with the ferrite ring up the back side of the Control Station in close proximity to the other da...

Page 453: ...ut the X ray Console in place above the keyboard 5 Route the excess X ray Console cable that is between the Control Station and Generator Cabinet beside the cable conduit from the Gantry When routing the X Ray Console cable between the Con trol Station and Generator ensure that it is not kinked and is free from all forms of mechanical stress it is mechanically protected from damage that could come...

Page 454: ...Chapter 6 Page no 454 JC PHY A 012 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A012 X ray Console Cable Routing This page is blank ...

Page 455: ...n Positioner harness leaves the Gantry through a black tubular conduit 1 Run the cable conduit from the Gantry to the control station through floor or wall ducting as appropri ate 2 The conduit can enter the control station cabinet from either side If it enters from the left as viewed from the front it must pass through the space at the bottom of the cabinet to emerge on the right hand side 3 Plac...

Page 456: ...IDC Gantry Conditioner Link to top right 9 pin COM1 connector 3 IDC SIB 2226621 IDC Detector Power Supply to 26 pin connector 4 IDC COM2 2244615 IDC Gantry Serial Link RT to COM2 9 pin connector 5 2389288 2 IDC ADS link via router Grey 100 Mbit s Ethernet cable to RJ 45 connector This should already be connected 6 IDC I O 2340426 IDC Detector link Two fiber optic cables to fiber optic connectors F...

Page 457: ...ter connector are firmly connected 2 Connect the following cables from the harness to the UPS power cable to the UPS power inlet socket 8 two gray cables labeled 2387162 which are joined together by one 9 pin connector to the 9 pin serial connector on the UPS 9 When making the UPS cable connections check that the three power output connectors 10 from the UPS are firmly connected Thses output conne...

Page 458: ...DVI cable is connected to the left hand side display port number 1 on the back of the ADS computer The monitor DVI cable must be connected to the display port via a DVI I dis play port adaptor cable shown below Mouse Keyboard Bar Code Empty Scanner Empty AC input from UPS Ethernet cable to internal switch 2389288 2 Ethernet cable to hospital network Monitor Cable via DVI I adaptor 12 DB9 Generator...

Page 459: ... labelled number 1 on the back of the ADS computer 4 All the other cables i e monitor keyboard mouse trackball service key Ethernet and power should already be connected to the ADS Computer Ensure that all these cables are still firmly in place Refer to Illustration 1 on page 458 for more information Note A trackball can be provided as an option in place of the mouse Do not attempt to connect a mo...

Page 460: ...llic cable support A UPS AC supply input cable Control Station ground cable and the other pre connected IDC and AWS power cables are connected to the front metallic cable support B When connecting the Gantry Ethernet cable C to port 3 of the switch i e directly below the pre connected Ethernet cables going to IDC and ADS secure the Ethernet cables from the Gantry IDC and ADS with the ferrite block...

Page 461: ...ion of AC Power Check that power inputs to the Control Station component components are correctly connected to the UPS AC power outputs The Control Station components include the AWS IDC Ethernet switch and LCD Monitor 6 5 Routing and Connection of Earth Cable Route the Earth Cable from the Gantry up the front matellic cable support A and connect it to the Con trol Bar B as indicated below A A B A...

Page 462: ... the Hospital Ethernet network cable to the lower RJ 45 socket on the rear panel of the ADS Computer Use a cable tie to secure the Hospital Ethernet network cable to the Gantry Harness So that the Hospital Ethernet network cable is hidden under the Gantry Harness and protected from the Omega Cover ensure that the buckle of cable tie is buckle is rotated as far as possible clockwise Cable Tie Buckl...

Page 463: ... Gantry to Control Station Page no 463 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 014 fm 6 7 UPS Battery Connection The battery plug to the UPS is not connected at delivery time Firmly connect the battery plug to the bat tery on the UPS as shown below Battery Connection UPS battery disconnected at delivery time Connect UPS battery as shown below ...

Page 464: ...C Monitor AC Mouse RJ45 4X 3X 2X 1X ETHERNET SWITCH DVI Keyboard 2387162 2387162 2244615 2226612 2340426 2226621 2244615 2226625 2385966 5177284 2 RJ45 COM1 COM2 OF SIB 26pts SIB 50pts AC IDC UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC HARDWARE KEY To Conditioner To Detector Power Supply To Detector Optical Fiber Socket To Generator To Generator To Generator MDR To Gantry RJ45 Service Network Connection Hospital ...

Page 465: ... 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A014 Connect Gantry to Control Station Page no 465 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 014 fm 7 2 Control Station Power Distribution Diagram AC OUT ETHERNET SWITCH AC Monitor 2385960 2385793 UPS AC IN AC AC AC AC AC AC AC IDC USB Z400 AC net0 net1 PCI1 PCI0 PCIe2 USB 1 2 ...

Page 466: ...apter 6 Page no 466 JC PHY A 014 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A014 Connect Gantry to Control Station This page is blank ...

Page 467: ...rocedure 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE CAUTION The HT block and kV mA board assembly is factory calibrated Do not attempt to adjust potentiometer P1 HT probe frequency compensation 6 1 HT Cable Connection The system is shipped with the HT cable disconnected and the air vent screw closed 1 Locate the HT probe cable Carefully release and remove its protective covers and any cable ties etc which h...

Page 468: ...ch to tighten the cable securing nut 1 until resistance is felt Try to move the probe by hand If any movement is possible tighten the nut further Continue until no movement is detected 5 The tank air vent screw 2 must be slightly open to ensure that no excess pressure builds up during long exposures Tighten the screw by hand then unscrew it to leave a 3 mm 1 8 inch gap Do not remove the screw 1 2 ...

Page 469: ...oltages etc are set in the factory However they must be checked in case they have been disturbed Refer to sections 2 1 and 2 3 in the System Description Chapter to ensure that the jumpers on the Generator CPU Board and Command Board are correctly set You will configure the jumpers on the Generator Command Board later on ac cording to Job Card PHY A018 Room Lamps and Door Configuration on page 475 ...

Page 470: ...re 200 V 208 V 220 V and 240 V 6 1 2 Line Frequency The Senographe operates with line frequencies of 50 Hz or 60 Hz without adjustment 6 2 Voltage Selection Mains Distribution Rack Check the position of the input connection wire on the Mains Distribution Rack transformer terminal block reference A in the illustration If the tap connection does not correspond to the nominal not the measured line vo...

Page 471: ...e 240 V transformer tap If the tap connection does not correspond to the nominal not the measured line voltage you determined in section 6 1 remove and reconnect the SEL wire to the cor rect terminal see Table 1 Notice The SEL wire must not be connected to the 0V terminal This terminal is reserved exclusively for use while performing the measurement described in Installation Job Card Line Resistan...

Page 472: ... the label located on the bottom of the Generator cabinet just below the AC supply switch S1 WARNING For safe operation of the Senographe pay particular attention to the information on this label Determine whether the AC supply consists of two phases phase phase or a single phase and neutral phase neutral When the supply is single phase with neutral phase neutral a metal cylinder delivered with th...

Page 473: ... supply is off 2 Connect the wires of the AC supply cable two phases or phase and neutral to the L and N termi nals and the ground wire to the yellow green terminal as shown in illustration 2 ILLUSTRATION 2 CONNECTING THE AC SUPPLY CABLE 3 Use a cable tie to secure the AC supply cable to the lower cross member of the Generator frame work 4 Route and connect the other end of the AC supply cable to ...

Page 474: ...Chapter 6 Page no 474 JC PHY A 016 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A016 AC Connection This page is blank ...

Page 475: ...UTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 1 Refer to Illustration 1 connect the room and lamp wiring to XJ1 XJ2 XJ3 on the 200PL4 board see Illustration 2 for locations 2 Route the wires in the generator cabinet along with the mains supply cable ILLUSTRATION 1 ROOM LAMPS AND DOOR WIRING Note For safety reasons the electrical source for the Seno ON and X ray ON lamps must be no more than 30 V Yo...

Page 476: ...the table TABLE 1 JP1 AND JP2 JUMPER SETTINGS 0 No jumper 1 Jumper present Note When the room door switch is present and configured for use the signals valid PR first trigger or prep and valid GR RADIOGRAPHY are enabled through the switch JP1 RADIOGRAPHY JP2 PREP Door closed Door opened 1 0 0 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY enabled PREP and RADIOGRAPHY disabled 2 1 0 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY enabled PREP and RAD...

Page 477: ...nd Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A018 Room Lamps and Door Configuration Page no 477 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 018 fm ILLUSTRATION 2 LOCATION OF ROOM WIRING CONNECTORS ILLUSTRATION 3 LOCATION OF JP1 TO JP4 200 PL4 XJ2 XJ3 XJ1 Room lamps and door wiring ...

Page 478: ...apter 6 Page no 478 JC PHY A 018 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A018 Room Lamps and Door Configuration This page is blank ...

Page 479: ...reconnect 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 6 PREREQUISITES Read the sub sections to understand the nature of the connections that you are about to remove 6 1 Summary of Connections The following table summarizes all of the connections on the Generator that you need to disconnect and then reconnect once the equipment is in the desired hospital room The thick line indicates the separation between the upper...

Page 480: ...lue cable with labeled PH2 originating from a thick white cable labeled 2381711 XJ3 Pink cable with labeled PH1 originating from a thick white cable labeled 2381711 Power Line Filter Box Earth Green yellow earth cable originating from a thick white cable labeled 2381711 Supply Command Board 200PL2 Bolt above XJ1 Black cable with blue plastic end originating from white cable labeled Gene W125 23817...

Page 481: ...ed by cable ties The cables pipes leave conduit 1 in close proximity to the Conditioner unit They are routed to within the upper and lower parts of the Generator as illustrated below Cond Cab Cond 22266611 RS 232 9 Pin In Out Coolant Pipe Coolant Pipe Conditioner Unit XP4 XP5 MDR XJ4 Cond Cab 2225470 XP5 Cond Cab 2386021 XJ10 XJ4 Generator Interface Board 400PL2 XJ10 GENE 400PL2 2226613 XJ4 GENE 4...

Page 482: ...conduit containing three optical fibers 400 PL2 XJ6 2381702 400 PL2 XJ7 2381704 400 PL2 XJ9 2381706 Gene W125 2381710 Black Black Black Black Red Blue HV Cable labeled 2379842 REV 01 Black Cable No Label Red Earth HV Connector HV Tank XJ2 Anode Starter 300PL2 XJ6 XJ7 XJ9 Generator Interface Board 400PL2 PT10 Supply Command Board 200PL2 Bolt above XJ1 To TH1 To BR1 Orange Coupling Block Off white G...

Page 483: ...R DISCONNECTION PROCEDURE Use the following steps to disconnect the Gantry connections from the various parts of the Generator 1 Remove the four Generator side panels see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 to reveal the inside of the Generator 2 Remove the cable ties 1 then from the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 disconnect the cables from the XJ4 and XJ10 connector...

Page 484: ...es 2 that secure the cables coolant pipes 3 from the Gantry to the framework Then un ravel the cables coolant pipes 3 from the Gantry from the side of the chiller 4 Disconnect the two coolant pipes 4 from the Conditioner In and Out connectors and disconnect IDC data cable connection 5 from the Conditioner RS 232 connector 5 Remove the cable ties 6 and disconnect the two power connectors 7 from the...

Page 485: ...es power cables and data cables that you disconnected during steps 2 to 5 You will connect these back to the Conditioner MDR and Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 later on once the equipment is in the hospital room 7 On the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 disconnect the three optical fibers from the XJ6 XJ7 and XJ9 connectors 8 Remove the cable tie 8 securing the Gene W125 2381710 cable at the t...

Page 486: ...bles from the TP10 connector and the top left bolt connection ground 8 mm open ended wrench These black cables originate from the Gene W125 2381710 cable 10 From the orange coupling block 9 that connects to the BR1 and TH1 connections on the Auto Transformer remove the two black cables 10 small screwdriver The two black cables originate from the Gene W125 2381710 cable TP10 Ground 8 9 10 If necess...

Page 487: ...ss A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A030 Generator and Gantry Disconnection Reconnection Page no 487 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 030 fm 11 Remove the cable ties securing the white Gantry AC Supply cable labeled 2381711 to the HV Unit 11 and the cables near the Power Line Filter Box 12 12 11 ...

Page 488: ...2 At the back of the Power Line Filter Box 13 remove the Earth cable 14 8 mm open ended wrench The Earth cable originates from the white Gantry AC Supply cable labeled 2381711 13 On the Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 disconnect the cables PH2 and PH1 from the XJ1 XJ3 connectors 8 mm open ended wrench The cables PH2 and PH1 originate from the white Gantry AC Supply cable labeled 2381711 13 14 XJ1...

Page 489: ...isconnection Reconnection Page no 489 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 030 fm 14 On the Anode Starter Board 300PL2 remove the cable labeled G300 PL2 XP1 2381701 from the XJ2 connector 15 Remove the cable labeled G300 PL2 XP1 2381701 from the framework of the Generator by releasing the clamp 15 that secures it to the framework 4 mm allen wrench XJ2 15 ...

Page 490: ...lready connected in the HV Tank 17 On the HT block disconnect the X ray Tube Housing Return Cable 8 mm open ended wrench This cable is the black cable with the red plastic ending 17 labeled HT GND 2381701 18 Group together the cables that you disconnected during steps 7 to 17 You will fully remove them from the Generator by releasing the Generator cable bracket in the following steps You will conn...

Page 491: ...ge no 491 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 030 fm 19 Release the two allen screws 18 4 mm allen wrench that secure the Generator cable bracket 19 to the Generator framework Remove the Generator cable bracket from the Generator Keep the two allen screws in a safe place as you will use them again later on to re connect the Gen erator Cable bracket to the Generator framework 18 19 ...

Page 492: ...he various parts of the Generator 1 Secure the Generator cable bracket 1 to the Generator framework with the two allen screws 2 4 mm allen wrench 2 On the HT block connect the X ray Tube Housing Return Cable to the earth connector 8 mm open ended wrench This cable is the black cable with the red plastic ending 3 labeled HT GND 2381701 3 Except for the HV cable ensure that all of the cables leaving...

Page 493: ...er 6 JC PHY A 030 fm 4 On the Anode Starter Board 300PL2 connect the cable labeled G300 PL2 XP1 2381701 to the XJ2 connector 5 Secure the cable labeled G300 PL2 XP1 2381701 to the Generator framework with the clamp 4 4 mm allen wrench In order to avoid EMC interference ensure that the clamp is firmly secured to the exposed shielding on the cable labeled G300 PL2 XP1 2381701 XJ2 4 ...

Page 494: ...es Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A030 Generator and Gantry Disconnection Reconnection 6 On the Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 connect the cables PH2 and PH1 to the XJ1 XJ3 connec tors 8 mm open ended wrench The cables PH1 and PH2 originate from the white Gantry AC Sup ply cable labeled 2381711 XJ1 XJ3 ...

Page 495: ...30 fm 7 At the back of the Power Line Filter Box connect the Earth cable 6 to the earth connector 5 8 mm open ended wrench The Earth cable originates from the white Gantry AC Supply cable labeled 2381711 8 Ensure that the white Gantry AC Supply cable labeled 2381711 7 is routed as shown below Use cable ties to secure it to the HV Unit 8 and the cables near the Power Line Filter Box 9 5 6 9 8 7 ...

Page 496: ...eft bolt connection ground 8 mm open ended wrench The black cable with the blue plastic end originates from the Gene W125 2381710 cable 11 On the Supply Command Board 200 PL2 connect the black cable with the red plastic end to the TP10 connector The black cable with the red plastic end originates from the Gene W125 2381710 cable 12 Connect the remaining two black cables 9 that originate from the G...

Page 497: ...ee optical fibers to the XJ6 XJ7 and XJ9 connectors as summarized in the diagram and table below Note At this stage the connectors XJ4 and XJ10 are still disconnected on the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 This is normal as the two cables that make these connections are from conduit 1 which are routed in the following steps Connector Label Description of cable usually identified by code on a whi...

Page 498: ...1 at bottom right corner of Conditioner area Cable tie to conduit 1 to the Generator framework Cable tie to conduit 1 to the Generator framework Conduit 1 under neath Generator cable bracket Route the two cables labeled XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 2226623 and XJ10 GENE 400 PL2 2226613 to the lower part of the Gen erator Route the following cables to the upper part of the Generator the two power ca bles label...

Page 499: ...o 499 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 030 fm 16 Connect the black power cables labeled XJ4 Cond Cab 2225470 and XP5 Cond Cab 2386021 to the MDR XP4 and XP5 connectors respectively 17 Secure these two power cables to the MDR with the cable ties 12 18 Route the power cables along the edge of the Generator framework 13 and secure any remaining slack with cable ties 14 12 XP4 XP5 14 13 ...

Page 500: ...onnection Reconnection 19 Connect the two coolant pipes 15 to the Conditioner In and Out connectors 20 Connect IDC data cable 16 labeled Cond Cab Cond 2226611 to the Conditioner RS 232 connec tor 21 On the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 connect the cables labeled XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 2226623 and XJ10 GENE 400 PL2 2226613 to the XJ4 and XJ10 connectors respectively 16 15 XJ4 XJ10 ...

Page 501: ...e Generator as shown in the diagram below Secure the two cables labeled XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 2226623 and XJ10 GENE 400 PL2 2226613 going to the lower part of the Gen erator with cable ties Secure the cable labeled XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 2226623 from conduit 1 and the optical fibers from conduit 2 together Secure the two cables labeled XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 2226623 and XJ10 GENE 400 PL2 2226613 from conduit 1 and...

Page 502: ... Page no 502 JC PHY A 030 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A030 Generator and Gantry Disconnection Reconnection This page is blank ...

Page 503: ...4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down the equipment and switch off the Generator hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power Never switch off at the UPS except in emergency risk of data loss 5 PREREQUISITES Unplug and remove the X ray Console 6 REMOVAL REINSTALLATION OF V2 V3 V4 CONT...

Page 504: ...trol Station Covers 2 Carefully slide the blue top cover towards you to remove it 6 2 Omega Cover Front Cover Disassembly 1 If the radiation screen is present remove the main frame radshield joint 1 2 Use a screwdriver to remove all the screw covers 2 from the fixing points of the edge pinches 3 On one edge pinch loosen the two screws 3 and remove the two screws 4 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 505: ... and its pinch plate 5 Remove the two screws 5 securing the same side of the Omega cover 3 mm allen wrench Then release the Omega cover from the back of the Control Station 6 If the radiation screen is present re install the edge pinch that you previously removed in steps 3 and 4 and secure it with two screws 6 7 If the radiation screen is present carefully introduce the pinch plate 7 between the ...

Page 506: ...8EN Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers the radiation screen 8 If the radiation screen is present tighten with moderation the two screws 8 9 Repeat steps 2 to 4 and 6 to 8 for the Omega cover on the other side of the Control Station 10 Disconnect the ground cable from the right hand side of the Omega cover 8 7 ...

Page 507: ...Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers Page no 507 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 040 fm 11 Carefully move up the Omega cover towards you to remove it 6 3 Omega Cover Reassembly 1 Carefully put the Omega cover into position on the Control Station ...

Page 508: ...b Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers 2 Connect the ground cable to the right hand side of the Omega cover 3 On one edge pinch loosen the two screws 1 and remove the two screws 2 4 Remove the edge pinch and its pinch plate 5 Attach the two screws 3 to secure the same side of the Omega cover 3 mm allen wrench to the 2 1 ...

Page 509: ...A 040 fm back of the Control Station 6 If the radiation screen is present re install the edge pinch that you previously removed in steps 3 and 4 and secure it with two screws 6 7 If the radiation screen is present carefully introduce the pinch plate 7 between the edge pinch and the radiation screen 8 If the radiation screen is present tighten with moderation the two screws 8 5 6 8 7 ...

Page 510: ... screen is present attach the main frame radshield joint 10 12 Ensure that the Control Station covers have been correctly fastened and all blanking disks are cor rectly installed 6 4 Top Cover Reassembly 1 Carefully slide the blue top cover on to the top of the Control Station Ensure that its three holes are aligned with the three threaded holes on the Control Station framework 2 Use the three scr...

Page 511: ...3 Remove the front cover by pulling 4 Disconnect the ground connections Reverse the procedure to replace the cover 7 2 Top Cover CAUTION Be careful not to damage the fragile upper corner of the top cover To remove the top cover 1 Remove the omega cover see above 2 Unplug and remove the X ray Console 3 Remove the three front securing screws 4 3 mm allen wrench 4 Release the cover by tilting it towa...

Page 512: ...er 6 Page no 512 JC PHY A 040 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers This page is blank ...

Page 513: ... 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 5 minutes to remove covers and 5 minutes to reinstall covers 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down the equipment and switch off the Generator hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power Never switch off at t...

Page 514: ...or Covers 6 REMOVAL AND REINSTALLATION OF COVERS 6 1 Remove Generator Covers 1 Remove all power from the Senographe 2 Remove the four plastic blanking disks 1 slim flat blade in each corner of the Generator top cover to expose the screws that secure the Generator top cover 3 Remove the four allen screws 2 that secure the Generator top cover 5 5 mm allen wrench 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 ...

Page 515: ...ble 3 from the Generator top cover and leave it to rest on the Conditioner Unit Then remove the Generator top cover from the Generator Cabinet The front and back covers wider covers must be removed before you can remove the left and right covers 5 For the front and back covers do the following a Remove the two bolts 4 that secure the top of the cover 7 mm open ended wrench and pull it towards your...

Page 516: ...o the floor so the holes 5 in the bottom end of the cover pass past the rods 6 on each side c Disconnect the ground wire 7 at the Generator end to avoid risk of creating a short circuit d Fully remove the cover and store it in a safe place 6 For the left and right covers do the following a Remove the two bolts 8 that secure the top of the cover 7 mm open ended wrench and pull it towards yourself 6...

Page 517: ...l Generator Covers Page no 517 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 042 fm b Lift the cover away from the floor so the holes 9 in the bottom end of the cover pass past the rods 10 on each side c Disconnect the ground wire 11 at the Generator end to avoid risk of creating a short circuit d Fully remove the cover and store it in a safe place 10 9 11 ...

Page 518: ...y after connecting water pipes to the Conditioner Check that the covers do not compress the pipes and cause a blockage 1 Remove all power from the Senographe 2 For the left and right covers do the following a Connect the cover ground wire 1 to the Generator cabinet b Lower the cover towards the floor so the holes 2 in the bottom end of the cover pass on to the rods 3 on each side c Slide the lip o...

Page 519: ...For the front and back covers do the following a Connect the cover ground wire 5 to the Generator cabinet b Raise the cover from the floor so the holes 6 in the bottom end of the cover pass on to the rods 7 on each side c Slide the lip of the cover upwards so it passes side of the Generator cabinet Fully push the cover on to the top of the Generator cabinet Then secure the cover to the Generator c...

Page 520: ...res Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers two bolts 8 7 mm open ended wrench 4 Connect the earth cable 9 to the top cover and place the top cover on the Generator cabinet 5 Use the four allen screws 10 to secure the Generator top cover 5 5 mm allen wrench 8 8 9 10 10 10 10 ...

Page 521: ...tall Generator Covers Page no 521 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 042 fm 6 Attach the four plastic blanking disks 11 in each corner of the Generator top cover to hide the allen screws that secure the Generator top cover 7 Ensure that the Generator covers have been correctly fastened and all blanking disks are correctly installed 11 11 11 11 ...

Page 522: ...apter 6 Page no 522 JC PHY A 042 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers This page is blank ...

Page 523: ... mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power Never lay a cover down with the painted side on a hard surface 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 OVERVIEW For an overview of the covers refer to Gantry Covers on page 189 List of covers Column Covers section 7 Cable Exit Cover Top Column Cover Left and right Bottom Column Covers Rear and front Front covers Left and right Compression a...

Page 524: ...ompletely the rear locking screws 1 from each col umn half cover 3 Unscrew completely the side locking screws 2 from each col umn half cover 4 Lift and slide the complete half cover towards you to remove it CAUTION Be careful not to pinch or damage cables Note On pilot systems the right cover must be removed before the left cover On production systems the left cover must be removed be fore the rig...

Page 525: ...ION Be careful not to pinch or damage cables 3 Remove the front covers Perform the procedure in reverse order for reinstallation Ensure that the Front covers have been correctly fastened and all blanking disks are correctly installed 7 4 Bottom Column Covers 1 Remove the top column covers section 7 2 and front covers section 7 3 2 Release and remove the two securing screws 1 6 mm allen wrench 3 Re...

Page 526: ...pression Car riage cover 6 Remove the lower and upper parts of the Compression Carriage cover 3 Perform the procedure in reverse order for reinstallation Ensure that the Compression Carriage covers have been cor rectly fastened and all blanking disks are correctly installed 8 2 Arm Covers and Handle 8 2 1 Arm Cover Removal 1 Remove the Compression Carriage covers see section 8 1 2 Release and remo...

Page 527: ... cable ties 10 securing the ground cable 8 Release and remove the four screws 11 two on each side 4 mm allen wrench which secure the paddle holder 9 Remove the paddle holder 10 Release the two halves of the arm cover by remov ing one of the lower screws 12 large screwdriver 11 Carefully remove the arm covers When removing the arm covers pay attention not to damage the Compression board which is co...

Page 528: ...ply excessive force to the side securing screws 11 to avoid breaking the support CAUTION During reassembly of the small pulley 5 double check that its anti rotation key 6 and securing clip 4 are correctly set in place If the key is absent or the belt slides from its position manual compression functions and braking are not available If there is a motorized compression failure patient injury is pos...

Page 529: ...e securing screws slim flat blade Note Plastic caps are not present on pilot system covers 7 Remove the two securing screws 1 at the rear of the tube 2 5 mm allen wrench 8 Remove one of the securing screws 5 near the face shield attachment These screws are not present on pilot systems since pilot systems use a hook to hold the cov ers together at this location of the Tube Head 9 Hold the left and ...

Page 530: ...n correctly fastened and all blanking disks are correctly installed 10 DETECTOR COVERS 10 1 Removing pilot systems detector covers 1 Set the arm to a convenient height 2 Turn the Gantry power OFF 3 Remove the Bucky 4 Release and remove the securing screws 1 4 mm allen wrench while holding the lower cover 2 5 Remove the Detector lower cover 2 6 Remove the Detector upper cover 3 10 2 Replacing pilot...

Page 531: ... securing screws 3 4 mm allen wrench while holding the lower cover 2 Make sure that both screws which secure the lower cover are tightened with equal pressure 4 Replace the Bucky 5 Switch the Gantry power ON 10 3 Removing production systems detector covers 1 Set the arm to a convenient height 2 Switch the Gantry power OFF 3 Remove the Bucky 4 Release and remove the screws 1 securing the latch hook...

Page 532: ...when the latch hooks are mounted while holding the lower cover 2 7 Remove the Detector lower cover 2 8 Remove the Detector upper cover 3 10 4 Replacing production systems detector covers 1 Replace the Detector upper cover 1 2 Replace the Detector lower cover 2 3 Reattach the cover securing screws 3 while holding the lower cover 2 4 Reattach the latch hooks 4 5 Reattach the screws 5 4 mm allen wren...

Page 533: ... A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers Page no 533 Chapter 6 JC PHY A 044 fm which secure the latch hook are tightened with equal pressure 6 Replace the Bucky 7 Switch the Gantry power ON 8 Ensure that the Detector cover has been correctly fastened 5 3 ...

Page 534: ...Chapter 6 Page no 534 JC PHY A 044 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers This page is blank ...

Page 535: ...ation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Electrical Installation Page no 535 Chapter 7 Chap Electrical Install fm CHAPTER 7 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION This chapter contains information for the electrical installation and checking of the Senographe system ...

Page 536: ...Chapter 7 Page no 536 Chap Electrical Install fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Electrical Installation This page is blank ...

Page 537: ...Steering Guide Step Action Job Card Comments Done Preparation 1 Check the review workstations in use for first second review vs IHE Mam mography Image Profile compliance Make decision with customer to upgrade ADS SW See OM Addendum 5427687 1 199 2 Contact your local OLC to schedule Insite Checkout request modem address and software keys Contact printer supplier representative Preliminary Power up ...

Page 538: ...Manual Compres sion Check and Calibration on page 583 Configuration 16 AWS configuration Job Card ELE A013 AWS Configura tion on page 573 17 Network connection and configuration Job Card ELE A021 Networking Con nection and Configuration on page 625 18 Optionally change the internal IP address of the Senographe system Job Card ELE A050 Changing Senographe Internal IP Addresses on page 757 Optional ...

Page 539: ... the LCD Monitor Job Card ELE A043 AWS Monitor Cal ibration on page 729 31 Flat Field Check Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 32 Image Acquisition ACR Score Job Card ELE A037 Image Acquisition and ACR Score on page 705 33 Acquisition in AOP mode Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check on page 707 Detector Dose check Germany only 34 Compliance with Germany for Detec tor Dose J...

Page 540: ...Chapter 7 Page no 540 SC ELE A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Scenario ELE A001 Electrical Installation This page is blank ...

Page 541: ... is open i e in the 0 position 3 Close the main hospital supply circuit breaker 4 Connect the multimeter set to 20 VDC scale to the Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 between test points PT15 VE and PT12 0VE See illustration 5 Close generator Mains Supply Switch 200 S1 i e turn it to the 1 position and read the multimeter immediately It must read 8 2 VDC CAUTION If the voltmeter reading is outside t...

Page 542: ...plate To avoid any risk of electric shock do not touch any of the other components on the sup ply later models are protected by a transparent cover 3 On the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 measure the DC voltage 12 V nominal between PT3 and PT4 The voltage must be in the range 11 5 VDC to 12 5 VDC 4 On the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 measure the DC voltage 12 V nominal between PT5 and PT4 ...

Page 543: ...ured 6 FIRST POWER ON After installation of the system it must be powered up before installing options or configuring the system CAUTION When you are ready to apply power to the Senographe system for the first time carry out the following steps Note If any problem is encountered during the first power up refer to the checklists for power up down given in Job Card CHK A001 Boot Init and Shutdown on...

Page 544: ... the Password field and click the OK button The Browser appears 6 Check that the ADS Computer can communicate with the IDC as follows a Check that the IDC is powered up power LED on the front of the IDC is lit on and the fans are working If the IDC is not powered up ensure that the power switch on the front of the IDC is set to on I b From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a...

Page 545: ...mal Shutdown Procedure Switch power off at the AWS Monitor by clicking the System Shutdown button on the Browser win dow Wait for complete system and UPS shut down about 2 minutes check that no LEDs remain lit on the UPS before continuing To power down the Gantry and Generator system only press the switch STOP on the X ray Console Never switch off at the UPS directly except in emergency risk of da...

Page 546: ...Chapter 7 Page no 546 JC ELE A 006 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A006 First System Power On This page is blank ...

Page 547: ...drop when the generator draws maximum power This procedure checks that the resistance is within acceptable limits 6 1 Preparation 1 Switch off the system set the Generator power switch 200 S1 to the 0 position 2 Disconnect voltage selection wire SEL from its lug on the Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 recon nect it to the 0 V lug Notice The 0 V position of the SEL wire is reserved exclusively for ...

Page 548: ...resistance RL according to the formula RL V1 V2 V2 RINT where RINT the internal resistive load depends on the nominal AC supply voltage V Voltage V RINT Ω 200 11 208 11 220 11 240 11 4 Turn off the Senographe set the generator power switch to the 0 position and switch off AC power 5 Disconnect the line voltage selection wire SEL from the 0 V lug on the Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 Reconnect th...

Page 549: ...d with the foam ring attached and must be configured in Direct mode The Away Direct button toggles between away and direct modes To select the Direct mode keep pressing the Away Direct button until D is displayed on the lower left corner of the Spot Meter screen 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 40 minutes Remove canon and place foam ring Luminance Meter ATTENTION 1 When putting th...

Page 550: ...summarized in the following steering guide 7 1 1 Resolution Configuration on V3 Control Stations 1 Reboot the ADS Workstation to ensure that you are at the first Login prompt A series of system initialization messages appears on the screen then the Login prompt appears 2 Login as the root user as follows a At the Login prompt enter root b At the Password prompt enter operator A command prompt appe...

Page 551: ... space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue 9 At the kdmconfig Resolution Colors Selection page that appears use the cursor keys to move to the 2048x1536 256 colors option and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue 10 At the kdmconfig View and Edit Window System Configuration page that appears leave the No changes needed Test Save and Exit option s...

Page 552: ...tor option by entering SetMonitorConfig sh 3MP The SetMonitorConfig sh script runs as follows Running as sdc Run SetMonitorConfig sh script with input SET 3MP Enter root password Password Sun Microsystems Inc SunOS 5 10 Generic January 2005 Run SetScreenConfig script with input 3MP Remove existing setscreenenv file Creating symbolic link export home sdc senovision scripts setscreenenv export home ...

Page 553: ...em according to the pro cedure described in section 7 2 7 7 2 1 General Controls This section descibes the general use of the 21 inch 3 MP Monitor control buttons and power LED The right hand side of the 21 inch 3 MP Monitor contains various buttons and a LED as shown below Control Panel Existing Mode Setting Item Function Description 1 Power Indicator LED Indicates the monitor s operational statu...

Page 554: ... 21 inch 3 MP Monitor to use Landscape mode 1 Ensure that the 21 inch 3 MP Monitor is powered OFF 2 While pressing the Mode button press the Power button to power on the 21 inch 3 MP Monitor The monitor powers up and the Signal Selection window appears 3 From the Signal Selection window select the Single Link 10bit item and press the Enter button 4 From the Orientation window that appears select t...

Page 555: ...indow 2 On the Screen Manager window that appears leave the Setup item selected and press the Enter button 3 On the Setup window that appears leave the Mode Preset item selected and press the Enter but ton 4 On the Setup Mode Preset window that appears use the Up Down navigation menu buttons to select each mode and the Left Right navigation buttons to change the state to On Off as follows 1 DICOM ...

Page 556: ... only the 1 DICOM mode will be available 7 2 5 Change the Mode Window Duration Time 1 Press the Enter button to display the Screen Manager window 2 On the Screen Manager window that appears keep pressing the Right navigation button until the Others item selected and press the Enter button 3 On the Others window that appears keep pressing the Right navigation button until the Menu Set tings item se...

Page 557: ...orming the luminance tests 2 Insert the Test Pattern CD ROM into the DVD ROM drive of the ADS Computer 3 In the Browser click the CDR read write icon and select Query from the menu that appears A Media Browser CDR window appears 4 From the Media Browser CDR window a Select the AAPM Test Patterns patient b Select the 1K LUMIN Study ID c Select the 2 Series d Click the Disk icon under the Series lis...

Page 558: ... now includes a Patient called AAPM Test Patterns which contains the test patterns required to check the luminosity of the 21 inch 3MP Monitor 6 In the Browser click the CDR read write icon and select Detach from the menu that appears The DVD ROM drive of the ADS Computer opens 7 Remove the Test Pattern CD ROM and close the DVD ROM drive 8 From the Patient List in the Browser select the AAPM Test ...

Page 559: ...of the luminance at the center of the white box Allow the displayed luminance value on the luminance meter to stablize If the value of the luminance meter is 400 cd m no further action is required If the value of the luminance meter is less than or greater than 400 cd m proceed as follows to ensure that the maximum luminance of the central white box is at 400 cd m a Press again the Mode button on ...

Page 560: ... Monitor is powered OFF 2 While pressing the Enter button press the Power button to power on the 21 inch 3 MP Monitor The lock state of the control buttons on the 21 inch 3 MP Monitor will change from its existing state i e unlocked or locked to the other state i e locked or unlocked 3 Press the Enter button to see if the Screen Manager window appears If the Screen Manager window appears the contr...

Page 561: ...displayed on the X ray Console If on the first power up CHECKSUM ERROR GEN appears proceed as follows Reload the Generator saved parameters using the delivered diskette PN 2152250 or CD R that are to be used to save the generator parameters This diskette is labeled with the same product loca tor number as your Senographe system The CD R is labeled as the Generator Backup The files are identified a...

Page 562: ...DICAL BEEP and ensure that YES is selected 5 Ask the doctor for the desired maximum height during automatic decompression between 10 cm and 38 cm Select SETUP MEDICAL DECOMP HEIGHT Press or on the X ray Console repeat edly until the desired maximum height appears Perform a checksum SETUP GENE INSTAL CKSUM CKSUM and return to the Application mode 4 4 Set Maximum Generator Output Power Select SETUP ...

Page 563: ...Generator is turned on Recording dates and times in the error log Recording the date of last access to installation mode If it is necessary to change the date or time on the Gantry manually note the following points Dates menu path SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE CONFIG DAY are entered in the form DD MM YY e g for February 14th 2003 you must enter 14 02 03 Time menu path SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE CONFIG HOUR ...

Page 564: ...INSTAL GENE CONFIG CONFIG PRES PRS IDC Perform a checksum SETUP GENE INSTAL CKSUM CKSUM and return to the Application mode 5 4 Check Paddle Deformation Parameters Check the values of paddle deformation parameters against the default factory settings are all set to 0 000 E 0 These parameters alter the X ray exposure behavior in AOP mode Do not perform any modification of the Paddle deformation para...

Page 565: ...its Lower lift travel limit Upper lift travel limit Lift travel limit Measured then set Floor Ceiling Upper optical fork position Derived from the lift travel limit plus the lower lift travel limit Set in the ADS soft ware and must corre spond to upper optical fork position Top Middle Bottom Lift Potentiometer Lower Reference Voltage Lift Potentiometer Upper Reference Voltage 650 mm this automatic...

Page 566: ...ghts and minimum required ceiling corresponding to each of the three different Lift Travel Limits are as follows Note The information in the table above assumes that you have accurately set the lower lift travel limit to 670 2 mm from the floor Goal of Calibration Select the upper optical fork position to avoid collision with the ceiling Calibrate the Lift Potentiometer Set the lift lower limit an...

Page 567: ... The ceiling height ranges quoted above assume that there is a 70 mm marginal space between the top of the Tube Head and the ceiling 6 2 2 Lower Limit Adjustment Lift Potentiometer Lower Reference Voltage at 0 mm Use the following steps to set the lower lift travel limit which corresponds to the Lift Potentiometer Lower Reference Voltage 1 Launch the Service Desktop see Launching the Service Deskt...

Page 568: ...r Lower Reference Voltage The Gantry LCD updates with the following message Lower position successfully calibrated Move to upper position When reached press FOV button You must now proceed to Upper Limit Adjustment Lift Potentiometer Upper Reference Voltage at 650 mm on page 568 to set the upper Lift Potentiometer Upper Reference Voltage 6 2 3 Upper Limit Adjustment Lift Potentiometer Upper Refere...

Page 569: ...it Completion Use the following steps to save the calibration results and set the lift travel limit 1 On the Lift Position and Upper Limit Calibration page click the Save button A Lift Optical Fork Position Calibration page on the appears prompting you to select the upper optical fork position 2 Click the button corresponding to the upper optical fork position that you set in Upper Optical Fork Po...

Page 570: ...Chapter 7 Page no 570 JC ELE A 010 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A010 Set Lift Travel Limits This page is blank ...

Page 571: ...hen operating with X rays for example stay behind the radiation screen during an X ray exposure 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 GENERATOR TESTING You must check the Generator kV mA and mAs calibrations which have already been made in the fac tory 6 1 Set Up the Generator for Testing 1 Configure the Senographe for the following exposure Mode manual 2 point Focal spot large Track Mo Filter Mo mAs 60 lower mA...

Page 572: ...ement on page 1663 followed by Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 9 Take two exposures at 40 kV and 50 mAs at an interval of 30 seconds No arcing must be detected If arcing is detected perform the procedure given in Job Card CAL A007 Automatic X ray Tube Warm Up on page 1661 10 Reconfigure the Senographe to 30 kV and 25 mAs Take one exposure for each of the three follow ing f...

Page 573: ...l 1 Field Engineer Time 40 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Display the Configuration System Overview Window 1 From the Browser launch the Service Desktop see Launching the Service Desktop on page 120 2 From the Service Desktop click the Configuration button The System Overview appears showing the current site and communications settings 6 2 Set Site Informati...

Page 574: ...n and Config uration on page 625 Do not use the following characters in the Station Name _ etc ONLY USE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACES It is also possible to use the characters dash and dot Ensure that the Station Name is no more than 12 characters long 3 If there is more than one Senographe system on the hospital site the names chosen must clear ly differentiate between them For example b...

Page 575: ...activate Auto Delete or change Auto Delete settings without agreement from the customer e The Language check boxes allow you to set the required application language for the Browser Worklist and Viewer Changing the language impacts the only the Browser Worklist and Viewer The Service Desktop remains in English f The Edit Patient radio buttons allow you to determine whether the Edit Patient functio...

Page 576: ...Timeout is never for V1 V2 Control Stations and 15 minutes on V3 V4 Control Stations If the default Auto Logoff Timeout needs changing use the following steps 1 Click the Logout button in the Browser to return to the ADS Login Screen 2 At ADS Login Screen login as the admin user the default factory password is admin 3 Configure the Auto Logoff Timeout delay as follows For V1 V2 Control Stations do...

Page 577: ... Card ELE A013 AWS Configuration Page no 577 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 013 fm For V3 V4 Control Stations do the following a Click the Configuration tab b Type a new Auto Logoff Timeout delay value in minutes in the Inactivity Timeout minutes field c Clickthe Apply Configuration button d Click the Exit button ...

Page 578: ...Chapter 7 Page no 578 JC ELE A 013 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A013 AWS Configuration This page is blank ...

Page 579: ... front and rear collimator blade movement X ray tube housing movement Compression paddle movement to home position Column movement limit stops Coherency between focal spot size magnification and X ray tube housing angulation Grid movement Generator Gantry communications link Gantry CPU board 6 1 Check Gantry Readout Immediately following the power up sequence the Gantry readout must indicate the X...

Page 580: ...hecks 1 Check the operation of each keypad button by performing the operations listed in the table below The button references used are shown in the following illustration Press the top or bottom of button 4 for rotation in the direction of the arrow to right or left according to the position of the keypad 2 Check that movements stop automatically when the keypad button is released Perform each of...

Page 581: ...calibration of the compression force display on the Gantry readout Measure one point at 5 daN and one point at 15 daN The value on the Gantry readout must agree within 1 daN If it does not performJob Card CAL A048 Calibration of Compression Force Sensor on page 1709 If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available this verification can be done as follows Lowering the paddle close t...

Page 582: ...lue of compression force between 5 kg and 15 kg 5 If either or both of the above checks gives an unsatisfactory result perform the procedures described in Job Card CAL A050 Compression Thickness Calibration on page 1721 6 10 Check Stop Motion Buttons Check the red stop motion buttons located on either side of the Gantry column base Both of these buttons must be tested Press one of the stop motion ...

Page 583: ...ession Arm to the vertical position 2 Place a phantom on the Bucky 3 Turn the manual compression knob to apply compression to the phantom until the torque limiter pre vents any further increase in compression Note the value of compression displayed on the Gantry readout Notice When applying compression use your fingers to turn the compression knob Do not allow the mass of your hand and arm to rest...

Page 584: ...ng care to ensure that it enters the hole in the lock washer It must not exert pressure on the washer 4 Repeat the check and adjustment procedures until the measured maximum compression force is within the specification 7 2 Adjustment Measured Value Under the Limit If the measured value of maximum compression force is less than the lower limit of 27 daN proceed as follows 1 Remove the set screw fr...

Page 585: ...ield engineer the value of the hostname and AET that was set on the printer and ensure that you use these same values when configuring the printer on the GE system 5 2 GE Equipment Hostname Declaration on the Printer The hostname in DICOM format of the GE system must be declared on the printer so that it is permitted to print images to the printer Work with the printer manufacturer field engineer ...

Page 586: ... 192 100 009 005 but type 192 100 9 5 instead The alive answer from the system means that the Network printer can be reached from the Acquisition Workstation system through the network If the system displays unknown host your printer may not be correctly declared on the network If the system displays Network unreachable you probably have given the printer an IP address incom patible with your Revi...

Page 587: ...am Dryview 6850 Fuji FMDPL and Fuji Drypix 4000 5000 7000 printers Note Before using the values quoted below to configure a printer contact the printer manufacturer FE to check the software version installed on the printer 6 3 Set Print Annotation Level Ask the customer which print annotation model they want Depending on the customer s requirement set the Printing Annotations selection to the one ...

Page 588: ... JC ELE A 020 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices ILLUSTRATION 1 THE DICOM PRINTER PARAMETERS WINDOW ...

Page 589: ... sent to the printer When the 10 pixel depth check box is selected 10 bits per pixel are sent to the printer When the 12 pixel depth check box is selected 12 bits per pixel are sent to the printer Note If the pixel depth is set to 10 bits per pixel or 12 bits per pixel there may be problems with images printed from the Scrapbook The recommended pixel depth setting is 8 bits per pixel 6 4 2 Other P...

Page 590: ... wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e g Konica DPRO793 Hostname Use printer Hostname if any or a name unique to your Network e g dpro793 Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be DPRO793 Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 4596 H 5674 10...

Page 591: ...ographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 591 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 2 TYPICAL KONICA 793 ENTRIES ...

Page 592: ...y or a name unique to your Network e g dpro873 Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be dpro873 Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 4596 H 5674 10 in x 12 in W 5766 H 6826 Pixel size 43 75 Configuration information Must not contain any value De...

Page 593: ...ographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 593 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 3 TYPICAL KONICA 873 ENTRIES ...

Page 594: ... your Network e g DSAXYSM Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 136 Application Entity Title AET Default value is AXYS_M however contact the Agfa engineer for the correct AET value to use Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 3828 H 4958 10 in x 12 in W 4892 H 5890 Pixel size 50 Conf...

Page 595: ...nographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 595 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 4 TYPICAL AGFA AXYS ENTRIES ...

Page 596: ...k e g drystar5503 Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 136 Application Entity Title AET Default value is DS5500 however contact the Agfa engineer for the correct AET value to use Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 3828 H 4958 10 in x 12 in W 4892 H 5900 Pixel size 50 Configuratio...

Page 597: ...e DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 597 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 5 TYPICAL AGFA DRYSTAR 5500 5503 ENTRIES ...

Page 598: ...f any or a name unique to your Network e g DS4500M Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 136 Application Entity Title AET Must be DS4500 Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 3828 H 4958 10 in x 12 in W 4892 H 5900 Pixel size 50 Configuration information Must be PERCEPTION_LUT OEM919...

Page 599: ...phe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 599 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 6 TYPICAL AGFA DRYSTAR 4500M ENTRIES ...

Page 600: ...Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be 8900 Port number Must be 5040 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 5056 H 6368 10 in x 12 in W 6368 H 7656 Pixel size 39 08 Configuration information Must be LUT gsdfaa0p w8u 3 Density Must be Min no value Max 360 for DVM film type Max 415 for DVM film type Magnification type Must be Cubic Smo...

Page 601: ...phe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 601 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 7 TYPICAL KODAK DRYVIEW 8900 ENTRIES ...

Page 602: ...g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be DV6800 Port number Must be 5040 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 5056 H 6368 10 in x 12 in W 6368 H 7656 Pixel size 39 08 Configuration information Must be LUT gsdfaa0p w8u 3 Density Must be Min no value Max 360 for DVM film type Max 415 for DVM film type Magnification type Must be Cubic Smoothing factor ...

Page 603: ...phe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 603 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 8 TYPICAL KODAK DRYVIEW 6800 ENTRIES ...

Page 604: ...trator e g 3 48 15 141 Application Entity Title AET Must be DV5850 Port number Must be 5040 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 3848 H 4864 10 in x 12 in W 4864 H 5880 Pixel size 50 Configuration information Must be LUT gsdfaa0p w8u 3 Density Must be Min 20 Max 360 for DVM film type Max 415 for DVM film type Magnification type Must be Cubic Smoothing factor ...

Page 605: ...e DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 605 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 9 TYPICAL CARESTREAM DRYVIEW 5850 ENTRIES ...

Page 606: ...or e g 3 249 15 142 Application Entity Title AET Must be DV6850 Port number Must be 5040 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 4924 H 6224 10 in x 12 in W 6224 H 7526 Pixel size 39 08 Configuration information Must be LUT gsdfaa0p w8u 3 Density Must be Min 20 Max 360 for DVM film type Max 415 for DVM film type Magnification type Must be Cubic Smoothing factor ...

Page 607: ... DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 607 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 10 TYPICAL CARESTREAM DRYVIEW 6850 ENTRIES ...

Page 608: ...COM printer label Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e g Kodak 8610 Hostname Use printer Hostname if any or a name unique to your Network e g kodak1printer Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be IMN_9410 Port number Must be 1024 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Mus...

Page 609: ...phe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 609 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 11 TYPICAL KODAK DRYVIEW 8610 ENTRIES ...

Page 610: ...bel Any name you wish to see appearing on the Film Composer e g Kodak 8600 Hostname Use printer Hostname if any or a name unique to your Network e g kodak1printer Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be IMN_9410 Port number Must be 1024 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10...

Page 611: ...phe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 611 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 12 TYPICAL KODAK DRYVIEW 8600 ENTRIES ...

Page 612: ...00 or Fuji Drypix 7000 Hostname Must be drypixstd Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be DRYPIXSTD Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 3960 H 4890 10 in x 12 in W 4790 H 5900 Pixel size 100 Configuration information Must not contain any value...

Page 613: ... Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 613 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 13 TYPICAL FUJI DRYPIX 4500 5000 AND 7000 ENTRIES ...

Page 614: ...stname if any or a name unique to your Network e g Fuji1FMDPL Network address A unique IP address given by the hospital Network Administrator e g 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be FMDPLFINE Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 3907 H 4931 11 in x 14 in W 5075 H 7199 Pixel size 50 Configuration information Must be 1 Densi...

Page 615: ...ographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 615 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 14 TYPICAL FUJI FMDPL ENTRIES ...

Page 616: ... 3 48 16 135 Application Entity Title AET Must be UPDF750M Port number Must be 104 Layouts Must be 1 x 1 1 x 2 2 x 1 or 2 x 2 Film size Must be 8 in x 10 in W 4736 H 5856 10 in x 12 in W 5952 H 7040 Pixel size 42 05 Configuration information Must not contain any value Density Must be Min 20 Max 380 Magnification type Must be Cubic Smoothing factor Must not contain any value Trim Must be NO Printer...

Page 617: ...raphe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 617 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 15 TYPICAL SONY UP DF750 ENTRIES ...

Page 618: ...pecific printer The selected printer then uses these two values to build dynamically the right printing LUT correspond ing to the environmental review conditions 1 From the Browser click the Tools menu button and click Review Room Management The Review Room Selection window appears 2 Click the Add button The Review_rooms_parameters window appears 3 In the Review Room Label field type the name you ...

Page 619: ...nt Room Light Light Box Light Carestream 5850 see Note 2 10 5000 Carestream 6850 see Note 2 10 5000 Kodak 6800 see Note 2 10 5000 Kodak 8900 see Note 2 10 5000 Kodak 8600 10 5000 Kodak 8610 10 5000 Konica 793 1 4000 Konica 873 1 4000 Agfa 4500 M 10 4000 Agfa 5500 10 4000 Agfa 5503 10 4000 Agfa AXYS 1 4000 Fuji DryPix 4000 10 4000 Fuji DryPix 5000 10 4000 Fuji DryPix 7000 10 4000 SONY UP DF750 10 4...

Page 620: ...inter on page 620 9 ASSOCIATING A DEFAULT REVIEW ROOM TO A PRINTER 1 From the Browser click the Tools menu button then click Printer Management to display the Dicom printer selection window 2 From the list of registered printers select the printer you want to assign a default review room to 3 Click the Default Room button to display the Default Review Room selection window 4 From the list review r...

Page 621: ...eviewed 4 Click the Print button to print the image you opened 11 ANNOTATION OVERLAP TEST It might be possible to have an overlap of the annotations on the printed film if the site name and the site address are too long This concerns the models 3 4 and stereo if the Stereotaxy option is installed Note If the ELE Steering Guide was correctly followed the site name and the site address have been alr...

Page 622: ...ote If many print annotations are used at the site each of them has to be tested If the printer contained several film sizes each film size has to be tested Note To change the printing annotations use the Annotations window in Medical Preferences Refer to the Browser chapter in the Senographe DS Operator Manual for access to this window No overlap of the annotation must be seen on the printed film...

Page 623: ...edures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices Page no 623 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 020 fm ILLUSTRATION 16 EXAMPLE OVERLAP TEST IMAGE USING PRINT MODEL 3 Patient name must have 64 Ws visible with no interference from the Site Address ...

Page 624: ...er 7 Page no 624 JC ELE A 020 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices This page is blank ...

Page 625: ...d Contact your GE HNS representa tive for details 6 2 Ethernet Connection between AWS and Hospital Network The ADS Computer should have already been connected to the Hospital Network while performing the section 6 6 Network Connections on page 462 within Job Card ELE A021 Networking Connection and Configuration However check that the ADS Computer is still connected to the Hospital Network 6 3 IP A...

Page 626: ... Control Stations which is located in the ADS Computer As mentioned above on the previous page it is recommended that this interface has an external IP address of 192 1 1 100 with a Netmask 255 255 255 0 Running the procedure in the following section sets all the ADS Computer IP addresses back to their default values It also allows you to configure the Senographe system external IP address to your...

Page 627: ...t password enter operator 3 Run the system configuration mode by entering sys unconfig 4 At the warning message that appears answer y yes to continue 5 The AWS shuts down Wait until AWS power has been switched off by the UPS AWS shut down power light on monitor goes out Then press the UPS ON switch on the Generator Cabinet to power up the AWS 6 The AWS starts up in configuration mode 7 The system ...

Page 628: ...reen ensure that Yes is selected for the Networked option and press the F2 key to continue 2 At the DHCP screen ensure that No is selected for the Use DHCP option and press the F2 key to continue 3 At the Primary Network Interface screen ensure that eri0 is selected for the Primary Network Inter face and press the Return key to continue Then press the F2 key to continue Network Connectivity On thi...

Page 629: ... the following characters in the Hostname _ etc ONLY USE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACES It is also possible to use the characters dash and dot Ensure that the Hostname is no more than 12 characters long The Hostname must be the same value as the Station Name that is defined in Job Card ELE A013 AWS Configuration on page 573 5 At the IP Address screen type the external IP address to be used...

Page 630: ...he default value of 255 255 255 0 leave the default Netmask of 255 255 255 0 as is Press the F2 key to continue 8 At the IPV6 screen ensure that No is selected for the Use IPV6 option and press the F2 key to continue 9 At the Confirmation information screen ensure that the correct information appears for the eri0 net work interface and press the F2 key to continue A screen indicating a delay may a...

Page 631: ...se the Down arrow key to move to None Name Service option then press Return to confirm the selection Then press the F2 key to continue Note Do not select NIS or NIS Client services None is the primary selection 12 At the Time Zone screen use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Other Offset from GMT Kerberos Security On this screen Use Kerberos Security Yes No X Name service On this screen To m...

Page 632: ... Press Return to confirm the selection and then press the F2 key to continue 13 At the Offset from GMT screen that appears type 0 for the offset the press Return to confirm the offset value Press the F2 key to continue Time Zone On this screen To make a selection Regions X Africa Asia Eastern United States Other Offset from GMT Other Specify the number of hours difference between 0 Offset From GMT...

Page 633: ...he current root password for the Acqui sition Workstation from the default value of operator If you wish to change it type in the new password and press the Return key when done The password you type is not displayed The default password for root is operator Note Ensure that the caps lock key is not engaged before entering the password If you change the password the system asks you to re enter the...

Page 634: ...ue 2 At the Configure Multiple Network Interface screen ensure that only nge0 is selected from the list of Network Interfaces Press the Return key to confirm the selection and then press the F2 key to continue 3 At the DHCP for nge0 screen ensure that No is selected for the Use DHCP for nge0 option and press the F2 key to continue Specify Yes if the system is connected to Networked Yes No X Networ...

Page 635: ...t use the following characters in the Hostname _ etc ONLY USE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACES It is also possible to use the characters dash and dot Ensure that the Hostname is no more than 12 characters long The Hostname must be the same value as the Station Name that is defined in Job Card ELE A013 AWS Configuration on page 573 5 At the IP Address for nge0 screen type the external IP addr...

Page 636: ...tmask address If the Hospital Network Administrator has not given you a different netmask to the default value of 255 255 255 0 leave the default Netmask of 255 255 255 0 as is Press the F2 key to continue 8 At the IPv6 for nge0 screen ensure that No is selected for the Use IPV6 option and press the F2 key to continue 9 At the Set the Default Route for nge0 screen ensure that None is selected for ...

Page 637: ...ue A screen indicating a delay may appear while the settings for the nge0 network interface are being stored 11 At the Configure Security Policy screen ensure that No is selected for the Configure Kerberos Secu Default Route for nge0 Detect one upon reboot Specify one To specify the default route you can let the software Set the Default Route for nge0 None X X Networked Confirm the following infor...

Page 638: ...lass A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A021 Networking Connection and Configuration rity option and press the F2 key to continue Specify Yes if the system will use the Kerberos security mechanism Configure Kerberos Security Yes No X Configure Security Policy Specify No if this system will use standard UNIX security X ...

Page 639: ...ttings press the F2 key to continue 13 At the Name Service screen use the Down arrow key to move to None Name service option then press Return to confirm the selection Then press the F2 key to continue Note Do not select NIS or NIS services NIS is the primary selection Configure Kerberos Security Confirm the following information If it is correct Confirm Information No Name service NIS NIS On this...

Page 640: ...e F2 key to continue 15 At the Time Zone screen use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Other offset from GMT region Press Return to confirm the selection then press the F2 key to continue Name service Confirm the following information If it is correct Confirm Information None On this screen To make a selection Continents and Oceans X Antartica Arctic Ocean Pacific Ocean Other offset from GMT ...

Page 641: ...eed as follows If the date and time settings are incorrect use the Up or Down arrow keys to move to the field to be modified as applicable Type in the correct value then press Return to confirm the new value and move to the next field When you are happy with the date and time settings press the F2 key to continue If the date and time settings are correct press the F2 key to continue Specify the nu...

Page 642: ... identification screen appears At the prompt press the Return key to accept the default answer no The system reboots Log in to the system according to Login on page 652 Time zone Confirm the following information If it is correct Confirm Information GMTn Date and time 2007 06 09 11 33 Root password If you do not want a root password leave both entries blank Root Password Root password Please enter...

Page 643: ...e Configure Multiple Network Interface screen ensure that only e100g0 is selected from the list of Network Interfaces Press the Return key to confirm the selection and then press the F2 key to continue 3 At the DHCP for e1000g0 screen ensure that No is selected for the Use DHCP for e1000g0 option and press the F2 key to continue Specify Yes if the system is connected to Networked Yes No X Network ...

Page 644: ...he following characters in the Hostname _ etc ONLY USE ALPHANUMERIC CHARACTERS WITHOUT SPACES It is also possible to use the characters dash and dot Ensure that the Hostname is no more than 12 characters long The Hostname must be the same value as the Station Name that is defined in Job Card ELE A013 AWS Configuration on page 573 5 At the IP Address for e1000g0 screen type the external IP address ...

Page 645: ...ress If the Hospital Network Administrator has not given you a different netmask to the default value of 255 255 255 0 leave the default Netmask of 255 255 255 0 as is Press the F2 key to continue 8 At the IPv6 for e1000g0 screen ensure that No is selected for the Use IPV6 option and press the F2 key to continue 9 At the Set the Default Route for e1000g0 screen ensure that None is selected for the...

Page 646: ...ue A screen indicating a delay may appear while the settings for the e1000g0 network interface are being stored 11 At the Configure Security Policy screen ensure that No is selected for the Configure Kerberos Secu Default Route for e1000g0 Detect one upon reboot Specify one To specify the default route you can let the software Set the Default Route for e1000g0 None X X Networked Confirm the follow...

Page 647: ...1 Networking Connection and Configuration Page no 647 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 021 fm rity option and press the F2 key to continue Specify Yes if the system will use the Kerberos security mechanism Configure Kerberos Security Yes No X Configure Security Policy Specify No if this system will use standard UNIX security X ...

Page 648: ...ttings press the F2 key to continue 13 At the Name Service screen use the Down arrow key to move to None Name service option then press Return to confirm the selection Then press the F2 key to continue Note Do not select NIS or NIS services NIS is the primary selection Configure Kerberos Security Confirm the following information If it is correct Confirm Information No Name service NIS NIS On this...

Page 649: ... key to continue 15 At the NFSv4 Domain Name screen use the Up or Down arrow keys to select the Use the NFSv4 domain derived by system option Press Return to confirm the selection then press the F2 key to continue Name service Confirm the following information If it is correct Confirm Information None NFS version 4 uses a domain name The current NFSv4 default domain is NFSv4 Domain Name X Use the ...

Page 650: ...p or Down arrow keys to select the Other offset from GMT region Press Return to confirm the selection then press the F2 key to continue Confirm the following information If it is correct press F2 to change any information press F4 Confirm Information for NFSv4 Domain NFSv4 Domain Name Value to be derived dynamically On this screen To make a selection Continents and Oceans X Antartica Arctic Ocean ...

Page 651: ...eed as follows If the date and time settings are incorrect use the Up or Down arrow keys to move to the field to be modified as applicable Type in the correct value then press Return to confirm the new value and move to the next field When you are happy with the date and time settings press the F2 key to continue If the date and time settings are correct press the F2 key to continue Specify the nu...

Page 652: ...nce between the two entries the system will request it again Press the F2 key to continue 22 When the configuration is complete a System identification message appears System identification is completed The system then automatically reboots Log in to the system according to Login on page 652 7 5 Login The configuration process is now complete On completion of the boot sequence the console login pr...

Page 653: ...urn to sdc user by entering exit You are returned to the command prompt as sdc user 6 Open the etc rc2 d S93route file with the textedit command by entering textedit etc rc2 d S93route The etc rc2 d S93route file appears in an X Windows based TextEdit application window 7 In the TextEdit application window type the following four lines separated by carriage returns bin sh Section for routing echo ...

Page 654: ...d a max imum speed up to 1000 Mbit s full duplex negotiated by the workstation The workstation Z400 computer on V4 Control Stations uses a network interface on the motherboard which is called e1000g0 By default the e1000g0 interface is configured for auto negotiation yes and a maximum speed up to 1000 Mbit s full duplex negotiated by the workstation 9 1 Querying the Current Network Interface Setti...

Page 655: ...priate speed If you are disabling auto negotia tion you must consult the hospital network administrator to determine the maximum speed supported by the hospital switch port connected to the Control Station Any speeds that are not supported by the hos pital switch port must be disabled on the network interface eri0 nge0 e1000g0 before disabling the auto negotiation capabilities TABLE 1 POSSIBLE NET...

Page 656: ...set dev e1000g0 adv_autoneg_cap 0 6 Ping the IP address given to you by the hospital network engineer by entering ping ip address If the ping test works all speeds are supported and only auto negotiation is not supported If the ping test fails the highest supported speed needs determining go to step 7 for V3 V4 Con trol Stations or go to step 11 for V1 V2 Control Stations 7 Disable 1000 Mbit s Ful...

Page 657: ... network engineer by entering ping ip address If the ping test works the highest speed supported is 10 Mbit s Full Duplex If the ping test fails the highest supported is 10 Mbit s Half Duplex 15 Enable the Senographe firewall by entering etc rc2 d S65ipfboot start 16 Logout as root by entering exit 9 2 2 Disabling Auto negotiation from the Command Line To set the auto negotiation to off on the net...

Page 658: ...n ning in auto negotiation no mode with the maximum speed supported by the hospital switch To do this use the following steps 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 2 Log in as root as follows a At the ADS prompt enter su b When requested to specify the root password enter operator 3 Ensure that ...

Page 659: ...Typing the echo lines help you to locate any possible faults during boot in case of mistyping the router or auto negotiation information Note The example above includes sections for both declaring a router and disabling auto negotiation Type one or both sections according to your requirements If the maximum speed supported by the hospital switch port connected to the Control Station is less than t...

Page 660: ...he Control Station is less than that of the nge0 interface add appropriate commands from Table 1 on page 655 on each new line to disable the faster speeds that are not supported If the hospital switch port does not support 1000 Mbit s full duplex but supports all other speeds add the following line ndd set dev nge0 adv_1000fdx_cap 0 If the hospital switch port does not support 1000 Mbit s full dup...

Page 661: ...isabled so there is no need disable this mode within the etc rc2 d S93route file If the maximum speed supported by the hospital switch port connected to the Control Station is less than that of the e1000g0 interface add appropriate commands from Table 1 on page 655 on each new line to disable the faster speeds that are not supported If the hospital switch port does not support 1000 Mbit s full dup...

Page 662: ...for an IP address of a known node on the network that is alive and reachable by a network ping command 2 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 3 Log in as root as follows a At the ADS prompt enter su b When requested to specify the root password enter operator 4 Disable the Senographe firewall by ...

Page 663: ...ping from the remote hosts for testing purposes 3 TOOLS None 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS No specific safety precautions are applicable 6 PREREQUISITES Obtain full details of the addresses names and characteristics of the hosts to be declared from the net work administrator concerned and or Remote Host Conformance statement documents 6 1 Manage ...

Page 664: ...o select it Click the appropriate button at the bottom of the window to Add or Remove a host Click Update to apply the changes or Done button on V1 V2 Control Stations OK on V3 V4 Control Stations to close the Remote Host Selection window without applying changes PACS Archiver that supports storage and query retrieve Q R using a shared AE Title for both storage and Q R e g AGFA does support storag...

Page 665: ...f remote host devices review workstation Non Storage Commitment capable Archival device and Storage Commitment capable Archival device Host Label Enter the name you want to give to the icon that will represent the remote host Host Name Enter the host name provided by the hospital network administrator Application Entity Title Enter the Application Entity Title AET Network Address The network addre...

Page 666: ...e found in the file export home sdc Prefs SdCRHosts For this reason it is not possible to use ping telnet spray and sim ilar commands using the hostname The IP address must be used instead For example to ping the MR operator console from the workstation do not use usr sbin ping MR01_OC0 Instead use the IP address e g usr sbin ping 192 9 200 1 Though it is not mandatory to declare hosts in the etc ...

Page 667: ... of Registered Hosts perform the following steps 1 In the List of registered hosts section within the Remote Host Selection window CS V1 V2 version shown click the host name of the host that you intend to update 2 Click the Update button The Remote Host Parameters window appears like the following which contains the existing details of the select host Append the required fields in the Remote Host ...

Page 668: ... may need to append one or more of the following fields Storage Commitment Set to Yes if the Archival device DICOM 3 0 Conformance Statement lists this feature set to No if the Statement does not list the feature If Storage Commitment is set to No set Message Send to Yes if you want an S to appear in the Report Status column of the Study or Exam list when a study has been sent to the Archival devi...

Page 669: ... returned to the Remote Host Selection window 4 Click the Done button on V1 V2 Control Stations or OK button on V3 V4 Control Stations to close the Remote Host Selection window 5 For Senographe systems using ADS versions 31 27 and above you must reload the Senographe system IP Filters so that the recently deleted network host no longer has access through the Senographe system firewall via the DICO...

Page 670: ...Chapter 7 Page no 670 JC ELE A 022 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A022 Declare Network Hosts This page is blank ...

Page 671: ...tes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS No specific safety precautions are applicable 5 PREREQUISITES Obtain full details of the hostname Application Entity Title and IP address to be declared from the net work administrator or worklist provider concerned 6 PROCEDURE 1 From the Browser click the Tools menu button then click Worklist management The RIS host selection window like the following appears which displa...

Page 672: ...e defined in Job Card ELE A021 Net working Connection and Configuration on page 625 Otherwise you will not be able to update your worklist Example If the AWS hostname and Station Name is aws1 the Application Entity Title declared inside the worklist server MUST be WL_aws1 The port number is always 4006 Note Incorrect declaration of Application Entity Title is the most common issue related to workl...

Page 673: ...apter 7 JC ELE A 023 fm 5 In the Browser click the Worklist button The Worklist browser window like the following appears If Sort by Date Time does not function correctly work it is likely that the Solaris operating system lan guage is not English Only the application language must be the local one Click to perform RIS Query See next page for settings ...

Page 674: ...eshing using All systems in modality select All systems Worklist servers cannot always handle a filtered query such as All systems in modality This is since the query places the AWS hostname in the DICOM tag 0040 0001 Scheduled Station AE Title 8 Click Save as default to freeze the selection 7 TROUBLESHOOTING Use the Ping command to test access to the worklist server Use the SendEcho command to te...

Page 675: ...ure must have been completed See Job Card ELE A022 Declare Network Hosts on page 663 If a PPS server is to be declared for RIS image archiving at least one DICOM remote image storage device must be declared on the ADS This is required so that the DICOM remote image storage device can be associated with the remote PPS server If a PPS server is to be declared for CAD image archiving at least one CAD...

Page 676: ...remote servers associated with the archiving sys tem and or the CAD system The lower section is used for management of the PPS retry mechanism if the remote server returns an error Note The PPS Server Application Entity Title IP address and port number are attached to a specified Image Archiver or CAD system You must therefore select a system from the drop down menu be fore entering PPS configurat...

Page 677: ...te It is recommended that you leave the retry management parameters at their default values three retries and 30 seconds between retries These settings can be adjusted later to suit site specific requirements 7 TROUBLESHOOTING All PPS communication errors are tracked in the ppslog log file stored in the export home sdc logfiles directory If an error is reported in the communication between the ADS...

Page 678: ...ter 7 Page no 678 JC ELE A 024 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A024 Declare Performed Procedure Step Hosts This page is blank ...

Page 679: ...ompression paddle aligns with the chest wall edge of the image receptor 2 SUPPLIES None 3 TOOLS One coin e g a nickel or a 5 Eurocent coin 4 strips of GAFCHROMIC XR M film for each FOV and track tested Aluminium attenuator plate Radiation Protection Plate used to protect the detector from excessive exposure to X rays 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 20 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...

Page 680: ...on Plate is not used and not correctly positioned If the Radiation Protection Plate does not completely cover the field of view a ghost image may be imposed on the digital image receptor at the edge of the Radiation Protection Plate Ensure that the entire field of view of the light field is covered by the Radiation Protection Plate Note To achive better contrast of the edge of the light field it i...

Page 681: ...PS Note To achieve better contrast of the edge of the light field it is recommended to place the XR M film strips with the white side facing the collimator orange side down Note When positioning the XR M film strips you must ensure that that positive markers 1 2 and 3 are inside the light field as shown above X RM Film D X RM Film A X RM Film C X RM Film B Coin Coin attached to chest wall of compr...

Page 682: ...e chestwall edge the Bucky cover might obstruct the XR M such that it cannot lie flat with the surface of the aluminium attenuator If there is ob struction from the Bucky align the 2 reference line of the XR M film instead of the X reference line so that the XR M film avoids the obstruction and can lie flat with the surface of the aluminium attenuator Edge of light field There may be a shadow towa...

Page 683: ...on paddle at the chest wall edge Position the coin near the center of the chest wall edge 2 Place the Radiation Protection Plate on the surface of the Bucky Each side of the Radiation Protec tion Plate must extend about 4 cm beyond each edge of the light field CAUTION The X ray doses used in this procedure can saturate the image receptor if the Radiation Protection Plate is not used and not correc...

Page 684: ...ray field in the digital image the Collimator blades are aligned correctly You can continue with the measurements described in section 7 2 2 and sec tion 7 2 3 7 2 2 XR M Film Measurements From the film and AWS Acquisition Workstation RAW digital image you must make various measure ments as described below Use the Segment tool on the AWS for measurements on the image receptor Measurements both fro...

Page 685: ...he edge of the detector in the plane of the film To determine the deviation Zf proceed as follows a From the RAW digital image in the AWS view the digital image of the XR M film strip and deter mine the location of the detector edge D based on the extent of the XR M film strip imaged In the example image below the edge of the detector D is 9 mm from the X reference marker Insert the determined val...

Page 686: ...face a magnification factor 1 063 is applied to value of S as shown in the Eq 2 above Note You only need to calculate the global scaling factor S once for one of the field edges You can globally apply the determined global scaling factor S to each of the field edges Insert the determined global scaling factor S in the tables above 4 Finally determine the deviation of the x ray field edge from the ...

Page 687: ... in bold italics are measured and items in bold are calculated Mo Mo 19 x 23 paddle Mo Mo Flexible 19 x 23 paddle Rh Rh 19 x 23 paddle Rh Rh Flexible 19 x 23 paddle Step 1 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Geometric Case Wd Pd Z d Zd 1 063 x Z d Coin Bottom Edge Chest Wall Step 1 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Geometric Case Wd Pd Z d Zd 1 063 x Z d Coin Bottom Edge Chest Wall Step 1 2 Step 3 Step 4 Step 5 Geometric...

Page 688: ... 1 there is no problem with the posi tion of the compression paddle relative to the chest wall edge of the detector Continue with the measurements in this procedure to determine whether the edge of the compression paddle passes 3 From the RAW digital image in the AWS use the Segment tool to measure the following in the plane of the segment tool diameter of the coin Wd partial diameter of the coin ...

Page 689: ... Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks Page no 689 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 028 fm where Zd the calculation referenced to the image receptor plane Z d the calculation made using the Segment tool M 1 063 Insert the calculated value of Zd in the tables above and in the tables for action limit 3 on page 692 ...

Page 690: ...ailed Note If either YdA YdD or YdB YdC is more than or equal to 10 mm it is recommended to adjust the position of the Collimator Lamp according to Adjusting a Newly Installed Lamp on page 1388 then re perform the Collimator Checks Mo Mo The magnitudes of deviations at the left edge and right edge ignoring or signs are entered on the data form and added together Similarly the deviations at the ant...

Page 691: ...m and 13 2 mm the test may have failed Consult the physicist regarding the local requirements and if the test has failed re calibrate the Collimator according to Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 then re perform the Collimator Checks If Zi is above 13 2 mm the test has failed Re calibrate the Colli mator according to Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Cali bration on pa...

Page 692: ...in the plane of the image receptor for the coin That is the value Zd determined in step 5 of section 7 2 3 If the value of Zd for the coin is less than 6 6 mm then this action limit has passed If the value of Zd for the coin is more than or equal to 6 6 mm then this action limit has failed Mo Mo 19 x 23 paddle Mo Mo Flexible 19 x 23 paddle Rh Rh 19 x 23 paddle Rh Rh Flexible 19 x 23 paddle If any ...

Page 693: ...T Standard STD and Dose DOSE The changes in exposure parameter selection are expected to affect Contrast to Noise Ratio CNR and Average Glandular Dose AGD It is important to understand that any improvement in CNR is done at the cost of an increase in AGD and vice versa a reduction in AGD yields a diminished CNR If the site operates in the Contrast mode and the emphasis is on imaging mid sized brea...

Page 694: ... on the Generator 7 2 Decide Which Tables You Want to Set 7 2 1 AOP Factory Settings The Senographe system arrives from the factory with Classic tables TAB_A set for each of the three AOP modes DOSE STD and CNT TABLE 2 AOP FACTORY SETTINGS 7 2 2 Local Recommendations France To comply with the Décision du 30 janvier 2006 fixant les modalités du contrôle de qualité des installations de mammographie ...

Page 695: ...rectly to Completion on page 698 If you decide the AOP settings are different from the factory settings follow the steps summarized in illustration 1 At a later date after the very first installation If you decide to change the current AOP settings follow the steps summarized in illustration 1 If the AOP settings were not kept due to performing a DR Job Card or update on the Generator CPU Board or...

Page 696: ...CONFIGURATION Generator Configuration see Setting the AOP Configuration on the Generator on page 697 Configure AOP STD mode Configure AOP DOSE mode Configure AOP CNT mode Check Generator Configuration see Checking the Configuration Set on the Generator on page 697 Check AOP STD mode Check AOP DOSE mode Check AOP CNT mode ADS Computer Configuration see Setting the AOP Configuration on the ADS Compu...

Page 697: ...UP button until you exit the configuration menu on the X ray Console 7 4 2 Checking the Configuration Set on the Generator Use the following steps to check the AOP Configuration that is set according to your requirements for each mode on the Generator 1 Select SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE AOP APOLLO TYPE on the X ray Console 2 From the SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE AOP APOLLO TYPE menu select the mode that you...

Page 698: ... y 6 Once the setaop sh script finishes log out at root user by entering exit 7 Close the command window by entering exit 7 5 2 Checking the AOP Configuration is Set on the ADS Computer Use the following steps to check that the AOP configuration that is set on the ADS Computer 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears...

Page 699: ...ous phantom The ideal response of the detector is a uniform image with no large or small defects with no pixel having a signal much higher or much weaker than its neighbors and with a uniform signal to noise ratio The quantities to look for are thus Brightness Non uniformity the magnitude of low frequency structures large shapes High frequency modulation the magnitude of high frequency structures ...

Page 700: ...mum deviation of the SNR mea sured in each ROI 8 PROCEDURE 1 From the Browser click on the QAP button then select Flat Field Test 2 Follow the on screen instructions You are asked to a Remove the bucky and the compression paddle and to place the flatfield phantom on the image receptor b Verify using the light beam that the collimator is in full field of view c Verify that the tube arm angle is 0 d...

Page 701: ...ify in the raw image that the X ray beam field covers the detector field of view by adjust ing the contrast such that window width is less than 200 If collimator blades are visible at the borders check tube tilt centering and collimator format calibra tions If necessary redo these calibrations 3 The gain map is no longer valid calibrate gain in the MoMo no grid configuration move the phantom sligh...

Page 702: ...duction kit P N 5394527 to reduce this problem occur rence 9 3 3 Check if the flat field phantom is the root cause of the issue 1 Clean the Flat Field Phantom to avoid any dust on it use water if required but no chemical product 2 Run the Flat Field Test locate the bad ROIs or bad pixels adjust the viewing contrast to make the spot visible 3 Move the Flat Field Phantom slightly run the Flat Field ...

Page 703: ...clean and free from dust if not clean it up and redo the gain calibration in the configuration of the test which is failing Move slightly the Flat Field phantom between each X ray exposure 3 Redo the Flat Field test in the same configuration 4 If it is not passing run the bad pixel calibration Move the Flat Field phantom between each X ray exposures 5 Redo the Flat Field test in the same configura...

Page 704: ...s Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test 9 5 Final checks Notice If a new gain calibration was done you are recommended to recalibrate all other gain configura tions After investigating and correcting the suggested causes of error repeat the test If the test still fails call your OLC ...

Page 705: ...ates an ana tomical structure which can be found in breast tissue The acrylic gives attenuation equivalent to a breast of average density compressed to a thickness of 45 mm Starting from the top left hand corner as shown in the illustration the cells are of three types 1 Fibers Six cells represent fibrous calcifications they contain fibers with sections from 1 56 mm to 0 40 mm 2 Specks Calcificati...

Page 706: ...for an accurate assessment of the score If necessary complete the test and repeat it with the phantom in a better position and observe the 16 cells in the phantom image Note the ACR score 1 0 5 or 0 as described in the Test Description above for each cell and total the scores for each type of cell fibers masses speck groups 9 A group of three on screen sliders are displayed at the top right of the...

Page 707: ...g a 10 minute warm up period see the Guidance section reference in section 7 Action Limit 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Objective The test is designed to check the following aspects of system operation Correct choice of parameters in AOP Automatic Optimization of Parameters mode Correct level of SNR Signal to Noise Ratio in the image This check is also described in the section AOP Mode and SNR Check of the Seno...

Page 708: ...TABLE 1 AOP MODE AND SNR CHECK RESULTS 7 ACTION LIMIT If at the end of the results AOP B is displayed the AOP Mode test is successful if the exposure param eters are in accord with the values specified in the following table If at the end of the results AOP B is not displayed the AOP Mode test is successful if the exposure parameters are in accord with the values specified in the following table T...

Page 709: ...ater than the value used with 31 kVp It is only necessary that the mAs remain within the range given in the previous table If the system fails the test and you have a Gantry CPU Board running NSC 1 2 13 or above apply Job Card CAL A049 Compression Paddle Offset Calibration on page 1711 on the compression paddle that you used to perform the test Setting a compression paddle offset may resolve the i...

Page 710: ...Chapter 7 Page no 710 JC ELE A 038 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check This page is blank ...

Page 711: ...uto decompression select MEDICAL DECOMP DECOMP NO on the X ray Console 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Objective This procedure ensures that the Senographe system complies with Detector Dose German regulations 6 2 First Exposure 1 Make one exposure for each AOP mode with 45 mm thickness of acrylic on the Bucky compressed at 4 daN To yield an acrylic thickness of 45 mm stack 4 of the 10 mm plates and the 5 mm plat...

Page 712: ...ksum SETUP GENE INSTAL CKSUM CKSUM 6 4 Exposure with New Parameter A 1 Repeat one exposure for each AOP mode with 4 5 cm acrylic thickness on the Bucky and compres sion of 4 daN 2 Note the exposure parameters in the following table TABLE 2 The radiological thickness must be in the range 4 65 to 4 67 If not check your calculation of the param eter Anew The composition must be in the range 40 to 60 ...

Page 713: ... mode should satisfy most needs However if a higher priority is given to the dose delivered to the patient the DOSE mode may be selected instead If a higher priority is given to the contrast to noise ratio in images the CNT mode may be selected It is important to understand that any improvement in contrast to noise ratio is done at the cost of an increase in glandular dose and vice versa a decreas...

Page 714: ...r 7 Page no 714 JC ELE A 039 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A039 Compliance with Germany for Detector Dose This page is blank ...

Page 715: ... correctly installed and normal application software must be operational 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Introduction The bar code scanner is a fast and accurate tool for scanning bar code symbols in AWS applications It allows patient information to be entered rapidly and accurately Available with an 80 mm CCD scanning window and an integrated keyboard decoder the scanner cap tures an entire bar code symbol insta...

Page 716: ...USB connector on your laptop PC Note Connection or disconnection of the bar code scanner USB cable while the laptop PC is powered on on can cause damage to the bar code reader and or the laptop PC 2 Power on your laptop PC 3 Hold the scanner handle horizontally directly over the bar code printed below 4 Press the scanner trigger located below the scanner handle the scanner red LED beam lights The ...

Page 717: ... for V1 V2 Control Stations Refer to the diagram below when connecting the bar code scanner to V1 V2 Control Stations Respect the connections shown here incorrect connection may prevent boot Keyboard Bar Code Scanner ADS SB150 station USB connectors Trackball or mouse Trackball or Mouse Free Keyboard Bar Code Scanner Base of SB150 Top of SB150 Mouse or Trackball Keyboard Bar Code Scanner Empty ...

Page 718: ...ration for V3 Control Stations Refer to the diagram below when connecting the bar code scanner to V3 Control Stations Respect the connections shown here incorrect connection may prevent boot Keyboard Bar Code Scanner ADS U20 station USB connectors Trackball or mouse Trackball or Mouse Free Keyboard Bar Code Scanner Base of U20 Top of U20 Mouse Keyboard Bar Code Empty or Trackball Scanner ...

Page 719: ... V4 Control Stations Refer to the diagram below when connecting the bar code scanner to V4 Control Stations Respect the connections shown here incorrect connection may prevent boot Keyboard Bar Code Scanner ADS Z400 station USB connectors Trackball or mouse Trackball or Mouse Free Keyboard Bar Code Scanner Base of Z400 Top of Z400 Free Free Mouse Keyboard Bar Code Empty or Trackball Scanner Empty ...

Page 720: ...to the USB connector of the AWS workstation rear panel See Configuration for V1 V2 Control Stations on page 717 Configura tion for V3 Control Stations on page 718 or Configuration for V4 Control Stations on page 719 above for the position of the USB connector 3 Route the Bar Code Scanner cable up the right side of the Control Station framework and secure it to the framework using cable ties 4 Plac...

Page 721: ...pears The Bar Code Scanner beeps when it initalizes The sound of the initializing beep is different to the that when scanning a bar code 6 6 2 Scan a Bar Code Symbol 1 Go to the Patient List on the AWS Browser Create a new patient and click in a field of the Medical Procedure Card 2 Hold the scanner handle horizontally directly over the bar code printed below 3 Press the scanner trigger located be...

Page 722: ...given to activate the scanner and decoder default configuration Refer to the scanner documentation and or the AWS operator manual to activate other functions if necessary 1 Reset the bar code scanner to factory settings After scanning wait until you hear a beep 2 Set language to English Start Language setting Language is English 3 Save settings 4 End settings two beeps Go directly to Section 6 7 t...

Page 723: ...e AWS login screen select clinical from the Username drop down field type clinical in the Password field and click the OK button 3 Wait until the Browser to appear 4 Request a new exposure and open the Medical Procedure Card MPC 5 Click the first text input field Last Name with the left mouse button to set the keyboard focus 6 Complete the MPC by scanning all the symbols given on the following pag...

Page 724: ...nner Option 7 On completion the Medical Procedure Card appears like the image below Sex Male Female Other Save Cancel Start Exam PROCEDURE Study ID Study Description PATIENT Accession Number Procedure Description Operator Performing Physician Referring Physician Scheduled date time Jan 05 2000 16 45 Last Name First Name Patient ID Birth Date Medical Procedure Card ...

Page 725: ...GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A042 Bar Code Scanner Option Page no 725 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 042 fm Enter a date manually ...

Page 726: ...Chapter 7 Page no 726 JC ELE A 042 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A042 Bar Code Scanner Option ...

Page 727: ...eck for loose cable connections If the scanner does not scan a bar code symbol Ensure that the scanning system is programmed to scan the type of bar code you are trying to scan Refer to Section 6 6 3 Check that the bar code symbol is not defaced The scan head must touch and cover every bar and space on the symbol as shown below You can tilt the scanner forward or backward to achieve a successful d...

Page 728: ...Chapter 7 Page no 728 JC ELE A 042 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A042 Bar Code Scanner Option This page is blank ...

Page 729: ...or in contact Direct mode as illustrated below Siemens Serial Spot Meter P N 2319223 must be used with the foam ring attached and must be configured in Direct mode The Away Direct button toggles between away and direct modes To select the Direct mode keep pressing the Away Direct button until D is displayed on the lower left corner of the Spot Meter screen 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engin...

Page 730: ...ard only applies to V1 V2 Control Stations running ADS 32 04 or greater V3 Control Stations running ADS 53 40 or greater and V4 Control Stations 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS No specific safety precautions are applicable 6 PREREQUISITES Before beginning the calibration procedure check which configuration you have Monitor size 18 or 19 Control Station type CS V1 V2 or CS V3 V4 The monitor OSD menu and the c...

Page 731: ...ad Usage The monitor keypad at the bottom right corner of the monitor has four buttons whose functionality is summarized below Control Station Monitor Keypad Unlocking OSD Preliminary Configuration Display SMPTE Move OSD Calibration 1 V3 V4 7 1 7 2 7 3 7 4 7 5 7 6 1 2 V1 V2 7 6 2 Button Action Reference in this Job Card Display main menu or select a sub menu MENU Enter a sub menu or increase a val...

Page 732: ... to open ths OSD menu 7 3 Preliminary Configuration Checks on 18 Monitors 1 Press the MENU button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the MENU button until Service level 2 is selected 2 Press the UP button once then immediately press and hold the DOWN button until the Service level 2 menu re appears as shown below 3 From the Service level 2 menu keep pressing the MENU button until Test ...

Page 733: ...n so select the Calibration menu and press the UP button to enter the Calibration menu 8 In the Calibration menu verify that the Lut Backlight command value is set to OFF and the Select dis play function is set to 4 LUT 1 If these values are set not as recommended change them by selecting it with the MENU button and change it to the correct value with the UP button store the changed settings by pr...

Page 734: ...e SMPTE Test Pattern 3 Ensure that the mouse cursor is in the image of the SMPTE Test Pattern so that is correctly dis played Note Do NOT use the FFDM pattern that is accessible from the browser patient list 4 Once the SMPTE Test Pattern is displayed go to section 7 5 7 5 Move the OSD to a Convenient Position on 18 Monitors It may be desirable to move the OSD display toward the upper part of the s...

Page 735: ...respect to the SMPTE pattern displayed 1 If the OSD main menu is already in a good position go to step 6 2 Press the MENU button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the MENU button until Others is selected and press the UP button to enter the Others menu The OSD menu does not cover the central white level square used to do the monitor contrast brightness or backlight adjustment With mon...

Page 736: ...sition is selected and then keep pressing the UP DOWN button until the position of the OSD is towards the top of the screen 5 When you have reached the desired position for the OSD keep pressing the SET button until Accept changes is selected then press the UP button to exit and save the settings 6 Once the OSD menu is in a convenient position proceed as follows If you have a V3 V4 Control Station...

Page 737: ...MENU button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the MENU button until Auto functions is selected Press the UP button to enter the Auto functions menu Press the UP but ton again to perform an auto calibration The auto calibration takes place 3 Press the MENU button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the MENU button until Service level 2 is selected 4 Press the UP button once ...

Page 738: ...estarts 6 Unlock the OSD see section 7 2 and move the OSD to a convenient position see section 7 5 if necessary 7 Press the MENU button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the MENU button until Brightness Contrast is selected and press the UP button to enter the RGB menu The RGB menu appears 8 Do not change the default Brightness and Contrast values that appear in the RGB menu The defau...

Page 739: ...the luminance of the white level meets the target luminance of 400 cd m 10 cd m 10 Keep pressing the SET button until Accept changes is selected then press the UP button to exit and save the settings 7 6 2 18 Monitor and V1 V2 Control Station 1 The SMPTE pattern is already displayed on the AWS Monitor If not refer to section 7 4 to display the SMPTE pattern 2 Press the MENU button to access the OS...

Page 740: ...erify that the luminance measured is at the limit between not changing and decreasing see the image below which illus trates this adjustment 5 Perform a Monitor contrast adjustment as follows a Stay in the RGB menu and keep pressing the MENU button until Contrast is selected b With the luminance meter positioned on the central white level square of the SMPTE pattern see the image in section 7 4 us...

Page 741: ...o that the luminance of the white level meets the target luminance of 400 cd m 10 cd m 7 Perform a grey level visibility check on the SMPTE pattern by checking that All the grey levels are visible The 5 square remains visible compared to the 0 square The 95 square is visible compared to the 100 square If you do not have these results repeat the calibration steps 2 to 6 8 Keep pressing the SET butt...

Page 742: ...buttons whose functionality is summarized below Control Station Monitor Keypad Unlocking OSD Preliminary Configuration Display SMPTE Move OSD Calibration 1 V3 V4 8 1 8 2 8 3 8 4 8 5 8 6 1 2 V1 V2 8 6 2 Button Case Action Reference in this Job Card 1 Always Scroll Key1 2 Submenu is highlighted Select the submenu Key2 Function is selected Increase change the value 3 Function is selected Decrease cha...

Page 743: ...r 19 Monitors If the message OSD Locked appears on the AWS Monitor when pressing any of the keypads or if you can only access the Hotkey menu see image below the monitor is locked You can unlock the OSD with the following button sequence Press the Key4 button once then press the Key2 button three times You can also use the same button sequence to lock the OSD After unlocking the OSD press the Key1...

Page 744: ... necessary 2 Press the Key1 button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the Key1 button until Ser vice level 2 is selected 3 Press the Key2 button once then immediately press and hold the Key3 button until the Service level 2 menu re appears as shown below 4 From the Service level 2 menu keep pressing the Key1 button until Test and Reset is selected and With monitor connected via DVI V3 ...

Page 745: ...estarts with the factory settings 6 Unlock the OSD see section 8 2 and move the OSD to a convenient position see section 8 5 if necessary 7 Press the Key1 button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the Key1 button until Oth ers is selected 8 Press the Key2 button to enter the Others menu then keep pressing the Key1 button until LUT set tings is selected then press the Key2 button to ent...

Page 746: ...4 If these values are set not as recommended change them by selecting it with the Key1 button and change it to the correct value with the Key2 button store the changed settings by pressing the Key4 button until Accept changes is selected then press the Key2 button to exit and save the settings 10 Once the changed settings are saved go to section 8 3 for the 19 monitor INCORRECT INCORRECT CORRECT C...

Page 747: ... on page 120 2 From the Service Desktop click the Calibration button and select Peripherals AWS monitor then click the START button to display the SMPTE Test Pattern 3 Ensure that the mouse cursor is in the image of the SMPTE Test Pattern so that is correctly dis played Note Do NOT use the FFDM pattern that is accessible from the browser patient list 4 Once the SMPTE Test Pattern is displayed go t...

Page 748: ...fol lowing squares of the SMPTE pattern central white level square central black level square 5 0 grey level square 95 100 grey level square The image below represents a good example of OSD menu position with respect to the SMPTE pattern displayed 1 If the OSD main menu is already in a good position go to step 5 2 Press the Key1 button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the Key1 button...

Page 749: ...until the position of the OSD is towards the top of the screen 4 When you have reached the desired position for the OSD keep pressing the Key4 button until Exit OSD appears Then keep pressing the Key1 button until Accept changes is selected then press the Key2 button to exit and save the settings 5 Once the OSD menu is in a convenient position proceed as follows If you have a V3 V4 Control Station...

Page 750: ...p pressing the Key1 button until Brightness Contrast is selected and press the Key2 button to enter the Brightness Contrast menu The Brightness Contrast appears The Brightness and the Contrast are both set to 50 and cannot be changed 4 With the Backlight slider already selected peform a monitor backlight adjustment With the lumi nance meter positioned on the central white level square of the SMPTE...

Page 751: ...y1 button to access the OSD main menu then keep pressing the Key1 button until Auto functions is selected and press the Key2 button to enter the Auto functions menu 4 In the Auto functions menu keep pressing the Key1 button until Execute selected auto functions is selected and press the Key2 button to perform an auto calibration The auto calibration takes place 5 If necessary unlock the OSD see se...

Page 752: ...d is at the limit between not changing and decreasing see the image below which illus trates this adjustment 8 Perform a Monitor contrast adjustment as follows a Stay in the Brightness Contrast menu and keep pressing the Key1 button until Contrast is selected b With the luminance meter positioned on the central white level square of the SMPTE pattern see the image in section 8 4 use the Key2 butto...

Page 753: ...value so that the luminance of the white level meets the target luminance of 400 cd m 10 cd m 10 Perform a grey level visibility check on the SMPTE pattern by checking that All the grey levels are visible The 5 square remains visible compared to the 0 square The 95 square is visible compared to the 100 square If you do not have these results repeat the calibration steps 2 to 9 11 Keep pressing the...

Page 754: ...Chapter 7 Page no 754 JC ELE A 043 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A043 AWS Monitor Calibration This page is blank ...

Page 755: ...s 1 Firstly install the Core User Publications using the instructions described in section 7 of this Job Card 2 Then if supplied install the each of the Options User Publications using the instructions described in section 7 of this Job Card 3 Once all Core and Options User Publications are installed restart the Browser see Restarting the Browser on page 119 7 PROCEDURE Use the following steps to ...

Page 756: ...he Browser 2 Click the Access to Publications button to launch the Publications List and ensure that the User Publications listed open as expected when clicking on their link From the Publications List page you can select between different languages and between different publication types For more informa tion about accessing the User Publications refer to Chapter 6 Accessing publications in the O...

Page 757: ... the Senographe system components If such a conflict exists the Senographe system cannot be used on the hospital network until you have changed the Senographe system internal IP addresses The new Senographe system internal IP addresses can be one of the other non routable private net works 10 xxx xxx xxx 172 16 xxx xxx to 172 31 xxx xxx or 192 168 xxx xxx In the following example the Senographe sy...

Page 758: ...d Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 2 Change to the export home extra_tmp directory on the AWS by entering cd export home extra_tmp 3 Make an IPbak backup directory by entering mkdir IPbak 7 2 Disable the External Network 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 2 ...

Page 759: ...en the thisbox cfg file with the textedit command by entering textedit thisbox cfg The thisbox cfg file appears in an X Windows based TextEdit application window 10 Within the TextEdit application window change the current IDC IP address from 192 168 1 20 to your preferred new address e g 192 168 100 20 11 Save the file File Save and click the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit ...

Page 760: ...he telnet session then press the Control and d keys simultaneously to return to the ADS command prompt 7 4 Change Poseidon Gantry CPU IP Address The procedure you use to change the Gantry CPU s IP address varies slightly depending on the firm ware version of Poseidon running on the Gantry CPU board Proceed as follows 1 If necessary power on the Senographe system 2 Go to the Service Desktop home pa...

Page 761: ...P address to the example given then you can use the ADS calculator to convert from each of the four octets from decimal into hexadecimal 12 Save the envdebug cfg file File Save and click the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor 13 Logout from Poseidon by entering logout 14 Reboot the system power off and on the Gantry from the X Ray Console 15 From behind the Browser la...

Page 762: ...g error you can correct your mistake at the end in step 20 after re entering the command bootChange 19 At the prompt check that the IP Address changes you made in step 18 above were set by re entering bootChange 20 Then press the Return key at each parameter to and check that the IP addresses have been set to the correct values CAUTION Double check that the parameters are set as described in step ...

Page 763: ... hosts file writable by other users by entering chmod o w etc inet hosts b Make the sdc senovision scripts light_adjustment file writable by the owner by entering chmod o w sdc senovision scripts light_adjustment c Make the sdc senovision config PositionerServer cfg file writable by the owner by entering chmod o w sdc senovision config PositionerServer cfg 4 Exit as root user to return to sdc user...

Page 764: ...p IPbak directory for backup purposes by entering cp etc inet hosts export home extra_tmp IPbak hosts new 11 Ensure that etc hosts is a symbolic link to etc inet hosts by using the following sub steps a List all the symbolic links associated with the etc hosts file by entering ls l etc hosts b Review the command line output c Remove the etc hosts file without prompting for confirmation regardless ...

Page 765: ...cript Then change the reference of http 192 168 1 10 to match the new address of the AWS e g 192 168 100 10 15 Save the sdc senovision scripts light_adjustment file File Save and click the button in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor 16 Copy the newly modified sdc senovision scripts light_adjustment file to the export home extra_tmp IPbak directory for backup purposes by enteri...

Page 766: ...in the top left of the TextEdit window to exit the editor 21 Copy the newly modified sdc senovision config PositionerServer cfg file to the export home extra_tmp IPbak directory for backup purposes by entering cp sdc senovision config PositionerServer cfg export home extra_tmp IPbak PositionerServer cfg new 22 Copy the original export home insite svcproxy_env cmd file to the export home extra_tmp ...

Page 767: ... by entering cp export home insite svcproxy_env cmd export home extra_tmp IPbak svcproxy_env cmd new 27 Log in as root as follows a At the ADS prompt enter su b When requested to specify the root password enter operator 28 Revert the permissions of some of the ADS configuration files back to their original state as follows a Change the etc inet hosts file to its original permissions by entering ch...

Page 768: ...k to either floppy diskette or CD R by following the steps in the appropriate section Note No floppy disk drive exists on the V3 V4 Control Station so you must use the CD R media on V3 V4 Control Stations 7 7 1 Copying Backup Files to Floppy Disk To copy the backup files to floppy disk proceed as follows 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page ...

Page 769: ...the CD ROM drive and close the CD ROM drive 5 Exit the command window by entering exit The command window closes 8 COMPLETION Make a noticeable entry in the maintenance log book that the internal IP addresses of the Senographe system have been changed Explain to the customer that each time they power on the Senographe system they may see the follow ing message on the X ray Console S61 X ray Beam n...

Page 770: ...ades on the IDC If you want to upgrade the software on the IDC proceed as follows Perform Section 1 page 758 to reconfigure the IDC back to the default IP address of 192 168 1 20 Perform Section 7 6 page 762 to reconfigure each of the files on the ADS Computer back to their default 192 168 1 0 network address scheme Run the upgrade of the software on the IDC Perform Section 1 page 758 to reconfigu...

Page 771: ...R is not possible it is necessary to record AWS parameters manu ally so that they can be restored later e g after an upgrade procedure Refer to Form LBK A003 Back up Restore Procedure AWS Parameters Manual Record Sheets on page 801 for a suit able form Notice An AWS backup from a particular ADS version can only be restored to the same ADS version Un less it is written in the Upgrade Procedure it i...

Page 772: ...alibration files are copied through the AWS Senographe serial link to Backup 1 With the Generator parameters the tube heater current parameters are not saved If external media formatted floppy or CD R was optionally inserted then the three AWS configura tion files ads tar iip tar and iop tar are copied to the external media No IDC or Senographe data are written to the external media Backup 1 expor...

Page 773: ...f any part of the system and after each set of calibrations 2 A system backup is not recommended after a single calibration or configuration change when the change is going to be followed by more changes 3 Each time that a system backup is made the current AWS file backup Backup 2 is lost over written by Backup 1 This must be taken into account when considering a new backup 4 Medical Preferences a...

Page 774: ... If no floppy is inserted AWS param eters are still copied to the hard disk 4 Click the Backup button The Back up screen like the following appears 5 Enter a suitable name into the text field System Backup Description Text click the START button to continue If no floppy disk is present the message Floppy disk error or not formatted appears click Continue to continue the backup The process takes ab...

Page 775: ... Select System Tools Backup The Back up screen like the following appears 5 Enter a suitable name into the text field System Backup Description Text click the START button to continue If no CD R disk is present the message CD Mount Error Or CD Not Blank appears click Continue to continue the backup The process takes about 10 minutes 6 An AWS reset is carried out automatically click OK when it comp...

Page 776: ...tton the Restore screen like the following appears 4 Select the appropriate restore procedure you can restore separate sub system data AWS IDC or Senographe as required 5 Select the data source Backup1 or Backup 2 on the AWS disk or 3 5 floppy 6 If you are restoring from a floppy drive insert the diskette containing the backup data into the drive on the AWS unit To access the floppy drive remove t...

Page 777: ...restore procedure you can restore separate sub system data AWS IDC or Senographe as required 5 Select the data source Backup1 or Backup 2 on the AWS disk or CD R disk 6 If restoring from the CD R disk insert the CD R disk containing the backup data into the CD ROM drive on the AWS unit 7 A message indicating successful completion appears at the end of the restore procedure 8 If the IDC data has be...

Page 778: ... 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 2 Make a telnet connection with the IDC by entering telnet idc A prompt appears 3 At the prompt reboot the IDC by entering idcReboot The IDC shuts down and reboots the message Connection closed by foreign host appears If you wish to view IDC startup message...

Page 779: ...t damaged Ensure that the CD R has not been erased using the CD Erase function as this is only applicable to CD RW media and not CD R media Note If the backup to CD R is not possible record the AWS parameters manually See Form LBK A003 Back up Restore Procedure AWS Parameters Manual Record Sheets on page 801 9 5 ADS Hard Disk Size Limitations For V1 V2 Control Stations the hard disk partition wher...

Page 780: ...mkdir current 7 Change the privileges of the current directory to read write execute by entering chmod 777 current 8 Change the ownership of the current directory to the sdc user by entering chown sdc informix current 9 Make a new current IDC backup directory by entering mkdir previous 10 Change the privileges of the previous directory to read write execute by entering chmod 777 previous 11 Change...

Page 781: ... The Gantry has been moved to its final position and secured to the floor if necessary All procedures likely to require movement and disturbance in the area of the Tube and Image Recep tor have been completed Physical installation inter connection and AC connection of the Gantry Generator Cabinet and Con trol Station have been successfully completed 5 1 Reception The digital detector is delivered ...

Page 782: ... coolant pipes are not secured properly and if this arm angle range is not respected there is a risk of coolant entering the inner workings of the Digital Detector 6 Turn Gantry power off 7 Switch off the Conditioner the Generator covers are currently uninstalled at this stage so you do not have to remove them to access the Conditioner 6 2 Installation of Digital Detector CAUTION Two people are re...

Page 783: ...ry adjustments and tighten the three screws 2 7 Connect the front connector 5 and secure it using its two screws flat screwdriver 8 Connect the fiber optic cables to their connectors 6 on the Digital Detector connector panel CAUTION Do not apply force to fiber cables take care not to bend them excessively 9 Connect the coolant supply pipes 7 CAUTION Be careful to avoid spillage of coolant especial...

Page 784: ...reuse Note A document describing an alternate procedure is provided in the coolant kit For maximum safety and minimum risk of spillage General Electric Healthcare recommend using the procedure given below 1 Check that all hoses are correctly connected 2 Remove the reservoir cap 3 Use the funnel to add slowlyliquid from the container labeled Topping to the reservoir until the liquid reaches the bot...

Page 785: ...A060 Image Receptor Installation Page no 785 Chapter 7 JC ELE A 060 fm 6 5 Install Covers Install the Detector covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers section 10 page 530 Install the Compression and Arm covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers section 8 page 526 ...

Page 786: ...Chapter 7 Page no 786 JC ELE A 060 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A060 Image Receptor Installation This page is blank ...

Page 787: ...he Senographe system makes some considerable noise you should ideally unplug the trackball from the Senographe system and connect it to your laptop PC in a quiet area 7 PROCEDURE TRACKBALL CONFIGURATION 7 1 Trackball Configuration Reference numbers used to identify the buttons of the trackball are shown in the illustration Trackballs supplied on a new system are correctly configured in the factory...

Page 788: ...the beep ends the beep lasts 2 seconds 3 Press and release button 2 and wait for the trackball to stop beeping 4 Press and release button 2 and wait for the trackball to stop beeping 5 Press and release button 1 and wait for the trackball to stop beeping Button 3 Left click 1 Press and hold buttons 1 and 6 until the trackball beeps 2 Press and hold buttons 2 and 5 Wait until the trackball beeps an...

Page 789: ...o open the Console window If the Console window does not open repeat the setup procedure for button 4 4 To check that buttons 3 and 4 are correctly set for left click With the cursor in the Console window press the keyboard Control key Keep the Control key pressed while you do each of the following checks Press button 3 if the Main Options Menu does not appear repeat the setup procedure for button...

Page 790: ...indow press the keyboard Control key Keep the Control key pressed while you do each of the following checks Press button 1 if the VT Fonts Menu does not appear repeat the setup procedure for button 1 Release button 1 if the VT Fonts Menu does not close repeat the setup procedure for button 1 Press button 6 if the VT Fonts Menu does not appear repeat the setup procedure for button 6 Release button ...

Page 791: ...booklet supplied with the AWS Applica tion Software CD refer to the last step of Install from Scratch or Update from CD ROM 6 PROCEDURE 1 Discuss the required configuration of the Repeat and Reject Analysis feature with the customer 2 Before activating the feature ensure that all names held on the system for technologists who are concerned with this feature are correctly entered Notice Check that ...

Page 792: ...er 7 Page no 792 JC ELE A 067 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card ELE A067 Repeat and Reject Analysis Configuration This page is blank ...

Page 793: ...0 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Installation of the CAD Button on AWS 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 2 In the command window run the install cad script by entering install cad 3 When requested to specify the root password enter operator Once the in...

Page 794: ...CAD Unit In the Label field enter the name to be used to identify the CAD Unit in the Service desktop e g iCAD_SLDU If the same CAD Unit is declared on more than one AWS it is recommended that the same name should be used on each AWS to avoid confusion In the IP address field enter the IP address allocated to the CAD Unit In the Hostname field enter the hostname allocated to the CAD Unit typically...

Page 795: ... Identification and Follow up Page no 795 Chapter 8 Chap System History fm CHAPTER 8 SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION AND FOLLOW UP This chapter contains a form to be completed at installation time The form must be updated as required to provide a record of the system history including hardware and software changes ...

Page 796: ...Chapter 8 Page no 796 Chap System History fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN System Identification and Follow up This page is blank ...

Page 797: ...2 SDC PASSWORD HOSPITAL NAME USER INTERFACE LANGUAGE APPLICATION SUPPORT TELEPHONE MISCELLANEOUS Note 1 To obtain the hostname and the IP address open the Service desktop and press the Home icon Alternatively open a command window and enter more etc hosts the line ending by loghost tells you the IP adress and hostname Note 2 To obtain the netmask value if it exists open a Command window and enter ...

Page 798: ...le NETWORK HOST NUMBER 3 Hostname IP address Host label Port Number Protocol Comments A E Title NETWORK HOST NUMBER 4 Hostname IP address Host label Port Number Protocol Comments A E Title NETWORK HOST NUMBER 5 Hostname IP address Host label Port Number Protocol Comments A E Title NETWORK HOST NUMBER 6 Hostname IP address Host label Port Number Protocol Comments A E Title NETWORK HOST NUMBER 7 Hos...

Page 799: ... NUMBER 1 Hostname IP address Protocol Port Number A E Title Comments NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER NUMBER 2 Hostname IP address Protocol Port Number A E Title Comments NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER NUMBER 3 Hostname IP address Protocol Port Number A E Title Comments NETWORK or DICOM PRINTER NUMBER 4 Hostname IP address Protocol Port Number A E Title Comments ROUTING TABLE route add net route add net route ...

Page 800: ...Chapter 8 Page no 800 FRM LBK A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Form LBK A001 System Configuration Form This page is blank ...

Page 801: ...ackup to floppy or CD R is not possible it may be necessary to record AWS parameters manually This is so that they can be restored later e g after an upgrade procedure The following pages provide information and space to note each of the following sets of parameters 1 Site Information and General Configuration 2 Filter Management 3 Browser Preferences Layout Filter Sort 4 Medical Application Prefe...

Page 802: ...eneral to view and note the General Configuration Site Information Copy the current settings into the table below note that a Valid Service Key must be installed to display all settings General configuration Copy the current settings into the table below Parameter Current setting Site Name Site Address Phone Fax Contact Person Phone Station Name Auto Delete Language System clock Upper threshold En...

Page 803: ... below Copy this sheet if you need additional space 1 Filter name Circle the current value Note current value of the parameter Patient level Patient Name Begins with Contains Is Patient ID Begins with Contains Is Exam level Exam description Begins with Contains Is Performing Physician Begins with Contains Is Referring physician Begins with Contains Is Exam modality MG DX N A Exam date Between Befo...

Page 804: ...rameter Patient level Patient Name Begins with Contains Is Patient ID Begins with Contains Is Exam level Exam description Begins with Contains Is Performing Physician Begins with Contains Is Referring physician Begins with Contains Is Exam modality MG DX N A Exam date Between Before After On Exam time Series level Series description Begins with Contains Is Series Type SCPT RAW PROCESSED SR N A App...

Page 805: ...rameter Patient level Patient Name Begins with Contains Is Patient ID Begins with Contains Is Exam level Exam description Begins with Contains Is Performing Physician Begins with Contains Is Referring physician Begins with Contains Is Exam modality MG DX N A Exam date Between Before After On Exam time Series level Series description Begins with Contains Is Series Type SCPT RAW PROCESSED SR N A App...

Page 806: ...he current settings on the illustration Mark each selected button clearly with a cross Filter Record the current filter names for local and remote lists If none write None Local lists Current setting Remote lists Current setting Sort For each parameter circle the currently selected option Sort patients by Name Identifier Last study date Sort exams by Date Identifier Description Performing Physicia...

Page 807: ...t selection Auto Print ON OFF If Auto Print is ON enter DICOM printer information in the table below For each named printer note the name the selected print mode and the selected number of copies Click the Printer properties button to obtain the selected print parameters Parameters shown in square brackets in the table e g Fit to film are default values which normally do not change Copy this sheet...

Page 808: ...ox If Repeat and Reject Analysis is not enabled circle the current selection below Default Image Quality Check OK NOT OK Auto Delete Circle the current selection Auto Delete ON OFF If Auto Delete is ON use the table below to record the auto delete profile place a cross in the box beside each of the options currently selected Annotation level Selected annotations Printing annotations Patient inform...

Page 809: ...the following steps 1 From behind the Browser right click the background and from the Root Menu that appears select Service Tools Command Window to launch a command window A command window appears with an ADS prompt 2 Check the current installation status of the PV Strength and PVi by entering setenv grep PV The command returns the current installation status similar to the following PV_EXT TRUE P...

Page 810: ...table below Copy this sheet if you need additional space 1 6 Worklist Query Definitions From the right side of the Browser click the Worklist icon to open the Worklist window From the Worklist window click the Query button to open the Query Definitions window Note down the settings of the Query Definitions window into the table below Parameter Entry Entry Host label Host name Application Entity Ti...

Page 811: ... Update to view the remote host parameter settings and copy them into the table below Where multiple choices are shown circle the selected parameter Copy this sheet if you need additional space Parameter Host 1 Host 2 Host 3 Host label Host name Application Entity Title Network address Network protocol Port number Query retrieve Patient Study No provider Patient Study No provider Patient Study No ...

Page 812: ...s names etc into one of the illustrations below and mark all selected check boxes with a cross Copy the illustration if you need additional space Printer 1 DICOM printer parameters DICOM printer label Hostname Application Entity Title AET Network address Port number Layouts Slide formats 35 mm 40 mm Pixel depth 10 12 Film size 8 in x 10 W H 10 in x 12 10 in x 14 11 in x 14 14 in x 14 W H 14 in x 1...

Page 813: ...parameters DICOM printer label Hostname Application Entity Title AET Network address Port number Layouts Slide formats 35 mm 40 mm Pixel depth 10 12 Film size 8 in x 10 W H 10 in x 12 10 in x 14 11 in x 14 14 in x 14 W H 14 in x 17 24 cm x 24 24 cm x 30 Printer pixel size micron Configuration information Density Min Max Magnification type Cubic Smoothing factor Trim No Save Clear Done Printer Memo...

Page 814: ...the current selections PPS on RIS Image Archiver Selected Not selected PPS on CAD Selected Not selected If PPS on RIS Image Archiver is selected use the table below to record the parameter settings If PPS on CAD is selected use the table below to record the parameter settings Use the table below to record the PPS Retries settings Application Entity Title Network address Port Related Image Archiver...

Page 815: ...tion for each of the needles When completing the table use the following terms acronyms for the different needle types FNA FNA Core Biopsy CB Hook Hook Vacuum Assisted Divice VAD Lateral Approach Tool LAT The lengths you need to record vary for each needle type All needles include the A length parame ter whereas only some needle types include B length and C length parameters In the cases where the...

Page 816: ...t 1 12 Network Routing Information S93ROUTE File From behind the Browser right click the background and from the Root Menu that appears select Service Tools Command Window to launch a command window 6 View the contents of the etc rc2 d S93route file with the textedit command by entering more etc rc2 d S93route If the message file or directory not found appears no route is set on the system and the...

Page 817: ...intenance It contains the following types of Job Cards ERR Error Messages DIAG Diagnostics TSG Troubleshooting REP Repair Workaround D R Disassembly Reassembly procedures CFG Configuration CAL Calibration CHK Verification Check Note While entering the Service Desktop or when performing diagnostics a small Netscape WARNING window can appear in the upper left hand corner of the screen while the syst...

Page 818: ...Chapter 9 Page no 818 Chap Corrective Maintenance fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Corrective Maintenance Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 819: ...age Scale Factor on page 1655 Heating Current Calibration Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor on page 1649 Tube mA Measurement Job Card CAL A009 X Ray Tube mA Measurement on page 1663 kV Scale Factor Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 1667 mAs X Ray Calibration Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 Tube Tilt Calibration Job Card CAL A027 Tube Tilt...

Page 820: ...age no 820 SC CAL A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Scenario CAL A001 Image Quality Full Calibration Process from Scratch This page is blank ...

Page 821: ...scribe part replacement procedures They include any checks and calibrations which must be carried out after replacement post D R Many part replacement procedures are relatively simple and do not require a D R Job Card e g some board replacements However the changing of the part can affect system operation and can therefore require post D R calibration and check procedures This Scenario specifies p...

Page 822: ...er formed Calibrations Checks Job Card Calibrate backlight Job Card ELE A043 AWS Monitor Calibration on page 729 Calibrations Checks Job Card Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ tests not OK repeat all calibra...

Page 823: ...Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 Collimation Check Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 If Collimation Check not OK repeat Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on pa...

Page 824: ...at Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conversion Factor ...

Page 825: ...tor Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conversion Factor Job Card C...

Page 826: ...limator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conversion Factor Job Ca...

Page 827: ... D R Procedures Page no 827 Chapter 9 SC PDR A 001 fm 2 3 Generator Cabinet 2 3 1 Power Supply 50W 5V see component index page 183 The following calibrations and checks must be performed after replacement of this component Calibrations Checks Job Card 5 V dc adjustment Job Card ELE A005 Check Supply Voltages on page 541 ...

Page 828: ...Chapter 9 Page no 828 SC PDR A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Scenario PDR A001 Post D R Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 829: ...s Page no 829 Chapter 9 Error Messages fm ERROR MESSAGES CHAPTER 9 Error message information is given in the following modules ERR SUB A001 Generator Error Messages on page 831 ERR SUB A003 Gantry Error Messages on page 851 ERR SUB A005 AWS Error Messages on page 935 ERR SUB A007 IDC Error Messages on page 937 ...

Page 830: ...Chapter 9 Page no 830 Error Messages fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Error Messages This page is blank ...

Page 831: ...tains error messages generated by the AWS and IDC To view the error log content right click the AWS Screen background select Service Tools Service Desktop Error Log from the drop down menu 3 ERROR CODE STRUCTURE Error codes are displayed on the X ray Console in the format shown here The User Error Code is the code given in the Senographe DS Operator Manual It is easy to use and communicate and giv...

Page 832: ...TX Real time operating system Software errors Many of the codes are described as software errors e g 002 001 Gene CPU soft ware error These errors normally never occur If they do and especially if they are repeated con tact Service Engineering with as much information as possible Include a copy of the error codes file on floppy diskette or CD R For more information about copying error logs to flop...

Page 833: ...3 004 Gene CPU software error privilege vio lation 003 005 Gene CPU software error trace error 003 006 Gene CPU software error emulation line 1010 error 003 007 Gene CPU software error emulation line 1111 error 003 008 Gene CPU software error CHK error 003 009 Gene CPU software error TRAPV error 004 001 Gene interface reset error 004 002 Gene interface read write error on timer PTM1 004 003 Gene i...

Page 834: ...V not rising 006 003 Generator Signal En_Pose Exposure_On not rising 006 004 Generator fatal security triggered dur ing exposure 006 005 Generator fatal security triggered at end of exposure or signal En_Pose Exposure_On stays high 006 011 Generator signal Secu_Rattrap No_Fatal_Security stays high after arcing recovery 006 028 E20 Check Main Distribution Rack The Mains Distribution Rack is not cor...

Page 835: ...e init tests one fatal security input 0 xxx identifies input Access gener ator error log for full error decoding 011 001 Focus bias software error unknown command 011 002 Focus bias software error unknown task status 012 001 E02 Focus bias fail ure Focus bias signal Pres_Polar Bias_Presence high in standby sta tus 012 002 E02 Focus bias fail ure Focus bias signal Pres_Polar Bias_Presence stays low...

Page 836: ... during 6000 rpm braking 017 010 E03 Rotor failure Anode starter signal Pres_Rotation Rotation_Presence stays high during rotor failure 017 011 E03 Rotor failure Anode starter signal Pres_Rotation Rotation_Presence stays low during rotation 021 001 Heater software error unknown com mand 021 002 Heater software error unknown task status 021 003 Heater software error Heater scaling parameters ICH or...

Page 837: ... Heating failure track 2 Heater track 2 signal Pres_Chauf Heater_Presence goes low during exposure 023 006 E11 Heating failure track 2 Heater track 2 mA value not significant 023 007 E11 Heating failure track 2 Heater track 2 signal Pres_Chauf Heater_Presence low after exposure 023 008 E11 Heating failure track 2 Heater track 2 signal Pres_Chauf Heater_Presence stays high when the heater stopped 0...

Page 838: ...ror unknown task status 041 001 Gene thermal protection software VRTX error 041 002 Gene thermal protection software VRTX error 041 003 Gene thermal protection software VRTX error 041 004 Gene thermal protection software VRTX error 041 005 Gene thermal protection software unknown anode starter status 041 006 Gene thermal protection software VRTX error 050 043 An unexpected request was received in ...

Page 839: ... In this case you must Remove the Bucky Reset the Senographe Reconnect the Bucky 062 000 Gene to control panel communication driver no reply from control panel after two attempts 063 006 Gene init tests no Gantry status feed back after 10 requests No Poseidon boot If the problem per sists change the Gantry CPU Board If this error occurs in conjunction with the error 061 000 then the Bucky grid has...

Page 840: ...rep is per formed A Senographe component tube rotor etc or IDC is not ready for the exposure prepStatusOk message not sent to Senographe by IDC This error is either caused by IDC or Senographe When a Senographe sub system is not ready there should be a second error message displayed relating to the sub system causing the error 072 008 Exposure software error unknown task status 072 009 Exposure so...

Page 841: ... IST standby mA measurement calibration problem 074 001 Gene software error IST exposure unknown exposure end 074 002 Gene software error IST exposure unknown Gantry reply 074 003 Gene software error IST exposure unknown Gantry reply 074 004 Gene software error IST exposure unknown exposure status 075 010 Gene software error MNT anode starter speed impossible 075 011 Gene software error MNT anode ...

Page 842: ... error codes display problem 075 093 Gene software error MNT error codes display problem 075 100 Gene software error MNT transfer frame code error 075 101 Gene software error MNT transfer abnormal transfer task save status 075 102 Gene software error MNT transfer abnormal transfer task save status 075 103 Gene software error MNT transfer abnormal state transfer task load sta tus 075 104 Gene softw...

Page 843: ...nt at end of first trigger or Gantry fault Check the error logs If there are any collimator reported errors change the impacted collima tor related FRUs If there are no collimator reported errors change the other impacted sys tem related FRUs 079 013 E05 Failure Before Exposure Between AOP pre exposure and AOP exposure the Generator sends a StartSequence message to the IDC and launches a timeout o...

Page 844: ...roblem with the Positioner Reboot the Senographe system If the problem persists contact your OLC 079 019 E05 Failure during pre exposure The Generator has not received pre exposure information from IDC after 15 seconds Switch Off the system Switch On again repeat the exposure 079 021 E25 AWS SENO Synchro fail AWS did not sent acknowledgment to DMR preparation phase request within 3 seconds Reboot ...

Page 845: ...synchronization that is not correctly received by the exposure automaton from the Gantry or Bucky 2 Occurs in the middle of the pre expo sure X ray emission It s due to tube arcing Contact OLC 084 009 E24 Failure before exposure An error occurred before X ray emis sion but after the Radiography key has been pressed Relating to a signal not correctly received by the exposure automaton from the IDC ...

Page 846: ... and IDC the connection is lost no answer from IDC for 2 minutes When this error occurs the detector power supply is set off Probable cause 1 Board or COM2 connector on IDC faulty 2 IDC Generator RT COM cable 2244615 faulty 3 IDC Generator Serial cable 2226613 faulty 4 Generator board issue faulty From the Service Desktop perform the IDC DMR Serial Line diagnos tics using the loopback connectors f...

Page 847: ...loopback connectors from the Loopback Kit 5 If the problem persists check the error logs to see if any other errors occur in conjuction with this error Depending on the the associated errors change either the IDC or the appropriate board within the Genera tor 092 003 E19 IDC Seno down DPS is off If 5 minutes after the IDC has booted there is no communication at all between the IDC and Generator th...

Page 848: ... an error on a signal message expected from the IDC task of the Senographe Prep com mand not received by the exposure automaton task T_APPLI Check communication between IDC and Senographe perform comm diagnostics perform IDC diagnostics If the problem persists additionally try adding DB9 Adaptors to the DB9 sockets on the IDC rear panel see Job Card TSG A012 Use of DB9 Adaptors to Reduce Intermitt...

Page 849: ...ion not correct 096 039 I32 Abort Image signal too high Image signal too high Occurs in AOP mode between pre exp and exposure if the dose sent by IDC is out of permitted range Check Mechanical thickness Paddle type used Presence of implant or marking in the breast That paddle is located in the center of the trolley support That the paddle type does not change during compression paddle label positi...

Page 850: ...I48 U turn before end of pre shot The exposure time for the pre shot AOP mode is greater than the grid motion duration to the first turn back point None warning 097 027 I49 U turn before end of exposure The exposure time manual and AOP mode is greater than the grid motion duration to the first turn back point None warning 098 044 I60 Detector sig out of range This error is raised during an exposur...

Page 851: ...SUB A003 Gantry Error Messages Page no 851 Chapter 9 ERR SUB A 003 fm ERR SUB A003 Gantry Error Messages Chapter 9 1 HOW TO VIEW THE ERROR LOG 2 WARNING MESSAGE STRUCTURE A Warning message is composed of Code numeric abc def Text displayed in the Error Log File or on AWS LCD Monitor Recommended actions ...

Page 852: ...s to see whether the 100 001 LIFT HARDWARE ERROR occurs within the same time as another POSI TION ERROR e g rotation or compression 2 If a POSITION ERROR e g rotation or com pression does exist within the same time ignore the 100 001 LIFT HARDWARE ERROR Do not change the Lift Board and take appropriate action to resolve the POSITION ERROR 3 If a POSITION ERROR e g rotation or com pression does not...

Page 853: ...d into upper position or close to the upper position move the lift down manually To do this turn the lift screw to about 2 cm below the upper optical fork 100 010 HALT LIFT POSITION ERROR The Lift is below the lower software limit Occurs when the lift position is not between the software lim its at power up including a tolerance to be defined Typically this can happen when the lift has been moved ...

Page 854: ...d be a disconnect between the CPU soft release and the Node soft release Contact OLC if the problem persists 101 003 WARNING LIFT CALIBRATION ERROR If the calibration is not achieved for each CAN mes sage which is not a calibration command the IPMS ignores the command and sends the CalibrationNot Achieved error Use Job Card CAL A031 Lift Calibration on page 1687 to perform a Lift calibration CALA0...

Page 855: ...en the initial Lift button is pressed then the faulty FRU is the board linked to the UIF that has been pressed for the motion For example the faulty FRU is the Lift board Compression board or Tube Tilt board 3 Lift Compression or Tilt recalibration is requested following corresponding board replacement 102 000 HALT LIFT SOFTWARE ERROR The watch dog receives a pulse from microcontroller every 40 ms...

Page 856: ...problem A1008 page 947 102 006 HALT LIFT FOOTSWITCH DEFECT SwitchDefect i for i 1 4 occurs when the two signals from the button do not arrive at the same time on the CPLD i indicates the nature of the but ton and the side right or left Double Footswitch con cerns 2 error signals and quadruple footswitches concerns 4 error signals Lift up Lift down Compression up Compression down Refer to JC DIAG A...

Page 857: ... Occurs when node is performing a movement and the Gantry CPU sends a command for another movement when the first movement is not finished This is a CPU problem because the CPU did not wait to send the next movement command Should not occur in the field There could be an incompatibility between the CPU software release and the Node software release Contact your OLC if the problem persists 102 017 ...

Page 858: ...ore 15 ms Change the Lift board then perform Lift Calibration D R A201 page 1161 CAL A031 page 1687 102 023 HALT LIFT CPLD MEM ORY ERROR There is a CPLD memory error Test data from the CPLD is periodically read to ensure the proper com munication If this error does not match the node sends this error Change the Lift board then perform Lift Calibration D R A201 page 1161 CAL A031 page 1687 102 024 ...

Page 859: ...A page 1183 102 026 HALT LIFT ABSOLUTE ENCODER ERROR The lift potentiometer is faulty and generating too much noise Change the Lift Potentiometer and Cable see Job Card D R A204 Lift Potentiometer on page 1175 D R A204 page 1175 102 027 WARNING LIFT MCU CALI BRATION DATA CORRUPT The MCU calibration data is corrupt The checksum on the calibration data stored by the MCU does not match Perform a Lift...

Page 860: ...otion was about to go in the reverse direction to what was requested Change the Lift board then perform Lift Calibration D R A201 page 1161 CAL A031 page 1687 102 033 HALT LIFT DSP TIMEOUT The Lift DSP did not answer to the MCU before the timeout Change the Lift board then perform Lift Calibration D R A201 page 1161 CAL A031 page 1687 102 034 WARNING LIFT CAN COM MAND NOT PRO CESSED CAN command no...

Page 861: ...e 1161 CAL A031 page 1687 102 038 HALT CPU HEARTBEAT NOT RECEIVED BY LIFT NODE There has been a heartbeat failure The Gantry CPU did not send periodic heartbeat CAN message 1 Change the Gantry CPU Board see Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 2 Perform a Collimator Calibration see Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card EL...

Page 862: ...llimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 ELE A028 page 679 102 043 DEBUG_O NLY LIFT INVALID BRAKE DEFECT ERROR There has been a brake malfunction The Lift node normally does not report this error in any case Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 102 044 DEBU...

Page 863: ...H Bridge voltage error Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 102 051 HALT LIFT UNEXPECTED EVENT ERROR There has been a software error Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 102 052 DEBUG_O NLY LIFT INVALID GO ROTATION FAIL URE ERROR Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OL...

Page 864: ...the IPMS checks whether the software stop limit for the specified direction is not already reached If the limit is reached the StartMotion command is ignored and the following error is returned Lift UpperLimitAlreadyReached if the lift upper stop limit is active LowerLimitAlreadyReached if the lift lower stop limit is active Operator error No service action is required Code Category Text in Log Fi...

Page 865: ...m pression does exist within the same time ignore the 110 001 ROTATION RELAY DEFECT error Do not change the Rotation Board and take appropriate action to resolve the POSITION ERROR 3 If a POSITION ERROR e g rotation or com pression does not exist within the same time the 110 001ROTATION RELAY DEFECT error is valid Change the Rotation Board and then re calibrate the Rotation Arm D R A221 page 1223 ...

Page 866: ...ode soft release If the problem persists contact your OLC 111 003 WARNING ROTATION CALIB NOT ACHIEVED If the calibration has not been achieved for each CAN message which is not a calibration command the IPMS ignores the command and returns the Cal ibrationNotAchieved error Perform Job Card CAL A021 Arm Rotation Calibra tion on page 1679 CAL A021 page 1679 111 004 WARNING NO VALID LINE FOR ROTATION...

Page 867: ...ts the microcontroller and the rotation node restarts and sends a boot up signal to Gantry CPU The only possible reason for a boot up of a node after system power up is a reset by watchdog Therefore when Gantry CPU receives the boot up signal it produces the SWOverRun error This failure is linked to a firmware problem micro controller or CPLD on the Rotation board Change the Rotation board then pe...

Page 868: ... it is operating and there is too much current in it Refer to JC DIAG A1112 ROTATION BRAKE DEFECT on page 953 to fix the problem A1112 page 953 112 010 HALT ROTATION HARD WARE LIMIT REACHED Occurs when the IPMS detects that a motion has reached the electrical stop limit In this case the IPMS stops and forbids the motion and sends an error message Refer to JC DIAG A1109 ROTATION CONTROL FAILURE on ...

Page 869: ...L ITY Occurs when the hardware configuration CPLD of the rotation node the DSP or the MCU firmware not match Change the Rotation board then perform a Rotation Calibration D R A221 page 1223 CAL A021 page 1679 112 017 HALT ROTATION NODE PARITY ERROR Occurs when the parity bit does not set correctly on the on board bus between the CPLD and the MCU Change the Rotation board then perform Rotation Cali...

Page 870: ...d to ensure the proper com munication If this error does not match the node sends this error Change the Rotation board then perform Rotation Calibration D R A221 page 1223 CAL A021 page 1679 112 023 HALT UNCONTROLLED ROTATION MOTION DETECTED STOP LINE ACTIVATED There is uncontrolled motion If the motion is per formed when the rotation node is not supposed to drive it the rotation node sends this e...

Page 871: ...Board then perform Rotation Calibration D R A227 page 1239 D R A221 page 1223 CAL A021 page 1679 112 026 WARNING ROTATION MCU CALIBRATION DATA CORRUPT The MCU calibration data is corrupt The checksum on the calibration data stored by the MCU does not match Perform a rotation calibration If the problem per sists change the rotation board CAL 021 page 1679 D R A221 page 1223 112 027 WARNING ROTATION...

Page 872: ...page 1223 CAL 021 page 1679 112 033 WARNING ROTATION CAN COMMAND NOT PROCESSED The CAN command was not processed The main CPU have sent command to the rotation node before the rotation node could acknowledge the previous command Reboot the system from the X ray Console Retry the command If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 034 HALT ROTATION RX CAN BUFFER OVERRUN Possible causes CAN overrun...

Page 873: ...ard D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 2 Perform a Collimator Calibration see Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 ELE A028 page 679 112 038 DEBUG ONLY HEARTBEAT DIS ABLED ON ROTA TION NODE The Gantry CPU tried to disable the heartbeat check of the ro...

Page 874: ...n Check see Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 ELE A028 page 679 112 042 WARNING ROTATION NODE SWITCH TO ANGU LATION MODE FAILED The rotation node failed to switch to angulation mode Check the clutch position If the clutch is not in angu lation mode detector is locked check the clutch control change the clutch device after clutch control check 11...

Page 875: ...C 112 050 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID LIFT DOWN FAST BUTTON ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 051 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID ROT LEFT SLOW BUTTON ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 052 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID ROT LEFT FAST BUTTON ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 053 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INV...

Page 876: ...t your OLC 112 066 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID LIFT DOWN PEDAL PRESS ERROR The lift down pedal is depressed Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 067 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID LIFT UP PEDAL PRESS ERROR The lift up pedal is depressed Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 068 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID COMPRESSION PEDAL PRESS ERROR The compression...

Page 877: ...his error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 076 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID ROT RIGHT SLOW BUTTON PRESS ERROR The Right Rotation button on either the Compression Arm or the Tube Head is depressed Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 112 077 DEBUG ONLY ROTATION INVALID ROT RIGHT FAST BUTTON PRESS ERROR The Right Rotation button on either the Compression Arm or the T...

Page 878: ...he limit is reached command is ignored and the following error is returned Rotation UpperLimitAlreadyReached if the image receptor 180 software stop limit is active LowerLimitAlreadyReached if the image receptor 180 software stop limit is active Angulation UpperLimitAlreadyReached if the arm 45 soft ware stop limit is active LowerLimitAlreadyReached if the arm 45 soft ware stop limit is active Ope...

Page 879: ...NG LIFT UP BUTTON STILL PRESSED 120 003 WARNING LIFT DOWN BUT TON STILL PRESSED 120 004 WARNING LIFT DOWN BUT TON STILL PRESSED 120 005 WARNING ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 120 006 WARNING ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 120 007 WARNING ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 120 008 WARNING ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 120 009 WARNING CC BUTTON STILL PRESSED 120 010 WARNING MLO BUTTON STILL PRESSED 120...

Page 880: ...O VALID LINE FOR COMPR There is no valid Line The Gantry CPU requests a motion but node does not see the valid line The valid line is an RT line that is activated by the CPLD of the node containing the UIF during the time when the UIF is pressed a deceleration time This activa tion is a frequency put on the RT line and that is spe cific to the button pressed This also occurs when the valid line fa...

Page 881: ...ee JC DIAG A1214 COMPRESSION CONTROL FAILURE on page 961 to fix the problem A1214 page 961 122 003 HALT COMPRESSION ENCODER DEFECT For every node equipped with a coding wheel If a coding wheel defect is detected through the comple mented HW lines the IPMS stops and forbids the motion and sends an error message The signal coming from motor encoder contains four phases A A complementary B B compleme...

Page 882: ...his can hap pen whereas correlation is OK for example when a mechanical hardpoint imposes zero signal from both encoder and potentiometer See JC DIAG A1206 COMPRESSION CONTROL FAILURE on page 958 to fix the problem A1206 page 958 122 007 HALT COMPRESSION OVERSPEED The compression speed measured by the encoder is too high in relation to the speed profile and correla tion is OK See JC DIAG A1206 COM...

Page 883: ...RESSED 122 012 HALT LIFT DOWN BUT TON STILL PRESSED 122 013 HALT ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 122 014 HALT ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 122 015 HALT ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 122 016 HALT ROTATION BUT TON STILL PRESSED 122 017 HALT CC BUTTON STILL PRESSED 122 018 HALT MLO BUTTON STILL PRESSED 122 019 HALT MLO BUTTON STILL PRESSED 122 020 HALT COMPR BRAKES LOW CURRENT There is low brake cu...

Page 884: ...ry CPU 1 Change the Compression Board 2 Perform a calibration of the Compression Force Sensor 3 Perform a Compression Thickness calibration D R A250 page 1323 CAL A048 page 1709 CAL A050 page 1721 122 024 DEBUG ONLY COMPR SOFT WARE ERROR Occurs when the compression node is currently per forming a movement and the Gantry CPU sends a command for another movement while the current movement is not fin...

Page 885: ... 24 V the node sends this error 1 Change the Compression Board 2 Perform a calibration of the Compression Force Sensor 3 Perform a Compression Thickness calibration D R A250 page 1323 CAL A048 page 1709 CAL A050 page 1721 122 029 HALT COMPRESSION READ TIMEOUT ERROR If the MCU does not react on the IRQ coming from the CPLD before 15 ms the node sends this error 1 Change the Compression Board 2 Perf...

Page 886: ...DATA COR RUPT The MCU calibration data is corrupt The checksum on the calibration data stored by the MCU does not match 1 Perform a calibration of the Compression Force Sensor 2 Perform a Compression Thickness calibration 3 If the problem persists check the Compression board cabling 4 If the problem persists change the Compression board CAL A048 page 1709 CAL A050 page 1721 D R A250 page 1323 122 ...

Page 887: ...BY COMPRESSION NODE There is a heartbeat failure The main CPU did not send periodic heartbeat CAN message 1 Change the Gantry CPU Board see Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 2 Perform a Collimator Calibration see Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 p...

Page 888: ... A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 ELE A028 page 679 122 043 HALT COMPRESSION FORCE SENSOR FAILURE There is a compression force sensor defect No fre quency signal is detected from the compression force sensor IPMS_SRS_SAR_013 In case of defect on force sensor the I...

Page 889: ...ists contact your OLC 122 052 DEBUG ONLY COMPRESSION INVALID USERINTERFACE_ ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 122 053 DEBUG ONLY COMPRESSION INVALID COLLIMATOR_BUT TON_ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 122 054 HALT COMPRESSION INVALID RELAY_ERROR Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 122 055 D...

Page 890: ... INVALID DECELERATION_E RROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 122 065 DEBUG ONLY COMPRESSION INVALID MOVEMENT_REVE RSE_DIRECTION Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 122 066 HALT COMPRESSION INVALID INTERNAL_SOFTW ARE_ERROR Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 122 067 DEBUG ONLY COMPRESSION INVALID DSP_TIM...

Page 891: ...otswitch whereas the maximum compression force is already reached Operator error No service action required 123 002 ADVISORY LCD A05 Compres sion upper position is reached COMPR UP LIMIT ALREADY Occurs when an operator presses the decompres sion footswitch whereas the upper software limit for the compression paddle positioning is already reached Operator error No service action required 123 003 AD...

Page 892: ...IF Still pressed 130 014 WARNING UIF Still pressed 130 010 INHIBIT Tube Tilt initializa tion failure At power up in case the optical fork is shut or not the Tube Tilt moves in one direction or the other in order to find the transition After the transition has been found the Tube Tilt goes up and down for a definite number of steps The Tube Tilt board checks that the transition is reached after the...

Page 893: ...is produced Change the Fan and cable W406 132 003 HALT Tube Tilt switch defect SwitchDefect i for i 1 9 occurs when the two signals from the button do not arrive at the same time on the CPLD The error signal indicates the nature of the button but not the side right or left Lift up V1 V2 Lift down V1 V2 Rotation Right V1 V2 Rotation Left V1 V2 Light Field Of View MLO CC Refer to JC DIAG A1301 CONTR...

Page 894: ...014 INHIBIT TILT NODE PARITY ERROR Occurs when the parity bit does not set correctly on the on board bus between the CPLD and the MCU Change the Tilt board then perform a Tilt Calibration D R A266 page 1365 CAL A027 page 1681 132 015 INHIBIT LOW VOLTAGE ERROR ON TILT NODE Occurs if the voltage of the power supply to the Tube Tilt board falls below 24 V Change the Tilt board then perform a Tilt Cal...

Page 895: ...CESSED The CAN command was not processed The Gantry CPU has sent command to the compression node before the compression node could acknowledge the previous command 1 Change the Gantry CPU Board see Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 2 Perform a Collimator Calibration see Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card ELE A028 Co...

Page 896: ...Gantry CPU Board see Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 2 Perform a Collimator Calibration see Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 3 Perform a Collimation Check see Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 ELE A028 page 679 132 030 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID RX_OPTICAL_FOR K1_ERROR Ignore this error If the problem per...

Page 897: ...blem persists contact your OLC 132 043 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID USERINTERFACE_ ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 044 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID COLLIMATOR_BUT TON_ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 045 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID RELAY_ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 046 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID CORELL...

Page 898: ...sists contact your OLC 132 057 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID UNDERSPEED_ER ROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 058 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID POSITION_ERROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 059 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID DECELERATION_E RROR Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 060 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID MOVEMENT_REVE RSE_D...

Page 899: ...EBUG ONLY TILT INVALID LIFT_DOWN_PEDA L_PRESS ERROR Occurs when the lift down pedal is depressed Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 069 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID LIFT_UP_PEDAL_P RESS ERROR Occurs when the lift up pedal is depressed Ignore this error If the problem persists contact your OLC 132 070 DEBUG ONLY TILT INVALID COMPRESSION_PE DAL_PRESS ERROR Occurs when the comp...

Page 900: ... 1 Reboot the system If the problem persists con trol board failure identify the type of collimator currently in your system 2 Replace the Collimator Set refer to Job Card D R A280 Collimator Set on page 1369 3 Perform Collimator Format Calibration D R A280 page 1369 CAL A029 page 1683 140 002 INHIBIT COLLIMATOR SOFTWARE ERROR FPGA configuration failed At power up the control board DSP configures ...

Page 901: ...e problem Check collimator connections and reboot See JC DIAG A1402 COLL BLADE HOMING FAIL URE on page 967 to fix the problem A1402 page 967 140 004 INHIBIT COLL LEFT BLADE HOMING FAIL 140 005 INHIBIT COLL REAR BLADE HOMING FAIL 140 006 INHIBIT COLL RIGHT BLADE HOMING FAIL 140 007 INHIBIT COLL FILTER HOM ING FAIL Similar cause to BLADE HOMING FAIL See JC DIAG A1403 COLL FILTER HOMING FAIL URE on p...

Page 902: ...d re calibrate the collimator afterwards 3 If the problem persists contact your OLC D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 141 007 INHIBIT Coll out of FOV left 141 008 INHIBIT Coll out of FOV rear 141 009 INHIBIT Coll out of FOV right 141 010 INHIBIT Coll filter type not exist 141 011 INHIBIT Coll beyond phy limit front axis i for i 1 4 beyond physical limit the FOV is beyond the blade capability 1...

Page 903: ...1683 141 017 INHIBIT Coll left blade time out 141 018 INHIBIT Coll rear blade time out 141 019 INHIBIT Coll right blade time out 141 020 INHIBIT Coll filter timeout axis i for i 1 5 time out axis i does not reach target position within timeout limit Possible reasons 1 Cables drive cable or motor cable are loose or broken 2 Control board failure 3 Overcurrent during the movement Actions to correct ...

Page 904: ...3 141 022 INHIBIT Coll PDO2 length error 141 023 INHIBIT Coll PDO3 length error 141 024 INHIBIT Coll PDO4 length error 142 001 DEBUG ONLY Coll 12V lamp power failure The power is down for 12 VDC lamp See JC DIAG A1401 LIGHT CENTERING FAILURE on page 967 to fix the problem A1401 page 967 142 003 INHIBIT Coll front blade over current Axis i for i 1 5 is protected the axis is pro tected This is eithe...

Page 905: ...ersa the control board checks the transition of opti cal sensor If the optical sensor signal is not received at expected position this error is produced Possible reasons 1 Filter gear loose 2 Optical sensor failure 3 Control board failure Actions to correct problem 1 Change Collimator Set Refer to Job Card D R A280 Collimator Set on page 1369 2 Perform Collimator Format Calibration D R A280 page 1...

Page 906: ...le has failed See JC DIAG A1508 AC DC Module Reports Power Failure on page 976 to fix the problem A1508 page 976 152 004 DEBUG ONLY Fan Fail The fan on the AC DC module has failed See JC DIAG A1509 AC DC Module Reports Fan Failure on page 976 to fix the problem A1509 page 976 152 005 WARNING Over Temperature The temperature of the AC DC module has exceeded the specified limits See JC DIAG A1510 AC...

Page 907: ...ror persists contact your OLC 152 013 DEBUG ONLY Internal 5V DC volt age is out of spec limits The internal 5V DC voltage is out of the specified limits Ignore this error If the error persists contact your OLC 152 014 DEBUG ONLY Internal 5V DC volt age is out of spec limits The internal 5 V DC voltage is out of the specified limits Ignore this error If the error persists contact your OLC 152 015 D...

Page 908: ...he specified 9 to 60 degrees operating range Ignore this error If the error persists contact your OLC 152 026 HALT Low power 2 fuse failure The low power 2 fuse F1 to the nodes is faulty See JC DIAG A1504 LOW POWER 2 FUSE IS BAD on page 975 to fix the problem A1504 page 975 152 027 HALT High power fuse fail ure The high power fuse F2 to the motors is faulty See JC DIAG A1505 HIGH POWER FUSE IS BAD...

Page 909: ...ONLY Internal AD converter failure The internal A D converter has suffered an error Ignore this error No service action is required 152 033 HALT Generator cannot be turned off by PDU The Generator relay has failed or the cabling and connections between the Generator and PDU are not correctly established Check the error logs to see whether error 0x5010 is also reported If yes relay is damaged and n...

Page 910: ...m the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 160 003 HALT INTERNAL SOFT WARE ERROR The Gantry CPU failed to read the configuration file 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console 2 If the problem persists change the CPU Board and re calibrate the Collimator afterwards 3 If the problem persists contact your OLC D R A190 page 1131 CAL A029 page 1683 ELE A028 page 679 160 004 HALT INT...

Page 911: ...t up and is retrying the operation If system boots successfully no action is required If three reboot attempts are made and fail a 160 012 HALT error is raised 161 001 HALT INTERNAL SOFT WARE ERROR The Gantry CPU received an unknown UIF request Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 161 008 ADVISORY LCD A07 Lift is not operational The Gantry CPU received ...

Page 912: ...rror No service recommended actions 161 017 ADVISORY LCD A10 Motion stopped Multiple movements are requested The lift UIF request was rejected by the Gantry CPU because a compression motion is currently active Operator error No service recommended actions 161 018 ADVISORY LCD A10 Motion stopped Multiple movements are requested The lift UIF request was rejected by the Gantry CPU because a lift moti...

Page 913: ...opped or a lift UIF request was rejected because a potential collision situation was detected by the Gantry CPU Operator error No service recommended actions 161 028 ADVISORY LCD A14 Risk of collision with floor A rotation lift motion was stopped or a rotation UIF request was rejected because a potential collision situation was detected by the Gantry CPU Operator error No service recommended actio...

Page 914: ...ole 2 If the problem persists check the error logs If this error occurs in conjunction with error 167 007 there is a possibility that a jumper exists on the TP2 connector on the Lift board In this case you must remove the jumper from the TP2 connector on the Lift board 3 If the problem persists contact your OLC 161 037 HALT ROTATION NODE NOT RESPONDING Possible causes The Rotation node did not sen...

Page 915: ...e is a possibility that a jumper exists on the TP1 connector on the Compression board In this case you must remove the jumper from the TP1 connector on the Compression board 3 If the problem persists change the Compression Board Firmware or Hardware problem and re calibrate compression force sensor and com pression thickness 4 If the problem persists check CAN bus D R A250 page 1323 CAL A048 page ...

Page 916: ...unicate with the Gantry CPU The TP2 connector on the Rotation board is closed Proceed as follows 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console 2 If the problem persists check the error logs If this error occurs in conjunction with error 167 008 there is a possibility that a jumper exists on the TP2 connector on the Rotation board In this case you must remove the jumper from the TP2 connector on the R...

Page 917: ...the problem persists contact your OLC 162 003 INHIBIT TILT NODE NOT STARTED Possible causes The tilt node did not start At power up the tilt node sends an acknowledgment which can be different from the first heartbeat signal to Gantry CPU If the tilt node does not send an acknowledgment the Gantry CPU creates this error The TP1 connector on the Tilt board is closed Proceed as follows 1 Reboot the ...

Page 918: ...roceed as follows 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console 2 If the problem persists check the error logs If this error occurs in conjunction with error 162 003 there is a possibility that a jumper exists on the TP1 connector on the Tilt board In this case you must remove the jumper from the TP1 connector on the Tilt board 3 If the problem persists contact your OLC 162 007 INHIBIT GRID NODE NOT ...

Page 919: ...NG Heartbeat signal was not sent by the stereotix node The stereotix node sends a Heartbeat signal every second to Gantry CPU If not the Gantry CPU cre ates this error This error occurs when an operator did not disconnect the stereotix within 10s after releasing the latches time out Operator error After releasing the latches operator has 10s to disconnect the stereotix Reboot the sys tem from the ...

Page 920: ...head to center posi tion Move tube head to center position Operator error No service recommended actions 162 025 ADVISORY LCD A21 No Gantry motion while Stereot actic Positioner motion Inconsistent operator request Operator error No service recommended actions 162 028 HALT LCD H16 Stereotac tic Pos control failed Node Failure Fault State Reboot the system from the X Ray Console If the problem pers...

Page 921: ...button state inconsistency The lift or rota tion button counter on the Gantry CPU has overflown or underflown Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 163 105 WARNING INVALID LAN GUAGE DEFAULT USED An invalid language is currently configured on and English is currently being used Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your ...

Page 922: ...ESPONDING The collimator node did not send the Heartbeat sig nal Between two motions the collimator node sends a Heartbeat signal every second to Gantry CPU If not the Gantry CPU creates this error During lift motion the lift collimator sends an actual value message regularly in addition to the heartbeat If not the Gantry CPU creates this error Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the probl...

Page 923: ...onsole If the problem persists contact your OLC 165 007 INHIBIT Internal software error Events count not found Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 165 008 INHIBIT Internal software error Event number from the list not defined Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 165 009 DEBUG ONLY Internal software error Rev...

Page 924: ...contact your OLC 166 001 INHIBIT CLOSE SOCKET FAILED Close socket failed Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 166 002 INHIBIT ACCEPT CONNEC TION FAILED The incoming connection was not accepted Reboot the system from the X ray Console If the problem persists contact your OLC 166 003 INHIBIT TCP IP PACKET TRANSMISSION FAILED A TCP IP packet transmitted fr...

Page 925: ...l to Gantry CPU If the PDU node does not send an acknowledgment the Gantry CPU creates this error 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console and perform a compression motion before a com plete Gantry boot 2 If the problem persists change the PDU Board Firmware or Hardware problem see Job Card D R A191 PDU Board on page 1137 3 If the problem persists check CAN bus 167 002 HALT PDU NODE NOT RESPONDI...

Page 926: ...r 161 038 there is a possibility that a jumper exists on the TP1 connector on the Compression board In this case you must remove the jumper from the TP1 connector on the Compression board 2 If the TP1 connector is not closed on the Com pression board apply the following rules to determine which board to change If no other node responded to the stop com mand the Faulty FRU is the Compression Board ...

Page 927: ...he cable is fine change the Lift board If other nodes did respond to the stop command Faulty FRUs Lift Board bus connector other hardware or firmware problem Change the Lift board D R A210 page 1161 167 008 HALT EMCY LINE FAIL URE ON ROTA TION NODE Check the error logs If this error occurs in conjunc tion with error 161 037 or with error 161 043 there is a possibility that a jumper exists on the T...

Page 928: ...sages 167 009 ADVISORY INCORRECT GAN TRY CONFIGURA TION There is currently an incorrect Gantry configuration The field of view FOV setting does not match the paddle sliding position or the paddle breast support combination is not correct Operator error No service recommended actions Code Category Text in Log File or on LCD Possible Cause Recommended Action Job Card ...

Page 929: ...DE ERROR This error is due to an invalid PDO length 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console 2 If the problem persists check the overall system CAN bus 3 If the problem persists change the Bucky and check the mechanical thickness D R A255 page 1339 ELE A015 page 579 170 004 INHIBIT GRID NODE ERROR The Gantry CPU heartbeat was not received 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console 2 If the probl...

Page 930: ...al detector 1 Reboot the system from the X ray Console 2 If the problem persists and there are grid lines in the X ray images do the following with the Bucky connector cable W310 W313 a Check that the cable connectors are fine Check that they are not disfigured or have the plastic insulation covering them b Check the cable continuity You can do this by looking for erratic variation in resistance w...

Page 931: ...cable W310 W313 a Check that the cable connectors are fine Check that they are not disfigured or have the plastic insulation covering them b Check the cable continuity You can do this by looking for erratic variation in resistance when gently wiggling the cable c If the problem persists or this error occurred during wiggling the cable the cable is faulty 3 If the problem persists and there are gri...

Page 932: ... X Reboot the system from the X Ray Console If the problem persists then call the OLC 181 001 WARNING STEREOTAXY WARNING SKAT ING ON AXIS Y Reboot the system from the X Ray Console If the problem persists then call the OLC 181 002 WARNING STEREOTAXY WARNING SKAT ING ON AXIS Z Reboot the system from the X Ray Console If the problem persists then call the OLC 181 003 HALT STEREOTAXY HARDWARE FAIL UR...

Page 933: ...e Needle path failure Try to reproduce the defect by playing with the nee dle path lock button If defect is reproducible the Z axis trolley is faulty and you must change the Stereotactic Positioner see the Stereotaxy Service Manual If defect it is not reproducible the faulty FRU is the Stereotactic Positioner CPU board and you must change the CPU Board on the Stereotactic Posi tioner see the Stere...

Page 934: ...Chapter 9 Page no 934 ERR SUB A 003 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN ERR SUB A003 Gantry Error Messages This page is blank ...

Page 935: ...e Board or change AWS 6 Communication problem with external network Check network cable connection Check change network hub 7 Communication problem with UPS Check cable connection between AWS and UPS Try to restart the system On V3 or V4 Control Stations U20 or Z400 additionally try add ing DB9 Adaptors to the DB9 sockets on the ADS rear panel see Job Card TSG A012 Use of DB9 Adaptors to Reduce In...

Page 936: ...A 005 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN ERR SUB A005 AWS Error Messages 19 Wrong value received from IDC Check AWS and IDC releases if not compatible upgrade sys tem ...

Page 937: ...ning the LCD displays two blank digits followed a two digit code corre sponding to the current test If a test detects an error or fails to complete the tests are halted and the code of the failing test remains displayed 2 2 Software Diagnostic Display Three sets of software diagnostics are carried out While these tests are running the display shows X000 where X may be 1 2 or 3 If all tests are com...

Page 938: ...etector Power Supply cable 32 Change Detector Power Supply 33 Change Detector Power Supply ac cable Change Detector Power Supply 40 Check change IDC Detector fiber optic cables Change Detector 42 Check change IDC Detector fiber optic cables 51 Change IDC Senographe serial link cables Change Senographe board 400PL2 Change IDC 52 Error Log Message I52 detector calibration not optimum Root Cause The ...

Page 939: ...ocedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN ERR SUB A007 IDC Error Messages Page no 939 Chapter 9 ERR SUB A 007 fm 64 Check change IDC Conditioner water pipes Change Conditioner Change Detector 66 Repeat calibrations Change IDC Error Code Dis played Actions in recommended order ...

Page 940: ...Chapter 9 Page no 940 ERR SUB A 007 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN ERR SUB A007 IDC Error Messages This page is blank ...

Page 941: ...ion is given in the following modules Job Card DIAG A1000 Gantry Diagnostic on page 943 Job Card DIAG A001 AWS Sun VTS Diagnostics on page 977 Job Card DIAG A002 AWS Ethernet Port Diagnostics on page 987 Job Card DIAG A003 AWS File System and SCSI Board Diagnostics on page 989 Job Card DIAG A005 Error Log Retrieval on page 993 Job Card DIAG A010 No Lift or Rotation Movement on page 1005 ...

Page 942: ...Chapter 9 Page no 942 Diagnostics fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Diagnostics This page is blank ...

Page 943: ...DIAG A 1012 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE page 948 JC DIAG A 1013 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE page 948 JC DIAG A 1014 LIFT POSITION OVERSHOOT page 948 JC DIAG A 1015 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE page 949 JC DIAG A 1016 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE page 949 JC DIAG A 1017 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE page 950 JC DIAG A 1103 ROTATION CONTROL FAILURE page 950 JC DIAG A 1104 ROTATION CONTROL FAILURE page 950 JC DIAG A 1107 ROTATION CONTROL ...

Page 944: ...DIAG A 1305 TILT CONTROL FAILURE page 966 JC DIAG A 1401 LIGHT CENTERING FAILURE page 967 JC DIAG A 1402 COLL FRONT LEFT RIGHT REAR BLADE HOM ING FAILURE page 967 JC DIAG A 1403 COLLIMATOR FILTER HOMING FAILURE page 968 JC DIAG A 1500 AC MAINS FAILURE page 971 JC DIAG A 1501 JC DIAG A1501 12V DC Generator Voltage Off page 971 JC DIAG A 1502 ACDC MODULE POWER FAILURE page 973 JC DIAG A 1503 OVERCUR...

Page 945: ... is 0x5008 decomp pedal error 102 009 error code CAN code is 0x5007 comp pedal error If the error is present when the footswitches are connected Ensure that nothing is pressing on a footswitch then reboot the Gantry If the message is the same Disconnect the left footswitch and reboot the Gantry Reconnect the left footswitch disconnect the right footswitch and reboot the Gantry Disconnect both foot...

Page 946: ...er shaft manually If a fault is found change the lift potentiometer see Job Card D R A204 Lift Potentiometer on page 1175 and cable If the lift potentiometer unit is good change the Lift Board see Job Card D R A201 Lift Board on page 1161 FRUs 2 3 JC DIAG A1005 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 102 002 error code CAN code is 0x5010 or 0x500F speed error Check the DC level of complementary output...

Page 947: ...75 and start the calibration again If the errors persist check the lift motor and encoder cabling and connections If any item is found faulty change the faulty item see Job Card D R A205 Lift Motor on page 1179 If the cabling and connections are good recalibrate the Lift Board see Job Card CAL A031 Lift Calibration on page 1687 If the errors persist change the Lift Board see Job Card D R A201 Lift...

Page 948: ...agnostic for 102 004 error code CAN code is 0xxxxx lift low speed error 102 014 error code CAN code is 0x6005 lift low speed error 102 024 error code CAN code is 0xxxxx uncontrolled lift motion error Check the motor cable between the coil wires and between the control wires and the ground wires then measure the motor coil resistance If the cable is broken change the motor unit with encoder and cab...

Page 949: ...2 cable for Bucky board 3 If the error persists change the Lift Board see Job Card D R A201 Lift Board on page 1161 4 If the error persists change the PL 103 CPU Board see Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 FRUs 2 10 JC DIAG A1016 LIFT CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 102 040 error code CAN code is 0x8210 invalid PDO length Change the Lift Board see Job Card D R A201 Lift Board on page ...

Page 950: ...od power on the Gantry and check the voltage between the center pin of the rotation potentiometer connector and ground The following values must be obtained according to the arm position Arm at 180 V 2 825 V 0 05 V DC Arm at 0 V 1 65 V 0 05 V DC Arm at 165 V 0 606 V 0 05 V DC If the voltage check is not good turn the rotation potentiometer wheel to obtain the values specified If this adjustment fa...

Page 951: ... error code CAN code is 0x5004 optical fork error First check whether the optical fork has in fact been reached If it has been reached rotate the arm manually by moving the timing belt on the worm gear Check for play in the gearbox and for tightness of the timing belt Recalibrate the Rotation Board see Job Card CAL A021 Arm Rotation Calibration on page 1679 and try the movement again If the Potent...

Page 952: ...DIAG A1111 ROTATION CLUTCH FAILURE Diagnostic for 112 044 error code CAN code is 0x500E clutch error Check the clutch cable W221 and W218 and connectors visually then check the DS 6 LED on the Rotation Board It must be out not lit in rotation mode It must be lit in angulation mode clutch is active Check the clutch status visually with the arm not in angulation position If it is not correct move th...

Page 953: ...FRUs 2 19 JC DIAG A1113 ROTATION CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 112 011 error code CAN code is 0x6004 overspeed error Check the encoder cable W205 and its connection J9 on the Rotation Board If the cable is damaged change the motor encoder with cables see Job Card D R A228 Rotation Motor on page 1243 If J9 is damaged change the Rotation Board Job Card D R A221 Rotation Board on page 1223 If the ca...

Page 954: ...rror Inspect the cables listed below If you find any damage in a cable or connector change the cable or the Rotation Board Job Card D R A221 Rotation Board on page 1223 If no defect can be seen change the cables in the following order W213 POS BUS 1 cable for Lift to Rotation W304A cable for paddle detector W304B cable for paddle detector W314 Sys Pos Bus cable W311 POS BUS 2 cable for Bucky board...

Page 955: ... A221 Rotation Board on page 1223 FRUs 2 24 JC DIAG A1118 ROTATION CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 112 045 error code CAN code is 0x5028 optical fork reached error Inspect the optical fork cable If the optical fork cable seems to be good change the optical fork see Job Card D R A223 Rotation Optical Fork on page 1231 If the error persists put back the original optical fork and change the Rotation B...

Page 956: ... 009 error code CAN code is 0x5016 lift up error 122 010 error code CAN code is 0x5017 lift up error 122 011 error code CAN code is 0x5018 lift down error 122 012 error code CAN code is 0x5019 lift down error 122 013 error code CAN code is 0x501A rot left error 122 014 error code CAN code is 0x501B rot left error 122 015 error code CAN code is 0x501C rot right error 122 016 error code CAN code is ...

Page 957: ...ession timing belt is not loose or broken If necessary tighten or change the compression timing belt If the error persists check the incremental encoder cable W302 and its connection on the Com pression Board J4 If the W302 cable is broken change the Compression Motor and Encoder see Job Card D R A244 Compression Motor with Encoder and Compression Belt on page 1297 or If the J4 connector is broken...

Page 958: ... 2 28 JC DIAG A1206 COMPRESSION CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 122 006 error code CAN code is 0x502B step lost error 122 007 error code CAN code is 0x6004 overspeed error First make a careful visual check of the mechanical parts worm gear upper screw brake timing belt motor unit If no mechanical defect is detected Check the brake air gap The gap must be 0 2 mm for correct operation Check the incre...

Page 959: ...compression mechanism again for mechanical defects If you can move the timing belt by hand but the step lost error is still reported change the compres sion motor and encoder See Job Card D R A244 Compression Motor with Encoder and Compres sion Belt on page 1297 If the step lost error is still reported change the Compression Board see Job Card D R A250 Compression Board on page 1323 FRUs Compressi...

Page 960: ...323 Check the movement If the error persists change the compression motor unit see Job Card D R A244 Compression Motor with Encoder and Compression Belt on page 1297 FRUs 2 30 JC DIAG A1212 COMPRESSION BRAKE FAILURE Diagnostic for 122 020 error code CAN code is 0x500D brake error Check the B303 screw brake cable W309 and brake coils by measuring the brake resistance The nominal resistance value is...

Page 961: ... error is still reported change the Compression Board See Job Card D R A250 Compression Board on page 1323 FRUs 2 32 JC DIAG A1214 COMPRESSION CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 122 002 error code CAN code is 0x5038 absolute range error Error name potentiometer range error First check that the potentiometer screw is not broken If it is change the potentiometer and cable see Job Card D R A243 Compressi...

Page 962: ...Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 FRUs 2 34 JC DIAG A1216 COMPRESSION COMMUNICATION FAILURE Diagnostic for 122 040 error code CAN code is 0x8210 invalid PDO length Change the Compression Board see Job Card D R A250 Compression Board on page 1323 If the error persists change the CPU Board see Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 If changing the CPU board solved the problem put ...

Page 963: ...nal is detected or the signal is out of these limits continue with JC DIAG A1213 COM PRESSION CONTROL FAILURE on page 961 If the frequency is present but does not change when the applied force increases First change the compression force sensor If the frequency still does not change with the applied force change the PL304 paddle detector board If the frequency still does not change with the applie...

Page 964: ...132 027 error code CAN code is 0x5020 Ensure that nothing is pressing on any keypad button then reboot the Gantry If the same message appears Check the keypad cable and connections If the cable is faulty change it Disconnect the keypad and connect another of the installed keypads in its place then reboot the Gantry If the keypad is found to be faulty change it If the error persists change the Tube...

Page 965: ...he Tube Head covers 1 Check that the HV cable length is sufficient to allow tube movement Disconnect the HV cable and try the tube tilt without it If there is any interaction that restricts the movement of the Tube Tilt Mechanism adjust the positioning of the HV cable to stop this interaction 2 Check that there is no interaction between the HV cable support bracket and the frame top 2 when tilting...

Page 966: ...echanical links and ensure that critical mechanical parts are properly greased Reinstall the X ray tube If the error persists change the tube tilt mechanism assembly without motor see Job Card D R A265 Tilt Motor and Drive Assembly on page 1361 FRUs 2 38 JC DIAG A1305 TILT CONTROL FAILURE Diagnostic for 132 028 error code CAN code is 0x5026 overcurrent error First make a visual check of the motor ...

Page 967: ...e system If the error persists change the Collimator Set see Job Card D R A280 Colli mator Set on page 1369 FRUs 2 40 JC DIAG A1402 COLL BLADE HOMING FAILURE Diagnostic for 140 003 error code CAN code is 0x5200 140 004 error code CAN code is 0x5200 140 005 error code CAN code is 0x5200 140 006 error code CAN code is 0x5200 1 Check the cable connections motor drive cable W501 optical sensor cable W...

Page 968: ... Set on page 1369 4 Turn the Filter Wheel manually if there is mechanical interference the cause of the error is a mechanical assembly problem Check whether the Filter Wheel interferes with the tube tilt plate screw and if it does then reassemble the spectral filter and tilt plate If there is interference within the spectral filter itself or the shutter is broken change the Filter Wheel see Job Ca...

Page 969: ...nt a If the wheel turns in one way and does not change direction before the stop the cause is linked to an optical sensor failure or collimator control board problem b If the wheel does not move at all or the gear cannot be released by hand then either the wheel has failed or there is failure in motor drive cable or control board c If the wheel turns and changes directions for up to seven steps no...

Page 970: ...ere is mechanical disconnection screws rails If there is a mechanical dis connection try to recover the connection If the mechanical disconnection cannot be recovered change the Collimator Set see Job Card D R A280 Collimator Set on page 1369 If there is no a mechanical hard point or no noticeable resistance in the two directions power on the system to check whether there is abnormal noise or vibr...

Page 971: ...er is present in this area If the LED is lit switch off the Gantry using the circuit breaker MPCB Bulkhead area B1 B2 Inspect the fuses F5 F6 Switch on the Gantry Check the AC mains voltage on W104 If it is good check for this voltage on W127 Check that the W124 cable is connected If the voltage and fuses are good change the PDU Board see Job Card D R A191 PDU Board on page 1137 FRUs 2 47 JC DIAG ...

Page 972: ... the following Physically check for broken connections on the J2 connector on the PDU board and on the TP10 connector on Generator Supply Command board If there are bad connections ensure the cables are well connected If there are broken connections change the appropriate board according to Job Card D R A408 Generator Supply Command Board 200 PL2 on page 1583 or Job Card D R A191 PDU Board on page...

Page 973: ...2 of J22 Check that LED DS13 goes out not lit If not inspect the W107 cable connections J3 connector on PDU Board and J138 connector on the PL102 board If the LED is still lit change the PDU Board see Job Card D R A191 PDU Board on page 1137 If the error persists check for 48 V 5 on channel 0 If no 48 V is measured check the F2 fuse on Terminal block ST102 and the W110 and W117 cable connections I...

Page 974: ...sure current on cable W210 while performing a rotation movement It must be less than 20 A If it is more than 20 A change the Rotation Board Job Card D R A221 Rotation Board on page 1223 Measure current on cable W210 while performing a lift movement It must be less than 20 A If it is more than 20 A change the Lift Board see Job Card D R A201 Lift Board on page 1161 2 Low Power Measure current on ca...

Page 975: ...x5001 Fuse HP error Inspect the F1 20 A fuse on the MPCB Terminal Block ST102 If it is good change the PDU Board see Job Card D R A191 PDU Board on page 1137 FRUs 2 52 JC DIAG A1506 LOW POWER 1 FUSE IS BAD Diagnostic for 152 028 error code CAN code is 0x5002 Fuse LP1 error Inspect the F3 fuse on the PL101 PDU Board If it is good change the PDU Board see Job Card D R A191 PDU Board on page 1137 FRU...

Page 976: ...55 JC DIAG A1509 AC DC Module Reports Fan Failure Diagnostics for 152 004 error code CAN code is 0x3112 ACDC fan error Check whether the fan fail LED is lit on the AC DC Module If yes change the AC DC Module according to Job Card D R A194 AC DC Module on page 1153 If not check for short circuits between any pins of cable W107 If the cable is good change the PDU Board see Job Card D R A191 PDU Boar...

Page 977: ...local use only To launch a command line window click the title bar of the Browser window and move the Browser to expose the background Right click the background of the Browser screen and from the Root menu that appears select Service Tools then select Command window Note Since the Browser is launched automatically by logging in as the sdc UNIX user at the first console login prompt any command li...

Page 978: ...on hard disk with device name c0t0d0 from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin disktest v n o dev c0t0d0 For V1 V2 Control Stations to perform a short test on hard disk with device name c0t1d0 from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin disktest v n o dev c0t1d0 For V3 Control Stations to perform a short test on hard disk with device name c1d0 from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin disktest...

Page 979: ...NWvts bin vmem v f o amount 100 On V3 Control Stations from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin vmemtest v f o amount 100 6 2 Long Test Type of test SUN VTS On V1 V2 Control Stations from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin vmem v f o reserve 100 On V3 Control Stations from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin vmemtest v f o reserve 100 7 VIDEO BOARD TESTS Type of test SUN VTS Note Video b...

Page 980: ...ntrol Stations from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin cdtest v f o dev c0t2d0 On V3 Control Stations from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin cddvdtest v f o dev c0t0d0 9 3 CD ROM Diagnostics Type of test Service Desktop 1 Launch the Service Desktop see Launching the Service Desktop on page 120 2 From the Service Desktop select Diagnostics SUBSYSTEMS AWS 3 Select the either the Internal CD...

Page 981: ...ts bin sptest v f o dev se0 L I T b 4 One the internal tests are complete restart the UPS from the command line by entering ups start 11 2 Full Test without Cable Type of test SUN VTS 11 2 1 Full Tests without Cable on V1 V2 Control Stations 1 Power up the system and wait for the console login prompt on the AWS monitor 2 Within 20 seconds of seeing the login prompt stop the UPS daemon by doing the...

Page 982: ... dev term 3 The system answers Connected 8 Type some alphanumeric characters on the keyboard If the board is good they are echoed immedi ately on the screen 9 To exit the test type the command Return Note It can be necessary to repeat the sequence several times 10 Once the test is complete reconnect the UPS cable to Slot 2 of PCI1of the AWS Computer 11 Restart the UPS from the command line by ente...

Page 983: ...stop 5 Once the UPS has stopped remove the UPS cable from Slot 2 of PCI1 of the AWS Computer 6 Plug a Standard RS 232 Loopback Adapter into Slot 2 of PCI1 on the AWS Computer 7 Run the test from the command line by entering tip dev term 3 The system answers Connected 8 Type some alphanumeric characters on the keyboard If the board is good they are echoed immedi ately on the screen 9 To exit the te...

Page 984: ...essary to repeat the sequence several times 8 Reconnect the cable when the test is complete 12 2 Full Test with Cable Type of test UNIX command 1 Power up the system and wait for the console login prompt on the AWS monitor 2 Login as root as follows a At the console login prompt login as root by entering root b When requested to specify the root password by entering operator 3 Remove the Senograph...

Page 985: ...ndow enter opt SUNWvts bin nettest v f o dev hme0 target IDC For V3 Control Stations from a command window enter opt SUNWvts bin nettest v f o dev nge1 target IDC 14 MOTHER BOARD SERIAL PORTS TESTS 14 1 Internal Test Type of test SUN VTS Note Motherboard serial port tests are only applicable to V1 V2 Control Stations because the V3 Control Stations do not have onboard serial ports On V1 V2 Control...

Page 986: ...Chapter 9 Page no 986 JC DIAG A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card DIAG A001 AWS Sun VTS Diagnostics This page is blank ...

Page 987: ... STATIONS Many of the tests on the V1 V2 Control Station require you to run them from the ok prompt This section describes how to obtain the ok prompt and how to return to the AWS application from the ok prompt Note Tests run from the ok prompt is only applicable to V1 V2 Control Stations 2 1 Go to ok Prompt 1 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on p...

Page 988: ...is not ok the AWS transceiver is faulty You must replace the ADS Computer see Job Card D R A311 AWS Unit on page 1401 If Result 1 Result 2 are ok the AWS motherboard is good and either the cable is faulty or the IDC is faulty In this case replace the Ethernet cable between the ADS Computer and IDC with a cable that is known to work Then attempt to ping the IDC by entering ping idc If the IDC respo...

Page 989: ... tests the AWS hardware components locates any non functional subsystem and then locates a non functional FRU Field Replaceable Unit 1 1 Access to the Tests There are two ways to launch an AWS diagnostic From a command window as sdc or root user local use only From the ok prompt local use only 2 COMMON PROCEDURES 2 1 Open a Command Window Right click the screen background select Service tools and ...

Page 990: ...s root or sdc 2 If a Password prompt appears enter the appropriate password for the username you initially speci fied 3 FILE SYSTEM FSCK TEST Type UNIX command Description This test checks the file system It must be launched when the file system is suspected to be corrupt For example the AWS has been powered off manually files can not be found boot does not succeed or some basic system functions a...

Page 991: ...te SCSI board tests are only applicable to V1 V2 Control Stations Type Open boot command 1 Go to the ok prompt see Go to ok Prompt on page 989 2 At the command line enter probe scsi all 3 Relaunch the AWS application see Relaunch the AWS Application on page 990 Result interpretation If no SCSI identifier is found the SCSI board is faulty On a system with a cd writer two identifiers are detected th...

Page 992: ... 9 Page no 992 JC DIAG A 003 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card DIAG A003 AWS File System and SCSI Board Diagnostics This page is blank ...

Page 993: ...writable CD R disk or formatted floppy disks 4 PRE REQUISITES The AWS must be functional 5 PROCEDURES 5 1 Error Log Files The following error log files can be of interest All are located in the directory export home sdc senovi sion logfiles error log Records information for all detected errors including the type of error halt warning advi sory debug only date time of occurrence and the software mo...

Page 994: ... section 5 2 2 5 2 1 Connect Laptop to Control Station Switch 5 2 1 1 V1 V2 Control Stations and Pre Penduick V3 Control Stations 1 Remove the X ray Console 2 Remove the Control Station top cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 3 Remove the Control Station omega cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Sta tion Covers on page 503 4 Use a straig...

Page 995: ...trol Stations and V4 Control Stations 1 Carefully remove the caps from each corner of the Omega window 2 Remove each of the four screws and plastic washers from each corner of the Omega window and remove the Omega window to reveal the RJ 45 Service connector 1 3 Use a straight Ethernet cable to connect the network interface card NIC of your laptop to the RJ 45 Service connector 1 in the Control St...

Page 996: ...rk as the Senographe system To do this do the following on your laptop 1 Open the Windows Network Connections window using one of the following methods from the Windows Desktop right mouse click on My Network Places and select Properties click START Settings Control Panel then double click on Network Connections 2 From the Network Connections window right mouse click on the NIC that you plan to co...

Page 997: ...en specify an IP Address of 192 168 1 29 and a Netmask of 255 255 255 0 5 In the Internet Protocol TCP IP Properties window click OK to accept the settings 6 When returned to the Local Area Connection Properties window click Close 7 Open a Command Window Start Run then enter cmd and click OK 8 From the Command Window that appears verify that the IP address you configured is correct by entering ipc...

Page 998: ...les on to your laptop via FTP using the Command Window Alternatively you can use a graphical FTP client such as HummingBird FTP Client CoreFTP or FileZilla to get the ADS log files The principles of getting the ADS log files are the same as those below i e IP address username password file locations are all the same and transfer mode is Binary not ASCII 1 On your laptop open a Command Window Start...

Page 999: ... entering cd export home sdc senovision logfiles 12 List the log files in the export home sdc senovision logfiles directory by entering ls The filenames of the different log files located in the export home sdc senovision logfiles directory appear Check to see if the error log back file exists 13 Change to prompt mode so you do not need to confirm every file that you get by entering prompt 14 Tran...

Page 1000: ...ur SSO with the date format YYMMDD by entering mkdir YYMMDD where YYMMDD represents the current date e g 081117 for 17th November 2008 3 Change into the YYMMDD directory by entering cd YYMMDD where YYMMDD represents the current date e g 081117 for 17th November 2008 4 Create an IDC directory within D Documents and Settings your SSO YYDDMM by entering mkdir IDC 5 Change to the IDC directory by ente...

Page 1001: ... disk 1 Insert a writable CD R disk into the Senographe system writable CD ROM drive 2 From behind the Browser launch a command window see Launching a Command Line Window on page 120 A command window appears with an ADS prompt 3 Run the BurnCdr sh script to copy the contents of the export home sdc senovision logfiles directory the contents of the export home sdc logfiles directory and the var adm ...

Page 1002: ...rectory where the log files exist by entering cd export home sdc senovision logfiles 5 List the log files in the export home sdc senovision logfiles directory by entering ls The filenames of the different log files located in the export home sdc senovision logfiles directory appear 5 4 2 Compress the Log Files If the required files appear to be too large to fit on a floppy disk they can be compres...

Page 1003: ...t files can then be copied to floppy as for the original files 5 4 3 Copy Log Files to Floppy Disk Copy the required files to a floppy disk as follows 1 Insert a formatted disk in the floppy drive 2 Log in as root as follows a At the prompt enter su root b When requested to specify the root password enter operator 3 Mount the floppy drive device as floppy by entering mount F pcfs dev fd0 floppy 4 ...

Page 1004: ...senovision logfiles directory where the temp directory exists by entering cd export home sdc senovision logfiles 6 Remove all the files in the export home sdc senovision logfiles temp directory by entering rm temp 7 Remove the export home sdc senovision logfiles temp directory by entering rmdir temp 8 Close the xterm window by entering exit Send the floppy disks containing the saved log files to y...

Page 1005: ...MOS switch on each branch The bold lines in the diagram below define the branches of the H Bridge The direction of the motor is determined by the pair of MOS switches that are closed i e c for clockwise and a for anticlock wise Movement is achieved by applying 48 V DC to the motor When there is a lift or rotation movement request by an Operator of the Senographe system the Micro processor does the...

Page 1006: ...vement on the Senographe 2 Immediately observe the DS4 and DS8 diodes on the DC Node Board If the H Bridge is faulty then the DS8 diode remains on all of the time DS4 diode is initially on while the microprocessor assesses whether there is a rotation or lift movement and after a time out the DS4 diode turns off If the H Bridge is faulty change the appropriate board see Job Card D R A221 Rotation B...

Page 1007: ...Up on page 1009 Job Card TSG A007 Digital Detector Firmware Corrupted on page 1015 Job Card TSG A009 AWS Bootup Troubleshooting on page 1017 Job Card TSG A012 Use of DB9 Adaptors to Reduce Intermittent IDC or ADS Communication Errors on page 1029 Job Card TSG A015 Lift Movement Troubleshooting on page 1035 Job Card TSG A016 Rotation Movement Troubleshooting on page 1059 Job Card TSG A020 Generator...

Page 1008: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1008 TSG FM GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Troubleshooting guides This page is blank ...

Page 1009: ...It must be used when a fault prevents the AWS or its monitor from pow ering up or if a monitor problem makes the display unreadable In such circumstances the usual error messages and on board help files are not usable The flow charts on the following pages suggest service actions checks or corrective actions to be taken in response to observed symptoms The order in which the actions are given is i...

Page 1010: ... of AC power input has been checked but the system does not power up the supply can be defective check voltage grounding etc No Yes No Yes Good display on monitor No Go to monitor adjustments and power checks on page 1012 No AWS Cabinet appears to power up correctly Is the UPS running on battery no AC power input Is the UPS battery charge too low Is the UPS faulty Change the UPS Charge the UPS bat...

Page 1011: ...rect the cable problem From page 1010 UPS and MDR check is good but AWS does not power up It is likely that the ADS computer PSU is faulty Plug the ADS computer into a wall socket If the ADS computer still does not power up and function correctly then the ADS computer PSU is faulty Is the ADS power supply faulty Yes Change the ADS Computer No Correct the cable problem No Is the UPS AWS power cable...

Page 1012: ...he problem persists start again on page 1010 or ask for help from your OLC Is there a visible display on the monitor Is the monitor operation LED lit No Check the monitor power cable Is it wrongly connected or defective Yes Check the monitor fuse Is it defective Yes No Reconnect or change the monitor power cable Change the monitor fuse Yes Refer to LCD GS AWS Monitor Service Manual for actions to ...

Page 1013: ...M If the problem persists start again on page 1010 or ask for help from your OLC Yes Yes Yes Yes Check ADS Computer for video signal problems Check the video cable Is it defective No No RAM badly seated No CPU badly seated No Defective Graphics card or Motherboard video chip No Check the monitor synchronization cables Are they defective or wrongly connected Yes Change the video cable Interchange t...

Page 1014: ... 9 Page no 1014 JC TSG A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card TSG A001 AWS Troubleshooting No Display on Power Up This page is blank ...

Page 1015: ...ou can monitor the boot sequence in a telnet idc window These symptoms can seem rather like a fiber optics communication failure for example or any other failure that prevents IDC from booting Therefore you must suspect firmware corruption only if the IDC or the detector has been changed and a software compatibility problem has occurred 2 SOLUTION There exists a way to force a detector firmware do...

Page 1016: ...2 16 8EN Job Card TSG A007 Digital Detector Firmware Corrupted execute the loadDetectorFW command you typed in step 4 The flashing firmware write occurs during this minute 6 Some messages on the screen indicating that the IDC must be rebooted 7 At the prompt reboot the IDC by entering idcReboot The detector should boot normally ...

Page 1017: ...k white with no text or graphics and then returns to the Login prompt This scenario occurs in the follow ing situations the mouse or trackball is disconnected the mouse or trackball is faulty If you witness a blank screen that keeps returning to the Login prompt after logging in as the sdc user then you must do the following Check that the mouse trackball is correctly attached to the AWS Check bot...

Page 1018: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1018 JC TSG A 009 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card TSG A009 AWS Bootup Troubleshooting This page is blank ...

Page 1019: ...are errors before bad pixel calibration results are displayed although exposures are still possible the customer must not use the Senographe system for clinical use until the problem is solved and bad pixel calibration passed Before the customer uses a Senographe system for clinical use you must ensure that all the bad pixel calibration results passed In case of bad pixel calibration failure follo...

Page 1020: ...ky is removed and that no compression paddle is installed Then perform bad pixel calibration with the flat field phantom as instructed 2 If the problem persists perform Check results on page 1670 in Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor to see if the kV Scale Factor is within the correct limits If the kV Scale Factor results fail re calibrate the kV scale factor according to Job Card CA...

Page 1021: ...alibration 3 1 2 2 Corrective Action Ensure that the bucky is removed that no compression paddle is installed and that no object is in the Field of View Then perform bad pixel calibration with the flat field phantom as instructed 3 1 3 IQ Check Test Collimator in Field of View The purpose of this test is to check that the collimator is not in the Field of View If this test fails the cal ibration i...

Page 1022: ... required for correction as stated in section 4 Post Cor rective Actions on page 1026 3 2 Troubleshooting Failure at the End of Bad Pixel Calibration Bad pixel calibration fails if one or more of the following defect categories have a Fail status Isolated pixels Small clusters Medium clusters Large clusters 3 3 clusters Bad columns Bad rows Small cluster density Medium cluster density Local defect...

Page 1023: ... bad pixel calibration it is important that The flat field phantom used in this procedure is very clean and free from imperfections All surfaces in the beam detector tube filter etc are very clean and free from imperfections which can affect calibration The flat field phantom is well positioned on the detector centered laterally well covered on each detector edge 3 2 3 Collimator Blades Check If y...

Page 1024: ...Pixel Calibration Failure 3 2 3 1 Corrective Steps if Bad Pixels are Close to the Detector Edges If you have seen any white band on the border s of a flat field image use the troubleshooting flowchart in the Illustration 3 page 1025 3 2 3 2 Corrective Steps if no Bad pixel is Close to the Detector Edges If the collimator blades check fail use the service escalation process ...

Page 1025: ... actions see section 4 1 Calibration to be performed after bad pixel calibration on page 1026 Perform Bad Pixel Calibration see Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Bad Pixel calibration passes YES NO 1 Change the Collimator see Job Card TSG A010 Troubleshooting Bad Pixel Calibration Failure on page 1019 2 Perform collimator calibration see Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calib...

Page 1026: ...rement on page 1701 Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 AOP Calibration Job Card CAL A051 AOP Calibration on page 1723 mAs non linearity Job Card CAL A053 mAs Non linearity Calibration on page 1725 AOP SNR Check Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check on page 707 If AOP SNR test is not OK repeat all calibrations from AOP Calibration Calibration Test Job Ca...

Page 1027: ...e 1703 AOP Calibration Job Card CAL A051 AOP Calibration on page 1723 mAs non linearity Job Card CAL A053 mAs Non linearity Calibration on page 1725 AOP SNR Check Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check on page 707 If AOP SNR test is not OK repeat all calibrations from AOP Calibration Calibration Test Job Card Tube Tilt Calibration Job Card CAL A027 Tube Tilt Calibration on page 1681 Collimator F...

Page 1028: ...llimator Format Calibra tion Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 Collimation Checks Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 If Collimator Check is not OK repeat Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 Flat field tests Job Card ELE A03...

Page 1029: ...ONNECTION ISSUES 1 2 Purpose The purpose of this Job Card is fix intermittent communication faults and stop the IDC and or ADS errors listed in Table 1 from being raised intermittently by the system 1 3 Solution On sites having one or more of the IDC and or ADS errors listed in Table 1 being raised intermittently order the DB9 Adaptor Kit 5420609 and install the adaptors on the 9 pin D connectors ...

Page 1030: ...EMALE ADAPTORS 2 APPLICABILITY Perform this Job Card only if your other previous trouble shooting attempts have failed to resolve the IDC and or ADS errors listed in Table 1 3 SUPPLIES DB9 Adaptor Kit 5420609 4 TOOLS Standard Tool Box including a small flat screwdriver 5 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 25 to 40 minutes including all functional checks 6 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 7 PRE...

Page 1031: ...wing steps for installing the DB9 adaptors for each of the 9 pin connectors summarized in Table 2 and Illustration 3 Note Perform the steps below cable by cable in order to avoid connection to wrong port on the IDC 1 Unscrew the DB9 cable connector using a screwdriver and disconnect the DB9 cable 2 Insert the DB9 adaptor and tighten the two screws progressively to obtain a good contact 3 Plug back...

Page 1032: ...A012 Use of DB9 Adaptors to Reduce Intermittent IDC or ADS Communication Errors TABLE 2 IDC DB9 CONNECTIONS ILLUSTRATION 3 IDC DB9 CABLE CONNECTIONS DB9 cable connection reference in illustration Cable Label 1 IDC Gantry Conditioner Link 2226612 2 Detector Power Supply 2226621 3 IDC Gantry Serial Link RT 2240227 or 2246615 Dione4 1 2 3 1 2 3 Dione5 ...

Page 1033: ...2 The intermittent ADS error codes due to poor connections only occur on either the U20 or Z400 ADS Computer The SB 150 ADS Computer does not suffer from poor connections 1 Unscrew the DB9 cable connector using a screwdriver and disconnect the DB9 cable 2 Insert the DB9 adaptor and tighten the two screws progressively to obtain a good contact 3 Plug back the DB9 cable and tighten the two screws of...

Page 1034: ...1 key at the same time 3 From the Service Desktop perform IDC diagnostics not requiring inserting the loopback kit connec tors and communication checks to ensure the connectivity is correct Check ADS connectivity and that no errors are reported To do this use the following sub steps a From the Browser launch the Service Desktop see Launching the Service Desktop on page 120 b From the Service Deskt...

Page 1035: ...tion of 2 Lift Gas Spring 3 Lower Lift Screw Bearing indication of failure can be abnormal noise and vibration without any of the displayed errors 4 Lift screw assembly 5 Lift motor 6 Lift board 102 014 Lift Low Speed WARNING 102 024 Uncontrolled Lift Motion HALT Note 1 Only Grease for Lift and Rotation 5212483 Orapi CT FLON 607 must ever be used on the Gantry Use of other types of grease are not ...

Page 1036: ...his stage of the product life cycle brake capability was required because the Senographe Essential system was made available for mobile van scenarios A top brake was designed to be installed at the top of the Lift Screw Assem bly Forward production Gantries from January 2008 were produced with a Type 2 Lift Screw Assembly that had a silver L bracket with threaded holes to support the installation ...

Page 1037: ... letting go of the lift control buttons Type 3 Brake motor stationary and mobile systems the latest systems in the install base dat ing from June 2011 onwards At this stage of the product life cycle brake functionality was consid ered a product improvement All Gantries manufactured from June 2011 were installed with a Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly containing the brake motor A system containing a brak...

Page 1038: ...embly and determine the Lift Screw Assembly Type installed accord ing to Table 1 1 2 2 FRU Compatibility Matrix Depending on Lift Screw Assembly Type Table 2 on page 1039 describes how the existing Lift FRUs can be applied ordered for depending on the Lift Screw Assembly type installed in the Gantry For more information on the different Lift Screw Assem bly types see section 1 2 1 Identifying Lift...

Page 1039: ...solete Lift Screw Assembly Type 2 with Motor Obsolete Obsolete Obsolete NO 5212900 Brakeless Lift Motor YES YES YES NO 5391083 Lift Screw Type 2 without Motor YES YES YES NO 5373048 Lift Screw Type 3 without Motor YES YES NO YES 5413527 Lift Brake Motor Type 3 NO NO NO YES 5337148 Lift Screw Assembly Type 3 with Motor YES YES YES YES 5198687 Lift Top Brake Assembly Kit NO YES YES NO Notes The Lift...

Page 1040: ... trouble shooting guide use illustration 1 to help identify the parts on the Lift ILLUSTRATION 1 GANTRY PARTS Lift Screw Assembly Lower Ball Bearing Ring Lift Motor Encoder Can also include an integrated brake Lift Board Lift Cardan Nut Assembly Lift Screw Assembly Lift Screw Assembly Ball Bearing Ring Lift Upper Optical Fork Lift Gas Spring Lift Lower Optical Fork Lift Potentiometer Rotation Brak...

Page 1041: ...w Assembly Does customer complain about Error 102 024 or does Error 102 024 repeatly appear in the error logs Yes No Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly with Brake Motor 5337148 Lift Gas Spring Lift Gas Spring Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly with Brake Motor 5337148 Lift Board Type 2 Lift Screw Assembly Does customer complain about Error 102 024 or does Error 102 024 repeatly appear in the error logs Yes No Are...

Page 1042: ...MBLY Does customer complain about Error 102 024 or does Error 102 024 repeatly appear in the error logs Perform the lift trouble shooting steps described in illustration 3 Troubleshooting Flowchart For Lift Movement Problems Related to Errors 102 013 and 102 014 Type 1 Lift Screw Assembly on page 1043 Install Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly with Brake Motor 5337148 See Job Card D R A232 Lift Screw Asse...

Page 1043: ...K OK NOK Lift Gas Spring Checks See section 3 4 Lift Gas Spring Checks on page 1052 NOK Change Lift Gas Spring See Job Card D R A206A Lift Gas Spring on page 1183 Perform Lift Functional Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 OK NOK Perform Lift Functional Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 OK OK Contact OLC Corrective actions Change Lift Board See Job C...

Page 1044: ... OK NOK Lift Gas Spring Checks See section 3 4 Lift Gas Spring Checks on page 1052 NOK Change Lift Gas Spring See Job Card D R A206A Lift Gas Spring on page 1183 NOK Perform Lift Functional Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 After the checks return back here OK OK OK OK OK NOK Perform Lift Functional Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 OK Contact OLC ...

Page 1045: ...cks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 OK NOK Perform Lift Functional Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 OK OK Nut Bearing and Lift Checks See section 3 5 Bearing and Lift Checks on page 1057 OK If Nut Bearing or Lift NOK change for Type 2 Lift without Motor 5391083 keeping the motor from the old lift See Job Card D R A232 Lift Screw Assembly on page 1255 N...

Page 1046: ...TROUBLESHOOTING ENTRY TYPE 3 LIFT SCREW ASSEMBLY Does customer complain about Error 102 024 or does Error 102 024 repeatly appear in the error logs Perform the lift trouble shooting steps described in illustration 7 Troubleshooting Flowchart For Lift Movement Problems Related to Errors 102 013 and 102 014 Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly on page 1047 Proceed to the Grease Checks in illustration 7 and fo...

Page 1047: ...onal Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 1048 OK OK Nut Bearing and Lift Checks See section 3 5 Bearing and Lift Checks on page 1057 OK If Nut Bearing or Lift NOK change Type 3 Lift without Mo tor 5373048 keeping the mo tor from the old lift See Job Card D R A232 Lift Screw Assembly on page 1255 NOK Perform Lift Functional Checks See section 3 1 Lift Functional Checks on page 104...

Page 1048: ...no Lift related errors warnings and the Lift up down movement is constant the Lift func tional checks have passed the corrective action worked and no further action is required If there are Lift related errors warnings and or the Lift up down movement is not constant the Lift functional checks have failed the corrective action did not work and you must continue with the trou bleshooting tasks back...

Page 1049: ...teps a Apply Cleaner Spray to the Lift Screw Recommended product 3M Cleaner Spray 3M PN 50098 b Use ORA Wipes or equivalent cloths for removing the grease from the Lift Screw Rotate the ORA Wipes cloth around the Lift Screw and along the entire length of the Lift Screw as shown below Take care not to use the type of cloth wipes that could disintegrate since the loosened threads or particles may ge...

Page 1050: ... Grease for Lift and Rotation 5212483 Orapi CT FLON 607 to the Lift Screw by hand Ensure the Lift Screw is homogeneously covered with grease as shown in illustration 8 CAUTION Do not use any other type of grease other than Grease for Lift and Rotation 5212483 Orapi CT FLON 607 Do not use a brush to apply the grease as this may introduce foreign objects on to the Lift Screw Only use your hands to a...

Page 1051: ...Arm Control but tons to drive the Lift over the whole range up and down two times in slow speed 4 Use the fast speed Arm Control buttons to drive the Lift over the whole range up and down a few times in fast speed 5 Check how grease has been spread to the screw Examples of well spread grease smoothly and uniformly along the whole screw length with no splattered grease are shown in illustration 9 G...

Page 1052: ...as move the Arm again in slow and fast speeds and check the greasing again 3 4 Lift Gas Spring Checks 1 Remove the Tube Head covers Bucky and Compression Paddle Note If you do not remove the Tube Head covers Bucky and Compression Paddle the Arm assembly will be too heavy for the Lift Gas Spring checks to work 2 Remove the two springs of curtains from the back of the Gantry Using a crook or tiewrap...

Page 1053: ... the two lower screws securing the lower curtain 3 3 mm allen wrench 5 Remove the lower curtain 6 Release the two lower screws 4 on the lower part of each of the Curtain Ribs 3 mm allen wrench 7 Release the four nuts 5 securing the lower X plate 17 mm open ended wrench and remove the lower X Plate by sliding it under the remaining Curtain Ribs 8 Use the Arm Control buttons to drive the Lift to its...

Page 1054: ...e Cardan are visible 9 Release two right hand side Cardan screws 6 from the Cardan 6 mm socket wrench 10 Release two left hand side Cardan screws 7 from the Cardan To access these screws from behind Note The supporting block s must have a total height of between 7 6 cm 3 and 12 7 cm 5 The supporting block s must be at least 7 6 cm 3 wide and 10 cm 4 to 20 cm 8 long One or more blocks can be used b...

Page 1055: ...int knuckle joint 11 Once the Arm has been disconnected from the Cardan Nut Assembly lift the exam Arm by hand manually so that the detector upper surface is approximately 1 meter above the floor If you need lots of force to manually lift the Arm up do not try to lift the Arm as the Lift Gas Spring is faulty In this case just change the Lift Gas Spring according to Job Card D R A206A Lift Gas Spri...

Page 1056: ...tance of at least 2 cm 0 79 inches above the bottom Gantry baseplate see illustration 10 the Lift Gas Spring is in good condition and does not need changing If the Arm moves slowly or rapidly down to the Gantry baseplate see illustration 10 the Lift Gas Spring is defective and needs changing according to Job Card D R A206A Lift Gas Spring on page 1183 ILLUSTRATION 10 INDICATION OF LIFT GAS SCREW T...

Page 1057: ... compression paddle 2 Install the Bucky and protect the Bucky surface with some paper or similar non abrasive material 3 Add approximately 13 5 kg 29 8 lbs of additional weight on the Bucky If the Stereotaxy Positioner is present install the Stereo taxy Positioner instead and add 6 kg 13 2 lbs of additional weight 4 Use the high speed Arm Control buttons to drive the Lift over the whole range up a...

Page 1058: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1058 JC TSG A 015 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card TSG A015 Lift Movement Troubleshooting This page is blank ...

Page 1059: ... error code 1 1 FRU to Error Code Matrix The following table lists the potentially faulty FRUs starting with the highest occurrence probability down to the lowest one depending on the raised Rotation error Note The errors in the table above can not be due to a faulty Rotation Gear Gas Spring Rotation Error Potential Faulty 112 011 Rotation Overspeed HALT 1 Cabling bad routing of cables 2 Grease fo...

Page 1060: ...d D R A230 Rota tion Gas Spring on page 1251 OK NOK OK OK Check Rotation Motor See section 3 7 Rotation Motor Checks on page 1068 NOK Change Rotation Motor See Job Card D R A228 Rota tion Motor on page 1243 OK NOK Contact OLC Change Rotation Board See Job Card D R A221 Rota tion Board on page 1223 OK NOK OK Perform Rotation Functional Checks See section 3 1 Rotation Functional Checks on page 1061 ...

Page 1061: ...s are getting stuck with the Arm Covers etc If there are no Rotation related errors warnings and the movement is constant the Rotational func tional checks have passed the corrective action worked and no further action is required If there are Rotation related errors warnings and or the movement is not constant the Rotation func tional checks have failed the corrective action did not work and you ...

Page 1062: ...ntry column covers 2 Ensure that the Motor cables W206 and W205 to the Rotation Board connector J10 and J9 are routed and secured with cable ties as indicated in illustration 2 If they are not routed correctly re route them as indicated in section 3 3 Cable Re routing 3 Ensure that the clutch cables are correctly positioned and secured to the spacer of Rotation Board PL202 by a cable tie as indica...

Page 1063: ...tal support to secure the cables behind the curtain The free length between the two cable ties A and B is approx 60 cm 24 inch Use some adhesive tape to secure the two cables together in this area Do not use cable ties they can catch on other items during movement Use a cable tie B to secure the cables at this point When installing the covers place these cables inside the lower cover with the keyp...

Page 1064: ... for access Lower the arm for good access to the rotation gears 1 Switch OFF the Gantry electric power CAUTION The following procedures require power to be applied in order to rotate the arm for access to the gears After positioning the arm be sure to switch off all power when you are inspecting or greasing the gears 3 4 2 Inspect the gears Locate the meshing teeth of the worm and worm gear 2 and ...

Page 1065: ... A 016 fm 3 4 3 Locate dry surfaces Rotate the examination arm between 165 and 185 Check for dry or partly dry surfaces as shown here 4 this is the visible effect of incorrect greasing Notice Be sure to identify dry or partly dry surfaces before greasing General greasing may not help The most critical areas are visible with the arm in the following positions 0 45 135 and 180 4 ...

Page 1066: ...ant than the quantity Use a brush to apply grease so as to avoid direct skin contact as far as possible Use a suitable cloth to remove excess grease Take care to ensure that you do not apply grease to the cog wheel of the Rotation Potentiometer Grease on the cog wheel of the Rotation Potentiometer causes a bad connection resulting in unexpected rotation errors CAUTION Do not use any other type of ...

Page 1067: ... 11 lbs weight to top of the handle then use the slow speed Arm Control buttons to rotate the Arm back to 0 in slow speed While moving the Arm back to 0 a Check on the Gantry LCD Display whether the following Rotation related errors appear 112 011 Rotation control error 112 012 Rotation control error 112 023 Rotation control error b Visually check that the speed of the rotation movement is constan...

Page 1068: ...on Motor on page 1243 Note To confirm whether the Rotation Motor is faulty you can additionally measure the resistance be tween the motor connector pins J10 on the Rotation Board If the resistance is infinite open cir cuit the Rotation Motor is faulty If the Rotation Board connectors are not OK change the Rotation Board according to Job Card D R A221 Rotation Board on page 1223 If the cabling conn...

Page 1069: ...y_OK going low or high 079 004 Exposure aborted power fault The flow charts on the following pages suggest service actions checks or corrective actions to be taken in response to observed symptoms In the flow charts below the boards below have the following nota tion The order in which the actions are given is intended to optimize troubleshooting efficiency This order takes into account the probab...

Page 1070: ... the X ray Console ON button is pressed If TP5 is at 12 V check the thermal switch status on XJ10 200PL2 If TP5 is not at 12 V check the LED status of DE4 DE5 DE6 and DE7 on 200PL1 If the problem per sists see Power Up Sequence on page 1071 Failure If K1 does not stay engaged see Power Up Sequence on page 1071 Failure state present if Power_Supply_Present is not detected In this case the Console d...

Page 1071: ...oltage on PT5 12 V 200PL2 Isolate the emergency off circuit by placing strap between PT0VV and PT1 200PL2 DE1lit Power up sequence started Problem with connector XJ1 Replace the cable connecting with 400PL1 No No Yes Yes Change 200PL2 No Yes 200PL1 DE5 and DE7 both lit Start the power up sequence by pressing button on console button on console steadily lit and PL2 DE1 lit button on console blinkin...

Page 1072: ... page 469 or re tighten TR1 primary lugs 200PL1 connectors XJ1 and XJ3 tight Re tighten connectors XJ1 and or XJ3 200PL1 Problem with X1 relay On 200PL2 strap PT13 to 0VV and observe if X1 activates 200PL1 relay X1 activated Change 200PL2 200PL1 Strap 0VV to anode of D2 and observe whether X1 activates 200PL1 relay X1 activated Replace the cable between 200PL1 connector XJ14 and 200PL2 connector X...

Page 1073: ...power up sequence by opening Generator mains supply switch S1 0 position then closing it again 1 position Normal power up sequence now possible using console button End Yes No No 300PL1 600VF 600VR 0 600VF 0 600VR connections tight Yes No Tighten appropriate connections 200PL1 lugs W1 W2 W3 and 300VR connections tight Yes No Tighten appropriate connections 300PL1 Voltage between 600VR and 0 600VR ...

Page 1074: ...9 lit 200PL1 Re connect XJ15 200PL1 Disconnect XJ14 No Yes 200PL1 DE8 and DE9 lit Cable bundle between including connectors 200PL1 XJ15 and 200PL2 XJ4 OK Yes Yes Change 200PL2 Replace the cable bundle between 200PL1 connector XJ15 and 200PL2 connector XJ4 No 200PL1 DE2 lit 200PL1 DE3 lit See Keep Alive Voltage Checks on 200PL2 on page 200PL1 voltage between PT1 and PT2 at 12 V Yes 200PL1 DE2 Fault...

Page 1075: ...en Generator mains and supply switch S1 terminal at mains voltage Yes No With mains fuses F1 and F2 removed is wiring continuity between mains fuse terminals F1 1 F2 1 and main power contact K1 terminals K1 1 K1 3 good With mains fuses F1 and F2 removed is wiring continuity between main power contact K1 terminals K1 2 K1 4 and 200PL1 XJ2 XJ7 good Replace appropriate wiring and or appropriate fuse ...

Page 1076: ...een Plus VV and 0VV at 12 V Yes No 200PL1 Voltage between VE and 0VE at 8 V and between VE and 0VE at 8 V Yes 200PL1 Voltage between TP17 and 0VE at 5 V Yes No Change 200PL1 End of tests No Wiring between 200PL2 XJ4 and 200PL1 XJ15 OK Yes No Change 200PL2 Change wiring between 200PL2 XJ4 and 200PL1 XJ15 Wiring between 200PL2 XJ2 and 200PL1 XJ14 OK Yes No Change 200PL2 Change wiring between 200PL2 ...

Page 1077: ... 200PL1 check continuity between XJ7 and terminal 4 of relay X1 and between XJ3 and terminal 7 of relay X1 Continuity checks OK Yes On 200PL1 measure resistance between terminal 4 of relay X1 and 0 V The resistance must be approximately equal to R1 and R4 in series if strap IN2 is in position HT or R1 and R4 in parallel if strap IN2 is in position BT See Job Card PHY A016 AC Connection on page 469...

Page 1078: ...TOP button on console lit Yes No Start the power up sequence by pressing button on console After 3 seconds 200PL1 DE5 DE2 and 200PL2 DE2 all lit Yes No Open generator mains supply switch S1 0 position On 200PL1 reconnect XJ4 XJ6 and XJ7 Close generator mains supply switch S1 1 position Mains fuses F1 F2 all OK Yes No Main power contact K1 activated Yes No End of tests Start Power up Sequence See P...

Page 1079: ...o Start Power up Sequence See Power Up Sequence on page 1071 Yes 400PL1 DS7 DS9 DS11 and 400PL2 DS1 thru DS9 all lit Yes No Check low voltage power supply 400T1 400PL2 voltage between TP27 and TP4 at 5 V No Yes Change 400PL2 DR407 page 1577 400PL1 voltage between TP2 and GND3 at 12 V Yes No Continuity between 200PL1 XJ10 pin 19 and 400PL1 XJ2 pin 19 OK Yes No Disconnect the cable between 200PL1 XJ...

Page 1080: ... 400PL1 XJ1 pin 23 OK Yes Change 400PL1 DR406 page 1569 No Change cable between 200PL1 XJ1 and 400PL1 XJ1 Disconnect the cable from 200PL1 connector XJ11 Connect voltmeter between 200PL1 XJ11 pin 12 and 0VV Note pin 1 is marked and at top left pin 12 is bottom right Measured voltage greater than 26 V Yes No Continuity OK in cable between 200PL1 XJ11 and 200PL2 XJ2 Yes Change 200PL2 and reconnect c...

Page 1081: ...6 AC Connection on page 469 SEL wire is set to a voltage greater than the true mains voltage 400PL1 voltage between TP85 and GNDB at 0 V No Yes Continuity OK in cable between 400PL1 XJ10 and 400PL2 XJ2 Yes Change 400PL2 DR407 page 1577 No Change cable between 400PL1 XJ10 and 400PL2 XJ2 200PL2 voltage between TP4 and 0VV at 12 V No Yes Continuity between 400PL1 connector XJ1 pin 25 and 200PL2 conne...

Page 1082: ...er 9 Page no 1082 JC TSG A 020 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card TSG A020 Generator Power Up Sequence Flow Charts This page is blank ...

Page 1083: ...en on the Generator as to whether X ray Tube arching is occurring If during the exposure the high tension noise from the Generator is not consistent and regularly changes then X ray Tube arching is occurring 2 View the error logs If 080 011 occurs in conjunction with E24 084 013 RTL rises too late or E24 079 014 RTL drops too early then either the IDC Hardware Software is faulty or the RT Cable fr...

Page 1084: ...hapter 9 Page no 1084 JC TSG A 027 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card TSG A027 080 011 Error Trouble Shooting This page is blank ...

Page 1085: ...the E24 084 008 error Troubleshooting must be performed from this specific positioner error code 3 2 Tube Arcing during AOP Pre Exposure When a tube arcing occurs during an AOP pre exposure the acquisition has to be aborted for AOP per formance But the pre exposure tube spit abort creates an E24 084 008 arm synchronization error instead of reporting an acquisition abort S01 As a result the operato...

Page 1086: ...ion Counter on page 1089 Bucky to Main Pos CPU Synchronization Error Check Replace Positioner CAN bus 1 W311 Distribution Board PL301 J3a to Bucky Board PL302 J1A 2 W314 Distribution Board PL301 J1 to Interf Board PL104 J5 POS to DMR Synchronization Error 1 Check Replace optical fiber be tween Generator and Gantry W121 PL104 J8 to 400PL2 XJ9 2 Check Replace Gantry interface board PL104 3 Check Rep...

Page 1087: ...n t reduce the tube arcing occurrence you may ask the operator to perform the heating procedure for the selected focal spot size large or small when the system has not been used Calibrations Checks Job Card Acquisition Image Chain Bias Calibration Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 1655 Heating Current Calibration Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor on p...

Page 1088: ...rom tube arcing before deciding whether or not to change the tube 6 1 Procedure The below procedure is a suggested site analysis procedure You may use another site analysis proce dure that will give you the same result 1 Write down The current acquisition number value N1 See section 6 2 Acquisition Counter on page 1089 after performing Job Card TSG M022 HV Troubleshooting on page 1403 or the preve...

Page 1089: ...rcing is smaller than or equals Accepted Occurrence Number you shall not change the tube If Number of E24 arcing is greater than Accepted Occurrence Number you may plan on changing the tube 6 2 Acquisition Counter To display the current acquisition number you must press the SETUP button The current acquisition number appears in the upper right corner of the DMR menu window below e g 2 650E 2 as sh...

Page 1090: ...Then the DMR continuously refreshes heater current for a given triplet If you make an exposure using a cold tube could be in the morning you set the heater current for a cold tube for the selected triplet that may not be suitable for a hot tube As a result in order to reach the expected mA value the DMR sets up the heater current faster which may cause tube arcing for an aged tube Turn off Senogra...

Page 1091: ...ng Page no 1091 Chapter 9 JC TSG M 028 fm 7 3 Supported Pre Exposure Configurations The AOP pre exposure mAs value is equal to 4mAs The AOP pre exposure focal spot triplets are as follows Large focal spot Small focal spot Track kV Track kV Mo 22 Mo 22 Mo 23 Mo 23 Mo 24 Mo 24 Mo 25 Mo 27 Rh 27 Mo 27 Rh 28 Mo 30 Rh 31 Rh 29 Rh 32 Rh 31 Rh 34 Rh 34 ...

Page 1092: ...apter 9 Page no 1092 JC TSG M 028 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card TSG M028 E24 084 008 Error Troubleshooting This page is blank ...

Page 1093: ... D R A207 Lift Belt on page 1189 Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains on page 1193 Job Card D R A210 Gantry cover replacement guide on page 1197 Job Card D R A212 Gantry Readout on page 1215 Job Card D R A215 Arm Control Keypad Cables on page 1217 Job Card D R A216 Arm Control Keypads on page 1219 Job Card D R A221 Rotation Board on page 1223 Job Card D R A222 Clutch and Cable on page 1227 Job Card D...

Page 1094: ... on page 1417 Job Card D R A313 Trackball on page 1427 Job Card D R A315 International Keyboard on page 1443 Job Card D R A317 Radiation Screen on page 1463 Job Card D R A318 LCD Monitor on page 1469 Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm on page 1483 Job Card D R A321 IDC Computer on page 1503 Job Card D R A322 RJ 45 Service Network Patch Panel on page 1517 Job Card D R A331 UPS on page 1521 Job Card D R...

Page 1095: ...ation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Disassembly Reassembly Page no 1095 Chapter 9 DR FM Job Card D R A414 Power Line Filter Box on page 1617 Job Card D R A415 Generator Board CPU EEPROMs on page 1625 Job Card D R A421 Conditioner Unit on page 1633 ...

Page 1096: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1096 DR FM GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Disassembly Reassembly This page is blank ...

Page 1097: ...rs 1 Switch off the Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the generator covers and the Gantry column covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 and Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Disconnect the optical fibers at both ends 4 Disengage the harness connecting the generator and the Gantry particularly if the harness is coiled under the gen...

Page 1098: ...t the system oper ates correctly when the electrical power is switched on 12 Disconnect the four fibers and reinstall the ribbed outer cover in the harness 13 Carefully install new cable ties particularly inside the Gantry and between the base plate and Gantry interface board PL104 6 2 Functional Check 1 Switch on the Senographe electrical power 2 Raise and lower the column and visually check that...

Page 1099: ...s 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Power off the Gantry before disconnecting or working on the Digital Detector If the casing is punctured wear protective gloves and dust masks when removing the detector Send the protective items for disposal along with the defective detector The Digital Detector is cumbersome Two people are required for its removal and installa tion see section 6 1 page 1101 Follow s...

Page 1100: ...move Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Switch on the Gantry power Set the arm to an intermediate height Rotate the arm to between a working position of 45 to 45 Notice Never rotate the arm outside of the range 45 to 45 when installing the Digital Detector If the coolant pipes are not secured properly and if this arm angle range is not respected there is a risk of coolant entering the inner worki...

Page 1101: ...riate connectors then disconnect the coolant sup ply pipes 3 by pulling on the connectors not the pipes CAUTION Be careful to avoid spillage of coolant especially onto or near electrical connections If any coolant is spilled it must be cleaned up immediately 4 Release the screws 4 securing the ground cables 7 mm open ended wrench 5 Remove the three screws 5 securing the Bucky inter connection plat...

Page 1102: ...ector which contains coolant may cause irreparable damage This is especially important in win ter when there is a danger of freezing WARNING Note The removed Digital Detector must be packed in the appropriate engineering designed shipping crate Digital Detectors that are not correctly packed and shipped have to be replaced at a high cost for the company 6 2 Reassembly of the Digital Detector 1 To ...

Page 1103: ...elect Service Desktop Calibration Detector then select Clear Calibrations and perform the Load Detector Parameters procedure as indicated 6 4 1 Load Detector Parameters on V1 V2 Control Stations 1 Launch the Service Desktop see Launching the Service Desktop on page 120 2 From Service Desktop click the Utilities button 3 Under Workstation Tools click DETECTOR REPLACEMENT 4 Insert the Mammo Detector...

Page 1104: ...the digital detector Once the firmware is written to the digital detector the Results section of the Service Desktop updates with the message DETECTOR REPLACEMENT COMPLETE and the AWS unit automati cally ejects the CD ROM drive 6 Remove the SFOV Mammo Detector Manufacturing Data CD ROM from the CD ROM drive of the AWS unit and close the CD ROM drive 7 Reboot the Senographe system 8 View the Servic...

Page 1105: ...s described in QC Test 3 and QC Test 4 of the Planned Maintenance section of the Stereotaxy Operator Manual The puncture tool accuracy check as described in QC Test 6 of the Planned Maintenance section of the Stereotaxy Operator Manual Calibrations Checks Job Card Acquisition Image Chain Tube Tilt Calibration Job Card CAL A027 Tube Tilt Calibration on page 1681 Collimator Calibration Job Card CAL ...

Page 1106: ...up After performing the specified calibration and check procedures a system backup must be made to safe guard the new detector and calibration data Follow the instructions given in Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 7 4 CAD License If the CAD option is present the new Detector ID must be declared in the CAD computer Follow the instructions given in the CAD Unit Service Manual ...

Page 1107: ...2 fm Job Card D R A142 Detector Power Supply Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES Detector Power Supply 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITE Turn the Gantry power off Remove the Gantry column covers See Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 ...

Page 1108: ...t removing the two securing nuts 4 5 located at bottom of power supply chassis 5 5 mm open ended wrench nuts not seen on this picture 5 Remove the two securing nuts 2 7 securing the top of the power supply chassis 5 5 mm open ended wrench Take care not to lose the nuts 6 Remove the defective power supply by holding both the top and bottom of its chassis with both hands Note Tilt the power supply a...

Page 1109: ...and Board F4 illustration 3 380 Vac 10 A Fast 58079166 Supply Command Board F5 illustration 3 380 Vac 10 A Fast 58079166 Supply Command Board F6 illustration 3 250 Vac 16 A Fast 58079690 Next to circuit breaker F1 illustration 4 600 Vac 35 A Fast 99184154 Next to circuit breaker F2 illustration 4 600 Vac 35 A Fast 99184154 Mains Distribution Board F1 illustration 5 250 Vac 1 A Delay 58079686 Mains...

Page 1110: ...he Compression Arm covers to access the Compression Board Refer to section 8 in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 If you are changing fuses on the PDU Board remove the Column covers to access the PDU Board Refer to section 7 in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 If you are changing a fuse on one of the boards in the Generator remove the Generato...

Page 1111: ...mponents within the Generator to discharge 2 Switch off the electrical power supply on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position 0 3 Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check that there is no residual voltage between screws S1 and S2 before proceeding WARNING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged befor...

Page 1112: ... the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position 0 3 Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check that there is no residual voltage between screws S1 and S2 before proceeding WARNING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Supply Command board 4 The XJ6 and XJ7 connectors may still...

Page 1113: ... Fuses Page no 1113 Chapter 9 JC DR A 150 fm that there is no residual voltage 35V DC between the XJ6 and XJ7 connectors 5 The C1P and M1P connectors may still have a residual voltage of 250V DC from the C1 capacitor located behind the Generator Supply Command board Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check XJ6 XJ7 C1P M1P ...

Page 1114: ... System Fuses that there is no residual voltage 250V DC between the C1P and M1P connectors WARNING Residual voltage stored in the C1 and C2 capacitors located behind the Generator Com mand Supply board can be dangerous Ensure that the capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the fuses on the Generator Supply Command board C2 C1 XJ6 XJ7 C1P M1P ...

Page 1115: ...the Generator 2 Switch off the electrical power supply on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position 0 3 Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check that there is no residual voltage between screws S1 and S2 before proceeding WARNING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Mains Distri...

Page 1116: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1116 JC DR A 150 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A150 System Fuses tors XJ8 XJ9 ...

Page 1117: ...System Fuses Page no 1117 Chapter 9 JC DR A 150 fm WARNING Residual voltage stored in the C1 C2 C5 C6 C7 and C8 capacitors located behind the Mains Distribution board can be dangerous Ensure that the capacitors are fully dis charged before you handle the fuse on the Mains Distribution board C1 C5 XJ8 XJ9 C7 C8 C6 C2 ...

Page 1118: ...upply Command Board fuse locations refer to illustration 3 For the Generator Main fuse locations refer to illustration 4 For the Mains Distribution Board fuse locations refer to illustration 5 For the PDU Board fuse locations refer to illustration 6 For the MPCB Board fuse locations refer to illustration 6 2 If changing a fuse within the Generator ensure that the components in the Generator are fu...

Page 1119: ... Job Card D R A150 System Fuses Page no 1119 Chapter 9 JC DR A 150 fm ILLUSTRATION 1 MAINS DISTRIBUTION ASSEMBLY FUSES J2 F1 J7 J5 TP1 F4 F5 F2 F3 J6 J4 J3 J8 J9 TP2 J1 DS1 DS8 DS9 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS2 DS3 TP3 Fuse F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 locations on Mains Distribution Assembly Mains Distribution Assembly ...

Page 1120: ...3 F1 DS9 DS11 F2 F3 TP88 TP86 TP78 TP83 TP87 TP90 TP89 GND5 TP71 TP63 TP51 TP60 GND3 TP67 TP58 TP56 DS7 TP53 TP52 TP44 TP46 TP79 TP80 TP75 TP68 TP76 TP72 TP66 TP64 TP85 TP84 TP82 TP81 TP77 TP73 TP69 TP65 TP70 TP74 TP62 GND4 TP59 TP57 TP55 TP54 TP49 TP45 TP47 TP48 TP50 TP51 GND1 TP28 TP7 TP5 TP4 TP3 TP8 TP25 TP27 TP29 TP31 TP26 TP24 TP23 TP9 TP6 TP22 TP32 TP34 TP36 TP37 TP33 TP35 TP1 TP2 GND2 TP43 ...

Page 1121: ...er 9 JC DR A 150 fm ILLUSTRATION 3 GENERATOR SUPPLY COMMAND BOARD FUSES Fuse F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F5 locations on Generator Supply Command Board Generator Supply Command Board XJ1 XJ2 XJ3 XJ4 F1 F2 F4 F5 XJ8 XJ3 XJ6 XJ7 XJ9 F3 F6 TP19 TP19 TP19 TP18 P250V TP1 P27V 0V 27V XJ5 TP2 0VV TP16 TP15 TP12 TP13 TP8 TP7 TP6 TP5 TP4 TP3 TP10 0V 250V TP9 TP21 XJ10 ...

Page 1122: ... no 1122 JC DR A 150 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A150 System Fuses ILLUSTRATION 4 GENERATOR MAIN FUSES F1 and F2 Main System Fuses ...

Page 1123: ...fm ILLUSTRATION 5 MAINS DISTRIBUTION BOARD FUSES XJ4 XJ5 XJ6 XJ3 XJ2 XJ1 XJ7 XJ8 DE4 DE1 DE5 DE6 DE7 DE3 DE2 N2 N1 F2 F3 F1 DE8 DE9 PT2 PT1 PT3 PT4 PT6 PT7 PT5 PT8 PT9 PT10 PT13 PT18 PT20 PT17 PT16 PT11 0VE PT14 PT12 PT15 PT19 SW2 SW1 XJ14 XJ11 XJ13_2 XJ13_1 XJ12_1 XJ12_2 P1 P2 XJ10 IN2 Mains Distribution Board Fuse F1 F2 F3 locations on Mains Distribution Board ...

Page 1124: ...Job Card D R A150 System Fuses ILLUSTRATION 6 PDU BOARD FUSES AND MPCB FUSES DS1 J8 DS2 DS21 20 19 17 16 DS25 DS24 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 J9 J4 J2 J5 J7 J6 S3 S2 S1 F3 F4 F1 F6 F5 S4 J22 J1 J11 J3 J10 DS14 13 11 10 12 9 DS15 18 DS26 PRGM PDU Board MPCB Fuses F1 and F2 Left Hand Side of Gantry Column Fuse F1 F3 F4 F5 F6 locations on PDU Board ...

Page 1125: ...ng circuit boards take precautions against damage by ESD electro static discharge 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removing the Interface Board 1 Remove the Gantry CPU board from the Interface board according to Removing the Gantry CPU Board on page 1131 in Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board 2 Disconnect all the cables and optical fibers from the Interface board and make a mental note where th...

Page 1126: ...Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A189 Interface Board 3 Remove the three screws 1 securing the Interface board cross head screwdriver 4 Remove the four threaded nuts 2 securing the Interface board and remove the Interface board 5 Put the defective Interface board in an anti static bag 1 2 ...

Page 1127: ...ded nuts 1 and three screws 2 cross head screwdriver 2 Connect all the cables to the new Interface board as summarized in the diagram above and table below Ensure that the Ethernet cable is fully visible and does NOT go behind the PDU board Ensure that all the other cables are routed away from the Interface board and that the stop button cable which connects to J7 is routed around the Interface bo...

Page 1128: ... LED states are as follows all three of the green LEDs in the upper part of the Interface CPU board near the fiber connectors J8 J9 and J10 i e DS1 DS2 and DS3 are ON the green LEDs DS8 and DS11 near the J5 connector are blinking i e there is network activity on the Ethernet connection all the other green LEDs near the J5 connector i e DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS9 DS10 DS12 and DS13 are OFF 8 Reinstall the...

Page 1129: ...ice Desktop home page and by consulting Table 1 on page 63 The system level will be defined by one of the System Level Model Number columns in Table 1 on page 63 4 Check whether the current software version for the new Interface Board corresponds to the required firmware version for the that system level If the current software version matches the required version quoted in Table 1 on page 63 no a...

Page 1130: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1130 JC DR A 189 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A189 Interface Board This page is blank ...

Page 1131: ... 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE CAUTION Collimator parameters are saved in the CPU board memory It will be necessary to recali brate the collimator after changing the board Other Gantry settings are stored in the node boards i e lift parameters in the lift board tube tilt parameters in the tilt board etc If the node boards are not changed it is not necessary to repeat these calibrations 6 1 Remo...

Page 1132: ...work to expose the Gantry CPU board 3 4 Remove the four screws 4 securing the Gantry CPU board cross head screwdriver 5 Carefully pull the top part of the Gantry CPU board to remove it from the Interface board Apply equal force to both sides of the Gantry CPU board to ensure that you do not damage the two connectors on the Interface board 6 Put the defective Gantry CPU board in an anti static bag ...

Page 1133: ...e is initially programmed A jumper must never be present on the TP2 connector in the field However the TP2 connector must only contain blue plastic socket This socket is normal and does not act as a jumper as it contains no conductive material Do not attempt to remove the blue plastic socket as you risk damaging the TP2 connector 2 Carefully push the new Gantry CPU board into the two connectors 1 ...

Page 1134: ...tates are as follows all three of the green LEDs in the upper part of the Gantry CPU board i e DS1 DS2 and DS3 are ON the first eight of the block of yellow LEDs starting on the left i e DS4 DS5 DS6 DS7 DS8 DS9 DS10 and DS11 blink in a cycling fashion from outside to inside the last two of the block of yellow LEDs on the right hand side i e DS12 and DS13 are OFF 6 Switch off the Senographe electri...

Page 1135: ...mpatibility Matrix on page 63 for the compatible software versions of the Gantry CPU board corresponding to the different ADS Application Software versions 3 If the Gantry CPU board current software version does not match the required software version you must perform a software update of the newly replaced Gantry CPU board according to the instruc tions supplied in the Gantry Software Update CD R...

Page 1136: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1136 JC DR A 190 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A190 Gantry CPU Board This page is blank ...

Page 1137: ...Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off When handling circuit boards take precautions against damage by ESD electro static discharge 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal and Replacement of the PDU Board 1 Switch off the Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the left column cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Lift ...

Page 1138: ... to expose the PDU board 3 4 Disconnect all the cables from the PDU board and make a mental note where they connect to on the PDU board Ensure that you do not move them too much so it is easier to re connect them later on CAUTION Disconnect with caution to avoid damage to the connectors and cables 5 Remove the six screws 4 securing the PDU board cross head screwdriver and remove the PDU board 2 3 ...

Page 1139: ...he defective PDU board into an anti static bag 7 Install the replacement PDU board and secure it with the six screws 4 cross head screwdriver 8 Connect all the cables to the new PDU board as summarized in the diagram and table below To avoid potential EMC interference ensure that all the cables are routed around away from the PDU board 4 4 J1 J4 J2 J5 J7 J6 J9 J8 J10 J3 ...

Page 1140: ...M 6 on the PDU board is open 11 Switch on the Senographe electrical power Connector Label Description of cable usually identified by code on a yellow label Cable color J1 J1 PL101 W104 Gray J2 J2 PL101 W125 White J3 No code but cable ends with a gray ribbon cable Black J4 2345987 Black J5 J5 PL101 W110 Gray J6 J6 PL101 W315 Gray J7 Three cables arriving at the same physical connector J7 PL101 W114...

Page 1141: ...ly in the middle of the PDU board i e DS25 is blinking and repre senting the watchdog heartbeat of the microcontroller on the PDU board the green LEDs above and to the right of connector J2 i e DS1 and DS2 are ON the four red LEDs towards the top left of the PDU board i e DS5 DS6 DS7 and DS8 spell the word dEF If only the third LED from the left shows a 0 and the other LEDs are not lit the PDU boa...

Page 1142: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1142 JC DR A 191 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A191 PDU Board This page is blank ...

Page 1143: ...mage by ESD electro static discharge 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal and Replacement of the Arm Distribution Board 1 Switch off the Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the right column cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Disconnect all the cables from the Arm Distribution board and make a mental note where they con nect to on the Arm Distribu...

Page 1144: ...i static bag 6 Install the replacement Arm Distribution board and secure it with the four screws 1 3 mm allen wrench Secure the top two screws first then the bottom right screw When you secure the bottom left screw ensure that you have metal connector 2 that surrounds cable J7 PL301 attached to the screw so that is secured to the Arm Distribution board 7 Connect all the cables to the new Arm Distr...

Page 1145: ...rical power 11 Reinstall the right column cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Connector Label Description of cable usually identified by code on a yellow label Cable color J1 J1 PL301 W314 2345920 2 Gray J2 J2 PL301 W315 2345921 Gray J3 J3 PL301 W503 5143848 Black J4 J4 PL301 W310 5139723 Gray J5 J5 PL301 W307 2371179 Gray J6 J6 PL301 W308 2372181 Gray J7 J7...

Page 1146: ...A 192 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A192 Arm Distribution Board 7 COMPLETION After changing the Arm Distribution board no calibrations are necessary ...

Page 1147: ...rsonnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off When handling circuit boards take precautions against damage by ESD electro static discharge 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 1 Switch off the Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the left column cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Lift the top metal panel ...

Page 1148: ...e Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A193 AC DC Board latches on the left side of the framework 4 Lift the bottom metal panel 3 up using its handles 4 to release it from the framework 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 1149: ... Remove the ground cable 5 8 mm open ended wrench from the bottom metal panel and place the bottom metal panel in a safe place 6 Removing the bottom metal panel exposes the AC DC Module 6 AC DC Board 7 and associated cabling In this Job Card you are only replacing the AC DC Board 7 Disconnect the J138 PL107 W107 cable 8 and the J137 PL102 W106 cable 9 from the 5 7 6 ...

Page 1150: ...oth sides of the AC DC Board so that you do not distort the pins that are located in the AC DC Module black plastic connector The AC DC Board will slide away from the black plastic connector that secures it to the AC DC Module 11 Put the defective AC DC Board into an anti static bag 12 Carefully insert the new AC DC Board 13 into the AC DC Module by gently pushing it up into the AC DC Board black ...

Page 1151: ...6 Switch on the Gantry electrical power 17 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported 18 Switch off the Gantry electrical power 19 Re attach the ground cable to the bottom metal 8 mm open ended wrench cover and replace it over the framework to cover the newly installed AC DC Board 20 Lift the top metal panel up to release it from the left side of the framework...

Page 1152: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1152 JC DR A 193 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A193 AC DC Board This page is blank ...

Page 1153: ...ngineer Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off When handling circuit boards take precautions against damage by ESD electro static discharge 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Remove the Defective AC DC Module 1 Switch off the Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the left column cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Lift...

Page 1154: ... Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A194 AC DC Module latches on the left side of the framework 4 Lift the bottom metal panel 3 up using its handles 4 to release it from the framework 2 1 4 3 ...

Page 1155: ...ble 5 8 mm open ended wrench from the bottom metal panel and place the bottom metal panel in a safe place 6 Removing the bottom metal panel exposes the AC DC Module 6 AC DC Board 7 and associated cabling In this Job Card you are only replacing the AC DC Module but you will need to move the AC DC Board 7 Disconnect the J138 PL107 W107 cable 8 and the J137 PL102 W106 cable 9 from the 5 7 6 ...

Page 1156: ...Carefully remove the AC DC Board from the AC DC Module by gently pushing down on the AC DC Board Apply even pressure on both sides of the AC DC Board so that you do not distort the pins that are located in the AC DC Module black plastic connector The AC DC Board will slide away from the black plastic connector that secures it to the AC DC Module 11 Put the AC DC Board into an anti static bag 12 Di...

Page 1157: ... 8EN Job Card D R A194 AC DC Module Page no 1157 Chapter 9 JC DR A 194 fm leave the other end connected to the framework 15 Remove the four nuts 16 8 mm socket and torque wrench that secure the defective AC DC Module to the framework and remove the defective AC DC Module 15 AC DC Module 16 16 ...

Page 1158: ...ard 2 into the AC DC Module by gently pushing it up into the AC DC Board black plastic connector Apply even pressure on both sides of the AC DC Board so that you do not distort the pins that are located in the AC DC Module black plastic connector The AC DC Board will remain in place due to the tight fit of the AC DC Module black plastic connector 3 Put the L shaped metal strip 3 in place below the...

Page 1159: ...0 to the new AC DC Module 10 mm open ended wrench 9 Switch on the Gantry electrical power 10 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported 11 Switch off the Gantry electrical power 12 Re attach the ground cable to the bottom metal cover 8 mm open ended wrench and replace it over the framework to cover the newly installed AC DC Board 13 Lift the top metal panel up...

Page 1160: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1160 JC DR A 194 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A194 AC DC Module This page is blank ...

Page 1161: ...FETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the system power Remove the column covers Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of Lift Board Read the following procedure to replace the Lift Board 1 Carefully disconnect all the cables from the Lift Board Pay attention to how the cables are routed around ...

Page 1162: ...nformation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A201 Lift Board CAUTION Disconnect the cables with caution to avoid damage to the connectors 2 Release the six screws 1 securing the Lift Board cross head screwdriver 3 Put the defective Lift Board into an anti static bag 1 1 ...

Page 1163: ...t Board 1 Put the new Lift Board in place being careful not to pinch any of the existing cables in the area 2 Use the six screws 1 to secure the new Lift Board cross head screwdriver to the side of the Gan try 3 Carefully reconnect all of the cables to the new Lift Board as summarized in the diagram above and table below 1 1 J12 J1 J2 J4 J5 J3 J9 J10 J15 J22 J16 J17 J14 J13 J4 J23 J21 J6 ...

Page 1164: ...1 Lift Screw Assembly no brake no cable is attached If the Senographe system has a Type 2 Lift Screw Assembly and has been fitted with a Top Brake a black cable with no label leading up to the Top Brake located at the top of the Lift Screw Assembly If the Senographe system has a Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly a black cable with no label going to the Motor Brake located in the Lift Motor at the bot tom...

Page 1165: ...top home page and by consulting Table 1 on page 63 The system level will be defined by one of the System Level Model Number columns in Table 1 on page 63 4 Check whether the current firmware version s for the new Lift Board corresponds to the required firmware version for the that system level If the current firmware version s match the required version s quoted in Table 1 on page 63 no additional...

Page 1166: ...on cable is correctly positioned Refer to Check Gantry Read out Cable Position on page 1216 in Job Card D R A212 Gantry Readout 7 3 Calibrations Check that footswitches are working properly Check if the readability of Gantry Readout text is acceptable If needed adjust the Gantry Readout Potentiometer on the Lift board until the text brightness contrast is acceptable For adjustment use a very small...

Page 1167: ...RED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 25 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Raise the arm to an intermediate position to facilitate the access to both upper 1 and lower 2 optical forks Switch off the system power Remove the Front cover and the right column cover Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and re...

Page 1168: ... the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench 2 Disconnect the Upper Optical Fork cable 1 labeled J4 PL201 W201 from the J4 connector on the Lift Board 3 Carefully cut the cable ties 2 to unattach the Upper Optical Fork cable labeled J4 PL201 W201 from the rest of the cables running up the right hand side of the Lift Board 4 Release the two screws securing the lower optical fork in order to free the ...

Page 1169: ...6 2 Reassembly of the Upper Optical Fork 1 Use the two screws to secure the new Upper Optical Fork 1 2 5 mm allen wrench to the Gantry frame 2 Route the Upper Optical Fork cable W201 down the Gantry framework past the position of the lower Optical Fork Then use the two screws to secure the original Lower Optical Fork back into place 2 5 mm allen wrench 3 Connect the Upper Optical Fork cable 2 labe...

Page 1170: ... J4 PL201 W201 to the other cables using cable ties 3 as shown above CAUTION When connecting the new Upper Optical Fork to the Lift Board ensure that you route the W201 cable so it does not pass over Lift Board as shown above This precaution avoids potential interference caused by component electronic noise 5 Use the four bolts to secure the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench to the Gantry fram...

Page 1171: ...l Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 25 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Raise the arm to its maximum height to access the lower optical fork 1 Switch off the system power Remove the Front cover and the right column cover Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain u...

Page 1172: ...sembly of the Lower Optical Fork 1 Release the four bolts securing the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench 2 Disconnect the Lower Optical Fork cable 1 labeled J5 PL201 W202 from the J5 connector on the Lift Board 3 Carefully cut the cable ties 2 to unattach the Lower Optical Fork cable labeled J5 PL201 W202 from the rest of the cables running up the right hand side of the Lift Board J5 2 1 ...

Page 1173: ... two screws securing the Lower Optical Fork 3 2 5 mm allen wrench 6 2 Reassembly of the Lower Optical Fork 1 Use the two screws to secure the new Lower Optical Fork 1 2 5 mm allen wrench to the Gantry frame 2 Route the Lower Optical Fork cable W202 down to the location of the Lift Board 3 Connect the Lower Optical Fork cable 2 labeled J5 PL201 W202 from the new Lower Optical Fork 3 1 ...

Page 1174: ... J5 PL201 W202 to the other cables using cable ties 3 as shown above CAUTION When connecting the new Lower Optical Fork to the Lift Board ensure that you route the W202 cable so it does not pass over Lift Board as shown above This precaution avoids potential interference caused by component electronic noise 5 Use the four bolts to secure the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench to the Gantry fram...

Page 1175: ... Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes incl calibrations and functional checks 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Raise the arm to an intermediate height to access the lift potentiometer 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the covers See Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry cur...

Page 1176: ...ometer 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Lift Potentiometer 1 Release the four bolts securing the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench 2 Disconnect from the lift board 2 the Cable W203 Potentiometer cable connector J11 3 Release without removing the four screws 3 secur ing the potentiometer 2 5 mm allen wrench 4 Slide the potentiometer out of its supports 2 J11 3 ...

Page 1177: ...e 4 screws from the potentiometer attach ment location 2 Attach the new potentiometer with the same 4 attachment screws that were used with the old lift pot See the orientation in the picture below 3 Attach the potentiometer wire loop to the trolley hook 4 Guide the potentiometer cable through the opening in the column back and connect it to the lift board 7 COMPLETION Check that footswitches and ...

Page 1178: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1178 JC DR A 204 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A204 Lift Potentiometer This page is blank ...

Page 1179: ... TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 45 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING While working on the column mechanism shut down the equipment and switch off the Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power Lift Type in Install Base System No brake Type 1 Top bra...

Page 1180: ...r access to the lift motor 1 Switch off the system power Remove the front and the column covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain refer to Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains on page 1193 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Lift Motor 1 Release the bolts securing the lower X plate 2 10 mm open ended wrench 2 Remove the curtain r...

Page 1181: ...06 Lift Motor power supply cable con nector J10 Cable W205 Lift Motor Encoder cable connector J9 4 If an earth cable exists disconnect the earth cable that is routed to the bottom left corner of the Detector Power Supply plate 5 If a Motor Brake cable exists Type 3 Lift Screw Assemblies disconnect the Motor Brake cable that is connected to the J6 connector on the Lift Board Earth cable routing 4 J...

Page 1182: ...ve If you are installing the Type 3 Lift Brake Motor 5413527 you must also connect the Motor Brake cable to the J6 Connector on the Lift Board as shown above 6 3 Check Column Movement 1 Move the compression paddle out of compression Then check that all four sets of column up down control buttons are operational check each button for up and down movement of the column 2 Move column to its upper and...

Page 1183: ...al energy when the arm is at heights of less than the maximum height To minimize the risk of rapid gas spring movement due to stored mechanical energy you must ensure that the Arm is raised to its maximum height before you proceed WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES The arm must be in the vertical position Raise the arm to its maximum height Switch off the Gantry power Remove th...

Page 1184: ...piston rod 6 1 Disassembly of the Lift Gas Spring To disassemble the Lift Gas Spring 1 proceed as follows 1 Raise the arm manually until the lift belt is loose Access the trapezoidal screw 2 on the top right side of the Gantry use a ratchet handle 13 mm hex socket to turn it clockwise 2 Release the four bolts securing the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench 3 Use circlip pliers to pull the clip ...

Page 1185: ...06 fm 5 Remove the gas spring lower shaft Remove the roller 4 Remove the pulley shaft 5 Remove the gas spring shaft 6 6 Remove the belt then pull the gas spring forward Unscrew it by turning it clockwise The arm cover may be an obstacle when tilting the gas spring for removal 7 7 Remove the U fork 8 from the top of the gas spring 10 mm open ended wrench 5 6 4 7 8 ...

Page 1186: ...wing steps 1 Turn the endless screw 2 counter clockwise 13 mm hex socket and move the arm down 50 mm to make the belt taut This places the gas spring under pressure 2 Assemble the stirrup upper and lower parts using M6 screws but do not tighten them 3 Adjust the alignment of the gas spring in the front rear direction the holes on the stirrup are elon gated to allow adjustment 4 The belt must be po...

Page 1187: ... are operational check each button for up and down movement of the column 2 Move the column to its upper and lower limits Software limits should stop movement If the software limits fail the optical forks are used to recognize and stop any movement before impact with mechan ical stops 3 During column movement check for any noise that indicates excessive friction or binding 4 Move the lift over its...

Page 1188: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1188 JC DR A 206 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A206A Lift Gas Spring This page is blank ...

Page 1189: ...energy when the arm is at heights of less than the maximum height To minimize the risk of rapid lift belt movement due to stored mechani cal energy you must ensure that the Arm is raised to its maximum height before you pro ceed WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Raise the arm to its maximum height Switch off the system power Remove the Front and Column covers for access to the...

Page 1190: ...e Lift Belt 1 Continue to raise the belt pulley 2 manually raise the arm until the lift belt is loosened Access the endless screw 3 on the top right side of the Gantry use a ratchet handle 13 mm hex socket and turn clockwise 2 Release the four bolts securing the lower X plate 4 10 mm open ended wrench 3 Remove the curtain roller 5 2 3 UPPER LEFT SIDE FRONT VIEW UPPER RIGHT SIDE LATERAL VIEW 4 5 ...

Page 1191: ...2 Reassembly of the Lift Belt Proceed to the following steps 1 Insert the lower end of the belt 9 so that it protrudes by 20 mm from the edge of the lower fixing plate two teeth 20 mm 2 Insert the end of the belt at the edge of the upper fixing plate 8 3 Apply blue Loctite to the threads of the four securing screws 10 before tightening them 4 Tighten the four screws securing the belt to the upper ...

Page 1192: ... check that all four sets of column up down control buttons are operational check each button for up and down movement of the column 2 Move column to its upper and lower limits Software limits should stop movement If the software lim its fail the optical forks are used to recognize and stop any movement before impact with mechanical stops 3 During column movement check for any noise that indicates...

Page 1193: ... Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING While performing this procedure you must Power off the Gantry Wear safety glasses and gloves 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the front and column covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Switch on the Gantry power Use the lift command buttons to move the arm vertically un...

Page 1194: ...m B Steps 1 2 and 3 to access the rear of the Gantry C 6 1 Disassembly of the Gantry Curtains 1 Use bent needle nose pliers to unhook and remove the two springs 2 from the curtains CAUTION If the extremity of the spring slides out of the pliers the spring can fly out and cause injury 2 Release and remove the four screws 3 to release the curtains 7 mm open ended wrench 3 If the curtains are to be r...

Page 1195: ... cable tie To use an allen wrench Engage the wrench with the spring hook and the hole in the curtain as shown Lift the wrench to tighten the spring and bring the hook near to the hole Twist the spring hook so that it enters the hole Pull out the wrench To use a cable tie Loop the cable tie into the upper spring hook then use it as a handle to guide the hook into the hole in the cur tain 5 Remove t...

Page 1196: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1196 JC DR A 208 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains This page is blank ...

Page 1197: ...some cases a modification may be required before the replacement covers can be installed When changing covers new screw head cover caps are usually required A kit of screws and caps is available it provides screw caps and a selection of screws nuts and washers to replace lost items This Job Card provides a guide to cover compatibility and lists the parts required for replacement of any cover 2 REQ...

Page 1198: ...1 page 1201 2375028 Column Cover Top Right section 3 3 1 page 1201 2375028 2 section 3 3 2 page 1201 2375028 3 section 3 3 1 page 1201 2375029 Column Cable Exit section 3 3 1 page 1201 2375029 2 section 3 3 2 page 1201 2375029 3 section 3 3 1 page 1201 2375030 Column Cover Bottom Front section 3 3 1 page 1201 2375030 2 section 3 3 2 page 1201 2375030 3 section 3 3 1 page 1201 2375031 Column Cover ...

Page 1199: ...5041 Compression Cover Lower section 3 5 1 page 1205 2375041 3 section 3 5 1 page 1205 2375043 Head Cover Left section 3 6 1 page 1207 2375043 2 section 3 6 2 page 1207 2375043 3 section 3 6 1 page 1207 2375044 Head Cover Right section 3 6 1 page 1207 2375044 2 section 3 6 2 page 1207 2375044 3 section 3 6 1 page 1207 2401145 2 Compression Cover Upper section 3 5 2 page 1205 2401147 Compression Co...

Page 1200: ...ced individually or if a complete set must be ordered and installed Order and install the specified parts Use a copy of the table given in Order Summary on page 1214 to list the parts to be ordered After installing the new covers verify that the positioner reaches rotation and angulation limit posi tions correctly and that no cable is twisted or under excessive strain Column Cover Top Right Column...

Page 1201: ...75029 2375029 3 Column Cover Cable Exit 2375030 2375030 3 Column Cover Bottom Front 2375031 2375031 3 Column Cover Bottom Back 2375032 2375032 3 Column Cover Front Left 2375033 2375033 3 Column Cover Front Right Reference Description Quantity 2375027 2 Column Cover Top Left 1 2375028 2 Column Cover Top Right 1 2375029 2 Column Cover Cable Exit 1 2375030 2 Column Cover Bottom Front 1 2375031 2 Colu...

Page 1202: ...1203 to determine if the defective cover s can be replaced individually or if a complete set must be ordered and installed Order and install the specified parts Use a copy of the table given in Order Summary on page 1214 to list the parts to be ordered After installing the new covers verify that the positioner reaches rotation and angulation limit posi tions correctly and that no cable is twisted ...

Page 1203: ... using the information given in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers section 8 page 526 3 4 3 Post installation checks After installing the new covers verify that the positioner reaches rotation and angulation limit posi tions correctly and that no cable is twisted or under excessive strain Reference Description 2375037 2375037 3 Arm Cover Left 2375038 2375038 3 Arm Cover Right Referen...

Page 1204: ... to determine if the defective cover s can be replaced individually or if a complete set must be ordered and installed Order and install the specified parts Use a copy of the table given in Order Summary on page 1214 to list the parts to be ordered After installing the new covers verify that the positioner reaches rotation and angulation limit posi tions correctly and that no cable is twisted or u...

Page 1205: ...ference of the defective part appears in the following table it can be replaced individually The table indicates the necessary part s to be ordered Install the new cover s using the information given in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gan try Covers section 8 page 526 Reference of defective part Description 2375040 2375040 3 2401145 Compression Cover Upper 2375041 2375041 3 Compression Cover Lo...

Page 1206: ...1207 to determine if the defective cover s can be replaced individually or if a complete set must be ordered and installed Order and install the specified parts Use a copy of the table given in Order Summary on page 1214 to list the parts to be ordered After installing the new covers verify that the positioner reaches rotation and angulation limit posi tions correctly and that no cable is twisted ...

Page 1207: ...e covers If the reference of the defective part appears in the following table it can be replaced individually The table indicates the necessary parts to be ordered Install the new cover s using the information given in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gan try Covers section 9 page 529 Reference of defective part Description 2375043 2375043 3 Head Cover Left 2375044 2375044 3 Head Cover Right Re...

Page 1208: ...9 to determine if the defective cover s can be replaced individually or if a complete set must be ordered and installed Order and install the specified parts Use a copy of the table given in Order Summary on page 1214 to list the parts to be ordered After installing the new covers verify that the positioner reaches rotation and angulation limit posi tions correctly and that no cable is twisted or ...

Page 1209: ...hanging the interface plate install the new covers using the infor mation given in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers section 10 page 530 3 7 2 Detector Covers available covers If the reference of the defective part appears in the following table it can be replaced individually The table indicates the necessary part s to be ordered Install the new cover s using the information given ...

Page 1210: ...n earlier systems to provide anchor points for newer covers Install the assembly as described below 1 Screw the provided locking nut A onto the threaded rod B of the Arm Cover Rework Assy 2 Fit the rod into the lowest pair of holes in the Arm Beam C 3 Screw the two tapped fittings D E onto the ends of the rod to secure it and use the locking nut to lock one of them in place 4 Use the two M4 screws...

Page 1211: ... Detector assembly on earlier systems to provide anchor points for the newer covers 1 Remove the Detector by following the instructions of Job Card D R A141 Image Receptor Digital Detector on page 1099 2 Drill a 4 mm countersink hole at 90 to the exterior face through the mounting lug on each side of the assembly Position 16 7 mm behind the existing hole as shown below Diameter 4 0 1mm Countersink...

Page 1212: ...he metal sheet at the bottom of the detector positioner Interface Plate where the detector cables are attached 3 Remove the existing detector positioner Interface Plate 4 Install the new Interface Plate A provided in the kit 5 Reinstall the metal sheet at the bottom of the detector positioner Interface Plate 6 Reinstall the detector by following the instructions of Job Card D R A141 Image Receptor...

Page 1213: ...ing with an early machine Use the following table to determine the number Column Cover Top Left 2375027 Column Cover Top Right 2375028 Column Cable Exit 2375029 Column Cover Bottom Front 2375030 Column Cover Bottom Back 2375031 Column Cover Front Left 2375032 Column Cover Front Right 2375033 Arm Cover Left 2375037 Arm Cover Right 2375038 Compression Cover Upper 2375040 Compression Cover Lower 2375...

Page 1214: ... two or three cov ers it is usually only necessary to order one kit Reference Description Quantity 2375027 2 Column Cover Top Left 1 0 2375028 2 Column Cover Top Right 1 0 2375030 2 Column Cover Bottom Back 1 0 2375031 2 Column Cover Bottom Front 1 0 2375032 2 Column Cover Front Left 1 0 2375033 2 Column Cover Front Right 1 0 2375037 4 Arm Cover Left 1 0 2375038 4 Arm Cover Right 1 0 2412297 Arm C...

Page 1215: ...powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the front covers the column covers and the bot tom front cover 2 refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 for access to the Gantry Readout 1 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Gantry Readout 1 Disconnect the LCD connect cable W204 from the Lift Board connector J15 2 Carefully remove the LCD connect cable th...

Page 1216: ...oop so that the ribbon cable can be connected to the Lift Board Ensure that the loop that you created sits firmly on the base of the Gantry at 13 cm away from the Lift Board as shown below If you do not check the positioning of the Gantry Readout ribbon cable there is a risk of EMC interfer ence between the Lift Board and ribbon cable This EMC interference can cause the Gantry Readout to appear co...

Page 1217: ... SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal and Reinstallation of Cables from the Tube Head Keypads 1 Switch off all Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the tube head covers see Tube Head Covers on page 529 3 Disconnect the keypad cable from the keypad and from connector J7 or J8 on the Tilt Board PL401 4 Remove the cable 5 Install the r...

Page 1218: ...nd Handle on page 526 3 Disconnect the keypad cable from the keypad and from connector J7 or J8 on the Compression Board PL303 4 Remove the cable 5 Install the replacement cable 6 Ensure that the keypad cables are positioned as shown 7 COMPLETION Check for correct operation of all keypad controls View from right arm at 0 Cable from right keypad is secured to the Arm Distribution Board spacer as sh...

Page 1219: ...er one or two V2 keypads 1 Firmly press your finger on the middle of the Keypad lift rotation button as shown below to observe whether the button contains a membrane 2 On a working Keypad press the far edge of the lift rotation button and observe if there is lift rotation movement If there is lift rotation movement the currently installed Keypad is an old V1 Keypad If there is no lift rotation mov...

Page 1220: ...om the keypad leave it connected at the Compression Board PL303 or the Tilt Board PL401 3 Place the cover on the prepared working surface 4 Check the condition of the cable W305 or W407 If there is any sign of damage or pinching a new cable must be fitted see Job Card D R A215 Arm Control Keypad Cables on page 1217 5 Remove and keep for reuse the nuts and washers three sets which secure the keypad...

Page 1221: ...al checks of keypad operation to be made before completion For example install only the minimum number of securing screws required to ensure that covers do not fall and use masking tape to prevent unwanted movement Notice 1 Apply only moderate pressure when connecting a cable to a keypad to avoid damage to the connector The connector is soldered in its position at right angles to the keypad board ...

Page 1222: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1222 JC DR A 216 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A216 Arm Control Keypads This page is blank ...

Page 1223: ...otation Board 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 90 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the front covers Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain Refer to Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains on page 1193 to acces...

Page 1224: ...hex nuts 2 securing the rotation board 5 5 mm open ended wrench 4 Remove the Rotation Board 6 2 Reassembly of the Rotation Board Reverse the disassembly procedure Add the following step to the reassembly procedure Apply blue Loctite on the threads of the six screws securing the rotation board supporting plate and tighten them with the Torque wrench 0 8 Nm 0 1 Nm CAUTION When reconnecting the cable...

Page 1225: ...n Board corresponds to the required firmware version for the that system level If the current firmware version s match the required version s quoted in Table 1 on page 63 no additional steps are required If the current firmware version s does not match the required version s you must perform a firm ware update of the mismatched firmware version s so that the new Rotation Board firmware ver sion s ...

Page 1226: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1226 JC DR A 221 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A221 Rotation Board This page is blank ...

Page 1227: ...y already has a compatible V2 Rotation Board that supports the V2 Clutch check the model number of the system located on the Generator covers identification labels If the system model number is 2383168 5 or greater the Gantry contains a V2 Rotation Board In this case order the Clutch 2345968 4 and change the Clutch according to the instructions in this Job Card If the system model number is 238316...

Page 1228: ...044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 for access to the clutch 1 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain refer to Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains on page 1193 for access to the rotation board 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Clutch 1 Unplug the clutch cables W218 and W221 from the Rotation Board connector J8 and J7 2 Release and remove the two screws 2 securing the clutch 4 mm allen wren...

Page 1229: ... 2 mm gauge 2 mm allen wrench or suit able feeler gauge to ensure that the gap 2 mm 0 mm 0 3 mm 3 Apply blue Loctite 243 on the threads of the two screws that secure the clutch Then tighten the two screws 2 to secure the clutch to the Arm 4 mm allen wrench 4 Reconnect the clutch cables of the new clutch to the Rotation Board connectors as follows W218 cable to J8 connector W221 cable to J7 connect...

Page 1230: ...d are operational check each button for arm rotation movement 7 COMPLETION None Pass a cable tie A through the hole in the curtain metal support to secure the cables behind the curtain The free length between the two cable ties A and B is approx 60 cm 24 inch Use some adhesive tape to secure the two cables together in this area Do not use cable ties they can catch on other items during movement Us...

Page 1231: ...IES Rotation Optical Fork 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 75 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the front covers Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain refer to Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains on page 1...

Page 1232: ...f the Optical Fork 1 Release the four bolts securing the lower X plate 10 mm open ended wrench 2 Remove the Rotation Board supporting plate 3 3 mm allen wrench 3 Disconnect the rotation potentiometer cable 2 4 Open the cable chain to be able to rotate the rotation board 5 Remove the two screws securing the optical Fork 2 5 mm allen wrench 6 Unplug the Optical Fork cable 4 7 Remove the Optical Fork...

Page 1233: ...s securing the Optical Fork before tightening them CAUTION When connecting the new Optical Fork to the Rotation Board ensure that you route the W215 cable so it does not pass over Rotation Board This precaution avoids potential interference caused by component electronic noise 6 3 Check the Rotation Movement 1 Move the compression paddle out of compression Then check that all four sets of arm left...

Page 1234: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1234 JC DR A 223 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A223 Rotation Optical Fork This page is blank ...

Page 1235: ...100N 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Remove the front covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Raise the arm until the mounting plate of the Gas Spring rises above the pulley of lift belt Rotate the arm to about 45 degrees clockwise ...

Page 1236: ...or Rotation Worm Gear 6 PROCEDURE 1 Release the four allen screws 2 securing the mounting plate 3 of the Gas Spring 4 mm allen wrench 2 Carefully remove the mounting plate 3 making sure that the felt disk 4 remains in place CAUTION Take care to ensure that the old Gas Spring does not fall out of the mounting plate during the handling of the mounting plate 2 2 3 4 4 ...

Page 1237: ...s A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A224 Gas Spring for Rotation Worm Gear Page no 1237 Chapter 9 JC DR A 224 fm 3 By hand carefully pull the old Gas Spring 5 to remove it from the mounting plate 3 4 By hand carefully push the new Gas Spring 6 to into the mounting plate 3 3 5 3 6 6 3 ...

Page 1238: ...during the handling of the mounting plate Do NOT adjust the positions of the large allen screw 8 and column 9 which accomo dates the Gear Gas Spring 6 Gently push on the column 9 to compress the Gas Spring against the felt disk and insert the two rear allen screws 10 Apply blue Loctite 243 to secure the thread of the two rear allen screws 7 Apply blue Loctite 243 to secure the thread of the two fr...

Page 1239: ...ation Potentiometer 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 75 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the front covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain refer to Job Card D R A208 Gantry Curtains on page 1193 fo...

Page 1240: ...r 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Rotation Potentiometer 1 Remove the Rotation Board supporting plate 2 5 mm allen wrench Note In the following step take care not to lose the tension spring 3 when loosening the screw 2 2 Remove the screw 2 securing the Potentiometer support 2 mm allen wrench 3 Unplug the Potentiometer cable W220 from the Rotation Board connector J11 3 2 ...

Page 1241: ... and 3 before tightening them When the Potentiometer and its support plate are reassembled in the column place the spring 4 as shown in the illustration Route the Potentiometer cable W220 as shown below and plug it into the J11 connector on the Rotation Board 6 3 Check the Rotation Movement 1 Move the compression paddle out of compression Then check that all four sets of arm left right con trol bu...

Page 1242: ...message 112 001 appears after potentiometer replacement check the voltage between the center pin of the rotation potentiometer connector and ground The following values must be obtained according to the arm position Arm at 180 V 2 825 V 0 05 V dc Arm at 0 V 1 65 V 0 05 V dc Arm at 165 V 0 606 V 0 05 V dc 7 COMPLETION Carry out the following calibration Job Card CAL A021 Arm Rotation Calibration on...

Page 1243: ...andard Tool Box Hub extractor 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 75 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Lower the arm for good access to the Rotation Motor 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the arm and the front covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Loosen and remove the Gantry curtain refer to...

Page 1244: ...ug the Motor cables W206 and W205 from the Rotation Board connector J10 and J9 2 If an earth cable 2 exists disconnect the earth cable that is connected to one of the four screws 2 3 Remove the four screws 3 securing the Motor 5 mm allen wrench 4 Remove the Motor from its belt 5 5 Release the screw securing the gear 4 and the motor 2 mm allen wrench 6 Use a hub extractor to extract the gear 17 mm ...

Page 1245: ... right corner motor fix ing plate as shown above When routing the earth cable make sure all excess cable is secured using a cable tie so that the excess cable cannot interact with other moving parts of the Gantry When routing the Motor cables W206 and W205 to the Rotation Board connector J10 and J9 ensure that they are routed and secured with cable ties as indicated in the illustration 6 3 Check t...

Page 1246: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1246 JC DR A 228 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A228 Rotation Motor This page is blank ...

Page 1247: ...ead 22 mm 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 90 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the top right and left column covers and remove the front covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Turn the Gantry power on Raise the arm to have good acces...

Page 1248: ...otation Brake 1 Insert and tighten the two transportation screws 2 4 mm allen wrench CAUTION Do not dismount the brake without the transportation screws in place and tight ened 2 Disconnect the Brake cable W219 from the Rota tion Board connector J6 3 Release the six screws 3 securing the Brake holder plate 5 mm allen wrench Screw Name How many Allen Wrench mm A Transportation Screws 2 4 B Brake Ho...

Page 1249: ... to clean the surface of the brake disk 6 2 2 Prepare the New Brake on a Table 1 Loosen the two transportation screws 4 mm allen wrench on the new brake until you have a 5 mm gap between the non mobile and the mobile assemblies of the brake 2 Grease the springs that are now accessible between the non mobile and the mobile assemblies 3 Tighten the transportation screws 4 Mount the new brake on the ...

Page 1250: ... of the opening F loosen the pushing screw until the feeler gauge slips in 3 Try to insert the feeler gauge through the right side of the opening G loosen the pushing screw until the feeler gauge slips in 4 Try to insert the feeler gauge through the left side of the opening H loosen the pushing screw until the feeler gauge slips in 2 Check for each opening that 1 The 0 15 mm feeler gauge slips in ...

Page 1251: ...chanical energy ensure that the Tube Head is set to 0 before you proceed WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Ensure that the orientation Tube Head is set to 0 degrees Switch off the Gantry power Remove the front covers and the column covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Switch on the Gantry power Use the lift command buttons to move the ar...

Page 1252: ... Plate from the lower support 2 Loosen the four screws 3 of the lower support plate by half a turn only 6 mm allen wrench WARNING Do not remove the four screws 3 3 Loosen the fifth screw 4 of the lower support plate 6 mm allen wrench 4 Untighten and remove the screw 5 from the bearing 6 mm allen wrench 5 Pull and remove the lower end of the Gas Spring 6 Turn the Gas Spring anti clockwise until it ...

Page 1253: ...ower support plate 6 mm allen wrench While tightening the fifth screw of the lower support plate ensure that the bottom of the Gas Spring 8 is aligned within approximately 2 mm with the bottom of the arm 9 6 Tighten the four screws 3 of the lower support plate by half a turn 6 mm allen wrench 7 Place the U Plate 2 on the lower support and secure it with the four screws 1 4 mm allen wrench 6 3 Chec...

Page 1254: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1254 JC DR A 230 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A230 Rotation Gas Spring This page is blank ...

Page 1255: ...g rather than the entire Lift Screw Assembly with Motor In this case order the appropriate Lift Screw according to the Type of Lift Screw Assembly installed in the system For systems with Type 1 and Type 2 order a Type 2 Lift Screw without Motor 5391083 For systems with Type 3 order a Type 3 Lift Screw without Motor 5373048 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box including a universal joint knuckle joint for ac...

Page 1256: ...f Gantry Column Covers except Column Cover Bottom Rear Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Remove the Compression arm covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Cov ers on page 523 If a Type 2 Lift Screw Assembly exists and is fitted with the Top Brake remove the Lift Screw Assem bly Top Brake that is currently on the old Lift Screw Assembly in the ...

Page 1257: ... Gantry Curtains 1 Remove the two springs of curtains from the back of the Gantry Using a crook or tiewrap could help If necessary move the trolley position so that the springs 1 that attach upper and lower cur tains are visible 2 Cut the tiewrap fixing the clutch cable to curtain 2 3 Release and remove the two lower screws securing the lower curtain 3 3 mm allen wrench 4 Remove the lower curtain ...

Page 1258: ...ease the two lower screws 3 on the lower part of each of the Curtain Ribs 3 mm allen wrench 2 Release the four nuts 4 securing the lower X plate 17 mm open ended wrench and remove the lower X Plate by sliding it under the remaining Curtain Ribs 3 Remove the Gantry LCD readout and base cover of the Gantry 4 Release the nuts of the front Curtain Roller 5 19 mm open ended wrench and remove it from th...

Page 1259: ...remove the two left hand screws as described in the following steps If you remove the two left hand side fixing screws of the Cardan the entire Cardan assem bly and associated Compression Arm will fall quickly 7 If necessary power on the system and use the Arm control buttons to until the lift position is at its maximum possible height The lift position must be at its maximum possible height in or...

Page 1260: ...sary i e if the Lift upper limit is not at the maximum setting manually raise the lift posi tion by rotating the Lift Screw anti clockwise 13 mm or 17 mm hexagonal wrench to the correct height so that the disk of the Arm can be accommodated by the recess of located on the Gantry LOTO Tool One belt end starts here Route behind X Plate Other belt end finishes here Loop belt here Bottom part of the r...

Page 1261: ...lip 8 disappears into the lower part of the Gantry LOTO Tool d With the lower lip hidden push the lower part of the Gantry LOTO Tool into the Gantry so that it sits flush with the outer surface of the Gantry framework If necessary look down the guidance hole 9 to check the bottom part of the Arm disk is visible above the lower surface of the recess e When the lower part of the Gantry LOTO Tool is ...

Page 1262: ...he lift position by rotating the Lift Screw clockwise 13 mm or 17 mm hex agonal wrench g Physically verify that the Gantry LOTO Tool is locked into position WARNING You MUST ensure that the nylon belt or Gantry LOTO Tool secures the Compression Arm If you remove the two left hand side fixing screws of the Cardan without securing the Com pression Arm the entire Cardan assembly and associated Compre...

Page 1263: ... 2 Lift Screw Assembly also has the Top Brake installed remove the Top Brake cable from the J6 connector on the Lift Board If you are changing a Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly disconnect the earth cable that is routed to the bottom left corner of the Detector Power Supply plate and disconnect the Motor Brake cable that is connected to the J6 connector on the Lift Board 13 Remove the Lift Board refer t...

Page 1264: ...rd D R A232 Lift Screw Assembly Gantry and place them in close proximity to the DC motor 15 Release the four screws 14 that connect the lower part Bearing Block of the Lift Screw Assembly to the Gantry frame 5 mm allen wrench While releasing these screws carefully hold the base 15 of the Lift Screw Assembly so that it does not fall 13 14 15 ...

Page 1265: ...enographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A232 Lift Screw Assembly Page no 1265 Chapter 9 JC DR A 232 fm 16 Remove the old Lift Screw Assembly 16 from the Gantry 16 ...

Page 1266: ...old grease is fully removed using the fol lowing sub steps 1 Apply Cleaner Spray to the Leadscrew Recommended product 3M Cleaner Spray 3M PN 50098 Note When working with grease and to protect your hands against the Leadscrew always wear rubber cloves 2 Use ORA Wipes or equivalent cloths for removing the grease from the Leadscrew Rotate the ORA Wipes cloth around the Leadscrew and draw wipe both di...

Page 1267: ... ORA Wipes cloth around the Leadscrew and rotate Lead Screw by other hand along the entire length of the Leadscrew as shown below Take care not to use the type of cloth wipes that could disintegrate since the loosened threads or particles may get mixed with the grease 4 Repeat these steps above several times until the Leadscrew is cleaned A well cleaned Leadscrew looks like that shown below Rotate...

Page 1268: ...e Apply Loctite 270 and a torque of 7 1 Nm when securing the M6 allen screws If necessary in the case of 5337148 to attach the Brake Motor to the bottom of the Lift Screw Lift Motor Frame use the following steps 1 Insert the Brake Motor into the Lift Motor Frame ensuring that the bottom of Lift Screw 1 is aligned with the top of the Brake Motor 2 2 Use the four M5 allen screws supplied with the Li...

Page 1269: ...at the four holes in the Cardan Nut assembly are pointing in the correct direction so that they will face out of the Gantry when the Lift Screw Assembly is re installed i e the L bracket holes are to the right hand side and 90 of the Cardan Nut assembly holes Note The position of the Cardan Nut Assembly is important so that its threaded holes will be aligned with the Arm frame which is in position...

Page 1270: ...ot use any tools 4 If necessary adjust the Cardan Nut Assembly position so that its threaded holes are aligned with the four holes in the Arm frame To adjust the Cardan Nut Assembly position rotate the Lift Screw 3 accordingly 17 mm hexagonal wrench 5 Route the cables 4 from the DC motor of the new Lift Screw Assembly though the other side of the Gantry so they are in close proximity to where you ...

Page 1271: ...wo left hand screws 5 of Cardan Assembly ensure that you apply a torque of 20 Nm and apply Loctite 270 To access right hand screws from behind the Rotation board use a 6 mm socket wrench with universal joint knuckle joint 7 Remove the physical LOTO previously applied as follows If you secured the Compression Arm with a nylon belt remove the nylon belt that secured the Com 4 5 Universal joint knuck...

Page 1272: ...y pull the lower part of the Gantry LOTO Tool away from the Gantry framework c Fully remove the Gantry LOTO Tool paying particular attention to not drop it CAUTION The Gantry LOTO Tool is 0 7 kg Be prepared to take the weight of the Gantry LOTO Tool as you pull it s lower apart away from the Gantry If you are not prepared to take the weight of the Gantry LOTO Tool there is a risk that it could fal...

Page 1273: ...d lower parts of the Lift Screw Assembly move the Compression Arm up and down at least two times 11 Move the Compression Arm down and tighten the four screws 9 that connect the lower part Bear ing Block of the Lift Screw Assembly to the Gantry frame 5 mm allen wrench Ensure that you apply a torque of 10 Nm and apply Loctite 270 Fully tighten the four screws in the following cross order top left bo...

Page 1274: ...Screw Assembly route and connect the Lift Motor earth cable to the bottom left corner of the Detector Power Supply plate If you are changing a Type 3 Lift Screw Assembly route and connect the Lift Motor earth cable to the bottom left corner of the Detector Power Supply plate and connect the brake cable to the J6 connec tor on the Lift Board 15 Replace the curtains refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove...

Page 1275: ...607 to the Leadscrew by hand Ensure the Leadscrew is homogeneously covered with grease as shown in illustration 1 CAUTION Do not use any other type of grease other than Grease for Lift and Rotation 5212483 Orapi CT FLON 607 Do not use a brush to apply the grease as this may introduce foreign objects on to the Leadscrew Only use your hands to apply the grease to the Leadscrew About 35 g 1 23 oz of ...

Page 1276: ...trol buttons to drive the Lift over the whole range up and down two times in slow speed 3 Use the fast speed Arm Control buttons to drive the Lift over the whole range up and down a few times in fast speed 4 Check how grease has been spread to the screw Examples of well spread grease smoothly and uniformly along the whole screw length with no splattered grease are shown in illustration 2 Good Unif...

Page 1277: ...ast speeds and check the greasing again 6 6 Check Column Movement 1 Move the compression paddle out of compression Then check that all four sets of column up down control buttons are operational check each button for up and down movement of the column 2 Move column to its upper and lower limits Software limits should stop movement If the software lim its fail the optical forks are used to recogniz...

Page 1278: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1278 JC DR A 232 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A232 Lift Screw Assembly This page is blank ...

Page 1279: ... 1 SUPPLIES Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake 2 APPLICABILITY This Job Card is only applicable to systems with a Type 2 Lift Screw Top Assembly A Type 2 Lift Screw Top Assembly has a silver L bracket withthreaded holes as indicated below 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 1 hour 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered OFF 6 PREREQUISITES Switch ...

Page 1280: ...crew Assembly Top Brake 1 Remove the right hand side Gantry Column Covers to reveal the location of the Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake and the Lift Board refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 2 Disconnect the Lift screw Assembly Top Brake cable W510 from the J6 connector on the Lift Board Cut the cable ties to secure the Lift screw Assembly Top Brake cable W510 up th...

Page 1281: ...aphe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A233 Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake Page no 1281 Chapter 9 JC DR A 233 fm try as shown below Cable Tie Cable Tie Cable Tie Cable Tie ...

Page 1282: ...nd Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A233 Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake 3 Release and carefully remove the four allen screws 1 that secure the Lift screw Assembly Top Brake 2 to the bracket 4 mm allen wrench 4 Carefully remove the Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake 2 from the bracket 3 1 2 3 ...

Page 1283: ...w Assembly so that the screw s hexagonal shape is in the correct orien tation for the Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake to fit onto it Turn the Lift Screw so that the corner of the screw s hexagonal shape is pointing towards the edge of the Gantry wall 2 Place the Lift screw Assembly Top Brake 2 so that the corner with the cable 2 is on the right hand side when viewing the Gantry wall front on as illu...

Page 1284: ...embly Top Brake align with the threaded holes of the bracket 5 You may need to move the Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake until each side is flush to the bracket 4 Secure the Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake to the bracket with the four allen screws 6 4 mm allen wrench Progressively tighten the opposite corners together so that equal pressure is applied to the fixations between the bracket and the Lift S...

Page 1285: ...8EN Job Card D R A233 Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake Page no 1285 Chapter 9 JC DR A 233 fm route it directly upwards towards the brake Use cable ties to secure the Lift screw Assembly Top Brake cable W510 up the side of the Gantry as shown below Gather the excess cable at the end of J6 To Brake ...

Page 1286: ...3 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A233 Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake the brake and create a loop with a cable tie Cable Tie Cable Tie Cable Tie Cable Tie ...

Page 1287: ... Top Brake With normal brake operation the clamping noise occurs within one second of the stopping of the column movement If you cannot hear the clamping noise then Check the W510 cable connection to the J6 connector on the Lift Board Check that the CPLD firmware on the Lift Board is 10 0 1 or later To do this go to the Service Desktop home page and observe the CPLD entry next to the Lift Board in...

Page 1288: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1288 JC DR A 233 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A233 Lift Screw Assembly Top Brake This page is blank ...

Page 1289: ...ter and Cable with Support 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box Mammography compression scale with digital display 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 1 hour incl calibrations and functional checks 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 0 Lower the arm until you have a good access to the Compression Potentiometer Switch off the Gantry power...

Page 1290: ...oard connector J6 2 Release the screw securing the extremity of the position detecting wire 1 3 mm Allen wrench 3 Identify the type of Compression Potentiometer currently installed see illustration below to deter mine your next step Determine your next step If you have a Type 1 or Type 2 Compression Potentiometer go to step 6 If you have a Type 3 Compression Potentiometer go to step 4 4 Remove the...

Page 1291: ...ometer 3 from the Compression Potentiometer Support 6 Remove the Allen screws 4 securing the Compression Potentiometer Support 3 mm Allen wrench Then remove the Compression Potentiometer Support plus Potentiometer for Type 1 Type 2 or Compression Potentiometer Support Type 3 from the Compression Assembly frame Step applicable for Type 3 Compression Potentiometers only 2 3 Step applicable for Type ...

Page 1292: ...f the Compression Potentiometer Sup port This allows inserting the Compression Potentiometer Support attachment screws Note Do not remove the upper left screw 2 only loosen it slightly 3 Place the Compression Potentiometer and its Support with the remaining loose screw on the Com pression Assembly frame and insert and tighten the two M4 Allen screws 3 3 mm Allen wrench to attach the Support to the...

Page 1293: ... equivalent medium strength locking compound to the screws See picture below 4 Insert and tighten the two removed lower M4 screws 4 to the corners of the Compression Potenti ometer Support to attach the Compression Potentiometer firmly to the Support Tighten the third screw also on the upper left corner 5 Route the Compression Trolley cable W304b P N 2379180 and the Potentiometer cable W303 3 4 ...

Page 1294: ...nect the Compression Potentiometer W303 cable to the J6 connector on the Compression board 7 Attach the potentiometer wire loop to the Compression Trolley attachment point 6 with an M4 screw 3 mm Allen wrench Check the potentiometer wire is vertically installed If the potentiometer wire is vertical check if the correct Support holes have been used to attach it to the Compression Assembly frame 8 C...

Page 1295: ...s verification can be done by lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the Bucky installing the magnification device in the upper pair of holes and connecting a spring dynamometer calibrated from 0 kg to 15 kg be tween the compression paddle and the magnification device 7 COMPLETION Carry out the following calibration procedures Calibrations Checks Job Card Gantry Compression Force Sensor J...

Page 1296: ...pter 9 Page no 1296 JC DR A 243 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A243 Compression Potentiometer and Cable This page is blank ...

Page 1297: ...hapter 9 1 SUPPLIES 1 Compression Motor 1 Compression Belt 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box Hub extractor Mammography compression scale with digital display 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 45 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Lower the arm until you have good access to the Com pression Motor 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the arm c...

Page 1298: ... Loctite on the threads of the four screws securing the supporting plate and on the threads of the screw securing the motor and the gear before tightening them Check manually that the Belt is tight enough 6 4 Check the Compression Movement 1 Check that both sets of compression decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs located on the paddle holder all function correctly That is the padd...

Page 1299: ...n Belt Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES Manual Compression Belt 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Lower the arm to obtain good access to the Manual Compression Belt 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the compression covers Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers ...

Page 1300: ...y of the Manual Compression Belt Reverse the disassembly procedure Check manually with your hands that the belt is sufficiently tight that it does not slide and that the pulleys move when the Manual Compression Belt moves CAUTION During reassembly of the small pulley 5 double check that its anti rotation key 6 and securing clip 4 are correctly set in place If the key is absent or the belt slides f...

Page 1301: ... Compression Brake 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box Mammography compression scale with digital display 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Lower the arm to obtain good access to the Manual Compression Brake 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the paddle Remove the compression covers Refer to Job Card PHY...

Page 1302: ... 8EN Job Card D R A246 Manual Compression Brake 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Manual Compression Brake 1 Remove the belt 1 refer to Job Card D R A245 Manual Compression Belt on page 1299 2 Remove the M6 screw 2 5 mm allen wrench 3 Release the four pairs of M4 screws 3 3 mm allen wrench Then and carefully remove the Paddle 1 2 ...

Page 1303: ... the Paddle Holder board carefully disconnect the Paddle Recognition cable from the J2 connec tor Force Sensor cable from the J1 connector and Motor cable from the J2 connector Disconnect the ground cable from the Paddle Holder 5 Remove the four pairs of M4 screws 5 3 mm allen wrench and then remove the upper and lower 4 3 J2 Paddle Recognition Cable J1 Force Sensor J3 Manual Compression Brake J1 ...

Page 1304: ...althcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A246 Manual Compression Brake parallel panel 6 6 Release the M6 screw 7 and nut 8 5 mm allen wrench and remove the force sensor 9 5 6 7 8 9 ...

Page 1305: ...ssion Brake Page no 1305 Chapter 9 JC DR A 246 fm 7 Release the M4 screw 10 3 mm allen wrench that secures the fixation ring 11 8 Release the M5 set screw 12 9 Pull out the Actuator axis 13 10 Release the three M3 screws 14 fixing the compression brake 15 2 5 mm allen wrench and remove the compression brake 15 13 12 11 10 14 15 ...

Page 1306: ... mm feeler gauge as shown in the illustration Apply blue Loctite on the threads of the three screws securing the brake before tightening them Check manually with your hands that the belt is sufficiently tight that it does not slide and that the pulleys move when the Manual Compression Belt moves CAUTION If the belt slides from its position manual compression functions and braking are not available...

Page 1307: ...try readout Measure one point at 5 daN and one point at 15 daN The value on the Gantry readout must agree within 1 daN If it does not perform Job Card CAL A048 Calibration of Compression Force Sensor on page 1709 Note If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available this verification can be done by lowering the paddle close to the top surface of the Bucky installing the magnificati...

Page 1308: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1308 JC DR A 246 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A246 Manual Compression Brake This page is blank ...

Page 1309: ...x Mammography compression scale with digital display 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 45 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered on mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying commands 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 90 for access to the Motorized Compression Brake 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the Compression Arm covers ref...

Page 1310: ...sassembly of the Motorized Compression Brake 1 Loosen the screw 2 on the top of the brake 2 5 mm allen wrench 2 Disconnect the brake power supply cable 3 W309 from the Compression Board connector J5 3 Connect the brake power supply cable 3 W309 to the Arm Distribution Board connector J5 in place of the previous cable 4 disconnect W307 2 Compression Board Arm Distribution Board 3 4 Connect W309 Her...

Page 1311: ...losing the key 6 6 Disconnect the power cable W309 from the Arm Distribution Board connector J5 6 2 Reassembly of the Motorized Com pression Brake Reverse the disassembly procedure Remember to reconnect the brake supply cable W309 to J5 on the Compression Board and W307 to the Arm Distribution Board Add the following steps when reassembling the motorized compression brake Note The brake must be su...

Page 1312: ...he Bucky and the compression paddle to check calibration of the compression force display on the Gantry readout Measure one point at 5 daN and one point at 15 daN The value on the Gantry readout must agree within 1 daN If it does not perform Job Card CAL A048 Calibration of Compression Force Sensor on page 1709 Note If the recommended compression measurement tool is not available this verification...

Page 1313: ...ce Sensor Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES Force Sensor 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the Paddle Remove the Paddle Holder cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 for access to the Force Sensor 1 1 ...

Page 1314: ...OCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Force Sensor 1 Remove the M6 screw 1 5 mm allen wrench 2 Release the four pairs of M4 screws 2 3 mm allen wrench and remove the Paddle Holder 3 3 On the Paddle Holder board carefully disconnect the Paddle Recognition cable from the J2 connec tor Force Sensor cable from the J1 connector and Motor cable from the J2 connector Disconnect 1 3 2 ...

Page 1315: ...Page no 1315 Chapter 9 JC DR A 248 fm the ground cable from the Paddle Holder 4 Remove the four pairs of M4 screws 4 3 mm allen wrench and then remove the upper and lower parallel bar 5 J2 Paddle Recognition Cable J1 Force Sensor J3 Manual Compression Brake J1 PL304 W304 J3 PL304 W314 J2 PL304 W319 Paddle Holder Earth Cable 4 5 ...

Page 1316: ...DR A 248 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A248 Force Sensor 5 Release the M6 screw 6 and nut 7 5 mm allen wrench and remove the force sensor 8 6 7 8 ...

Page 1317: ...wever at this stage do not reinstall the Padle Holder cover CAUTION Take care to install the new Force Sensor in its original position not inverted Take care to correctly route the cables as shown in the illustration below 6 3 Paddle Holder Board DIP Switch Setting If the Senographe system contains a Paddle Holder Board 2369391 2 with DIP switches see illustra tion below set the DIP switches as de...

Page 1318: ...lete If DS2 is still illuminated the Paddle Holder Board is probably faulty or possibly the newly installed Force Sensor is faulty TIP use a 1 5 mm allen key or a similar small object to set the DIP switch positions Note When red LED DS3 next to the connector J1 is illuminated it indicates that Force Sensor is wire disconnected or that the Force Sensor needs changing 4 Once the Paddle Holder Board...

Page 1319: ...ddle Recognition Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES W304 Cable for Paddle Recognition 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the Paddle Remove the Paddle Holder cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 for access to the ...

Page 1320: ...6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Paddle Recognition Cable 1 Remove the M6 screw 1 5 mm allen wrench 2 Release the four pairs of M4 screws 2 3 mm allen wrench and remove the Paddle Holder 3 3 On the Paddle Holder board carefully disconnect the Paddle Recognition cable from the J2 connec tor Force Sensor cable from the J1 connector and Motor cable from the J2 connector Disconnect 1 3 2 ...

Page 1321: ... to damage the earth cable cut the cable ties 4 that secure the Paddle Recognition cable to the side of the Compression Arm framework 5 Carefully disconnect the D connector 5 of the Paddle Recognition cable from the cable that leads to the D Connector 6 of the cable leading to the Compression Board J2 Paddle Recognition Cable J1 Force Sensor J3 Manual Compression Brake J1 PL304 W304 J3 PL304 W314 ...

Page 1322: ...y of the Paddle Recognition Cable Reverse the disassembly procedure Take care to correctly route the cables as shown in the illustration below 6 3 Check the Compression Movement Check that both sets of compression decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs located on the paddle holder all function correctly That is the paddle moves up or down in response to each control 7 COMPLETION Non...

Page 1323: ...0 Compression Board Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES Compression Board 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 40 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the Compression arm covers Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 to access the Compression Board 1 1 ...

Page 1324: ...m too much so it is easier to re connect them later on 2 Remove the four screws 2 securing the Compression board 2 5 mm allen wrench 3 Remove the Compression Board 6 2 Reassembly of the Compression Board 1 Carefully place the new Compression board in position and secure it using the four screws 2 5 mm allen wrench CAUTION Ensure that you do not pinch the cables that are in close proximity to the C...

Page 1325: ...GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A250 Compression Board Page no 1325 Chapter 9 JC DR A 250 fm J1 J6 J10 J9 J4 J3 J5 J8 J7 J2 ...

Page 1326: ...ally identified by code on a yellow label Cable color J1 J1 PL303 W307 Gray J2 J2 PL303 W308 Gray J3 J3 PL301 W301 Red Blue Orange Yellow J4 J4 PL301 W302 Gray ribbon J5 J4 PL303 W309 covered with flexible plastic Red Green Blue Green J6 J6 PL303 W303 Black Red Green J7 J7 PL303 W305 Note Only connected when replacing the covers Light brown ribbon J8 J8 PL303 W305 Note Only connected when replacin...

Page 1327: ...3 and W304 do not pass over the microprocessor that is located in the center of the Compression board Use cable ties to secure cables W302 and W308 together Cable W302 must pass in front of the board as shown Use cable ties to secure cables W303 and W304 together Use cable ties to secure cable W313 to the board spacers 1 In order to avoid EMC interference use cable ties to ensure that the W303 and...

Page 1328: ...the Gantry and check that no errors are raised on the Gantry LCD display Check that the LED states are as follows For more information about the behavior and states of the Compression board LEDs refer to Stepper Board on page 288 LED Label LED Color LED Status DS1 Green ON DS2 Green ON DS3 Yellow ON DS4 Yelllow ON DS5 Green ON DS6 Yellow OFF DS7 Green ON or OFF DS8 Yellow ON DS9 Green ON DS10 Red ...

Page 1329: ...ed version s you must perform a firm ware update of the mismatched firmware version s so that the new Compression Board firmware version s match those quoted in Table 1 on page 63 To update the new Compression Board firmware follow the instructions supplied in the Gantry Software Update CD ROM that is kept with the system 7 2 Calibrations Check compression motion and keypad Carry out the following...

Page 1330: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1330 JC DR A 250 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A250 Compression Board This page is blank ...

Page 1331: ...eft hand side of the Paddle Holder Block where the earth cable is connected see below Order the appropriate Paddle Holder Board according to the type already present in the Gantry Paddle Holder Board PN 2369391 if the existing Paddle Holder Board does not have a set of DIP switches Paddle Holder Board PN2369391 2 if the existing Paddle Holder Board does have a set of DIP switches 2 TOOLS Standard ...

Page 1332: ...nformation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A251 Paddle Holder Board 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power Remove the Paddle Remove the Paddle Holder cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 to access the Paddle Holder Board 1 1 ...

Page 1333: ...OCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Paddle Holder Board 1 Remove the M6 screw 1 5 mm allen wrench 2 Release the four pairs of M4 screws 2 3 mm allen wrench and remove the Paddle Holder 3 3 On the Paddle Holder board carefully disconnect the Paddle Recognition cable from the J2 connec tor Force Sensor cable from the J1 connector and Motor cable from the J2 connector Disconnect 1 3 2 ...

Page 1334: ...2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A251 Paddle Holder Board the ground cable from the Paddle Holder 4 5 Remove the four M4 screws 4 5 mm allen wrench 6 Remove the Paddle Holder Board 5 J2 Paddle Recognition Cable J1 Force Sensor J3 Manual Compression Brake J1 PL304 W304 J3 PL304 W314 J2 PL304 W319 Paddle Holder Earth Cable 4 5 ...

Page 1335: ...the Padle Holder cover Take care to correctly route the cables as shown in the illustration below 6 3 Paddle Holder Board DIP Switch Setting If you changed the Paddle Holder Board with a Paddle Holder Board 2369391 2 with DIP switches see illustration below set the DIP switches as detailed below If you changed Paddle Holder Board 2369391 2 with another 2369391 2 set the DIP switches of the new Pad...

Page 1336: ... 3 3 Power on the Gantry and see if DS2 is illuminated If DS2 is NOT illuminated the correct DIP switch setting has been found and this procedure is complete If DS2 is still illuminated the Force Sensor is probably faulty or possibly the newly installed Paddle Holder Board is faulty TIP use a 1 5 mm allen key or a similar small object to set the DIP switch positions Note When red LED DS3 next to t...

Page 1337: ...G The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Switch off the Gantry power 6 PROCEDURE 1 Remove the Compression Carriage covers refer to section 8 1 in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 2 Remove the Compression trolley refer to section 8 2 in Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Change the old Compression trolley for a new Compression trolley ...

Page 1338: ...lowing calibration procedures Calibrations Checks Job Card Gantry Compression Force Sensor Job Card CAL A048 Calibration of Compression Force Sensor on page 1709 Compression Thickness Job Card CAL A050 Compression Thickness Calibration on page 1721 If Compression Thickness not OK repeat calibrations from Compression Force Sensor AOP SNR Check Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check on page 707 If...

Page 1339: ...that the Bucky is placed for at least 30 minutes in a dry room whose temperature is greater than or equal to 20 C 68 F Notice Never put the Bucky onto a hot surface to speed up this process 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Principle Bad repositioning of the Bucky during gain calibration or during acquisitions result in vertical artifacts on the image perpendicular to the grid lines 6 2 Installation of New Bucky To...

Page 1340: ...6 3 Verification Release the two screws Tighten the screws while pushing the latch securing plate firmly in the direc tion of the chest wall Tighten the screws while pushing the latch securing plate firmly in the chest wall direction and ensuring that it is aligned with the one on the detector side Release the two screws Check that when the latches are tightened the Bucky is in contact with the ba...

Page 1341: ...al steps are required If the current firmware version s does not match the required version s you must perform a firm ware update of the mismatched firmware version s so that the new PDU Board firmware ver sion s match those quoted in Table 1 on page 63 To update the new PDU Board firmware follow the instructions supplied in the Gantry Software Update CD ROM that is kept with the system 7 2 Calibr...

Page 1342: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1342 JC DR A 255 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A255 Bucky This page is blank ...

Page 1343: ...sonnel 1 Field Engineer Time 20 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Not applicable 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Bucky Top Cover 1 Remove the three screws and brass blocks 1 cross head screwdriver which secure the top cover to the Bucky Ensure that you access the two side screws by the hole 2 in the Bucky framework Note The Bucky illustrated has three brass blocks Earlier versio...

Page 1344: ...om the back of the Bucky to expose the interior components of the Bucky 3 Gently slide the old top cover towards the back of the Bucky away from the carbon surface to fully remove it from the Bucky CAUTION The interior components of the Bucky are extremely delicate and contain electrical and moving parts Pay special attention not to touch Bucky s interior components when you fully remove the top c...

Page 1345: ...elow the carbon surface CAUTION The interior components of the Bucky are extremely delicate and contain electrical and moving parts Pay special attention not to touch Bucky s interior components slide the new top cover into place 2 Gently lower the top cover down towards the back of the Bucky to hide the Bucky s interior compo nents When lowering the top cover onto the back of the Bucky ensure tha...

Page 1346: ...back of the new top cover fits firmly in the Bucky s framework and that there is equidistant space between the top cover and the Bucky 4 Attach the three screws and brass blocks 4 cross head screwdriver to secure the top cover to the Bucky Ensure that you access the two side screws by the hole 5 in the Bucky framework Notice Be careful not to overtighten the screws on the three plastic threaded st...

Page 1347: ... 1 Field Engineer Time 20 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Not applicable 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Bucky Top Cover 1 Remove the three screws and brass blocks 1 cross head screwdriver which secure the top cover to the Bucky Ensure that you access the two side screws by the hole 2 in the Bucky framework Note The Bucky illustrated has three brass blocks Earlier versions of ...

Page 1348: ... The interior components of the Bucky are extremely delicate and contain electrical and moving parts Pay special attention not to touch Bucky interior components when you fully remove the top cover 6 2 Change the Bucky Board 1 Carefully disconnect the Bucky connector cables 1 and 2 and Bucky motor cable 3 from the Bucky board Note The connectors on the Bucky connector cable and Bucky motor cable a...

Page 1349: ...the left hand side by carefully sliding it downwards to into the Bucky When inserting the Bucky board be careful to ensure that the metal arm 5 connected to the Bucky passes in between the optical fork on the Bucky board 5 Use the four allen screws and washers 4 secure the Bucky board to the Bucky 2 5 mm allen wrench 6 Carefully connect the Bucky connector cables 1 and 2 and Bucky motor cable 3 to...

Page 1350: ...the carbon surface Notice The interior components of the Bucky are extremely delicate and contain electrical and moving parts Pay special attention not to touch Bucky interior components while sliding the top cover into place 2 Gently lower the top cover down towards the back of the Bucky to hide the Bucky interior compo nents When lowering the top cover onto the back of the Bucky ensure that each...

Page 1351: ...hat the back of the new top cover fits firmly in the Bucky framework and that there is equi distant space between the top cover and the Bucky 4 Attach the three screws and brass blocks 4 cross head screwdriver to secure the top cover to the Bucky Ensure that you access the two side screws by the hole 5 in the Bucky framework Notice Be careful not to overtighten the screws on the three plastic thre...

Page 1352: ...ns displayed on the Service Desktop home page and by consulting Table 1 on page 63 The system level will be defined by one of the System Level Model Number columns in Table 1 on page 63 5 Check whether the current HC12 firmware version for the new Bucky Board corresponds to the required firmware version for the that system level If the current HC12 firmware version matches the required version quo...

Page 1353: ...ll calibrations and functional checks 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Be careful when touching the tube housing as its temperature can be up to 80 C about 180 F 5 PREREQUISITES Select Aluminium filter to avoid possible damage to rhodium or molybdenum filters Rotate the arm to 90 to access the X ray Tube Switch off the Gantry power Remove the tube cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gant...

Page 1354: ...e screws securing the left pivot 2 mm allen wrench Pull out and remove the pivots The pivots are tapped x mm thread so that a screw can be inserted and used to pull the pivot out of its housing 4 Remove housing by gently pulling out the tube head interface plate and filter wheel all together and place them on a suitable trolley The X ray tube must be held by the HV female connector and not by the ...

Page 1355: ...tach the two screws securing the filter wheel to the interface plate 8 Carefully replace the newly constructed housing 9 Reattach the pivots 3 on both sides Re attach the left pivot so it is flush against the hous ing and tighten the three screws to secure it Re attach and push down firmly on the right pivot to ensure a tight fit CAUTION Failure to do this can create a gap that causes the tube to ...

Page 1356: ...age 1649 mAs X ray Calibration Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 Tube Tilt Calibration Job Card CAL A027 Tube Tilt Calibration on page 1681 Collimator Calibration Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 Collimation Check Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 If Collimation Check not OK repeat Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Ca...

Page 1357: ...nsor Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES Zero Tilt Sensor and Cable W405 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 90 for access to the Tilt Sensor 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the tube cover refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 1 ...

Page 1358: ... the Tilt Motor cable W404 from the tilt board connector J3 2 Unplug the Tilt Sensor cable W405 from the tilt board connector J12 3 Cut the two cable ties 4 Remove the four screws 2 securing the upper spacer 4 mm allen wrench 5 Remove the two screws 3 securing the Tilt Motor assembly 5 mm allen wrench 6 Tilt the assembly manually from the top to extract the coupling pin 4 from its fork 5 and remov...

Page 1359: ...f Collimation Check not OK repeat Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement ...

Page 1360: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1360 JC DR A 264 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A264 Tilt Sensor This page is blank ...

Page 1361: ...lt Drive Assembly with Bearing 2345905 Or separately as required Motor Tilt W404 2345929 Tilt Drive Assembly 2392469 Bearing Tilt Drive 99033678 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 90 for access to the Tilt Motor 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the tube...

Page 1362: ...e the two screws 3 securing the Tilt Motor assembly 5 mm allen wrench 5 Tilt the assembly manually from top to extract the coupling pin 4 from its fork 5 and remove the assembly If it is not necessary to change components within the assembly the procedure is complete To remove components from the assembly 1 Release the motor coupling screw 6 1 5 mm allen wrench 2 Remove the four screws 7 securing ...

Page 1363: ...at Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conversion Factor ...

Page 1364: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1364 JC DR A 265 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A265 Tilt Motor and Drive Assembly This page is blank ...

Page 1365: ...Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES Tube Tilt Board 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 0 and move it to its lowest position for access to the Tilt Board 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the tube cover Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 5...

Page 1366: ...8EN Job Card D R A266 Tube Tilt Board 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the Tilt Stepper Board 1 Unplug all cables from the Tilt Board after noting their positions 2 Remove the four screws 2 securing the Tilt Board 2 5 mm allen wrench 3 Remove the Tilt Board 6 2 Reassembly of the Tilt Stepper Board Reverse the disassembly procedure 2 ...

Page 1367: ...d firmware ver sion s match those quoted in Table 1 on page 63 To update the new Tube Tilt Board firmware follow the instructions supplied in the Gantry Software Update CD ROM that is kept with the sys tem 7 2 Calibrations Carry out the following calibrations Calibrations Checks Job Card Acquisition Image Chain Tube Tilt Calibration Job Card CAL A027 Tube Tilt Calibration on page 1681 Collimator C...

Page 1368: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1368 JC DR A 266 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A266 Tube Tilt Board This page is blank ...

Page 1369: ...er settings specific to the new Collimator In order for the new Collimator to function cor rectly you must also change the Collimator Control Board that is supplied with the Collimator 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 180 for access to the collimator Swit...

Page 1370: ...e 12 which supports the FOV button 4 mm allen wrench 2 Using an antistatic bag as protection place the plate and button on the X ray head support arm Notice Do not attempt to disconnect the FOV button Do not allow the plate to hang down the FOV con nection is fragile 3 Remove the four screws 9 two each side which secure the X ray containment box 8 4 mm allen wrench 4 Remove the X ray containment b...

Page 1371: ...wrench to the framework 3 Connect the cables to the following connectors on the new Collimator Control Board Collimator cable multicolored ribbon cable to connector J8 Ensure that the collimator cable does not pass over in close proximity to the microprocessor on the Collimator Control Board Power cable multicolored cable to connector J9 Ensure that the power cable is routed between the side of th...

Page 1372: ... screws 2 two each side 5 Reconnect four cables Lamp cable W503 flying lead 3 Collimator cable W501 4 Filter wheel cable W505 5 Filter wheel cable W507 or W509 6 6 Reattach the two screws securing the connector pro tection box 7 small cross head screwdriver 7 Replace the X ray containment box If necessary first reattach the two screws 8 which secure the fan pro tection box 3 mm allen wrench 8 Reat...

Page 1373: ...n on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conversion Factor Job Card CAL A045 Conversion Factor Measurement on page 1701 Use the same dosimeter as...

Page 1374: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1374 JC DR A 280 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A280 Collimator Set This page is blank ...

Page 1375: ...the task described in the table below depending on the Collimator Box Number of the existing Collimator 2 APPLICABILITY This Job Card applies to the core product If the system has the CESM option perform the CESM ver sion of this Job Card located in the CESM SIP instead 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must ...

Page 1376: ...V button 4 mm allen wrench 2 Using an antistatic bag as protection place the plate and button on the X ray head support arm Notice Do not attempt to disconnect the FOV button Do not allow the plate to hang down the FOV con nection is fragile 3 Remove the four screws 9 two each side which secure the X ray containment box 4 4 mm allen wrench 4 Remove the X ray containment box If necessary first remo...

Page 1377: ...ench 15 Use a torque wrench to tighten the four screws 2 two each side to 3 0 Nm 0 2 Nm 16 Apply Blue Loctite 243 around the heads of the four screws 2 two each side 17 Reconnect four cables Lamp cable W503 flying lead 16 Collimator cable W501 17 Filter wheel cable W505 18 Filter wheel cable W507 or W509 19 18 Reattach the two screws securing the connector pro tection box 20 small cross head screw...

Page 1378: ...alibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conversion Factor Job Card CAL A045 Conversion Factor Measurement on page 1701 Use the same dos...

Page 1379: ...llimator DC DC Board 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered OFF 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 180 for access to the collimator Switch OFF the Gantry power Remove the tube cover Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 to access the Collimator DC DC Board 1 which is ...

Page 1380: ...all the Colli mator Control Board 2 Release and remove the four nuts and washers securing the Collimator Control Board 4 5 5 mm open ended wrench 3 Remove the Collimator Control Board to expose the Collimator DC DC board 6 2 Change the Collimator DC DC Board 1 Unplug all connectors from the Collimator DC DC Board 2 Remove the four nuts securing the Collimator DC DC Board 5 5 mm Open ended wrench 3...

Page 1381: ...the framework 3 Connect the cables to the following connectors on the new Collimator Control Board Collimator cable multicolored ribbon cable to connector J8 Ensure that the collimator cable does not pass over in close proximity to the microprocessor on the Collimator Control Board Power cable multicolored cable to connector J9 Ensure that the power cable is routed between the side of the framewor...

Page 1382: ...heck that the LED states are as follows For more information about the behavior and states of the Collimator Control board LEDs refer to Collimator Control Board PL403 on page 295 7 Reboot the Senographe system and verify that the Collimator blades move as expected 7 COMPLETION None LED Label LED Color LED Status DS1 Green ON DS2 Green OFF or ON DS3 Green ON DS4 Green ON DS5 Green ON DS6 Green OFF...

Page 1383: ... must be used to ensure correct light intensity easy filament centering and reliability 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box including a small Pozi screwdriver 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 2 hours 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Not applicable 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 0 and move it to its comfortable working position to access to the Collimator Lamp 1 Switch off the Gantry power Remove the...

Page 1384: ...ecuring the rear plate 6 which supports the FOV button 4 mm allen wrench 2 Using an antistatic bag as protection place the plate and FOV button on the X ray head support arm Notice Do not attempt to disconnect the FOV button Do not allow the plate to hang down the FOV connection is fragile 3 Remove the four screws 3 two each side which secure the X ray containment box 2 4 Remove the X ray containm...

Page 1385: ...6 8EN Job Card D R A288 Collimator Lamp Page no 1385 Chapter 9 JC DR A 288 fm 6 Disconnect the lamp connector 8 7 Release the two screws 9 securing the lamp 10 and its support 2 5 mm allen wrench Be careful not to damage or move the mirror when you release the screws 8 Remove the lamp 8 10 9 ...

Page 1386: ...he new lamp 1 into position until it reaches the end of the slot 2 Partially secure the lamp with washers and allen screws 2 inside the collimator 2 5 mm allen wrench so that its position can be adjusted 3 Adjust the position of the lamp to so that the end of its support is 11 5 mm from the side of the Colli mator 4 Fully secure the lamp tightening the allen screws 2 to a torque of 1 1 Nm 5 Connec...

Page 1387: ...n 8 on the X ray head support arm with the two screws 9 one each side 4 mm allen wrench 10 Check visually that all screws securing the Collimator are well mounted 11 Perform Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 to determine whether the congru ence of the light field with the X ray field is such that the total misalignment sum of misalignments on opposite sides is within the limits set ...

Page 1388: ...e the plate and button on the X ray head support arm Notice Do not attempt to disconnect the FOV button Do not allow the plate to hang down the FOV connection is fragile 3 Remove the four screws 3 two each side which secure the X ray containment box 2 4 Remove the X ray containment box If necessary first remove the two screws 4 which secure the fan protection box 5 Remove the four screws 6 securin...

Page 1389: ...A288 Collimator Lamp Page no 1389 Chapter 9 JC DR A 288 fm help you determine in which direction to reposition the lamp 7 Fully secure the lamp tightening the allen screws 7 to a torque of 1 1 Nm 8 Reinstall the right collimator cover with the small screws 8 small Pozi screwdirver Reposition accordingly 3 8 7 8 ...

Page 1390: ...hat all screws securing the Collimator are well mounted 13 Perform Job Card ELE A028 Collimation Checks on page 679 to determine whether the congru ence of the light field with the X ray field is such that the total misalignment sum of misalignments on opposite sides is within the limits set by your local regulations If this congruence action limit is met go to Completion on page 1390 If this cong...

Page 1391: ... Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING The Gantry must be powered off 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Disassembly of the FOV Buttons 1 Switch off the Senographe electrical power 2 Remove the tube head covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Disconnect the W510 cable from the J4 connector on the Tube Tilt board 4 Remove t...

Page 1392: ...he top of the Tube Head cutting the cable ties 3 that secure the cables to the framework 7 Fully remove the FOV button 6 2 Reassembly of the FOV Buttons 1 Route the W510 cables of the new FOV button 1 up to the top of the Tube Head and to the Tilt Board 2 Connect the W510 cable to the J4 connector on the Tube Tilt board 3 Use the cable ties 2 that secure the cables to the framework 4 Put the new F...

Page 1393: ... Card D R A290 FOV Button Page no 1393 Chapter 9 JC DR A 290 fm side of the Tube Head with allen screws 3 3 mm allen wrench 5 Replace the tube head covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 7 COMPLETION After changing the FOV button no calibrations are necessary 3 3 ...

Page 1394: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1394 JC DR A 290 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A290 FOV Button This page is blank ...

Page 1395: ...raphe electrical power 2 Remove the top column cover where the broken stop button is located either left hand side or right hand side Refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 3 Search for and remove the fallen retaining ring from inside the column if found 4 Assemble the new Stop button on to the cover To do this put the spring 1 under and against the button 2 see illu...

Page 1396: ...en side of the ring is towards the longitudinal cut out of the Stop button 7 Manually press the Stop button from outside the covers and release it Visually observe that the Stop button presses in and returns without any jams Repeat this test five times 8 Re assemble the top cover back to the column refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 7 COMPLETION After changing th...

Page 1397: ... up to 80 C about 180 F 5 PREREQUISITES Rotate the arm to 90 counterclockwise placing the tube head at the 9 o clock position Switch off the Gantry power WARNING The Senographe system must be powered OFF and LOTO applied Switch OFF the electri cal power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appropriate LOTO padlock and label Remove the tube cover see Job Card Job Card PHY A...

Page 1398: ... ensure that there will be no lateral play in the tube assembly when the adjustable right side pivot is secured To replace the tube tilt pivot do the following 1 Release and remove the three screws securing the left pivot 1 2 mm allen wrench 2 Release and remove the screw securing the right pivot 2 mm allen wrench 3 Pull out and remove the pivots The pivot has a screw hole So you can insert a scre...

Page 1399: ...age 679 If Collimation Check not OK repeat Collimator Calibration Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 Flat field tests Job Card ELE M032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 813 Mag Resolution Test Job Card ELE M034 IQ Tools Mag Resolution Test on page 835 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all cali...

Page 1400: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1400 JC DR A 292 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A292 Tube Tilt Pivots This page is blank ...

Page 1401: ...kup the existing data on the current AWS unit See Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 Make a backup of the Repeat and Reject Analysis database Use the AWS Export Database feature as described in the chapter QC Tests for the Radiologic Technologist of the Senographe DS QC Manual Notice If there is a system failure that results in the loss of information from the Repeat and Rejec...

Page 1402: ...ables from the AWS unit rear panel Note Note locations of all disconnected cables 3 Remove the ground cable screwdriver 4 Release the AWS unit as follows On V1 Control Stations remove the three nuts securing the upper right corner plate 2 10 mm open ended wrench On V2 Control Stations loosen the allen screws which secure the front and back brackets 2 6 mm allen wrench For the front bracket move th...

Page 1403: ...he CD writer s power cable from the external CD writer and from the UPS 3 Remove the external CD writer 6 2 3 Reassembly of the New AWS Unit 1 Place the new AWS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Secure the AWS unit to the Control Station using the Velcro strips 3 3 Secure the new AWS unit as follows On V1 Control Stations secure the upper right corner plate 2 using three nuts 10 mm open ended wr...

Page 1404: ...nit rear panel Refer to ADS Rear Panel Connectors Sun SB150 Workstation on page 1414 for a guide to cable connections 6 3 Disassembly Reassembly of AWS Unit on V3 Control Stations 6 3 1 Disassembly of AWS Unit 1 Locate the AWS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Remove all the connected cables from the AWS unit rear panel Note Note locations of all disconnected cables 3 Remove the ground cable scr...

Page 1405: ...ated bracket 3 securing the back of the AWS unit 4 mm allen wrench 6 For each of the side L brackets 4 that secure the AWS unit do the following a Remove the two nuts 5 that secure the L bracket to the C bracket 7 mm open ended wrench b Untighten but do not remove the two allen screws 6 that secure the L bracket to the Control Station framework 4 mm allen wrench c Slide the L bracket away from the...

Page 1406: ...ealthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A311 AWS Unit d Gently remove the C bracket from the top of the AWS unit 7 Remove the defective AWS unit from the Control Station 4 5 6 7 ...

Page 1407: ... 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A311 AWS Unit Page no 1407 Chapter 9 JC DR A 311 fm 6 3 2 Reassembly of the New AWS Unit 1 Place the new AWS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Attach the two allen screws and associated bracket 2 to secure the back of the AWS unit 4 mm allen wrench 1 2 ...

Page 1408: ... wrench 4 Secure the top of the AWS unit to each of the side L brackets 4 as follows a Gently place the C bracket 5 on the top of the AWS unit so that its threads line up with the holes on the L bracket b Push the L bracket away onto threads of the C Bracket c Attach the two nuts 6 to secure the L bracket to the C bracket 7 mm open ended wrench d Tighten the two allen screws 7 to secure the L brac...

Page 1409: ...l Connectors Sun U20 Workstation on page 1415 for a guide to cable connections 6 4 Disassembly Reassembly of AWS Unit on V4 Control Stations 6 4 1 Disassembly of AWS Unit 1 Locate the AWS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Remove all the connected cables from the AWS unit rear panel Note Note locations of all disconnected cables 3 Remove the ground cable screwdriver 4 Remove the two allen screws ...

Page 1410: ...6 For each of the side L brackets 4 that secure the AWS unit do the following a Remove the two nuts 5 that secure the L bracket to the C bracket 7 mm open ended wrench b Untighten but do not remove the two allen screws 6 that secure the L bracket to the Control Station framework 4 mm allen wrench c Slide the L bracket away from the C Bracket 7 d Gently remove the C bracket from the top of the AWS ...

Page 1411: ...Chapter 9 JC DR A 311 fm 6 4 2 Reassembly of the New AWS Unit 1 Place the new AWS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Attach the two allen screws and associated bracket 2 to secure the back of the AWS unit 4 mm allen wrench 3 Attach the two allen screws and associated bracket 3 to secure the front of the AWS unit 4 mm allen wrench 1 2 3 ...

Page 1412: ... wrench 5 Reconnect the ground cable screwdriver 6 Reconnect all the cables to the AWS unit rear panel Refer to ADS Rear Panel Connectors HP Z400 Workstation on page 1416 for a guide to cable connections 6 5 Reassembly of Top and Front Covers 1 Reinstall the Control Station omega cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Sta tion Covers on page 503 2 Reinstall the Control Station top co...

Page 1413: ...Hosts Selection window refer to Job Card ELE A023 Declare Worklist Hosts on page 671 and check that all network devices are still correctly declared If not do the following as required for each network host and printer declare the network hosts refer to Job Card ELE A022 Declare Network Hosts on page 663 declare the printers refer to Job Card ELE A020 Declare and Set Printers Filming Devices on pa...

Page 1414: ...Generator Serial Link 2226625 3 Modem Serial Link 4 Not used 5 Internal Ethernet Switch IDC AWS Gantry 2389288 6 Not used 7 Not used 8 Service specific cable 9 Generator UPS ADS Serial Link 2387162 10 Monitor VGA Cable 2390029 11 Not used 12 Not used 13 External Ethernet Link to hospital network 14 Mouse or Trackball USB Link 15 Keyboard USB Link 16 Bar Code Reader USB Link 17 Not used 18 AC input...

Page 1415: ...4 Keyboard USB Link 5 External Ethernet Link to hospital network 6 Bar Code Reader USB Link 7 Not used 8 Generator Serial Link 2226625 9 Service specific cable 10 Not used 11 Generator UPS ADS Serial Link 2387162 12 Internal Ethernet Switch IDC AWS Gantry 2389288 on Pre Penduick systems 2389288 2 on Penduick and above systems 10 2 5 9 11 12 3 7 4 6 8 1 VGA Socket NOT used Ground Note Ensure that t...

Page 1416: ...B Link 4 Keyboard USB Link 5 6 8 Not used 7 Bar Code Reader USB Link 9 Internal Ethernet Switch IDC AWS Gantry 2389288 2 10 External Ethernet Link to hospital network 11 Not used 12 Generator UPS ADS Serial Link 2387162 13 Generator Serial Link 2226625 14 Service specific cable 13 2 12 14 9 3 8 4 7 11 1 Ground Note Ensure that the monitor DVI cable is connected to the left hand side display port n...

Page 1417: ...Control Stations and early V3 Control Stations contains one rotative arm support and two extension rotative arms Sisfle introduced with V3 V4 Control Stations contains one rotative arm support and one extension rotative arm The procedure used in this Job Card vary according to the type of rotative arm you have Since the mouse is not supported on Ergotron A arms this Job Card is only applicable to ...

Page 1418: ... Cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 3 Remove Control Station Omega Cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 4 Carefully extract the harness 1 from the rotative arm 5 Cut the cable ties from the monitor harness to free the mouse cable 6 Disconnect the mouse cable from the ADS computer 7 Extract the mouse cable from ...

Page 1419: ...he opening 1 of the rotative arm 3 Connect the mouse to the ADS Compouter 4 Route the mouse cable along the monitor harness Secure the monitor harness and trackball cable with black cable ties 5 Reinsert the harness 2 into the rotative arm 6 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 7 Reinstall the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Rei...

Page 1420: ...2 Remove the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 3 Remove the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 4 Carefully pull on the upper silicone mask 1 to remove it from the rotative arm Store the upper sili cone mask in a clean place 5 Carefully pull on the lower silicone mask 2 to remove it from the rotativ...

Page 1421: ...fm 6 Disconnect the mouse cable from the ADS computer 7 Cut the cable ties that secure the monitor cables and mouse cable to the Control Station framework 3 and harness 4 8 Carefully pull the harness 5 from the upper and lower parts of the rotative arm 9 Extract the mouse cable 6 from the hole in the harness and from the opening of the monitor sup 4 3 5 7 ...

Page 1422: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1422 JC DR A 312 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A312 Mouse port 7 Remove the mouse 8 ...

Page 1423: ...mouse support 2 Use pointed nose pliers to create an opening in the harness at 27 cm from the end of the harness 3 Route the mouse cable through the opening in the harness so that it leaves the other end of the har ness Then route the mouse cable through the rotative arm support entrance into the Control Station 4 Ensure that the rotative arm 1 and rotative arm support 2 are aligned in the same pl...

Page 1424: ... Job Card D R A312 Mouse 5 Insert the upper silicone mask shorter of the two 3 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwards 6 Insert the lower silicone mask longer of the two 4 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwards 7 Connect the mouse to the ADS computer 3 4 ...

Page 1425: ...ve This ensures that the movement of the monitor cables are not inhibited when the rotative arm is turned Secure the harness to the monitor cables and mouse cable with a cable tie at 1 cm from the end of the harness 6 Secure the monitor cables and mouse cable to the Control Station frame work with a cable tie 7 9 Turn the rotative arm though all extremes and check that the monitor harness monitor ...

Page 1426: ...edures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A312 Mouse 10 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 11 Reinstall the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 12 Reinstall the X ray Console 9 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1427: ...Sisfle introduced with V3 V4 Control Stations contains one rotative arm support and one extension rotative arm The procedure used in this Job Card vary according to the type of rotative arm you have 1 SUPPLIES ADS Trackball Kit 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down correctly the equipment ...

Page 1428: ...rms Reverse the disassembly procedure 7 PROCEDURE FOR ERGOTRON B ARMS 7 1 Disassembly of Trackball on Ergotron B Arm 1 Unplug and remove the X ray Console 2 Remove Control Station Top Cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 3 Remove Control Station Omega Cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 4 Carefully extract the h...

Page 1429: ...m monitor support 8 Release and remove the trackball securing screw 3 then the spacer 4 and remove the trackball 7 2 Reassembly of New Trackball on Ergotron B Arm 1 Install and secure the trackball with the longest screw 1 length 38 mm and spacer 2 that are supplied with the Trackball Kit The spacer must be located between the handle and the trackball 2 3 4 1 2 ...

Page 1430: ...DS computer Secure the Trackball and USB extension cable connectors with two cable ties 4 4 Route the trackball cable along the monitor harness Secure the monitor harness and trackball cable with black cable ties which are supplied with the Trackball Kit 5 Reinsert the harness 5 into the rotative arm 6 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page ...

Page 1431: ...ole 2 Remove the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 3 Remove the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 4 Carefully pull on the upper silicone mask 1 to remove it from the rotative arm Store the upper sili cone mask in a clean place 5 Carefully pull on the lower silicone mask 2 to remove it from the rot...

Page 1432: ...rackball cable from the USB extension cable leading to the ADS computer 7 Cut the cable ties that secure the monitor cables and trackball cable to the Control Station framework 3 and harness 4 8 Carefully pull the harness 5 from the upper and lower parts of the rotative arm 9 Extract the trackball cable 6 from the hole in the harness and from the opening of the monitor sup 4 3 5 7 ...

Page 1433: ...n 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A313 Trackball Page no 1433 Chapter 9 JC DR A 313 fm port 7 10 Release and remove the trackball securing screw 8 then the spacer 9 and remove the trackball 8 9 8 ...

Page 1434: ...cated between the handle and the trackball 2 Use pointed nose pliers to create an opening in the harness at 27 cm from the end of the harness 3 Route the trackball cable through the opening in the harness so that it leaves the other end of the harness Then route the track cable through the rotative arm support entrance into the Control Sta tion 4 Ensure that the rotative arm 3 and rotative arm sup...

Page 1435: ...5 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwards 6 Insert the lower silicone mask longer of the two 6 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwards 7 Use either the existing USB extension cable or the USB extension cable to connect the trackball to the ADS computer Secure the Trackball and USB extension cable connectors with two ca...

Page 1436: ...is ensures that the movement of the monitor cables are not inhibited when the rotative arm is turned Secure the harness to the monitor cables and trackball cable with a cable tie at 1 cm from the end of the harness 9 Secure the monitor cables and trackball cable to the Control Station framework with a cable tie 10 9 Turn the rotative arm though all extremes and check that the monitor harness monit...

Page 1437: ... R A313 Trackball Page no 1437 Chapter 9 JC DR A 313 fm 10 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 11 Reinstall the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 12 Reinstall the X ray Console 9 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1438: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1438 JC DR A 313 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A313 Trackball This page is blank ...

Page 1439: ...tes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 6 PREREQUISITES The installed AWS software must be ADS version 29 0 or later 7 PROCEDURE 7 1 Configure the CD RW unit Switches on the rear panel of the new CD RW unit must be correctly set before installation They are not accessible after the Control Station covers have been installed Check that the power switch at the rear of the new CD RW unit is set to to ON I A st...

Page 1440: ...r CD RW units that exist in systems are mounted in a housing unit 4 Carefully slide the old CD RW unit from the Control Station remove the power and SCSI cable from the back panel of the old CD RW unit and remove it from the Control Station Leave the power and SCSI cable in a convenient place so that they can be attached to the new CD RW unit 5 For newer CD RW units that need replacing untighten t...

Page 1441: ...ral bar of the Control Station frame 10 Temporarily mount the top cover then center the CD RW unit s tray with respect to the cover aper ture It is possible and accepted that the width of the CD RW unit exceeds the width of the opening in the top cover However there should be no gap between the CD RW and the top cover 11 Once you have aligned the top cover and the CD RW unit remove the top cover a...

Page 1442: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1442 JC DR A 314 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A314 External CD RW Unit This page is blank ...

Page 1443: ...ternational Keyboard for a keyboard with the same layout Note You must not use a Sun keyboard with a V4 Control Station Z400 since it can lead to keyboard malfunction 2 SUPPLIES For V3 Control Stations one of the following keyboards For V4 Control Stations one of the following keyboards Keyboard Layout FRU GE Part Number German 5233716 2 Swedish 5233716 3 Norwegian 5233716 4 Spanish 5233716 5 Fren...

Page 1444: ...nographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A315 International Keyboard 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 6 PREREQUISITES None ...

Page 1445: ...10 6 then shutdown the Control Station using the shutdown button the Browser and proceed to section 7 2 to change the keyboard with an International Keyboard WARNING Before proceeding to section 7 2 shut down correctly the equipment and switch off the Senographe system hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying...

Page 1446: ...eed to directly to section 8 2 8 1 Configure the ADS Workstation for the new Keyboard If you are going to connect a keyboard with a different layout to the ADS Workstation you must reconfig ure the ADS Workstation with the Desktop Manager Configuration Tool before you connect the new key board To do this with the original keyboard connected proceed as follows 1 Reboot the ADS Workstation to ensure...

Page 1447: ...option Press the F2 key to continue 6 At the Keyboard Type Selection page that appears use the cursor keys to move to the keyboard option corresponding to the International Keyboard you are going to install and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue You are returned back to the kdmconfig View and Edit Window System Configuration page The entry for the Keyboard Type ...

Page 1448: ... Edit Window System Configuration page use the cursor keys to move to the No changes needed Test Save and Exit option and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue 8 A kdmconfig Window System Configuration Test page appears prompting you to test and save the configuration Press the F4 key to bypass the test save the configuration and exit the Desktop Manager Configura ...

Page 1449: ...t that option Press the F2 key to continue 14 At the kdmconfig Screen Size Selection page that appears use the cursor keys to move to the appropriate screen size option 18 inch 46cm if the system uses an 18 monitor or 19 inch 48cm if the system uses a 19 monitor and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue 15 At the kdmconfig Resolution Colors Selection page that appe...

Page 1450: ...tall Control Station Covers on page 503 4 Disconnect the original keyboard from the back of the ADS Computer and remove it from the Control Station 5 Put the new keyboard on the Control Station and connect it to the USB connector at back of the ADS Computer as illustrated above 6 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 7 Reinstall the Top...

Page 1451: ... with the Desktop Manager Configuration Tool before you connect the new key board To do this with the original keyboard connected proceed as follows 1 Reboot the ADS Workstation to ensure that you are at the first Login prompt A series of system initialization messages appears on the screen then the Login prompt appears 2 Login as the root user as follows a At the Login prompt enter root b At the ...

Page 1452: ...option Press the F2 key to continue 6 At the Keyboard Type Selection page that appears use the cursor keys to move to the keyboard option corresponding to the International Keyboard you are going to install and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue You are returned back to the kdmconfig View and Edit Window System Configuration page The entry for the Keyboard Type ...

Page 1453: ... Edit Window System Configuration page use the cursor keys to move to the No changes needed Test Save and Exit option and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue 8 A kdmconfig Window System Configuration Test page appears prompting you to test and save the configuration Press the F4 key to bypass the test save the configuration and exit the Desktop Manager Configura ...

Page 1454: ...ins an x within the brackets 11 At the first kdmconfig page use the cursor keys to move to the Xorg server option and press the space bar to select that option Press the F2 key to continue 12 At the first Xorg Server Configuration Instruction page that appears press the F2 key to continue 13 You are returned to the command prompt 14 At command prompt ensure that the Control Station is in safe stat...

Page 1455: ...Control Station Covers on page 503 4 Disconnect the original keyboard from the back of the ADS Computer and remove it from the Control Station 5 Put the new keyboard on the Control Station and connect it to the USB connector at back of the ADS Computer as illustrated above 6 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 7 Reinstall the Top Cove...

Page 1456: ...ring textedit 4 Within the TextEdit application window that appears type some characters that are specific to the keyboard that you have installed Ensure that the characters that are displayed are the same as the keys that you are pressing on the newly installed keyboard If the characters displayed correspond to the keys you are pressing the keyboard is configured cor rectly If the characters disp...

Page 1457: ...nly applicable to V1 and V2 Control Stations 2 SUPPLIES SB 150 CD ROM drive 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 6 PREREQUISITES If possible ensure that no CD ROM is already present in the old CD ROM drive If you are unable to open the CD ROM tray with the eject button you can manually open the CD ROM tray via the hole on ...

Page 1458: ...overs on page 503 5 Remove the AWS Computer SB 150 from the Control Station refer to Section 6 1 page 1401 in Job Card D R A311 AWS Unit 6 Remove the two screws cross head screwdriver securing the SB 150 cover to the chassis 7 Slide the SB 150 cover towards the rear of the SB 150 until the cover tabs release 8 Lift the SB 150 cover straight up and put the cover aside in a safe place 9 Take the fol...

Page 1459: ...ensitive components in antistatic bags before placing them on any surface 10 Remove the IDE cable 1 and power cable 2 from the back of the CD ROM drive 11 Remove the two screws cross head screwdriver securing the CD ROM drive to the chassis 12 Place your fingers on the back of the CD ROM drive Push the CD ROM DVD ROM drive toward the chassis front and remove it 13 Place the faulty CD ROM in an ant...

Page 1460: ...n the new CD ROM drive in the chassis 16 Push the CD ROM drive toward the chassis rear 17 Replace the two screws cross head screwdriver to secure the CD ROM drive to the chassis 18 Connect the IDE cable 3 and power cable 4 to the back of the CD ROM drive Ensure that the cable assembly connectors are properly oriented by aligning the connector keys Cable Select CS Jumper information listed here 3 4...

Page 1461: ...Section 8 page 1414 in Job Card D R A311 AWS Unit 22 Reinstall the Omega Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 23 Reinstall the Top Cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 24 Reinstall the X ray Console 8 COMPLETION Ensure that the newly installed CD ROM is correctly configured as follows 1 Power on the Senographe sy...

Page 1462: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1462 JC DR A 316 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A316 SB 150 CD ROM Drive This page is blank ...

Page 1463: ...4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 2 Field Engineers Time 60 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Power to the system must be off before beginning the procedure 6 PRE REQUISITES The Control Station have been secured to the floor in its correct position 7 PROCEDURE 7 1 Disassembly 1 Remove the main frame radshield joint 1 between the radiation screen and the frame 2 Use a screwdriver to remove the eight screw cov...

Page 1464: ...ormation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A317 Radiation Screen can be removed To do this remove the two screws 5 and loosen the two screws 4 4 Remove the edge pinch and pinch plate 5 Loosen the two screws 4 on the opposite edge pinch 6 Slide out the radiation screen 5 4 ...

Page 1465: ...een Page no 1465 Chapter 9 JC DR A 317 fm 7 2 Reassembly 1 Carefully put the new radiation screen 1 in place The vertical felt bands 2 must be located towards the back of the Control Station 2 Carefully introduce one pinch plate 3 between the edge pinch and the radiation screen 3 Tighten with moderation the two screws 4 1 2 4 3 ...

Page 1466: ...l the edge pinch that you previously removed and secure it with two screws 5 5 Carefully introduce one pinch plate 6 between the edge pinch and the radiation screen 6 Tighten with moderation the two screws 7 7 Install the main frame radshield joint 8 between the radiation screen and the frame 8 Reinstall the eight screw covers 9 to the fixing points of the edge pinches 5 7 6 8 9 ...

Page 1467: ... 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A317 Radiation Screen Page no 1467 Chapter 9 JC DR A 317 fm 7 3 Completion Put the old radiation screen in the physical packaging of the new radiation screen Dispose the old radia tion screen as unsorted municipal waste that must be collected separately ...

Page 1468: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1468 JC DR A 317 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A317 Radiation Screen This page is blank ...

Page 1469: ...r the appropriate LCD Monitor as follows ADS Version Existing Monitor New Monitor Below 53 40 pre Penduick 18 LCD Monitor 2403952 4 19 LCD Monitor with BNC connectors 5397967 19 LCD Monitor 5148720 4 19 LCD Monitor 5148720 4 19 LCD Monitor Label 18 LCD Monitor Label 18 LCD Monitor has 18 as the first two numbers after SMD in the Item code 2403951 4 as the Model No 2403952 4 as the FRU No 19 LCD Mo...

Page 1470: ...ative arm you have This Job Card is only applicable to the V2 V3 V4 Control Station 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down the equipment and switch off the Generator hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from app...

Page 1471: ...9 LCD Monitor to a 21 3MP LCD Monitor refer to section 7 1 1 Dis assembly 18 and 19 Monitors to remove the 18 or 19 LCD Monitor and section 7 2 2 Reassem bly 21 3MP Monitors to install the 21 3MP LCD Monitor Note You can only upgrade 18 or 19 LCD Monitor to a 21 3MP LCD Monitor if the Senographe system has a V3 Control Station with a Sisfle Arm running ADS 54 30 or above or a V4 Control Station ...

Page 1472: ...e arm exists When appropriate the steps below show images for both arms 7 1 1 Disassembly 18 and 19 Monitors 1 If necessary cut the cable tie that secures the monitor harness to the back of the LCD monitor 2 Unscrew the screw 1 screwdriver which secures the monitor cable protecting plate 2 and remove the cable protecting plate 3 Disconnect the power supply cable 3 from the monitor 4 Remove the scr...

Page 1473: ...lack cable On V3 V4 Control Stations connect the DVI cable 6 Disconnect the ground cable 5 screwdriver 7 Remove the four inner screws 6 securing the monitor 3 mm allen wrench CAUTION Do not remove the four external screws 8 Carefully slide the monitor up the support to remove it from the rotative arm 5 4 Red Green Blue Grey Black plus BNC T Adapter and BNC Terminator 3 5 4 DVI 3 6 6 6 Sisfle Arm E...

Page 1474: ...se go directly to step 4 1 Remove the four screws 1 and 2 securing the screen plate to the old monitor The screen plate and four screws are used for fixing the new monitor to the rotative arm 2 Place the new monitor on a protected surface Fix the screen plate to the monitor using washers and two 20 mm screws 1 on the top and two 16 mm screws 2 on the bottom 3 Fix the screen plate to the new monito...

Page 1475: ... 16 8EN Job Card D R A318 LCD Monitor Page no 1475 Chapter 9 JC DR A 318 fm 4 Carefully slide the monitor on to the support at the end of the rotative arm 5 Fix the sliding pivot with the monitor using the four inner screws of 8 mm length 3 3 mm allen wrench 3 3 3 Sisfle Arm Ergotron B Arm ...

Page 1476: ... the monitor cable protecting plate 5 and remove the cable protecting plate 7 Connect the ground cable 6 screwdriver 8 Connect the video connection as follows On V2 Control Stations connect the five BNC cables Insert a BNC T Adapter and a 75 Ohm BNC Terminator between the black cable and the monitor connector 4 5 5 4 Sisfle Arm Ergotron B Arm 6 8 Red Green Blue Grey Black plus BNC T Adapter and BN...

Page 1477: ...ecting plate 5 while ensuring that the cables pass through the exit without being trapped and tighten the securing screw 4 screwdriver 11 At 17 cm away from the right edge looking from behind secure the monitor harness to the back of the LCD monitor with a black cable tie 9 12 Perform a monitor collision check as follows For the Ergotron B arm check that the three stop brackets and three stop scre...

Page 1478: ...he DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A318 LCD Monitor For the Sisfle arm check that the stop bracket and stop bracket screw 10 is correctly positioned to avoid a collision with the radiation screen 10 Sisfle Arm ...

Page 1479: ... 21 3MP Monitors 1 Cut and remove the cable tie 1 that secures the power cable to the back of the LCD monitor 2 Disconnect the power supply cable 2 from the monitor 3 Disconnect the DVI cable 3 4 Remove the four inner screws 4 securing the monitor 3 mm allen wrench CAUTION Do not remove the four external screws 5 Carefully slide the monitor up the support to remove it from the rotative arm 2 1 3 4...

Page 1480: ...the following steps otherwise go directly to step 3 1 Remove the four screws 1 and 2 securing the screen plate to the old monitor The screen plate and four screws are used for fixing the new monitor to the rotative arm 2 Place the new monitor on a protected surface Fix the screen plate to the monitor using washers and two 20 mm screws 1 on the top and two 16 mm screws 2 on the bottom 3 Carefully s...

Page 1481: ...481 Chapter 9 JC DR A 318 fm 4 Fix the sliding pivot with the monitor using the four inner screws of 8 mm length 3 3 mm allen wrench 5 Connect the DVI cable 4 6 Connect the power supply cable 5 and secure it with a cable tie 6 7 Perform a monitor collision check Check that the stop bracket and stop bracket screw 7 is correctly 3 3 5 6 4 ...

Page 1482: ...tor to a 21 3MP LCD Monitor perform all of Job Card ELE A008 Configuring the 21 inch 3MP Monitor on page 549 so that the ADS software is correctly configured for the 21 3 MP Monitor the 21 3 MP Monitor mode is configured to use DICOM mode 21 3 MP Monitor buttons a locked If you have changed an existing 21 3 MP Monitor perform section 7 2 Monitor Mode Configuration on page 553 in Job Card ELE A008 ...

Page 1483: ...supplies used in this Job Card vary according to the type of rotative arm you are changing 1 SUPPLIES Ergotron B Rotative Arm or Sisfle Rotative Arm 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Box Sisfle Rotative Arm Installation Tool FE supply 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 1 hour 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down the equipment and switch off the Generator hospital supply ...

Page 1484: ...072 16 8EN Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm 6 PROCEDURE FOR ERGOTRON B ARM 6 1 Disassembly of Ergotron B Arm 1 Carefully extract the harness 1 from the Rotative Arm and release them from the Monitor and Mouse Support 2 2 While holding the Monitor and Mouse Support 2 remove the two screws 3 securing it allen wrench 3 32 1 2 3 2 ...

Page 1485: ... fm 3 Remove the plastic blanking plug 3 from the corner of the rotative arm rotative arm support side 4 Unscrew the bolt 4 ratchet wrench with 13 mm socket and remove the rotative arm 6 2 Reassembly of Ergotron B Arm 1 On the rotative arm support check the presence of the axis 1 and stop bracket 2 alignment tab is positioned on the Control Station side 3 4 2 1 ...

Page 1486: ... Rotative Arm 2 Check the presence of the three stop screws 3 on the rotative arm 3 Attach the rotative arm to the axis 4 Secure the rotative arm with the bolt 5 torque wrench with 13 mm socket torque 6 5 N m and the four washers according to the following illustration 4 Reinstall the plastic blanking plug 6 on the corner of the rotative arm 3 3 4 5 6 ...

Page 1487: ...ews 7 allen wrench 3 32 6 Insert the harness 8 into the rotative arm 7 Reinstall the LCD Monitor refer to Job Card D R A318 LCD Monitor on page 1469 8 Check that the three stop brackets 9 are correctly positioned to avoid collision with the radiation screen 9 Reinstall the Omega cover then Top cover refer to Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 10 Reinstall and rec...

Page 1488: ...m 1 Carefully pull on the upper silicone mask 1 to remove it from the rotative arm Store the upper sili cone mask in a clean place 2 Carefully pull on the lower silicone mask 2 to remove it from the rotative arm support Store the lower silicone mask in a clean place 3 Disconnect the mouse cable from the ADS computer 4 Cut the cable ties that secure the monitor cables and mouse cable to the Control...

Page 1489: ...385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm Page no 1489 Chapter 9 JC DR A 319 fm 3 and harness 4 5 Carefully pull the harness 5 from the upper and lower parts of the rotative arm 6 Extract the mouse cable 6 from the hole in the harness and from the opening of the monitor sup 4 3 5 7 ...

Page 1490: ...arness back from the monitor cables and remove the monitor cables from opening of the moni tor support in the following order Ground cable DVI video cable for V3 V4 Control Stations or BNC video cables for V2 Control Stations Power cable 8 Remove the monitor cables 8 from the harness and put the harness in a clean place 9 Pass each of the monitor cables through the opening of the rotative arm supp...

Page 1491: ...Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm Page no 1491 Chapter 9 JC DR A 319 fm a Thread the ground cable through the opening of the rotative arm support b Thread the power cable through the opening of the rotative arm support as shown below ...

Page 1492: ...Rotative Arm c On V3 V4 Control Stations thread the ferrite ring 9 of the DVI video cable inside the rotative arm support While keeping the DVI connector outside 10 move the DVI video cable to the bottom of the rotative arm support d On V3 V4 Control Stations thread the DVI video cable through the opening of the rotative arm support as shown below 9 10 ...

Page 1493: ...ing the rotative arm support 5 mm allen wrench and remove it 7 2 Reassembly of Sisfle Arm 1 Install the new rotative arm support on the opposite side of the Control Station and secure it with the same four screws 5 mm allen wrench To do this easily use the Sisfle Arm Installation Tool with the following sub steps a Put the two threaded rods the Sisfle Arm Installation Tool into the lower two threa...

Page 1494: ... 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm rod will have some of its thread exposed as illustrated below b Slide lower holes of the rotative arm support onto the two threads Push the acrylic support block 3 from the Sisfle Arm Installation Tool on to the two threaded rods so that the rotative arm is supported 1 2 3 ...

Page 1495: ...p of the rotative arm support 5 mm allen wrench f Use the torque wrench to tighten the four screws to 9 5 Nm 0 5 Nm g Apply Blue Loctite 243 around the heads of the four screws 2 Pass each of the monitor cables that you stored on top of the Control Station keyboard through the opening of the rotative arm support To do this easily proceed as described in the following sub steps a On V3 V4 Control S...

Page 1496: ...ion and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm rotative arm support c On V2 Control Stations thread each of the BNC video cables through the rotative arm support as shown below d Thread the power cable through the opening of the rotative arm support as shown below 6 7 ...

Page 1497: ... the monitor cables 8 through the harness Ensure that the monitor cables do not cross each other as shown below 4 Put the harness through the opening of the monitor support 9 To do this pull the harness back from the monitor cables and insert the monitor cables through the opening of the monitor support in the following order Power cable DVI video cable for V3 V4 Control Stations or BNC video cabl...

Page 1498: ...nitor support 6 Place the mouse at the back of the mouse support so that there is enough cable for use of the mouse on the entire mouse support 7 Use pointed nose pliers to create an opening in the harness at 27 cm from the end of the harness 8 Route the mouse cable through the opening in the harness so that it leaves the other end of the har ness Then route the mouse cable through the rotative ar...

Page 1499: ...harness 10 Reinstall the LCD Monitor refer to Job Card D R A318 LCD Monitor on page 1469 11 Ensure that the rotative arm 11 and rotative arm support 12 are aligned in the same plane see below Carefully put the harness inside the rotative arm and rotative arm support 12 Insert the upper silicone mask shorter of the two 14 into the rotative arm The rounded edge of the silicone mask must point outwar...

Page 1500: ...point outwards 14 Reconnect the mouse to the ADS computer 15 Ensure that the monitor cables have sufficient slack 15 within the Control Station so that they can move This ensures that the movement of the monitor cables are not inhibited when the rotative arm is turned Secure the harness to the monitor cables and mouse cable with a cable tie at 1 cm from the end of the harness 16 Secure the monitor...

Page 1501: ... that the harness monitor cables and mouse cable are free to move as indicated below 17 When moving the rotative arm through the extreme positions check that the stop bracket screw 18 is correctly positioned to avoid a collision with the radiation screen 18 Reinstall the Omega cover then Top cover refer to Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 19 Reinstall and recon...

Page 1502: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1502 JC DR A 319 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A319 Rotative Arm This page is blank ...

Page 1503: ...your system is at pre Penduick level order the Dione 4 2375961 If your system is at Penduick or above level order the Dione 5 5324091 Floppy disk or CD ROM with parameters for the currently installed image receptor 2 TOOLS Standard Tool Kit 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 90 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down the equipment correctly and switch OF...

Page 1504: ...stalling a replacement IDC Computer 1 Disassembly removal of the existing IDC Computer 2 Reassembly installation of the replacement IDC Computer 3 Reload IDC software from the IDC Application Software CD ROM used for the current installation 4 Restore the detector calibration files by applying a Restore IDC see Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 5 Select Service desktop Utilit...

Page 1505: ... of IDC Computer on V1 V2 Control Stations 1 Locate the IDC Computer 1 inside the Control Station 2 Disconnect all cables from the IDC Computer rear panel Note Note locations of disconnected cables 3 Disconnect Ground cable screwdriver 4 Disconnect the fiber optic cables 5 For V1 Control Stations undo the Velcro strips 2 securing the IDC Computer to the Control Station framework 1 2 ...

Page 1506: ...321 IDC Computer 6 For V2 Control Stations a disconnect the front two allen 3 screws that attach the IDC Computer to the Control Station framework 2 5 mm allen wrench b Disconnect the back two allen 4 screws that attach the IDC Computer to the Control Station framework 2 5 mm allen wrench 7 Remove the defective IDC Computer from the Control Station 3 4 ...

Page 1507: ...ter 1 and UPS unit 2 inside the Control Station 2 Make a note of all the cables connected to the UPS unit rear panel 3 Disconnect all the power cables and data cable from the UPS unit rear panel 4 Disconnect Ground cable cross head screwdriver from the UPS unit rear panel 5 Open the velcro straps 3 securing the UPS to the Control Station 6 Remove the UPS unit from the Control Station by lifting it...

Page 1508: ...tation framework 5 mm allen wrench and 10 mm open ended wrench 9 Remove the UPS base plate from the Control Station frame to expose the IDC Computer 10 Disconnect all cables from the IDC Computer rear panel Note Note locations of disconnected IDC cables 11 Disconnect Ground cable screwdriver from the IDC Computer rear panel 12 Disconnect the fiber optic cables from the IDC Computer rear panel 13 D...

Page 1509: ...6 8EN Job Card D R A321 IDC Computer Page no 1509 Chapter 9 JC DR A 321_DS fm work 2 5 mm allen wrench 15 Disconnect the back two allen 7 screws that attach the IDC Computer to the Control Station frame work 2 5 mm allen wrench 16 Remove the defective IDC Computer from the Control Station 6 7 ...

Page 1510: ...er 1 and UPS unit 2 inside the Control Station 2 Make a note of all the cables connected to the UPS unit rear panel 3 Disconnect all the power cables and data cable from the UPS unit rear panel 4 Disconnect the ground cable cross head screwdriver from the UPS unit rear panel 5 Open the velcro straps 3 securing the UPS to the Control Station 6 Remove the UPS unit from the Control Station by lifting...

Page 1511: ...w and bolt 4 connect ing the UPS base plate to the L shaped bracket 2 5 mm allen wrench 8 Disconnect the four allen screws 5 connecting the UPS base plate to the Control Station framework 5 mm allen wrench 9 Remove the UPS base plate from the Control Station frame to expose the IDC Computer 10 Disconnect all cables from the IDC Computer rear panel 4 5 5 Pre Penduick V3 Control Stations Penduick an...

Page 1512: ... 12 Disconnect the front two allen 6 screws that attach the IDC Computer to the Control Station frame work 4 mm allen wrench 13 Disconnect the back two allen 7 screws that attach the IDC Computer to the Control Station frame work 4 mm allen wrench 14 If it exists i e on pre Penduick V3 Control Stations remove the allen screw 2 5 mm allen wrench that attaches the left hand side L bracket 8 to the C...

Page 1513: ...Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A321 IDC Computer Page no 1513 Chapter 9 JC DR A 321_DS fm bracket Access to the allen screw is to the left hand side behind the switch 15 Remove the defective IDC Computer and its baseplate from the Control Station 8 ...

Page 1514: ...N Job Card D R A321 IDC Computer 16 Remove the six allen screws 9 that attach the baseplate to the IDC 2 5 mm allen wrench 6 5 Reassembly of IDC Computer Reverse the disassembly procedure See the table and illustration below for the IDC rear panel connections See Job Card D R A331 UPS on page 1521 for the UPS rear panel connections 9 9 ...

Page 1515: ...n Penduick and above systems or 2389288 on Pre Penduick systems 2 IDC Gantry Conditioner Link 2226612 6 AC mains 3 Detector Power Supply 2226621 7 Optical Fiber cables to detector 4 IDC Gantry Serial Link RT 2240227 or 2246615 8 Tray ground wire Dione4 2 3 6 7 5 4 1 2 3 1 6 7 4 Dione5 Note For Dione5 an empty Ethernet port exists to the left hand side of the USB ports The Ethernet cable from the s...

Page 1516: ...ormation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A321 IDC Computer 6 6 Software Restore To reload the IDC software follow all the instructions given in the Senographe DS IDC Application Soft ware booklet 7 COMPLETION Perform the steps defined in Software Backup Kit IDC on page 822 ...

Page 1517: ... Panel 2 APPLICABILITY This Job Card is only applicable to Penduick and above V3 Control Stations and V4 Control Stations 3 TOOLS Standard Tool Box 4 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down correctly the equipment and switch off the Senographe system hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark i...

Page 1518: ...orner of the Omega window 2 Remove each of the four screws and plastic washers from each corner of the Omega window and remove the Omega window to reveal the RJ 45 Service connector 1 3 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the rear of the socket of the RJ 45 Service Network Patch Panel 4 Remove the two screws 2 small cross head screwdriver securing the RJ 45 Service Network Patch Panel and remove th...

Page 1519: ...ng sub steps to check that the newly connected RJ 45 Service Network Patch Panel is functional a Power up the Senographe system b Use a straight Ethernet cable to connect the network interface card NIC of your laptop to the RJ 45 Network Service Patch Panel in the Control Station c Configure your laptop according to Configure Laptop NIC on page 996 in Job Card DIAG A005 Error Log Retrieval to ensu...

Page 1520: ...apter 9 Page no 1520 JC DR A 322 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A322 RJ 45 Service Network Patch Panel This page is blank ...

Page 1521: ...work shut down the equipment correctly and switch off the Senographe system hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power 5 PREREQUISITES Remove the Control Station Omega cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 6 PROCEDURE ON V1 V2 CONTROL STATIONS 6 1 Disassembly of t...

Page 1522: ...72 16 8EN Job Card D R A331 UPS Note Note locations of disconnected cables 3 Disconnect the ground cable small screwdriver located at the top of the UPS rear panel 4 Remove the four screws 2 two on both side 5 mm allen wrench securing the UPS to the Control Station 5 Remove the defective UPS unit from the Control Station 2 2 ...

Page 1523: ... wrench to secure the UPS to the Control Station frame 3 Connect the ground cable 3 small screwdriver to the top of the new UPS rear panel 4 Connect all the power cables back to the new UPS rear panel 5 Connect the communications cable 4 to the back of the new UPS rear panel 6 The battery plug to the UPS is not connected at delivery time Firmly connect the battery plug 6 to the battery on the newl...

Page 1524: ... PROCEDURE ON V3 V4 CONTROL STATIONS 7 1 Disassembly of the UPS on V3 V4 Control Stations 1 Locate the UPS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Disconnect all cables from the UPS unit rear panel Note Note locations of disconnected cables 3 Disconnect the Ground cable cross head screwdriver 4 Open the velcro straps 2 securing the UPS to the Control Station 1 2 ...

Page 1525: ...hapter 9 JC DR A 331 fm 5 Remove the defective UPS unit from the Control Station by lifting it vertically from the framework and pulling it towards you 7 2 Reassembly of New UPS Unit on V3 V4 Control Stations 1 Put the new UPS unit 1 inside the Control Station 2 Attach the velcro straps 2 to secure the UPS to the Control Station 1 2 ...

Page 1526: ...r cables 4 from the Control Station Components to the power output sockets on the UPS rear panel as indicated below 5 Connect the AC mains supply power cable 5 from to Generator to the power input socket on the UPS rear panel 6 Connect the communications cable 6 to the UPS Monitor Port connector of the UPS rear panel 3 6 7 5 4 3 6 IDC AC Multi ADS Socket IDC ADS Pre Penduick V3 Control Stations Pe...

Page 1527: ... UPS as shown below 8 COMPLETION Power up the Senographe system and perform a UPS functional check according to UPS Function Check on page 1737 which is described in Job Card CHK A003 UPS Batteries Before sending the old UPS for recycling ensure that the plug on the UPS has been disconnected from the battery as shown below 7 UPS battery disconnected at delivery time Connect UPS battery as shown be...

Page 1528: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1528 JC DR A 331 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A331 UPS This page is blank ...

Page 1529: ...aker Lock it in the off position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power 5 PREREQUISITES Remove the Control Station Omega cover see Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 6 PROCEDURE ON V1 V2 CONTROL STATIONS 6 1 Disassembly of the UPS Battery on a V1 V2 Control Station 1 Remove the UPS from the Control Station see Job Card D R A3...

Page 1530: ...e procedure isolated from electrical hazards You may leave the UPS and load on for the following procedure 3 Grasp the top edge of the bottom front cover and tilt it out 4 Unhook the bottom section of the front cover from the chassis and set it aside 5 Use a flat blade screwdriver or a coin to remove the two battery door screws and open the door 6 Grip the wires for the front set of batteries and ...

Page 1531: ... they are heavy Batteries weigh 5 5 kg 12 1 pounds 6 2 Reassembly of the New UPS Battery on a V1 V2 Control Station 1 Affix a paper label with the charging date on new batteries 2 Slide the first set of new batteries into the unit Hold the connector down below the top of the bat teries and towards the door otherwise the assembly does not fit 3 Guide the connector over the top of the batteries and ...

Page 1532: ...on the front panel to power the UPS 3 Wait four hours for the new Battery to charge 4 The battery charges to 90 capacity during the first four hours of normal operation Do not expect full battery run capability during this initial charge period 5 Affix a paper label with the charging date on battery 2 Put the UPS unit back into the control station see Job Card D R A331 UPS section 6 2 Reassem bly ...

Page 1533: ...r the Battery to discharge 2 Unplug the battery connector 1 located on the rear panel 3 Grasp the top of the front cover and tilt it out and down 4 Unhook the bottom of the cover from the chassis and lift it upward to expose the battery door Be careful not to strain the ribbon cable Do not touch the exposed printed circuit board Fold the front cover on top of the UPS as shown below 1 ...

Page 1534: ... 8EN Job Card D R A332 UPS Battery Replacement 5 Use a flat blade screwdriver or a coin to remove the two battery door screws and open the door Grasp the tab and gently pull the battery out of the UPS 6 Disconnect the battery leads Loosen the connectors by gently wiggling them while pulling straight back from the battery connector ...

Page 1535: ...e packing material for the new battery 6 Re plug the battery connector by pushing the tethered jumper plug into the corresponding port 7 3 New Battery Charging 1 Connect the UPS directly to a compatible power supply voltage 2 Press the button on the front panel to power the UPS 3 Wait four hours for the new Battery to charge Note The battery charges to 90 capacity during the first four hours of no...

Page 1536: ...ng utility power to the connected equipment AVR Trim The UPS is compensating for a high utility voltage AVR Boost The UPS is compensating for a low utility voltage On Battery The UPS is supplying battery power to the connected equipment Overload The connected loads are drawing more than the UPS power rating Replace Battery Battery Disconnected The battery is disconnected or must be replaced Power ...

Page 1537: ...me 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 1 Remove the X ray Console 2 Remove the Control Station top cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 3 Remove the Control Station omega cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Sta tion Covers on page 503 4 Remove the U20 Workstation from the Control Station refer to section ...

Page 1538: ... Carefully set the panel aside 10 Gently lay the system on its right side on a stable nonslip surface 11 Pinch the battery latch together squeezing away from the battery until the battery pops out of the motherboard socket 12 Lift the battery to remove it 13 Insert a new battery with the positive sign facing up Tilt the battery into the battery connector angling the battery under the battery latch...

Page 1539: ...he cables refer to section 6 3 2 in Job Card D R A311 AWS Unit Turn the power switch on the back of the U20 chassis to the ON position I 18 Reinstall the Control Station omega cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Sta tion Covers on page 503 19 Reinstall the Control Station top cover See Job Card PHY A040 Remove Reinstall Control Station Covers on page 503 20 Reinstall the X ray Con...

Page 1540: ...ge the Press any key to reboot appears switch the U20 back button of the station to OFF 32 Switch the U20 back button to ON 33 After login prompt is displayed check if the following message is displayed Warning Time of day chip unresponsive dead batteries If this message is displayed return to step 23 If this message is not displayed continue to step 32 34 From the ads console login prompt that ap...

Page 1541: ...ck fields respectively 40 Click the Submit button to commit the updated date and time The new date and time are written to the U20 motherboard BIOS 41 Click the Exit button to close the Service Desktop 42 Back in the Browser click the the System Shutdown icon The Senographe system automatically shuts down 43 Power on the Senographe system from the X ray Console 44 Observe the end of the boot scree...

Page 1542: ...age no 1542 JC DR A 335 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A335 AWS U20 Motherboard Battery V3 Control Stations only This page is blank ...

Page 1543: ...anti static mat and an ESD strap 5 PREREQUISITES CAUTION Generator parameters are saved in the NV RAM of the Generator CPU Board If possible ensure that a backup of these parameters has been made before removing the board If not it will be necessary to reconfigure the Generator after changing the board To back up the NV RAM of the Generator CPU Board perform a full system back up according to Job ...

Page 1544: ...TO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge 2 Remove the Generator front panel CPU side to reveal the Generator CPU board 400PL3 refer to Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 3 Remove the five screws 1 4 mm allen wrench that secure the Generator CPU board 400PL3 to the Generator cabinet 4 Gently pull and forwards the Generat...

Page 1545: ...he New Generator CPU Board Install the existing EEPROMs that were removed from the old Generator CPU Board on to the new Gen erator CPU Board according to section 7 2 Install New EEPROMs on the Generator CPU Board on page 1627 in Job Card D R A415 Generator Board CPU EEPROMs 6 5 Restoring Generator Parameters 1 Switch on the Senographe electrical power 2 Ensure that the LEDs at the top of the newl...

Page 1546: ...e Generator parameters as described in Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 6 Restoring the Generator parameters will restore all the parameters except the X ray Tube Heater calibration You must perform an automatic calibration of X ray Tube Heater current in large and small focus Refer to Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 The small focus heater calibratio...

Page 1547: ...ob Card Acquisition Image Chain Heating Current Calibration Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor on page 1649 Bias Calibration Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 1655 Tube mA Measurement Job Card CAL A009 X Ray Tube mA Measurement on page 1663 kV Scale Factor Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 1667 mAs X ray Calibration Job Card CAL ...

Page 1548: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1548 JC DR A 401 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A401 Generator CPU Board 400PL3 This page is blank ...

Page 1549: ...licable 5 PREREQUISITES For Senographe systems that use AWS V43 0 or later on the SB150 or AWS 53 0 or later on the U20 determine the current AOP configuration for all three modes DOSE STD and CNT on the Generator see Job Card ELE A031 AOP Configuration section 7 4 2 Checking the Configuration Set on the Generator on page 697 6 PROCEDURE CAUTION Before removing Generator CPU board 400PL3 backup th...

Page 1550: ...erator front panel CPU side Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Cov ers on page 513 4 Pull generator CPU board 400PL3 gently forward and remove it 5 Solder the new lithium battery in the free position BT1 or BT2 respecting the polarities 6 Unsolder the old battery 7 Reinstall generator CPU board 400PL3 in its position in the generator 8 Reinstall the generator front panel CPU side 6 2 Fun...

Page 1551: ...r Current Scale Factor on page 1649 Bias Calibration Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 1655 Tube mA Measurement Job Card CAL A009 X Ray Tube mA Measurement on page 1663 kV Scale Factor Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 1667 mAs X ray Calibration Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041...

Page 1552: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1552 JC DR A 402 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A402 Generator CPU Battery This page is blank ...

Page 1553: ...ch off the mains power supply Check the residual voltage inverter supply 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal of Filtering Capacitors Refer to Illustrations1 and 2 at the end of this Job Card 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charg...

Page 1554: ...esonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle them 5 Remove screws S1 and S2 10 mm open ended wrench and remove the two resonant capacitors RC1 and RC2 together with their upper plate 6 Remove screw S3 8 mm open ended wrench that connects the C8 C7 cable to the capacitor box 7 Remove the screws S4 S5 and S6 8 mm open ended wrench th...

Page 1555: ...itors 1 Place the new capacitor box into position Ensure that the holes on the side of the capacitor box line up with the threads on the inverter panel 2 Attach screws S7 and S8 followed by screws S9 and S10 to mount the capacitor box on the Inverter panel 4 mm allen wrench 3 Connect the cables to the new capacitor box using the screws S4 S5 and S6 8 mm open ended wrench as follows S4 connects the...

Page 1556: ...o the new capacitor box with screw S3 8 mm open ended wrench 5 Attach the two resonant capacitors RC1 and RC2 together with their upper plate to the new capaci tor box using screws S1 and S2 10 mm open ended wrench 6 Switch on the electrical power supply both from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room and on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position I S2 S1 RC2 RC1 S3 C8 C7 S8 S10 ...

Page 1557: ... A403 Capacitor Box Page no 1557 Chapter 9 JC DR A 403 fm ILLUSTRATION 1 CAPACITOR BOX TOP VIEW WITHOUT RESONANT CAPACITORS ILLUSTRATION 2 CAPACITOR BOX SIDE VIEW 7 COMPLETION None C7 C5 C3 C1 C8 C6 C4 C2 C7 C8 C1 C1 C2 C2 C8 C7 S4 S5 S6 S1 S3 S2 RC1 RC2 S1 S2 S3 S7 S8 S9 S10 CAPACITOR BOX RESONANT CAPACITORS ...

Page 1558: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1558 JC DR A 403 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A403 Capacitor Box This page is blank ...

Page 1559: ...ck 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE CAUTION The HT block and kV mA board assembly is factory calibrated do not attempt to adjust potentiometer P1 HT probe frequency compensation 6 1 Removal and the HV Unit 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis...

Page 1560: ...ING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the HV Unit 5 On the HT block disconnect the following in the sequence listed HT connector 1 heating bias connector GKB 2 green ground connection 3 8 mm open ended wrench white and black ground connections two wires 4 8 mm open ended wrench inverter GK...

Page 1561: ... 8 5 mm allen wrench that secure the HV unit to the Generator framework The three allen screws are located on the three accessible sides of the HV unit 9 Carefully remove the faulty HV unit from the Generator 6 2 Installation of the HV Unit 1 Carefully place the new HV unit into the Generator framework Ensure that the holes for the three allen screws line up with the three threads on the Generator...

Page 1562: ... screw which is in close proximity to the kV mA board 3 On the kV mA board located on the side of the HV unit make the following cable connections Gray ribbon cable to the XJ1 connector ensuring that the red part of the ribbon cable is at the bot tom Be careful when inserting the cable into the XJ1 connector and apply equal pressure to ensure that you do not bend the connector pins Two black cable...

Page 1563: ... 7 HT connector 8 5 Grease the HT end piece if necessary 6 Slacken the air bleed screw 9 7 Switch on the electrical power supply both from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room and on the rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position I 8 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station 9 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error ha...

Page 1564: ... Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 Bad Pixel Calibration Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Gain calibration Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 flat field tests Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test on page 699 If IQ Tests not OK repeat all calibrations from Bad Pixel Half Value Layer Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement on page 1703 Conver...

Page 1565: ...Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge 2 Remove the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 3 Remove the Gantry covers see Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 4 Disconnect the cable from the Generator HV tank and from the T...

Page 1566: ...ollowing distances from the tube end of the cable M1 635 mm M2 1565 mm M3 1840 mm M4 3515 mm M5 5300 mm When changing the HV cable install new cable ties in the same positions where the original cable ties were 6 2 1 Reference Mark M1 Notice The position of reference mark M1 is critical 6 2 2 Reference Mark M2 Mark M1 must be positioned at the point where the cable from the tube enters the top of ...

Page 1567: ...MPLETION Check for correct operation of X ray exposures Reference mark M3 Mark M3 must be positioned at the level of the bottom surface of the metal clamp which secures the cable harness as it exits the bottom of the arm Mark M4 must be positioned at the external surface of the column Reference mark M4 Mark M5 must be positioned at the point where the cable leaves the cable sheath at the input to ...

Page 1568: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1568 JC DR A 405 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A405 HV Cable This page is blank ...

Page 1569: ... to avoid electric shock 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal of the Generator Command Board 400 PL1 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge 2 Remove the four Generator side panels see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator ...

Page 1570: ...Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A406 Generator Command Board 400 PL1 S2 before proceeding WARNING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Command board S2 S1 RC2 RC1 1 1 ...

Page 1571: ...hassis and carefully remove the defective Generator Command board 7 Make a note of the defective Generator Command board current jumper settings There are two sets of jumpers JP1 JP2 below the XJ8 connector and JP3 JP4 above the XJ8 connector These jumpers determine the room lamps and door configuration 8 Put the defective Generator Command board in an anti static bag 6 2 Installation of the Gener...

Page 1572: ... no 1572 JC DR A 406 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A406 Generator Command Board 400 PL1 XJ1 XJ2 XJ4 XJ6 XJ9 XJ8 XJ5 XJ7 XJ3 XJ10 XJ13 ...

Page 1573: ...he table below Place unused jumpers in the parking positions JP3 and JP4 Note If there is no door switch jumpers JP1 and JP2 must both be present case 4 in the table Connector Label Description of cable usually identified by code on a white label Cable color XJ1 400 PL1 XJ1 red line on right of ribbon connector Gray XJ2 XJ2 Black XJ3 400 PL1 XJ3 Black XJ4 400 PL1 XJ4 5 Black 1 White XJ5 C801418 XP...

Page 1574: ... If the Generator Command board is operating correctly the LED states on the Generator Command board are as follows 10 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 JP1 PREP JP2 RADIOGRAPHY Door closed Door opened 1 0 0 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY enabled PREP and RADIOGRAPHY disabled 2 0 1 PREP and RADIOGRAPHY enabled PREP and RADIOGRAPHY disabled NOT...

Page 1575: ...ns Calibrations Checks Job Card Bias Calibration Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 1655 Heating Current Calibration Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor on page 1649 kV Scale Factor Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 1667 mAs X ray Calibration Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 AOP SNR Check Job Card ELE A038 A...

Page 1576: ...hapter 9 Page no 1576 JC DR A 406 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A406 Generator Command Board 400 PL1 This page is blank ...

Page 1577: ...n to avoid electric shock 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal of the Generator Interface Board 400 PL2 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge 2 Remove the four Generator side panels see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generat...

Page 1578: ...erator Interface board is located on the middle right of the Generator Disconnect all the cables and optical fibers from the Generator Interface board and make a mental note where they connect to Ensure that you do not move them too much so it is easier to re connect them later on Notice Disconnect with caution to avoid damage to the connectors and cables 6 Remove the five screws 1 that secure the...

Page 1579: ...terface Board 400 PL2 1 Carefully place the new Generator Interface board on the Generator chassis by inserting it up into the connectors of the Generator CPU board Ensure that the holes for the five allen screws line up with the five threads on the Generator chassis 2 Attach the five allen screws 1 4 mm allen wrench to secure the Generator Interface board to the Generator chassis 3 Connect all th...

Page 1580: ...usually identified by code on a white label Cable color XJ1 45440115 Black XJ2 400 PL2 XJ2 45440116 400 PL1 X10 red line on top of ribbon connector Gray XJ4 XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 Gray XJ6 400 PL2 XJ6 optical fiber Black XJ7 400 PL2 XJ7 optical fiber Black XJ8 Empty optical fiber blank cover N A XJ9 400 PL2 XJ9 optical fiber Black XJ10 XJ4 GENE 400 PL2 Gray XJ11 XJ11 400PL2 GENE INTERF Gray XJ1 XJ2 XJ4 ...

Page 1581: ...switch in the Generator cabinet position I 7 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station 8 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported If the Generator Interface board is operating correctly the LED states on the Generator Interface board are as follows yellow DS1 LED is ON yellow DS2 LED is ON yellow DS3 LED is ON ...

Page 1582: ... the Generator Interface board Calibrations Checks Job Card Bias Calibration Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 1655 Heating Current Calibration Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor on page 1649 kV Scale Factor Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 1667 mAs X ray Calibration Job Card CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current on page 1673 AOP S...

Page 1583: ...ion to avoid electric shock 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Removal of the Generator Supply Command Board 200 PL2 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge 2 Remove the four Generator side panels see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall ...

Page 1584: ...in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Generator Supply Command board 5 The XJ6 and XJ7 connectors may still have a residual voltage of 35V DC from the C2 capacitor located behind the Generator Supply Command board Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check that there is no residual voltage 35V DC between the XJ6 an...

Page 1585: ...ge of 250V DC from the C1 capacitor located behind the Generator Supply Command board Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check that there is no residual voltage 250V DC between the C1P and M1P connectors WARNING Residual voltage stored in the C1 and C2 capacitors located behind the Generator Com mand Supply board can be dangerous Ensure that the capacitors are fully discharged before you handle th...

Page 1586: ...ier to re connect them later on Notice Disconnect with caution to avoid damage to the connectors and cables 8 Remove the four nuts 1 8 mm open ended wrench that secure the Generator Supply Command board to the Generator chassis Carefully remove the defective Generator Supply Command board The top left nut also attaches a black cable to the Generator Supply Command board do not move this cable too ...

Page 1587: ...Generator Supply Command board on the Generator chassis four threads 2 Attach the black cable 1 that you originally removed to the top left thread and secure it by attaching a nut 2 to the top left thread 8 mm open ended wrench 3 Attach the other three nuts 3 8 mm open ended wrench to secure the rest of the Generator Supply Command board to the Generator chassis 4 Connect all the cables to the new...

Page 1588: ... connector Gray XJ11 N A 200 PL2 XJ11 red line at left of ribbon connector Gray XJ2 N A 200 PL2 XJ2 Gray XJ3 N A 200 PL2 XJ2 cable labeled T on top Black XJ4 N A 200 PL2 XJ4 Gray XJ5 N A XJ5 Black XJ8 N A Two brown cables in to black connector Brown TP10 N A Black cable with red end plastic coming from to left conduit Black XJ10 Small screwdriver 200 PL2 XJ10 Black C1P Small screwdriver C1P Brown ...

Page 1589: ...trical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station 8 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported If the Generator Command board is operating correctly the LED states on the Generator Command board are as follows green DE1 LED is ON red DE2 LED is OFF red DE3 LED is OFF clear N1 LED is ON 9 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall...

Page 1590: ...ter 9 Page no 1590 JC DR A 408 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A408 Generator Supply Command Board 200 PL2 This page is blank ...

Page 1591: ...he Generator Relay Board 200 PL4 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge WARNING It is important that you switch off the external power supply on the Mains Distribution Panel This is because you will be working in close proximity to where...

Page 1592: ...elay board WARNING The lamp cables contain a live voltage from an external source It is important that you switch off the external power supply to the lamp cables because you will be handling them in order to remove Generator Relay board 6 The Generator Relay board is located on the side of the Generator behind the Generator Interface board Make a note of the defective Generator Relay board curren...

Page 1593: ...ective Generator Relay board in an anti static bag 6 2 Installation of the Generator Relay Board 200 PL4 1 Carefully place the new Generator Relay board on the Generator chassis Ensure that the holes for the four allen screws line up with the four threads on the Generator chassis 2 Attach the four allen screws 1 4 mm allen wrench to secure the Generator Relay board to the Generator chassis 3 Caref...

Page 1594: ...y Board 200 PL4 rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position I 7 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station 8 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported 9 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 7 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1595: ...Removal of the Inverter Board 300 PL1 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge WARNING It is important that you switch off the external power supply on the Mains Distribution Panel This is because you will be working in close proximity to ...

Page 1596: ...onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Inverter board 5 Remove all of the cables from the Inverter board 10 mm open ended wrench and small screwdriver Ensure that you do not move them too much so they are easier to re connect later on 6 Remove the six bolts 1 and the one nut 2 7 mm open ended wrench which attach the Inverter board to the Generator chassis 7 Remove the faulty I...

Page 1597: ... Inverter board 1 2 3 3 Attach the bolt 4 7 mm open ended wrench to the thread 4 Attach the six bolts 5 7 mm allen wrench to secure the rest of the Inverter board to the Generator chassis 5 Connect all the cables to the new Inverter board as summarized in the diagram and table below Connec tor Label Tool Description of cable usually identified by code on a white label Cable color XJ1 N A 300 PL1 X...

Page 1598: ...10 mm open ended wrench X10 Brown X11 Small screwdriver X11 X12 Brown X12 Small screwdriver X11 X12 Brown X13 Small screwdriver 2117977 G1 from lower hole Brown X14 Small screwdriver 2117977 K1 from lower hole Brown X15 Small screwdriver 2117977 G1 from upper hole Brown X16 Small screwdriver 2117977 K1 from upper hole Brown Connec tor Label Tool Description of cable usually identified by code on a...

Page 1599: ...in the Generator cabinet position I 7 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station 8 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported If the Inverter board is operating correctly the L1 LED is ON 9 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 7 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1600: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1600 JC DR A 410 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A410 Inverter Board 300 PL1 This page is blank ...

Page 1601: ...6 1 Removal of the Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge WARNING It is important that you switch off the external power supply on the Mains Distribution Panel This is because you will be working in close...

Page 1602: ...ceeding WARNING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Mains Distribution board 5 The XJ8 and XJ9 connectors may still have a residual voltage of 600V DC from the C1 C2 C5 C6 C7 and C8 capacitors located behind the Mains Distribution board Using a voltmeter rating 1000 V DC check that there...

Page 1603: ...s Distribution Board 200 PL1 Page no 1603 Chapter 9 JC DR A 411 fm WARNING Residual voltage stored in the C1 C2 C5 C6 C7 and C8 capacitors located behind the Mains Distribution board can be dangerous Ensure that the capacitors are fully dis charged before you handle the Mains Distribution board C1 C5 XJ8 XJ9 C7 C8 C6 C2 ...

Page 1604: ... the cables from the Mains Distribution board 8 mm open ended wrench Ensure that you do not move them too much so they are to re connect later on 7 Remove the four bolts 1 7 mm open ended wrench which attach the Mains Distribution board to the Generator chassis 8 Remove the faulty Mains Distribution board from the Generator chassis 9 Put the defective Mains Distribution board in an anti static bag...

Page 1605: ...r chassis 3 Connect all the cables to the new Mains Distribution board as summarized in the diagram and table below Connec tor Label Tool Description of cable usually identified by code on a white label Cable color XJ1 8 mm open ended wrench XJ1 Brown XJ2 8 mm open ended wrench Two cables XJ2 Brown XJ3 8 mm open ended wrench XJ3 Brown XJ4 8 mm open ended wrench XJ4 Brown XJ6 8 mm open ended wrench...

Page 1606: ...1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A411 Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 4 Switch on the electrical power supply both from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room and on the XJ11 XJ4 XJ6 XJ7 XJ8 XJ9 XJ12 XJ13 XJ14 XJ1 XJ2 XJ3 TR1 0 TR1 5 ...

Page 1607: ... Control Station Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported If the Mains Distri bution board is operating correctly the LED states on the Mains Distribution board are as follows red DE1 LED is OFF green DE2 LED is ON green DE3 LED is ON red DE4 LED is OFF yellow DE5 LED is OFF yellow DE6 LED is ON red DE7 LED is OFF clear N1 LED is ON clear K1 LED is ON 6 Rein...

Page 1608: ...hapter 9 Page no 1608 JC DR A 411 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A411 Mains Distribution Board 200 PL1 This page is blank ...

Page 1609: ...1 Removal of the Anode Starter Board 300 PL2 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge WARNING It is important that you switch off the external power supply on the Mains Distribution Panel This is because you will be working in close proxim...

Page 1610: ...NING Residual voltage stored in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the Anode Starter board 5 Remove all of the cables from the Anode Starter board Ensure that you do not move them too much so they are easier to re connect later on 6 Remove the four bolts 1 7 mm open ended wrench which attach the Anode Starter board t...

Page 1611: ... with the four threads on the Generator chassis 2 Attach the four bolts 1 7 mm allen wrench to secure the Anode Starter board to the Generator chassis 3 Connect all the cables to the new Anode Starter board as summarized in the diagram above and table below 4 Switch on the electrical power supply both from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room and on the Connector Label Description of cable usu...

Page 1612: ...tarter Board 300 PL2 rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position I 5 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported 6 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 7 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1613: ...EDURE 6 1 Removal of the BT Power Supply 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge WARNING It is important that you switch off the external power supply on the Mains Distribution Panel This is because you will be working in close proximity ...

Page 1614: ...in the resonant capacitors can be dangerous Ensure that the res onant capacitors are fully discharged before you handle the BT Power Supply 5 Remove the four bolts 1 5 mm open ended wrench which secure the BT Power Supply protective cover to the Generator chassis 6 Remove the two cables from the BT Power Supply Ensure that you do not move them too much so they are easier to re connect later on 7 R...

Page 1615: ...he four threads on the Generator chassis 2 Attach the four allen screws 1 2 5 mm allen wrench to secure the BT Power Supply to the Gener ator chassis 3 Connect all the cables to the new BT Power Supply as summarized in the diagram above and table below 4 Attach the four bolts 2 5 mm open ended wrench to secure the BT Power Supply protective cover to the Generator chassis 5 Switch on the electrical...

Page 1616: ...wer Supply 400 T1 rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position I 6 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported 7 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 7 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1617: ... 1 Removal of the Power Line Filter 1 Switch off the electrical power supply from the Mains Distribution Panel in the room Apply an appro priate LOTO padlock and label Wait 10 minutes for the components within the Generator to dis charge WARNING It is important that you switch off the external power supply on the Mains Distribution Panel This is because you will be working in close proximity to wh...

Page 1618: ...lamps and the cables 1 that are connected to the Generator Relay board WARNING The lamp cables contain a live voltage from an external source It is important that you switch off the external power supply to the lamp cables because you will be handling them in order to remove Generator Relay board 6 The Generator Relay board is located on the side of the Generator behind the Generator Interface boa...

Page 1619: ...so it is easier to re connect it later on Notice Disconnect with caution to avoid damage to the connectors and cables 9 Remove the four screws 4 that secure the Generator Relay board 4 mm allen wrench to the Gen erator chassis and carefully remove the Generator Relay board 10 Put the Generator Relay board in an anti static bag in a safe place 11 Disconnect the earth cable lablelled FILTRE 5 from t...

Page 1620: ...rning it clockwise 6 2 Installation of the Power Line Filter 1 Carefully put the new Power Line Filter into the Generator by turning it anti clockwise so that it screw threads line up with the holes on the Generator framework 2 Use the two allen screws 1 to secure the right side of the Power Line Filter to the Genrator base 4 mm allen wrench These allen screws point upwards with their heads undern...

Page 1621: ...1621 Chapter 9 JC DR A 414 fm 3 mm allen wrench 4 Connect the earth cable lablelled FILTRE 3 to the Power Line Filter 4 mm open ended wrench 5 Carefully place the Generator Relay board that you removed from the faulty Power Line Filter on the new Power Line Filter Ensure that the holes for the four allen screws line up with the four threads 2 3 ...

Page 1622: ...ide of the connector 8 Reconnect the lamp and door cables 6 exactly how they were connected before 9 Reconnect the Line Supply Cables 7 from the Mains Distribution Panel to the Power Line Filter 10 Ensure that a cable tie is present to secure the Line Supply Cable to the lower cross member of the Generator framework 11 Re establish the external power supply to the room lamps 12 Switch on the elect...

Page 1623: ...JC DR A 414 fm rotary switch in the Generator cabinet position I 13 Switch on the Senographe system electrical power i e Generator Gantry and Control Station 14 Wait until the Gantry boot is complete and check that no error has been reported 15 Reinstall the Generator covers see Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 7 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1624: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1624 JC DR A 414 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A414 Power Line Filter Box This page is blank ...

Page 1625: ...wing chart order the applicable EEPROM kit to be chosen from the following three P N 5405814 for DS systems up to but not including Penduick P N 5411745 for Penduick Z400 and Sunburst DS systems Note if you do not know the version of your system ignore the System version column and refer only to the Current CPU board reference column Note If the Generator CPU Board is also faulty in addition to th...

Page 1626: ...oard If possible ensure that a backup of these parameters has been made before removing the board If not it will be nec essary to reconfigure the Generator after changing the board To backup the NV RAM of the Gen erator CPU Board perform a full system back up according to Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 Note For Senographe systems that use AWS V43 0 or later on the SB150 or...

Page 1627: ...he Generator CPU board 400PL3 refer to Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 3 With the EEPROM removal tool on the Generator CPU board taking care of components around remove slowly the four EEPROMs B43 B44 B48 and B49 4 Remove the X2 jumper for 10 seconds and plug it back into the X2 pins again in horizontal position This action erases the NV RAM content 7 2 Install New ...

Page 1628: ...ESPONDING SOCKETS Generator version EEPROM kit Set of EEPROMs EEPROM P N Corresponding board socket Corresponding label reference to stick on Genera tor CPU Board 1 10 CMN 5405814 5405832 2385604 8 B43 2385602 8 2385605 8 B44 2385606 8 B48 2385607 8 B49 3 02 CMN 5405833 2385604 9 B43 2385602 9 2385605 9 B44 2385606 9 B48 2385607 9 B49 4 02 CMN 5411745 NA 2385604 11 B43 2385602 11 2385605 11 B44 23...

Page 1629: ...CPU EEPROMs Page no 1629 Chapter 9 JC DR A 415 fm ILLUSTRATION 1 LAYOUT OF THE GENERATOR CPU BOARD Take great care to respect the orientation of the EEPROMs Ensure that the small notch of the EEPROM is above the small notch on the Generator CPU Board Do not trust label orientation on the B44 socket B43 socket B48 socket B49 socket ...

Page 1630: ...ences 7 3 Restore Generator Parameters 1 Switch on the Senographe electrical power 2 Before restoring the NV RAM on the Generator CPU Board you must erase the NV RAM content On the Generator CPU Board to the left of the battery remove the X2 jumper for 10 seconds and plug it back into the X2 pins again in horizontal position 3 Restore the Generator parameters as described in Job Card ELE A052 Back...

Page 1631: ...rd Acquisition Image Chain Heating Current Calibration Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor on page 1649 Bias Calibration Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor on page 1655 Tube mA Measurement Job Card CAL A009 X Ray Tube mA Measurement on page 1663 kV Scale Factor Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor on page 1667 mAs X ray Calibration Job Card CAL A012 ...

Page 1632: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1632 JC DR A 415 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A415 Generator Board CPU EEPROMs This page is blank ...

Page 1633: ...Surplus Coolant Disposal refer to the Caution below CAUTION Before adding coolant to the Conditioner always switch OFF the Generator and MDR cir cuit breakers in the Generator Cabinet Switch on the MDR breaker only as instructed Always use a funnel when adding coolant to the Conditioner Always wear protective gloves and goggles when working with coolant When working with coolant you should treat i...

Page 1634: ...ve the used coolant Place the end of the purge tool into the container 4 Disconnect the coolant input pipe from the Conditioner The pipe connector seals automatically 5 Connect the disconnected coolant input pipe to the purge tool The connector is now unsealed and coolant can drain into the prepared container 6 Switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and press the Conditioner ON button in the generator ...

Page 1635: ...it clearly with a warning sign to prevent oth ers from applying power 1 Locate the Conditioner unit 1 in the Mains Distribution Rack 2 Disconnect serial line connector from the Con ditioner unit 3 Disconnect the two coolant pipes from the Con ditioner unit Note The coolant pipe connectors are self seal ing 4 Disconnect the AC Mains cable connector 5 Remove the two front screws 2 and the two rear s...

Page 1636: ...ro vided in the kit It must be blue for a non mobile sys tem 2 Check that all hoses are correctly connected 3 Remove the reservoir cap then slowly add liquid from the container labelled Topping to the reservoir until the liquid reaches the bottom of the cap threads The total capacity of the cooling system is approximately 500 ml 1 pint 4 Switch on the unit switch ON the MDR circuit breaker and pre...

Page 1637: ...hat within about 15 minutes of operation manifold temperature shown on the Conditioner dis play is 26 C 2 C About 15 minutes after the system is operational make an exposure verify that the exposure pro ceeds correctly with no warning message displayed after the acquisition 6 6 Surplus Coolant Disposal In a normal non sensitive environment used and surplus coolant may be disposed of by pouring dow...

Page 1638: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1638 JC DR A 421 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card D R A421 Conditioner Unit This page is blank ...

Page 1639: ... Class A 2385072 16 8EN Configuration guide Page no 1639 Chapter 9 Configuration fm CONFIGURATION GUIDE CHAPTER 9 Configuration information is given in the following module Job Card CFG A001 Software Reload on page 1641 Job Card CFG A070 Deactivate Contrast Mode on page 1645 ...

Page 1640: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1640 Configuration fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Configuration guide This page is blank ...

Page 1641: ... oc currence and the cause of data loss to provide documentation on the reasons for which an analysis may not be available in a particular period A Field Service record must also be prepared to indicate the nature of the failure and loss of information 6 AWS SOFTWARE 6 1 AWS Full Software Reload Notice When reloading system software from cold i e including the operating system first disconnect the...

Page 1642: ...ftware must be installed on your system use the AWS Application Software CD ROM used for the current installation or that provided for the update and follow the Update from CD ROM instructions given in the CD ROM booklet For V3 Control Stations that use AWS V53 10 10 or later and V4 Control Stations reinstall the Embedded Publications see Job Card ELE A044 Install User Publications on page 755 For...

Page 1643: ... the application after rebooting restore the IDC directory data from the current system backup Refer to Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 8 SENOGRAPHE PARAMETERS 8 1 Senographe Software Reload If Senographe parameters have been lost or corrupted reload them from the current system backup Refer to Job Card ELE A052 Back up Restore Procedure on page 771 If the backup is not ava...

Page 1644: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1644 JC CFG A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CFG A001 Software Reload This page is blank ...

Page 1645: ...ast Mode Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES None 2 TOOLS None 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 1 minute 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PRE REQUISITES None 6 APPLICABILITY In case of site specific requirements the access to CNT mode can be restricted as described in this Job Card 7 TO DEACTIVATE THE CONTRAST MODE Deactivate Contrast mode CNT by entering the command GENE INSTAL GENE AOP CNT NO on th...

Page 1646: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1646 JC CFG A 070 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CFG A070 Deactivate Contrast Mode This page is blank ...

Page 1647: ...ter Current on page 1673 Job Card CAL A021 Arm Rotation Calibration on page 1679 Job Card CAL A027 Tube Tilt Calibration on page 1681 Job Card CAL A029 Collimator Format Calibration on page 1683 Job Card CAL A031 Lift Calibration on page 1687 Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration on page 1693 Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 Job Card CAL A045 Conversion Factor Measurement...

Page 1648: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1648 Calibration fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Calibration guides This page is blank ...

Page 1649: ... 200 mV AC range shunt reference 80J10 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 67 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS CAUTION In case of equipment breakdown or service engineer error during this calibration proce dure the resulting parameter values might become so unreasonable as to render the X ray tube filament supply circuit unusable This can show up as an error message during power up and t...

Page 1650: ...n the HV unit cable adaptor and place a jumper on the other track see illustrations 1 and 2 Note 1 See important note in section 2 to ensure an accurate measurement 2 Keep the other filament connected in order to avoid error messages when the Senographe is switched on ILLUSTRATION 1 HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399 Note For safety reasons HT is permanently connected to ground ILLUSTRATION 2 HV CA...

Page 1651: ...3A For 5A measurement if the value read at Fluke is equal to 4 85A add 0 2 So the final value is 5 05A Note Correction factors are recommended by FLUKE in their datasheet in the case of Non sinusoidal waveforms These correction factors have been obtained statistically by Engineering by comparing correct measurement from 87 III scope and other accurate millimeters with 87 V They are required becaus...

Page 1652: ...k the calibration accuracy 1 Select SETUP 1st pt CALIB on the X ray Console Note Again the default filament current command value for this first point is 4 000E 00 4 0 A 2 Press the Exposure button on the X ray Console no X rays are produced and hold it until the multimeter reading stabilizes this may take a few seconds 3 Note the filament current value measured from the multimeter 4 Release the E...

Page 1653: ...splayed alternately by rotating the X ray Con sole kV dial CAUTION If the value of K is less than 8 000E 0 8 0 either the calibration procedure was done incorrectly or there is a hardware defect 11 Repeat the calibration and check procedures on the other tube track if necessary 12 Perform a checksum SETUP GENE INSTAL CKSUM CKSUM then turn the system off 13 Reconnect flat cable WG8 to generator com...

Page 1654: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1654 JC CAL A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A001 Heater Current Scale Factor This page is blank ...

Page 1655: ...usable This can show up as an error message during power up and thus inhibit use of the calibration software If this happens the only way to cancel the error is to manually re enter the default parameter values see section 6 for these values and switch the Senographe off and back on again before attempting to repeat the calibration 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 CALIBRATION OF X RAY TUBE BIAS VOLTAGE SCAL...

Page 1656: ... between common C and the focal bias voltage wire G see illustrations 1 and 2 ILLUSTRATION 1 HV UNIT HV CABLE ADAPTOR 36003399 Note For safety reasons HT is permanently connected to ground ILLUSTRATION 2 HV CABLE CONNECTOR PIN CONNECTION DIAGRAM The HV cable connector is marked with the standard X ray industry markings L S C and G However the functions of the corresponding conductors in the Senogr...

Page 1657: ...e 1 Open the work list and declare a new Patient called X ray Tube BIAS cal 2 Select SETUP CALIB 100TH M1 PARAM on the X ray Console 3 Select and change I and J with values written on the Generator Command Board 400 PL1 I is between 1 and 0 5 J is between 240 and 400 Notice Even if the I and J values are the same you must re enter them otherwise you will not be able to perform the calibration 4 Fi...

Page 1658: ... ray Console display 9 Press SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP CKSUM CKSUM on the X ray Console to perform a checksum 6 4 Calibration Accuracy Check 1 Shut down the Senographe system from the Browser 2 Re connect flat cable WG8 to the Generator Command Board 400 PL1 connector XJ7 3 Power on the Senographe system from the X ray Console 4 First check point a Select SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE GENE BIAS...

Page 1659: ...een 247 and 256Vdc 8 Fifth check point a Select SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE GENE BIAS VOLTAGE CHANGE on the X ray Con sole and enter the value corresponding to the MO SF noted down on step 7 fourth check point b Select MO SF voltage parameter and note the default value c Enter 3 000E 2V and valid d Press SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP CKSUM CKSUM on the X ray Console to perform a checksum e Press SETUP SETUP ...

Page 1660: ... 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A003 X Ray Tube Focal Bias Voltage Scale Factor screw to ensure proper ground continuity 7 COMPLETION If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point switch the Senographe off then on again ...

Page 1661: ...es If arcing occurs during an exposure some or all exposures are automatically repeated If persistent arcing occurs the warm up procedure is automatically terminated Proceed as follows 1 Select SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE GENE TUBE WarmUp on the X ray Console The track kV combination for the first exposure should appear on the X ray Console display 2 Press the Exposure button on the X ray Console and H...

Page 1662: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1662 JC CAL A 007 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A007 Automatic X ray Tube Warm Up This page is blank ...

Page 1663: ...ation Suitable meters are Fluke 87 multimeter Keithley 35035 mAs meter GS Poner 165 mA mAs meter 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 27 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 CALIBRATION OF X RAY TUBE MA MEASUREMENT The objective is to determine the scale factor F mA between the X ray tube mA measurement input to the software and the real X ray tube mA value The def...

Page 1664: ...Ray Tube mA Measurement 6 1 Preparation 1 Turn off the Senographe 2 Remove strap between terminal lugs MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV mA board 701 PL1 3 Connect the milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV mA board 701 PL1 Set the milliammeter to its 100 mA DC scale 4 Turn on the Senographe Strap MES_M_NEG MES_M_POS ...

Page 1665: ...If the calculated F mA value is between 850 and 1150 mA calib END appears on the X ray Console display if it is not then an error message appears 6 3 Check results 1 Select SETUP CALIB on the X ray Console Press push button SW2 on generator kV mA board 701 PL1 and HOLD IT DOWN Read and note down the value measured on the milliammeter While still holding SW2 down select MEASUR on the X ray Console ...

Page 1666: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1666 JC CAL A 009 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A009 X Ray Tube mA Measurement This page is blank ...

Page 1667: ...accuracy requirement of 3 Standard 19 X 23 Compression Paddle for positioning the kVp meter close to the Tube Head Detector Protection Plate used to protect the detector from the possibility of falling objects Radiation Protection Plate used to protect the detector from excessive exposure to X rays 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The procedures in ...

Page 1668: ...mpression Paddle Notice The Radiation Protection Plate will protect the detector from excessive exposure to X rays Before proceeding to make exposures ensure that the detector has been protected from excessive X ray doses as instructed above 2 Remove the Bucky and install the Detector Protection Plate 3 on the detector 3 Install the Standard 19 x 23 Compression Paddle updside down so that the Radi...

Page 1669: ...2 Perform the calibration procedure 1 Select SETUP GENE INSTAL GENE GENE KV CALIB 1st pt CALIB on the X ray Console Note By default the kV command value sent by the software for this 1st point is 25 kV 2 Press the Exposure button on the X ray Console and hold it down A single 1 second exposure is taken CALIBRATION END appears on the X ray Console display Release the Exposure button Note down the k...

Page 1670: ...sole refer to Representation of Numeric Parameters on page 96 7 Select SETUP SETUP calcul VALID on the X ray Console to execute the calculation Normally KV CALIB END appears on the X ray Console display The message OUT OF RANGE on the X ray Console display indicates either faulty kV measurement s in the steps above or a hardware failure 6 3 Check results 1 Remove the kV peak meter Radiation Protec...

Page 1671: ...es as instructed by placing a protective sheet on the top of the image receptor 10 Press the Exposure button on the X ray Console and hold it down A single 1 second exposure is taken The message CALIBRATION END appears on the X ray Console display Release the Expo sure button Note down the kV value displayed on the kV peak meter DO NOT ENTER THIS MEASURED VALUE 11 The kV value read on the RMI kV p...

Page 1672: ...hapter 9 Page no 1672 JC CAL A 011 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A011 Calibration of kV Scale Factor This page is blank ...

Page 1673: ...V mA board 701 PL1 on the HV tank unit Refer to Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 6 CALIBRATION OF X RAY TUBE HEATER CURRENT The objective is to determine the X ray tube heater current required to produce the desired X ray tube anode current at a given kV value The calibration procedure must be performed on each of the four focal size track combinations Four repetitio...

Page 1674: ...tion by pressing and holding the Exposure button In case of arcing the software re attempts the same exposure automatically The calibration procedure includes an exposure at 40 kV If for some reason this exposure is impossible to perform e g excessive arcing tube warm up may be necessary 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for LF Rh 4 Perform a checksum SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP CKSUM CKSUM 5 Exit th...

Page 1675: ...fer to Job Card CHK A013 Check mA and mAs settings Perform sections 6 1 Preparation on page 1756 and 6 3 Check mA calibration on page 1757 6 4 Completion If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point switch the Senographe off then on again 7 TROUBLE SHOOTING You may obtain the message arcing for the last LF Mo calibration point In most cases the tube does not actually arc The main ...

Page 1676: ...ng an exposure some parameters are displayed in two groups which appear alternately I HEATER measured is the last item in the first group 4 Return to manual Application Mode two points with the combination LF Mo any filter 5 To confirm the I HEATER value measured an exposure time longer than 500 ms is required To ensure this minimum time select 63 mAs for all kV stations Perform an exposure for ea...

Page 1677: ...26 5 13 4 79 4 88 4 72 27 5 12 4 81 4 88 4 74 28 5 12 4 82 4 88 4 76 29 5 12 4 83 4 89 4 78 30 5 11 4 84 4 89 4 79 31 5 08 4 81 4 87 4 76 32 5 06 4 78 4 84 4 74 33 5 01 4 75 4 82 4 71 34 4 99 4 73 4 80 4 68 35 4 96 4 71 4 78 4 66 36 4 94 4 68 4 76 4 64 37 4 92 4 66 4 74 4 62 38 4 90 4 64 4 73 4 60 39 4 88 4 62 4 72 4 59 40 4 86 4 61 4 70 4 57 41 4 84 4 59 4 69 4 56 42 4 83 4 58 4 67 4 55 43 4 82 4...

Page 1678: ...CAL A012 X Ray Tube Heater Current TABLE 2 I HEATER FOR LF MO COMBINATION kV I HEATER LF Mo I HEATER LF Mo from extended display after 63 mAs exposure 22 4 5 23 4 5 24 4 5 25 4 5 26 4 5 27 4 5 28 4 5 29 4 5 30 4 5 31 4 5 32 4 5 33 4 5 34 4 5 35 4 5 36 4 5 37 4 5 38 4 5 39 4 5 40 4 5 41 4 5 42 4 5 43 4 5 44 4 5 45 4 5 46 4 5 47 4 5 48 4 5 49 4 5 ...

Page 1679: ...e factory set However if parts have been replaced or disturbed which affect the software or hardware limits calibration must be carried out Calibration is necessary to set travel limits in software defining the maximum positive and negative usable angles The procedure first calibrates the 0 position to establish a reference point for the measurement system potentiometer and encoder Travel limits a...

Page 1680: ...ress the collimator FOV size button behind the tube head to signal completion of the 185 adjustment 5 If the 185 position cannot be attained or the message on the Gantry readout indicates an error repeat the procedures to set the 0 and 185 positions If the problem persists it will be necessary to investigate for a hardware error 6 2 3 Set the 165 position 1 You are now asked to move the arm to the...

Page 1681: ...ed on the screen 6 CALIBRATION OF X RAY TUBE TILT 6 1 Introduction The objective is to evaluate the difference between the real and the theoretical tilt angle The real tilt angle depends on mechanical properties position of the optical fork tube and others The difference can be measured by a specific exposure After the exposure the ADS receives an image and returns the distance from the chest wall...

Page 1682: ...e and any other objects from the field of view 5 Install the Magstand simulator plug 6 Click on START make an exposure 7 Wait for the result of the calibration The calculated real tilt angle appears together with the chest wall to anode heel distance for information only The real tilt angle must be 13 5 0 5 8 Take the appropriate action If the result is within the specified tolerance click SAVE Th...

Page 1683: ...collimator calibration is to ensure that X ray field and receptor misalignment is within the reg ulatory specification 6 2 Front blade alignment and blade parallelism check This part of the calibration is intended to align the front blade edge of the collimator with the detector edge at the chest wall side and to check the blade parallelism Note If it is not possible to align the front blade edge ...

Page 1684: ...he collimator 7 mm open ended wrench 3 Release the locking screw 5 5 5 mm open ended wrench 4 Turn the adjustment screw 6 at the back of the collimator according to the instructions on the screen An indicator is provided on the screw to assist in accurate adjustment 5 Tighten the locking screw 5 6 Tighten the four securing nuts 3 4 7 Reinstall the rear plate 2 and its securing screws 1 8 Click the...

Page 1685: ... a Click the on screen CANCEL button to terminate the calibration b Remove and reinstall the collimator c Repeat the full calibration procedure from section 6 2 d If the calibration of parallelism and computation of offset values are now within specifications the calibration procedure is now complete e If one of the displayed values is still out of specification continue with step 2 2 A displayed ...

Page 1686: ...set is out of specification pull the collimator towards the patient and then tighten all of the four screws If the right blade offset is out of specification push the collimator fully towards the right Then first tighten the screws the two screws on the right and then tighten the two screws on the left If the left blade offset is out of specification push the collimator fully towards the left Then...

Page 1687: ...r lift travel limit Upper lift travel limit Lift travel limit Measured then set Floor Ceiling Upper optical fork position Derived from the lift travel limit plus the lower lift travel limit Set in ADS software and must correspond to upper optical fork position Top Middle Bottom Lift Potentiometer Lower Reference Voltage Lift Potentiometer Upper Reference Voltage 650 mm this automatic stop distance...

Page 1688: ...o avoid collision with the ceiling Calibrate the Lift Potentiometer Set the lift lower limit and the lift travel limit in software defining the minimum and maximum usable heights Calibration is necessary to set the lift lower and upper travel limits in software defining the minimum and maximum usable heights The lower limit is set at a pre determined minimum usable height to establish a reference ...

Page 1689: ... mm lift travel 2 If the ceiling height is between 2400mm 94 6 inches and 2500mm 98 4 inches Remove the front covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523 Place the optical fork in the middle position allows 750 mm lift travel 3 If the ceiling height is between 2300mm 90 6 inches and 2400mm 94 6 inches Remove the front covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinst...

Page 1690: ...ocess The Gantry LCD updates with the following message Adjust lower limit Lower arm until you reach min usable height defined in JC ELE A010 Then press the FOV button 5 Measure the height of the flat surface of the detector A with respect to the top of the gantry base plate B as shown 6 Use the control buttons on the Tube Head to move the lift down until the measured height at the detector is 670...

Page 1691: ...r cancel the calibra tion see Selection of the Lift Travel Limit completion on page 1691 Notice If you do not move the lift up to its highest possible position until it automatically stops and you press the FOV size button the Gantry LCD updates with the message Upper lift position out of range Check lift position or positioner signal Then press FOV button In this case simply contin ue to move the...

Page 1692: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1692 JC CAL A 031 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A031 Lift Calibration This page is blank ...

Page 1693: ...ust be stabilized and within the specified range before commenc ing and during bad pixel calibration The Senographe must be in the Medical Application menu 6 BAD PIXEL CALIBRATION 6 1 Description A Bad Pixel is an Image Receptor cell which has a response curve very different from that of other cells subject to the same dose even after flat field correction It thus provides no useful information an...

Page 1694: ...o make a high dose exposure using the following parameters Rh Rh 30 kV 80 mAs 11 The IDC uses the acquired images to create the bad pixel map which will be used for subsequent image correction The bad pixel results are displayed on the screen in the form of a table indicating Pass or Fail for all tested specifications 6 3 Errors WARNING One Defect category FAIL means that the detector is above the...

Page 1695: ...ation about Bad Pixel troubleshooting refer to Job Card TSG A010 Troubleshooting Bad Pixel Calibration Failure on page 1019 6 4 Gain Calibration After completing the Bad Pixel calibration Gain Calibration must be performed for all techniques per form Job Card CAL A043 Detector Gain Calibration on page 1697 7 COMPLETION If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point switch the Senogr...

Page 1696: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1696 JC CAL A 041 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A041 Bad Pixel Calibration This page is blank ...

Page 1697: ... been used for a while and when Flat Field test fails The Senographe must be in the Medical Application menu Remove the compression paddle 7 DETECTOR GAIN CALIBRATION 7 1 Principle The goal of gain calibration is to compensate for differences in pixel responses and differences in elec tronic gain This calibration makes the image of a flat uniform object look flat flat field uniformity 7 2 Procedur...

Page 1698: ...hnique Calibration technique Configuration Mo Mo LF grid Mo Mo 26 kV 64 mAs LF Mo Mo 26 kV 320 mAs LF Bucky installed no paddle Phantom on Bucky Mo Rh LF grid Mo Rh 28 kV 36 mAs LF Mo Rh 28 kV 180 mAs LF Bucky installed no paddle Phantom on Bucky Rh Rh LF grid Rh Rh 30 kV 22 mAs LF Rh Rh 30 kV 100 mAs LF Bucky installed no paddle Phantom on Bucky Mo Mo LF nogrid Mo Mo 26 kV 32 mAs LF Mo Mo 26 kV 1...

Page 1699: ...x on the system again h Perform the angulation to reach 15 i Remove the stereotix j Perform the 3 gain maps at 15 k When all the stereo gain maps are calibrated move back to the 0 position l It is now safe to exit the calibrations Technique for calibration IQ check technique Calibration technique Configuration Mo Mo LF nogrid 15 Mo Mo 26 kV 32 mAs LF Mo Mo 26 kV 160 mAs LF No Bucky no paddle Phant...

Page 1700: ...nformed that the IQ check failed because the check for detector lag failed or because the detector temperature was outside limits You are then requested to try the test again after a 15 minute delay or after the detector temperature has stabilized 2 IQ check failed system configuration is not OK You are asked to repeat the IQ check after checking the system configuration phantom position removal o...

Page 1701: ...T Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 15 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING This procedure requires the use of X rays take all due precautions 5 PREREQUISITES None 6 CONVERSION FACTOR MEASUREMENT 6 1 Description The Conversion Factor is required for AOP Automatic Optimization of Parameters calculations It is determined by using a dosimeter to measure the X ray dose while acquiring an image This valu...

Page 1702: ...nstall the Dosimeter Support c Install the Radiation Protection Plate d Place the IQST phantom on the dosimeter support and the dosimeter in the low position Source Dosimeter Distance 622 5 mm e Take an exposure parameters set automatically Rh Rh 30 kV 56 mAs f Read the dosimeter and enter the dose value in microGray or mR g Remove the Dosimeter and Radiation Protection Plate h Take a second expos...

Page 1703: ...d Engineer Time 20 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The procedures in this Job Card produce X rays Ensure that you take appropriate precautions when operating with X rays for example stay behind the radiation screen during an X ray exposure 6 PREREQUISITES Notice The Detector must be protected with the Radiation Protection Plate 7 INTRODUCTION The purpose of this procedure is to verify that the Half v...

Page 1704: ... with Radiation Protection Plate on the image receptor 4 Place the dosimeter with 6M chamber on the high position of the Dosimeter Support the source to dosimeter distance SDD 592mm 5 Select the 9 x 9 collimator format verify using the light beam that the 6M ionization chamber is fully in the beam 6 In the HVL Yield calibration menu on the X ray Console enter the path corresponding to the Large Fo...

Page 1705: ... following and repeat the calibration Paddle is present Dosimeter is properly calibrated 6M probe is correctly placed in the high position of the dosimeter holder tool Tube tilt and format are correctly calibrated and probe is in the 9x9 field of view Generator kV and mA are properly calibrated If the calibration still fails the tube must be replaced 20 Repeat steps 6 through 19 for the other trac...

Page 1706: ...on paddle and read the dose value on the dosimeter 34 Press Set Up once on X ray Console select Meas D enter the dose value E0 in mGy see Notice above and press Valid 35 Press Set Up twice and press Calcul 36 Press Set Up press Param verify that the value is within the limits given below Acceptable Values 37 If the values are within limits the Senographe stores HVL and Yield values If not check th...

Page 1707: ... computes the HVL by interpolation using the following formula the units are mm of Al Where E0 E0 2 E0 5 are dose values measured behind 0 0 2 mm and 0 5 mm aluminum respectively The Senographe calculates Tube Yield as E0 mAs unit mGy mAs for this technique 9 COMPLETION If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point switch the Senographe off then on again Ε Ε 2 0 2 0 5 0 2 ln E E ln...

Page 1708: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1708 JC CAL A 046 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A046 Half Value Layer Measurement This page is blank ...

Page 1709: ...al sensor with the force measured externally by a calibrated force detector at several points over the working range The system software can then calculate compression forces to an accuracy of 1 daN Note If the Paddle Holder Assembly Force Sensor or Paddle Holder Board has been replaced it is pos sible that system reports 122 021H03 COMPRESSION CONTROL ERROR on the Gantry LCD Readout when Gantry i...

Page 1710: ... the AWS screen 6 3 Verification of the Compression Force Sensor calibration Note If you are re calibrating a Compression board that already contains calibration information e g you are performing a re calibration of an existing Compression board then you can directly follow the verification steps below If you are calibrating a Compression board that does not contain calibration information e g yo...

Page 1711: ...ecific safety precautions are applicable 5 APPLICABILITY This Job Card should be used if you witness problems when peforming Job Card ELE A038 AOP Mode and SNR Check on page 707 and you have a Gantry CPU Board running NSC 1 2 13 or above 6 PREREQUISITES The procedure to calibrate the final offset for each Compression Paddle uses a command whose syntax refers to the padlle number Before proceeding ...

Page 1712: ...n Paddle Offset Calibration 3 DS Axillary 2373360 4 DS Round spot 2373347 5 DS Square spot 2373343 6 DS Essential 2D Large localization paddle DS 2373385 Essential 5172704 7 DS Essential 2D Spot localization paddle DS 2373389 Essential 5172624 11 N A High wall Not yet available future use N A Paddle Number Products Compression Paddle Name Ref Number on Label Photo ...

Page 1713: ...ter 9 JC CAL A 049 fm 12 DS Essential 19 x 23 magnification paddle DS 2397559 Essential 5172828 14 DS Essential Round spot magnification paddle DS 2397557 Essential 5172946 15 DS Essential Square magnification paddle DS 2397558 Essential 5172686 16 Essential Flexible sliding 19 x 23 paddle 5144833 Paddle Number Products Compression Paddle Name Ref Number on Label Photo ...

Page 1714: ...al Sliding 19 x 23 paddle 5144832 2 18 Essential Sliding round spot paddle 5144836 19 Essential Sliding square spot paddle 5144835 20 Essential 2D Large localization paddle sliding Not yet available future use N A 21 Essential 2D Spot localization paddle sliding Not yet available future use N A 22 Essential 24 x 31 paddle 5173061 Paddle Number Products Compression Paddle Name Ref Number on Label P...

Page 1715: ...tion and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CAL A049 Compression Paddle Offset Calibration Page no 1715 Chapter 9 JC CAL A 049 fm 23 Essential Flexible 24 x 31 paddle 5172164 Paddle Number Products Compression Paddle Name Ref Number on Label Photo ...

Page 1716: ...with an ADS prompt 2 Make a Telnet connection with the Gantry CPU Board by entering telnet pos 3 At the prompt that appears display the existing offsets for the Compression Paddles by entering displayPaddleOffsets A list of paddle offets similar to the following appears No Paddle Deformation Offset 1 10th mm 1 Phlex 19x23 0 2 Std 19x23 0 3 Auxiliary 0 4 Round spot 0 5 Square spot 0 6 Biopsy 0 7 Sp...

Page 1717: ...he offset is negative if the known thickness is less than that displayed on the Gantry LCD Readout 6 Convert the calculated offset in 1 10 th of a mm by mulitplying the coffset by 10 Record this con verted value in column C of Table 2 on page 1719 7 3 Specify final the Offset for Each of the Compression Paddles Specify the final offset in 1 10 th of mm of the Compression Paddles on the Gantry CPU ...

Page 1718: ...ot as expected repeat procedure from step 2 of Section 7 2 Determine the Current Offset for Each of the Compression Paddles on page 1717 for the appropriate Compression Paddle s 5 For each Compression Paddle you changed the offset for follow these steps a Insert the compression Paddle b Apply a compresison of 10 dAN c Verify the Gantry LCD Readout displays exactly the known thickness of the 40 mm ...

Page 1719: ...ed Offset in 1 10th of a mm D Final Offset to declare in 1 10th of a mm i e value from Col umn A value from column C 1 Flexible 19x23 2383182 2 2 Standard 19x23 2373344 3 Axillary 2373360 4 Round spot 2373347 5 Square spot 2373343 6 2D Large localization paddle DS 2373385 Essential 5172704 7 2D Spot localization paddle DS 2373389 Essential 5172624 11 High wall Not yet available future use 12 19 x ...

Page 1720: ... 2 18 Sliding round spot paddle 5144836 19 Sliding square spot paddle 5144835 20 2D Large localization paddle sliding Not yet available future use 21 2D Spot localization paddle sliding Not yet available future use 22 24 x 31 paddle 5173061 23 Flexible 24 x 31 paddle 5172164 Paddle Number Compression Paddle Name Ref Number on Label A Existing Offset in displayed in 1 10th of a mm B Known Thickness...

Page 1721: ...ge 6 1 Paddle Holder Travel Limits 1 Select the Compression Thickness Calibration on the AWS Screen Service Desktop Calibration Positioner Breast Thickness and press START The Gantry Readout displays the procedure to fol low 2 Press the footswitch continuously do not release the compression pedal until the movement stops automatically to reach the lowest mechanical position of the compression Pres...

Page 1722: ...ve changed the Compression board or have updated the software on the Compression board then you must perform Compression Force Calibration on page 1709 in Job Card CAL A048 Cal ibration of Compression Force Sensor before you follow the verification steps below otherwise you will witness a compression related error 1 Place the Standard Compression Paddle 2 Still in contact mode place the corner of ...

Page 1723: ...during an X ray exposure 6 PREREQUISITES None 7 PROCEDURE 7 1 Presentation This procedure will be done for the three following techniques With Grid and Large Focal Spot Stereotix and Large Focal Spot if Stereo option present With No Grid and Small Focal Spot if Magnification option present Note AOP Calibration is required to adapt AOP parameters to tube yield mGy mAs 7 2 Calibration with Grid Larg...

Page 1724: ...ars on the X ray Console display Release the Exposure button 8 Perform a checksum SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP CKSUM CKSUM 9 Exit the Calibration Menu SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP 7 4 Calibration with No Grid Small Focal Spot configuration Note This calibration is applicable only if the Magnification option is present 1 Remove the Bucky 2 Install the 1 8 magnification Mag Stand the calibra...

Page 1725: ...nearity deviation and stores a correction factor in the X ray Console menu to be applied to the mAs value of all AOP exposures The correction factor is automatically calculated as MASPRE CORR S100 25 x S4 where S100 and S4 are the signals measured in the 100 mAs image and the 4 mAs image respectively 6 2 Procedure 1 Install the Flat Field Phantom on the Bucky 2 Install the paddle without compressi...

Page 1726: ... Calibration 9 Exit the Calibration Menu SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP SETUP 6 3 Acceptable Values The value displayed for MASPRE CORR should be within the limits 1 00 and 1 20 If it is outside this range check the Generator calibration and repeat the calibration 7 COMPLETION If you are handing the machine back to the user at this point switch the Senographe off then on again ...

Page 1727: ...ON CHECKS CHAPTER 9 Verification checking information is given in the following modules Job Card CHK A001 Boot Init and Shutdown on page 1729 Job Card CHK A003 UPS Batteries on page 1737 Job Card CHK A004 DICOM Printer Adjustments and Checks on page 1741 Job Card CHK A011 Check kVp settings on page 1745 Job Card CHK A013 Check mA and mAs settings on page 1755 ...

Page 1728: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1728 Check fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Verification checks This page is blank ...

Page 1729: ...nt Switching off one of these breakers removes power from only part of the system Remember that the UPS will continue to supply power to parts of the Control Station and imaging equipment until it is shut down NEVER switch off the UPS manually risk of data loss NEVER switch off power to the Conditioner except in emergency risk of damage to the Detector if the correct conditions of temperature and ...

Page 1730: ...r Circuit Breaker and to a circuit breaker in the MDR the Main Distribution Rack at the top of the Generator Cabinet in parallel Both circuit breakers are normally left ON All subsystem power switches items in the Control Station Conditioner etc are normally left ON The system is normally switched ON using the ON switch I on the Gantry Console The system is normally switched OFF by clicking the Sy...

Page 1731: ... and STOP push button is lit No display on the AWS monitor and no monitor LED lit None of the UPS front panel LEDs are lit visible through the acrylic cover at the base of the Control Station The Control Station and Conditioner pushbuttons ON inside the MDR are lit The Conditioner is powered up and operating normally 7 2 Complete power OFF state checks For these checks all items including the UPS ...

Page 1732: ...x on 4 Press the CONDITIONER ON push button at the top of the MDR the button lights and the Conditioner starts 5 Press the UPS ON push button on the Generator Cabinet for at least one sec ond the AWS starts up see VF Job Card UPS Battery if you suspect a prob lem with the UPS 6 The Login prompt appears on the AWS monitor within 90 seconds of switch on At the Login prompt enter sdc At the Password ...

Page 1733: ...ashing 4 The Login prompt appears on the AWS monitor within 90 seconds of switch on Log in as described above 5 The pop up message All devices are OK appears on the AWS monitor 6 The Gantry Console displays the two following messages S70 Wrong appli cation selected and S34 Select Laterality these messages are normal because an exam has not been started and no laterality has been selected 7 The Bro...

Page 1734: ... minutes of confirmation of the shutdown request the Control Station system is switched off and the Gantry Generator system is switched off check again at the X ray Console 6 No LED lit or flashing on the UPS 7 Check that the conditioner continues to operate check that the Control Station ON button at the front of the Generator Cabinet and the CONDITIONER ON button inside the MDR are still lit 11 ...

Page 1735: ...witch Conditioner Hospital supply ON OFF switch Conditioner OFF button inside MDR Gantry and Generator OFF ON at X ray Con sole Generator Circuit breaker in Generator Cabinet Also resets the Detector and its power supply Detector and its power supply OFF ON at X ray Con sole Detector OFF button inside MDR OFF ON at X ray Con sole also resets the Gan try and Generator Control Station and all conten...

Page 1736: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1736 JC CHK A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CHK A001 Boot Init and Shutdown This page is blank ...

Page 1737: ...efore the function check to avoid an additional delay while the battery recharges Proceed as follows to carry out the function check 1 With the system powered on as normal observe the state of the front panel LEDs a The On Line LED B should be lit b If any of the remaining five status LEDs A C D E F G are lit the cause should be investi gated c The Load Indicator LEDs indicate the power being draw...

Page 1738: ...o start this procedure immediately after the function check described above because it requires the battery charge to be 100 of capacity 7 1 Battery Capacity Re Calibration on V1 V2 Control Stations 1 From the Service Desktop click the Diagnostics button then the UPS button 2 To prevent the system from being shut down during the calibration process select Configuration Event Actions and then the U...

Page 1739: ...nsufficient Runtime Available event f Under Shutdown uncheck the Initiate Shutdown Sequence checkbox g Click on the Apply button 7 Start the calibration process To do this select in left menu Smart UPS 750 RM Select Diagnos tic under item Initiate diagnostic select diagnostic action Runtime calibration then click the Apply button 8 During the test and calibration process the following events occur...

Page 1740: ...by entering cd export home insite browser 13 Connect to the UPS web based diagnostics by entering mozilla bin http localhost 3052 14 At the login page that appears specify root for the username and root for the password 15 Use the UPS web based interface to restore the UPS paramters as follows a Select the left menu Event then Actions and click on the Battery discharged event b Under the Command f...

Page 1741: ...s and Checks Chapter 9 1 SUPPLIES None 2 TOOLS Densitometer 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 10 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS None 5 PREREQUISITES The printer must be correctly calibrated 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Preparation and Print 1 Install the SMPTE pattern together with the Test_pattern pattern To do this right mouse click on the Browser background and from the Root Menu that appears ...

Page 1742: ...FFDM Printer patient from the patient list in the Browser 3 Click the Review Exam button to open a review exam for the selected FFDM Printer A review exam for the FFDM Printer appears similar to the following 4 If the display WW and or WL values have been changed select the Standard auto windowing option to return them to the default values of WW 1500 and WL 2000 Auto windowing options WW and WL v...

Page 1743: ...he Print Request window that appears select the DICOM printer you want to check in the list of DICOM printers then click on Printing Properties 7 In the Printer properties window that appears select Blue film for the Media type Processor for the Destination and Portrait for the Film orientation Then click Save to save the settings and Done to return to the Print Request window 8 Back in the Print ...

Page 1744: ...mine the printed image illustrated below Check the image quality according to the points listed Verify continuity of the white diagonal lines 1 Check that they do not show steps In the two white squares 2 the vertical and horizontal lines must be well separated for good res olution In the large light gray square check that the arc 3 is not duplicated The small black square 4 within the larger squa...

Page 1745: ...not recommended for use in Europe It does not meet the European accuracy requirement of 3 Standard 19 X 23 Compression Paddle for positioning the kVp meter close to the Tube Head Detector Protection Plate used to protect the detector from the possibility of falling objects Radiation Protection Plate used to protect the detector from excessive exposure to X rays 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field ...

Page 1746: ...ion Paddle Notice The Radiation Protection Plate will protect the detector from excessive exposure to X rays Before proceeding to make exposures ensure that the detector has been protected from excessive X ray doses as instructed above 2 Remove the Bucky and install the Detector Protection Plate 3 on the detector 3 Install the Standard 19 x 23 Compression Paddle updside down so that the Radiation ...

Page 1747: ...e here is simply to reduce the distance between the kV peak meter and the X ray source see applicable documentation for minimum acceptable distance from X ray source if any Select the appropriate procedure according to the meter to be used as follows Procedure RMI 232 kVp meter on page 1748 Procedure RADCAL 4083 kVp meteR on page 1750 Procedure Keithley 35080B KVp meter on page 1752 ...

Page 1748: ...d kV correction values by copying CP row values from the meter calibration curve 7 2 Position the meter 1 Ensure that the Radiation Protection Plate is 205 mm 8 07 inches below the bottom of the Tube Head 2 Place the kV peak meter on the Radiation Protection Plate located on the Standard 19 x 23 Com pression Paddle 3 Use the Senographe light centering device to center the kV peak meter target with...

Page 1749: ...ures at the Selected kVp values shown in the table below For each exposure note the Measured kVp value shown on the meter 5 Use the kVp correction values noted above to calculate and enter Corrected kVp values 6 For the check to be passed each of the Corrected kVp values must lie between the specified Upper and Lower Limits 7 If the check fails at any value repeat the complete procedure 8 If the r...

Page 1750: ...3 KVP METER 8 1 kVp meter calibration Note the meter identification number and date of most recent calibration 8 2 Position the meter 1 Ensure that the Radiation Protection Plate is 155 mm 6 10 inches below the bottom of the Tube Head 2 Use the Senographe light centering device to center the kV peak meter target within the X ray zone kVp meter identification number Date of calibration dd mm yy ...

Page 1751: ...mAs LF 4 Make exposures at the Selected kVp values shown in the table below For each exposure note the Measured kVp value shown on the meter 5 For the check to be passed each of the Measured kVp values must lie between the specified Upper and Lower Limits 6 If the check fails at any value repeat the complete procedure 7 If the repeated check fails again kVp calibration is necessary Perform the pro...

Page 1752: ...uire ment of 3 9 1 kVp meter calibration Note the meter identification number and date of most recent calibration 9 2 Position the meter 1 Ensure that the Radiation Protection Plate is 205 mm 8 07 inches below the bottom of the Tube Head 2 Place the kV peak meter on the Radiation Protection Plate located on the Standard 19 x 23 Com pression Paddle 3 Use the Senographe light centering device to cen...

Page 1753: ...er 50 mAs LF 4 Make exposures at the Selected kVp values shown in the table below For each exposure note the Measured kVp value shown on the meter 5 For the check to be passed each of the Measured kVp values must lie between the specified Upper and Lower Limits 6 If the check fails at any value repeat the complete procedure 7 If the repeated check fails again kVp calibration is necessary Perform t...

Page 1754: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1754 JC CHK A 011 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CHK A011 Check kVp settings This page is blank ...

Page 1755: ...lid certi fication Suitable meters are Fluke 87 multimeter Keithley 35035 mAs meter GS Poner 165 mA mAs meter 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 30 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS The procedures in this Job Card produce X rays Ensure that you take appropriate precautions when operating with X rays for example stay behind the radiation screen during an X ray exposure 5 PREREQUISITES The...

Page 1756: ... DO NOT touch potentiometer P1 on generator kV mA board 701 PL1 at any point in this procedure 6 1 Preparation 1 Switch off the system 2 Remove the strap between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV mA board 701 PL1 3 Connect a milliammeter between test points MES_M_NEG and MES_M_POS of generator kV mA board 701 PL1 4 Place the Radiation Protection Plate on the Bucky to protect the ...

Page 1757: ... For the check to pass each Measured mA value M must be within 5 of the corresponding Expected Nominal mA value shown N 4 If the check fails there is a system error which must be corrected 6 4 Check mAs calibration 1 Follow the instructions of section 6 1 Preparation but this time connect an mAs meter in place of the milliammeter 2 Use the parameters shown in the following table to make an exposur...

Page 1758: ...Chapter 9 Page no 1758 JC CHK A 013 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CHK A013 Check mA and mAs settings This page is blank ...

Page 1759: ...ss A 2385072 16 8EN Long Term Shutdown Procedures Page no 1759 Chapter 10 Chap Shutdown fm CHAPTER 10 LONG TERM SHUTDOWN PROCEDURES This chapter contains important information which will be required if the Senographe system must be stored or left without power for a long period ...

Page 1760: ...Chapter 10 Page no 1760 Chap Shutdown fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Long Term Shutdown Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 1761: ...period special precautions must be taken to avoid damage to the detector 2 DETECTOR PROTECTION DURING SHUTDOWN There are two possible methods of protecting the detector if the normal system power must be switched off during a prolonged shutdown Connect the Conditioner to a normal power outlet and leave it switched on This ensures that power is returned after any brief power outages due to storms e...

Page 1762: ...10 Page no 1762 JC CARE A 001 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card CARE A001 Detector protection during system shutdown This page is blank ...

Page 1763: ...and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Planned Maintenance Procedures Page no 1763 Chapter 11 Chap Planned Maintenance fm CHAPTER 11 PLANNED MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES 1 INTRODUCTION This chapter contains recommendations for planned maintenance of the Senographe DS ...

Page 1764: ...Chapter 11 Page no 1764 Chap Planned Maintenance fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Planned Maintenance Procedures This page is blank ...

Page 1765: ...Drn time in minutes PM visits must be made at six monthly intervals The tables show a suggested sequence of tasks to be performed at successive PM visits in columns numbered from1 through 6 For each visit an X in the column indicates that the corresponding task should be performed The total time required for each PM visit depends upon the tasks scheduled and any additional work such as FRU replace...

Page 1766: ...y not be complete Carry out the following tasks in preparation for the visit FMI Required Applied FMI 12083 Reliability for FB images in Stereotaxy FMI 12075 Safety AWS 43 10 53 10 Task Title Task Definition Obtain site status information and error logs Job Card PM A101 Site Status p 1773 Analyze AWS Error Codes ERR SUB A005 AWS Error Messages p 935 Analyze IDC Error Codes ERR SUB A007 IDC Error M...

Page 1767: ...nsumables required per PM visit The following table lists the supplies and consumables required for each PM visit 1 2 3 4 5 6 Supplies Lithium battery for Generator CPU board X AWS U20 Motherboard Battery V3 Control Stations only X X X Consumables Blank DOS formatted HD 3 5 floppy disk or blank CD R X X X X X X Lubricant X X X Grease for Lift and Rotation X X X HV Grease X X X HV Oil X X X Coolant...

Page 1768: ...adaptor X X X X X X Mag Stand or Mag Stand Simulator X X X Mag Stand Simulator X X X X X X Flat Field Phantom 25mm acrylic X X X X X X ACR standard phantom X X X X X X IQST Standard Phantom X X X X X X RADCAL Dosimeter X X X 6M ionization chamber 6cc X X X Dosimeter support with Radiation Protection Plate X X X Radiation Protection Plate X X X X X X Detector Protection Plate X X X Two sheets of 0 ...

Page 1769: ...ge 1775 6 10 X X X X X X Generator Tube Remove Generator Covers Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Genera tor Covers p 513 6 5 X X X X X X Clean Conditioner Air Filter Job Card PM A429 Conditioner Air Filter Clean ing p 1807 6 5 X X X X X X Check and top up Conditioner coolant Job Card PM A428 Conditioner Coolant Level Check and Top up p 1805 6 5 X X X X X X Change Generator CPU Lithium Battery Jo...

Page 1770: ...ession Check and Calibration p 583 12 10 X X X Check Gantry emergency stop buttons Check operation of both Gantry emergency stop buttons Check that all movement of the Ganttry is stopped when either button is pressed 12 5 X X X Control Station Check UPS function Job Card CHK A003 UPS Batteries section 6 UPS Function Check p 1737 6 5 X X X X X X Recalibrate UPS Battery Capacity Job Card CHK A003 UP...

Page 1771: ...uminance Job Card PM A300 21 inch 3MP Monitor Lumi nance Checks on page 1793 12 60 X X X IQ Tools Flat Field Test Job Card ELE A032 IQ Tools Flat Field Test p 699 6 30 X X X X X X Calibrate Conversion Factor Job Card CAL A045 Conversion Factor Mea surement p 1701 12 8 X X X Check Image Acquisition and ACR Score Job Card ELE A037 Image Acquisition and ACR Score p 705 6 8 X X X X X X Calibrate mAs N...

Page 1772: ...vice Manual supplied with that option review station Refer to the Service Manual for the option review station 6 N A X X X X X X Completion Check site ready for customer Check the cleanliness and presentation of the site correct any hazards such as trailing cables etc 6 10 X X X X X X Check site records Check that all PM documents records etc are stored with the site log book 6 15 X X X X X X Cust...

Page 1773: ... in advance 2 SITE LOGBOOK 1 Review the site Logbook to identify recently applied FMI procedures and last Planned Maintenance Operation Report 2 Verify the presence of the following log diskettes or log CD Rs with the site logbook PM log Acquisition log Review log 3 REVIEW SYSTEM OPERATION WITH CUSTOMER 1 Discuss with customer to find out if there are any specific problems with the system Make a l...

Page 1774: ...Chapter 11 Page no 1774 JC PM A 101 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PM A101 Site Status This page is blank ...

Page 1775: ...the appearance of all visible cables and correct hazardous trailing cables in the room 6 1 2 Visual inspection of equipment Note any signs of damage to covers monitor support etc 6 1 3 Inspect the Radiation Screen Check for breaks or cracks in the glass gaps or cracks in the frame and for correct stable mounting etc 6 2 System Cover Checks 6 2 1 Generator cover check Check covers for security and ...

Page 1776: ...hapter 11 Page no 1776 JC PM A 155 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PM A155 General System Inspection Checks This page is blank ...

Page 1777: ...control but tons are operational check each button for up and down movement of lift 2 Move arm to its upper and lower limits Software limits should stop movement If the software limits fail optical sensors are used to recognize and stop any movement before impact with mechanical stops Total one way movement time going either up or down between upper and lower limits should be 8 2 seconds 3 Lift mo...

Page 1778: ...ry readout should show magnifications of 1 5 and 1 8 according to the device installed 6 6 Check Paddle Compression 1 Check the compression paddle mounting for signs of cracks or other damage 2 Verify that both sets of compression decompression pedals and the manual compression knobs located on the paddle holder all function correctly i e the paddle moves up or down in response to each command 3 U...

Page 1779: ...Time 20 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before working on any Gantry mechanism shut down the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power NEVER switch off at the UPS except in emergency risk of data loss 5 PREREQUISITES The Gantry Column and Compression Arm cover...

Page 1780: ...uide rails 3 5 Check the motor drive belt manually for adequate ten sion 6 2 Check and clean the compression mechanism 1 Switch off system power see the Warning above 2 Use Lubricant to clean and lubricate the guide rail 1 3 Check manually with your hands that the Manual Com pression Belt 2 is sufficiently tight that it does not slide and that the pulleys move when the Manual Com pression Belt mov...

Page 1781: ...1 Position the arm for access Lower the arm for good access to the rotation gears 1 Switch OFF the Gantry power CAUTION The following procedures require power to be applied in order to rotate the arm for access to the gears After positioning the arm be sure to switch off all power when you are inspecting or greasing the gears 6 3 2 Inspect the gears Locate the meshing teeth of the worm and worm ge...

Page 1782: ...sing may not help The most critical areas are visible with the arm in the following positions 0 45 135 and 180 6 3 4 Greasing Rotate the arm between the limits of 165 and 185 to as many positions as required to fully inspect and grease the gears CAUTION After each movement switch OFF power while inspecting and greasing Apply a light film of Grease for Lift and Rotation as required to the teeth of ...

Page 1783: ... 20 minutes 5 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before working on any Gantry mechanism shut down the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power NEVER switch off at the UPS except in emergency risk of data loss 6 PREREQUISITES If necessary apply LOTO to switch off the Gantr...

Page 1784: ...t cover and the Fan Filter from the Fan Filter back cover With modest pressure the Fan Filter front cover should unclip 2 Remove the Fan Filter from the Fan Filter front cover To clean the Fan Filter shake it until it is free from dust A clean Fan Filter should like similar to the following Note If when you clean the Fan Filter you notice that it is becoming used perished the next time you perform...

Page 1785: ...orizontal i e goes left right and so that the arrows 2 are located on the vertical edges and not the horizontal edges Note It is important that the text 1 and arrows 2 are orientated as described above Having the text 1 and arrows 2 orientated as described above makes the future removal of the Fan Filter front piece simple 5 Install the Fan Filter front piece and Fan Filter on the Fan Filter back ...

Page 1786: ...Chapter 11 Page no 1786 JC PM A 254 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PM A254 Tube Head Fan Filter Cleaning 8 COMPLETION None ...

Page 1787: ...ox including a small Pozi screwdriver 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 45 60 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before working on any Gantry mechanism shut down the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospital supply circuit breaker Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power NEVER switch off at the UPS except in e...

Page 1788: ...ormation and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PM A255 Collimator and Tube Head Cleaning 6 PROCEDURE 6 1 Clean Tube Head 1 Use the small static duster to clean both sides of the Tube Head as shown below 2 Use the small static duster to clean the top of the Tube Head as shown below ...

Page 1789: ...ng an antistatic bag as protection place the plate and FOV button on the X ray head support arm Notice Do not attempt to disconnect the FOV button Do not allow the plate to hang down the FOV connection is fragile 3 Remove the four screws 3 two each side which secure the X ray containment box 2 4 Remove the X ray containment box If necessary first remove the two screws 4 which secure the fan protec...

Page 1790: ...ar e g a digital camera sensor cleaner to clean it If necessary add some ethanol to the cotton bud to assist the removal of the dust The use of ethanol may require that you clean the mirror a number of times so that there is no smearing Notice The mirror surface is fragile Ensure that you take care when cleaning the mirror applying minimal pressure Only use a cotton bud or similar e g a digital ca...

Page 1791: ...8EN Job Card PM A255 Collimator and Tube Head Cleaning Page no 1791 Chapter 11 JC PM A 255 fm of the collimator as indicated below 11 Reinstall the cleaned right collimator cover with the small screws 9 small Pozi screwdriver Flat surface behind lamp Mirror side edge Flat surface below mirror 9 ...

Page 1792: ...screws 15 one each side 4 mm allen wrench 16 Check visually that all screws securing the Collimator are well mounted 7 COMPLETION 1 Power up the Senographe system 2 Perform a Flat Field test using a Flat Field Phantom 3 Determine your next step If the Flat Field test passes switch off the Gantry power and replace the tube covers refer to Job Card PHY A044 Remove Reinstall Gantry Covers on page 523...

Page 1793: ...tached and must be configured in Direct mode The Away Direct button toggles between away and direct modes To select the Direct mode keep pressing the Away Direct button until D is displayed on the lower left corner of the Spot Meter screen 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 60 minutes including 30 minutes to let the monitor warm up Remove canon and place foam ring Luminance Meter AT...

Page 1794: ...DURE 7 1 Install Test Images 1 Insert the Test Pattern CD ROM into the DVD ROM drive of the ADS Computer 2 In the Browser click the CDR read write icon and select Query from the menu that appears A Media Browser CDR window appears 3 From the Media Browser CDR window a Select the AAPM Test Patterns patient b Select the 1K LUMIN Study ID c Select both the 2 and 4 Series use the Control key to select...

Page 1795: ...corner of the Media Browser CDR window to return to the main Browser window The Patient List in the Browser now includes a Patient called AAPM Test Patterns which contains the test patterns required to check the luminosity of the 21 inch 3MP Monitor 5 In the Browser click the CDR read write icon and select Detach from the menu that appears The DVD ROM drive of the ADS Computer opens 6 Remove the T...

Page 1796: ...sary before performing the luminance tests 2 From the Patient List in the Browser select the AAPM Test Patterns Patient 3 In the Study list select the 1K LUMIN Study ID 4 In the Series list select Series 2 Procedure Description TG18 LN 5 Click the Review Exam icon The Exam Review window appears with images from the series 6 If not already selected use the Img up down buttons to select the first im...

Page 1797: ... Pattern displayed use the luminance meter to measure the value of the white luminance at the center of the white box Insert the measured white luminance value into row B of Table 1 on page 1800 The measured white luminance value must be more than 350 cd m for the monitor to pass the white luminance test 10 Calculate the contrast ratio To do this divide the white luminance value measured in step 9...

Page 1798: ...op right quadrant D3 bottom left quadrant D4 bottom right quadrant D5 center quadrant 14 Calculate the black non uniformity value as follows a From the measured luminosity values of each corner quadrant D1 D2 D3 and D4 determine the highest luminosity value BLmax b From the measured luminosity values of each corner quadrant D1 D2 D3 and D4 determine the lowest luminosity value BLmin c The measured...

Page 1799: ...E2 top right quadrant E3 bottom left quadrant E4 bottom right quadrant E5 center quadrant 17 Calculate the white non uniformity value as follows a From the measured luminosity values of each corner quadrant E1 E2 E3 and E4 determine the highest luminosity value WLmax b From the measured luminosity values of each corner quadrant E1 E2 E3 and E4 determine the lowest luminosity value WLmin c The meas...

Page 1800: ...r calculated value Expected Result Pass Fail A Black luminance TG18 LN12 01 Pattern Pass less than 1 cd m Fail greater than 1 cd m B White luminance TG18 LN12 018 Pattern Pass greater than 350 cd m Fail less than 350 cd m C Contrast ratio N A Ratio of measured values between white luminance value and black luminance value Pass greater than 100 Fail less than 100 D1 Black non uniformity TG18 UNL10 ...

Page 1801: ...xcept in emergency risk of data loss 5 PREREQUISITES Remove rear and left side covers from Generator and Conditioner Cabinet Refer to Job Card PHY A042 Remove Reinstall Generator Covers on page 513 6 PROCEDURE To check the HV Unit proceed as follows 1 Remove HV connector and visually inspect earth braid continuity 2 Check presence of oil or grease in HV connector If necessary add the appropriate p...

Page 1802: ...Chapter 11 Page no 1802 JC PM A 407 fm GE Healthcare Senographe DS Revision 1 Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN Job Card PM A407 Check HV Unit This page is blank ...

Page 1803: ...PLIES None 2 TOOLS Vacuum Cleaner Standard Tool Box 3 REQUIRED EFFORT Personnel 1 Field Engineer Time 10 minutes 4 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WARNING Before beginning work shut down the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospi tal supply circuit breaker Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power 5 PREREQUISITES Shut down and switch off the...

Page 1804: ...eaning 6 PROCEDURE To clean the IDC air filter proceed as follows 1 Remove the screws 1 securing the air filter cover 2 2 Remove the air filter and use a vacuum cleaner to ensure that the air filter is free from dust 3 Put back the air filter into the air filter cover 2 4 Use the two screws to secure the both the air filter cover and air filter to the IDC framework 1 2 ...

Page 1805: ...e Generator Cabinet Switch on the MDR breaker only as instructed Always use a funnel when adding coolant to the Conditioner Always wear protective gloves and goggles when working with coolant When working with coolant you should treat it with care avoid unnecessary contact See below for First Aid advice First Aid in case of contact with Conditioner coolant Immediately flush eyes or skin with plent...

Page 1806: ... are both undertaken on a 12 month basis 1 Check the coolant level weekly or when the CHECK FLUID message appears 2 When adding coolant use the container labelled Topping 3 Remove the reservoir cap and check the liquid level 4 If necessary add liquid until it reaches the bottom of the cap threads 5 Replace the reservoir cap when you are satisfied that the level is correct 6 Clean the exterior of t...

Page 1807: ...beginning work shut down the equipment and switch OFF the Senographe hospi tal supply circuit breaker Lock it in the OFF position or mark it clearly with a warning sign to prevent others from applying power 5 PREREQUISITES Shut down and switch off the equipment as per the Warning above Remove the Generator Cabinet covers as required for access to the Conditioner Refer to Job Card PHY A042 Remove R...

Page 1808: ...f the unit then pull the tab out to begin dislodg ing the air filter 4 3 4 Wash the air filter by holding the clean side of the air filter under running water for either two minutes or until the dirty side of the filter is clean 5 Allow the filter to dry 6 Use a piece of adhesive tape to remove any lint in the filter 7 Replace the air filter in its housing 8 Reassemble the air duct and secure it b...

Page 1809: ... Service Information and Procedures Class A 2385072 16 8EN End of the Publication Page no 1809 Last Page fm End of the Publication You have reached the end of this Publication To consult the Revision History see Revision History on page 39 ...

Page 1810: ...Manufacturer address GE Medical Systems SCS 283 rue de la Minière BP 34 78533 Buc Cedex France www gehealthcare com Imagination at work ...

Reviews:

No comments

Related manuals for Senographe DS

Brand: T-Drill Pages: 75

Brand: Zeiss Pages: 38

Brand: JB Systems Pages: 12

Brand: Tascam Pages: 8

Brand: B-K lighting Pages: 5

Brand: B-K lighting Pages: 4

Brand: B-K lighting Pages: 3

Brand: GARANT Pages: 239

Brand: p-light Pages: 36

Brand: Panta Safe Light Pages: 2

Brand: Calrec Pages: 70

Brand: jablotron Pages: 2

ActiveFinder One

Brand: LaserLiner Pages: 92

Brand: MAHA Pages: 21

Brand: MAGUIRE Pages: 47

Brand: UNIS Pages: 16

Bathomatic Basic

Brand: Unique Automation Pages: 10

Brand: Additel Pages: 139

Brands by name

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Popular brands

Load more brands